JP2023164729A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of improving amusement of games.SOLUTION: A game machine includes: determination means for determining whether or not special information satisfies a prescribed condition; a ball entrance portion allowing a ball entrance of a game ball; assistance means for assisting a ball entrance of a game ball to the ball entrance portion; state transition means for causing a transition of the state of the assistance means between a first state of making a ball entrance of a game ball to the ball entrance portion impossible or difficult and a second state of making the ball entrance of a game ball to the ball entrance portion possible or easy; and control means capable of performing at least a first control mode and a second control mode as control modes with different manners of the state transition means making a transition of the state of the assistance means. The control means can control the assistance means in a plurality of types of operation manners during a control mode shift period that is a period from a time point when a switching is made from the first control mode to the second control mode till a time point when the assistance means starts a state transition in the second control mode.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 84

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine.

In gaming machines such as pachinko machines and slot machines, the structure, control, Technical improvements have been made from various viewpoints such as performance (for example, Patent Document 1).

Various technical improvements have also been made with the aim of improving the soundness of gaming, such as discovering and deterring fraudulent actions by players and unauthorized modifications to gaming machines.

JP2011-172988A

In the above-mentioned gaming machines, further improvements have been made for the purpose of increasing the interest of gaming, reducing the processing load of gaming machines, optimizing processing, simplifying control, simplifying structure, and providing healthier gaming. Improvements in technology are desired.

The present invention has been made to solve at least part of the above-mentioned problems, and can be realized as the following forms.

[form]
an information acquisition means for acquiring special information upon satisfaction of acquisition conditions;
acquired information storage means for storing the acquired special information;
determining means for determining whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means satisfies a predetermined condition;
A game round execution means for executing a game round when one game round is defined as the time when the game operation for notifying the result of the determination by the determination means is started and the game operation is finished;
a firing means for firing a game ball;
a ball entry section into which a fired game ball can enter;
auxiliary means for assisting the entry of the game ball into the ball entry section;
The state of the auxiliary means is set to a first state that makes it impossible or difficult for the game ball to enter the ball entry section, and a first state that makes it possible or easy for the game ball to enter the ball entry section. state transition means for transitioning between a second state that is a state of
A control means for controlling the state transition means, the control means being capable of executing at least a first control mode and a second control mode as control modes in which the state transition means changes the state of the auxiliary means. means and
A gaming machine comprising:
The control means includes:
In a control mode transition period that is a period from the time when the first control mode is switched to the second control mode to the time when the auxiliary means starts state transition in the second control mode, the auxiliary means A game machine characterized in that the game machine can be controlled in multiple types of operation modes.

According to the above embodiment, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

It is a perspective view of the Pachinko machine in a 1st embodiment. It is a front view of a game board. It is an explanatory diagram showing a pattern and a display surface which are variably displayed on a pattern display device. It is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of a pachinko machine. It is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of various counters used for jackpot lottery and the like. It is an explanatory view showing the contents of a propriety table for the first starting port. It is an explanatory view showing the contents of the propriety table for the 2nd starting port. It is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of a distribution table. It is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of a win/fail table (win/fail table for electric accessory release lottery) used when executing an electric accessory release lottery. It is a time chart explaining the point award performance (case 1) performed by the pachinko machine of the first embodiment. It is an explanatory view showing how point grant performance X1 is executed. It is an explanatory view showing how point grant performance X2 is executed. It is an explanatory view showing how point grant performance X3 is executed. It is an explanatory diagram explaining a timer effect and a button press effect. It is a time chart explaining the point award performance (case 2) performed by the pachinko machine of the first embodiment. It is an explanatory diagram explaining the color of the stage. It is an explanatory diagram explaining standby performance. FIG. 6 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a point granting performance in which no points are given. It is an explanatory diagram explaining a timer effect and a button press effect executed in a game round. 3 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing. It is a flowchart showing the winning process for the starting opening. It is a flowchart which shows a destination determination process. It is a flow chart showing jackpot/reach information acquisition processing. It is a flowchart which shows fluctuating time information acquisition processing. It is a flowchart showing winning processing for through. 3 is a flowchart showing normal processing. It is a flowchart showing game time control processing. 3 is a flowchart showing data setting processing. It is a flowchart which shows fluctuation start processing. 3 is a flowchart illustrating a process for setting a variable time. It is a flowchart showing gaming state transition processing. It is a flowchart showing the big prize opening opening/closing process. It is a flowchart which shows the transition process at the end of an ending period. It is a flowchart which shows the process for electrical support. It is a flowchart which shows electric utility opening/closing control processing. FIG. 2 is a block diagram mainly showing the electrical configuration of an audio emission control device and a display control device. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process performed by audio-light side MPU. 5 is a flowchart showing command-based processing. It is an explanatory diagram explaining the composition of a game time setting information storage area. It is a flowchart showing update processing at the time of winning a prize. It is a flowchart which shows production information setting processing. It is an explanatory diagram explaining a performance scenario table for a jackpot. It is an explanatory diagram explaining a performance scenario table for reach. It is an explanatory diagram explaining the performance scenario corresponding to tentative fluctuation time T=t4 of the performance scenario table for a jackpot as an example. It is an explanatory diagram explaining a point granting scenario table for jackpot/reach. It is an explanatory diagram explaining a point granting scenario for jackpot/reach. It is an explanatory diagram explaining a performance scenario table for non-reach. It is an explanatory diagram explaining the production scenario corresponding to provisional variation time T=t24 of the non-reach production scenario table as an example. It is an explanatory view explaining a point giving scenario table for non-reach. It is an explanatory diagram explaining each point giving scenario for non-reach. It is a flowchart which shows production setting processing. It is an image diagram of a performance pattern generated based on a performance scenario and a point awarding scenario set for a game round to be processed. It is an explanatory diagram explaining a performance pattern table for point giving performance. It is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a performance pattern for point grant performance recorded in a performance pattern table for point grant performance. It is a flowchart which shows point grant performance execution processing. It is a flowchart which shows point accumulation processing. It is a flowchart which shows control processing at the time of point filling. It is a flowchart which shows button press production processing. It is a flowchart which shows point reset processing. It is a flowchart which shows stage display control processing. 3 is a flowchart showing main processing executed in the MPU of the display control device. 3 is a flowchart showing command interrupt processing executed in the MPU of the display control device. 3 is a flowchart showing V interrupt processing executed in the MPU of the display control device. It is an explanatory diagram explaining the production scenario of the last game of continuous production in modification 8 of the first embodiment and the point awarding scenario. It is an explanatory view explaining modification 9 of a 1st embodiment. FIG. 12 is an explanatory diagram illustrating point awarding performance in Modification 10 of the first embodiment. It is an explanatory view explaining modification 13 of a 1st embodiment. It is an explanatory diagram explaining a grant history area. It is an explanatory diagram explaining a grant history area. FIG. 12 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of point awarding performance in modification example 14 of the first embodiment. It is an explanatory diagram explaining point grant performance of multiplication mode. FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a display mode of a pearl image when the mode changes between an addition mode and a multiplication mode during execution of one point awarding performance. It is an explanatory view showing an example of a display mode of accumulated points. FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a display mode in which a boundary line of a partial image of a pearl corresponding to one point is not displayed as a display mode of accumulated points. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram showing how the display mode of accumulated points has been changed. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a configuration in which a plurality of positions (images) having a function of accumulating awarded points are displayed on the display surface 41a (multiple locations). FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a point award performance in which the number of award points is displayed at the start. It is an explanatory diagram explaining an example of a threshold reaching effect. It is an explanatory diagram explaining an example of carryover change effect. It is an explanatory diagram showing an example of timer time extension performance. It is a perspective view of the pachinko machine 10 in a 2nd embodiment. It is a front view of a game board. It is an explanatory diagram showing a pattern and a display surface which are variably displayed on a liquid crystal display device. It is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of a pachinko machine. It is an explanatory diagram showing contents of various counters used for a winning lottery and the like. It is an explanatory view showing the contents of a propriety table for the first starting port. It is an explanatory view showing the contents of the propriety table for the 2nd starting port. It is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of a distribution table. It is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of a win/fail table (win/fail table for electric accessory release lottery) used when executing an electric accessory release lottery. It is an explanatory diagram showing the flow of a game in a gaming machine. It is a time chart explaining special bonus processing. 3 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing. It is a flowchart which shows the ball entry process for starting holes. 3 is a flowchart showing normal processing. It is a flowchart showing game time control processing. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation start process for the 1st starting port. It is a flowchart which shows the reservation information shift process for 1st starting ports. It is a flowchart which shows the determination process for 1st starting ports. It is a flowchart which shows the setting process of the variable time for 1st starting ports. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st fluctuation stop processing. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation|variation start process for 2nd starting ports. It is a flowchart which shows the reservation information shift process for 2nd starting gates. It is a flowchart which shows the determination process for a 2nd starting opening. It is a flowchart which shows the setting process of the variable time for 2nd starting ports. It is a flowchart which shows the low-accuracy time-varying time information acquisition process. It is a flowchart which shows highly accurate high-frequency time-varying time information acquisition processing. It is a flowchart which shows high-accuracy low-frequency time-varying time information acquisition processing. It is a flow chart which shows the 2nd fluctuation stop processing. It is a flowchart showing gaming state transition processing. It is a flowchart which shows opening-and-closing scenario setting processing. It is a flowchart which shows opening time setting processing. It is a flowchart showing the big prize opening opening/closing process. It is a flowchart which shows the transition process at the end of an ending period. It is a flowchart which shows the process for electrical support. It is a flowchart which shows electric role opening/closing processing. FIG. 2 is a block diagram mainly showing the electrical configuration of an audio emission control device and a display control device. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process performed in MPU of an audio|voice light emission control apparatus. 3 is a flowchart showing state storage processing. It is a flowchart which shows display mode switching processing. It is a flowchart showing processing for special 1 game round performance. It is a flowchart which shows the setting process of the special 1 effect pattern for the main display area. It is a flowchart showing the special 1 game round performance execution process. It is a flowchart which shows the variation time measurement process for Special 1. It is a flowchart showing processing for special 2 game rendition. It is a flowchart which shows the setting process of the special 2 effect pattern for the main display area. It is an explanatory diagram explaining setting processing of a performance pattern for a small hit at the time of a special bonus. It is a flowchart showing the special 2 game round production execution process. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation time measurement process for Special 2. It is a flow chart showing special bonus performance setting processing. 3 is a flowchart showing main processing executed in the MPU of the display control device. 3 is a flowchart showing command interrupt processing executed in the MPU of the display control device. 3 is a flowchart showing V interrupt processing executed in the MPU of the display control device.

Embodiments of the gaming machine according to the present invention will be described in the following order with reference to the drawings.
A. First embodiment:
B. Second embodiment:
C. Application to other configurations:
D. Regarding inventions extracted from each of the above embodiments, etc.:

A. First embodiment:
A1. Structure of gaming machine:
The structure of the gaming machine in this embodiment will be explained.

FIG. 1 is a perspective view of a pachinko machine 10 in a first embodiment. The pachinko machine 10 includes a wooden outer frame 11 assembled into a substantially rectangular shape. When the pachinko machine 10 is installed in a game hall, this outer frame 11 is fixed to the island equipment of the game hall. Further, the pachinko machine 10 includes a pachinko machine main body 12 rotatably supported by an outer frame 11. The pachinko machine main body 12 includes an inner frame 13 and a front door frame 14 arranged in front of the inner frame 13. The inner frame 13 is rotatably supported by a metal hinge 15 with respect to the outer frame 11. The front door frame 14 is rotatably supported by a metal hinge 16 with respect to the inner frame 13. On the back side of the inner frame 13, control devices for controlling the pachinko machine main body 12, such as a main control device, a sound emission control device, and a display control device, are arranged. Details of these control devices will be described later. Furthermore, the pachinko machine 10 is provided with a cylinder lock 17. The cylinder lock 17 has a function of locking the inner frame 13 to the outer frame 11 so that it cannot be opened, and a function of locking the front door frame 14 to the inner frame 13 so that it cannot be opened. Each lock is unlocked by performing a predetermined operation on the cylinder lock 17 using a dedicated key.

An open window portion 18 is formed approximately in the center of the front door frame 14. Around the window portion 18 of the front door frame 14, resin parts and illumination parts for decorating the pachinko machine 10 are provided. The illumination parts are constituted by light emitting means consisting of various lamps such as LEDs. The light emitting means serves to enhance the performance effect by lighting up or blinking when a jackpot lottery is performed by the pachinko machine 10, when a jackpot is won, when a reach occurs, or the like. Further, a glass unit 19 made of two sheets of glass is arranged on the back side of the front door frame 14, and the opened window portion 18 is sealed by the glass unit 19. A game board, which will be described later, is removably attached to the inner frame 13, and a player of the pachinko machine 10 can view the game board from the front of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 19. Details of the game board will be described later.

The front door frame 14 is provided with an upper tray 20 and a lower tray 21 for storing game balls. The upper tray 20 is formed into a box shape with an open top surface, and stores game balls such as rental balls lent from a rental machine (not shown) and prize balls ejected from the pachinko machine main body 12. The game balls stored in the upper tray 20 are supplied to a game ball firing mechanism provided in the pachinko machine main body 12. The game ball firing mechanism is driven by the player's operation of the operating handle 25, and fires the game balls supplied from the upper tray 20 onto the front surface of the game board. The lower plate 21 is arranged below the upper plate 20, and is formed into a box shape with an open top surface. The lower tray 21 stores game balls that cannot be stored in the upper tray 20. A discharge port 22 for discharging game balls stored in the lower tray 21 is formed on the bottom surface of the lower tray 21. A lever 23 is provided below the outlet 22, and by operating the lever 23, the player can switch the outlet 22 between a closed state and an open state. When the player operates the lever 23 to open the discharge port 22, the game balls fall from the discharge port 22 and are discharged from the lower tray 21 to the outside.

A performance operation button 24 serving as an operation receiving means is provided in front of the peripheral edge of the upper plate 20. The performance operation button 24 is an operation section through which a player performs an input operation for a game performance performed by the pachinko machine 10. When the player operates the performance operation button 24 at a predetermined timing prepared by the pachinko machine 10, the pachinko machine 10 performs a game performance that reflects the operation.

Further, on the right side of the front door frame 14 when viewed from the front, an operating handle 25 is provided for the player to operate. When the player operates the operating handle 25 (rotating operation), a game ball is fired from the game ball firing mechanism to the front of the game board in conjunction with the operation. Inside the operating handle 25, there is a touch sensor 25a for permitting the driving of the game ball firing mechanism, a weight button 25b for stopping the firing of game balls by the game ball firing mechanism when pressed by the player, and the operating handle 25. A variable resistor 25c is provided for detecting the amount of rotational operation by a change in electrical resistance. When the player grasps the operation handle 25, the touch sensor 25a is turned on, and when the player rotates the operation handle 25 clockwise, the resistance value of the variable resistor 25c changes in accordance with the amount of rotation operation. Then, the game ball is fired from the game ball firing mechanism to the front of the game board with a strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor 25c.

Further, on the left side of the peripheral edge of the upper tray 20 when viewed from the front, a game ball firing button 26 is provided for the player to operate. When the game ball firing button 26 is operated by the player, the game ball is fired at a predetermined firing strength to the front of the game board, regardless of the amount of rotation of the operating handle 25 by the player. Specifically, when the player operates the game ball firing button 26, the game ball is fired to the front of the game board with the same firing strength as when the amount of rotational operation of the operating handle 25 is the maximum. In the case of this embodiment, when the game ball is fired by operating the game ball firing button 26, the game ball flows to the right side of the game board when viewed from the front, and also flows down the right side of the game board. That is, by operating the game ball firing button 26, the player can perform what is called a "right-handed hit." Note that the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment is configured such that when the game ball firing button 26 is operated, the game ball is fired onto the game board on the condition that the touch sensor 25a is on. . That is, the player turns on at least the touch sensor 25a by gripping the operating handle 25, and then operates the game ball firing button 26 to fire the game ball triggered by the operation of the game ball firing button 26. can be realized.

In this embodiment, the game ball firing button 26 is arranged on the left side of the peripheral edge of the upper tray 20 when viewed from the front, but it is also possible to arrange the game ball firing button 26 at another position. May be adopted. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which the game ball firing button 26 is arranged inside (periphery) of the operating handle 25 similarly to the weight button 25b. By doing so, the player can operate the operating handle 25, the weight button 25b, and the game ball firing button 26 with only his right hand.

FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board 30. The game board 30 is made of plywood, and a game area PA is formed on the front surface thereof. An inner rail portion 31a and an outer rail portion 31b are attached to the game board 30 so as to partition a part of the outer edge of the game area PA. A guide rail 31 for guiding game balls is formed between the inner rail portion 31a and the outer rail portion 31b. The game ball fired from the game ball firing mechanism is guided by the guide rail 31 and released to the upper part of the game area PA, and then flows down the game area PA. In the game area PA, a plurality of nails 42 are planted substantially perpendicularly to the game board 30, and various accessories such as a windmill are arranged. These nails 42 and windmills disperse and organize the falling direction of the game balls flowing down the game area PA.

The game board 30 is provided with a general winning opening 32, a first starting opening 33, a second starting opening 34, a through gate 35, and a variable winning opening 36. Furthermore, the game board 30 is provided with a variable display unit 40 and a main display section 45. The main display section 45 includes a special figure unit 37, a regular figure unit 38, and a round display section 39.

The general prize opening 32 is a ball entrance into which game balls can enter, and a plurality of them are provided on the game board 30. In this embodiment, when game balls enter the general winning hole 32, ten game balls are paid out from the payout device 71 as prize balls.

The first starting port 33 is a ball entry port into which game balls can enter. The first starting port 33 is provided below the center of the game board 30. In this embodiment, when game balls enter the first starting port 33, three game balls are paid out as prize balls, and a jackpot lottery to be described later is executed.

The second starting port 34 is a ball entry port into which a game ball can enter, and is provided on the right side of the game board 30. In this embodiment, when game balls enter the second starting port 34, three game balls are paid out as prize balls, and a jackpot lottery to be described later is executed. Further, the second starting port 34 is provided with an electric accessory 34a.

The through gate 35 includes a through hole that penetrates in the vertical direction. The through gate 35 is a through gate that serves as an opportunity to perform a lottery to open the electric accessory 34a. Specifically, when the game ball passes through the through gate 35, the main control device 60 uses the passage as a trigger to perform an internal lottery (electric accessory opening lottery). As a result of the internal lottery, if an electric role release is won, the electric role accessory 34a shifts to an electric role release state in which it becomes an open state in a predetermined manner. Since the through gate 35 is arranged upstream of the second starting port 34 with respect to the downstream direction of the game ball, the game ball that has passed through the through gate 35 flows down the gaming area PA after passing through and enters the second starting port 34. It is possible for the ball to enter the starting port 34. In addition, in this embodiment, even if the game ball passes through the through gate 35, the payout of the prize ball is not executed.

The variable winning device 36 includes a big winning hole 36a that leads to the back side of the game board 30, and an opening/closing door 36b that opens and closes the big winning hole 36a. The opening/closing door 36b is normally in a closed state in which game balls cannot enter the big prize opening 36a. When a game ball enters the first starting port 33 or the second starting port 34, the main control device 60 executes a jackpot lottery (internal lottery). When a jackpot or a small jackpot is won as a result of the jackpot lottery, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the opening/closing execution mode. The opening/closing execution mode is a mode in which opening/closing processing of the opening/closing door 36b of the variable prize winning device 36 is executed. Specifically, when the opening/closing door 36b of the variable prize winning device 36 shifts to the opening/closing execution mode, it transitions from a closed state in which game balls cannot enter into an open state in which game balls can enter, and a predetermined condition is satisfied. After that, it transitions to the closed state again. In this embodiment, when a game ball enters the big winning hole 36a of the variable winning device 36, the payout device 71 pays out 15 game balls as prize balls.

Further, an out port 43 is provided at the bottom of the game board 30, and game balls that have not entered the various ball entry ports are discharged from the game area PA through the out port 43.

The special figure unit 37 includes a first symbol display section 37a and a second symbol display section 37b. The first symbol display section 37a and the second symbol display section 37b are each constituted by a segment display in which a plurality of segment light emitting sections are arranged in a predetermined manner.

The first symbol display section 37a is a display section for displaying the first symbol. The first symbol refers to a symbol that is displayed in a variable manner or in a static manner based on a jackpot lottery triggered by the entry of a game ball into the first starting port 33. The first symbol display section 37a is configured as a display mode until the segment display displays a display corresponding to the lottery result when a jackpot lottery is performed triggered by the entry of a game ball into the first starting port 33. , the first symbol is displayed in a variable manner or in a predetermined manner. When the lottery ends, the first symbol display section 37a causes the segment display to stop display the first symbol corresponding to the lottery result. Hereinafter, a game round in which a jackpot lottery is executed triggered by the entry of a game ball into the first starting opening 33 will also be referred to as a first starting opening game round.

The second symbol display section 37b is a display section for displaying a second symbol. The second symbol refers to a symbol that is displayed variably or statically based on a jackpot lottery triggered by the entry of a game ball into the second starting port 34. The second symbol display section 37b is configured as a display mode until the segment display displays a display corresponding to the lottery result when a jackpot lottery is performed triggered by the entry of a game ball into the second starting port 34. , a variable display or a predetermined display of the second symbol is performed. When the lottery ends, the second symbol display section 37b causes the segment display to stop display the second symbol corresponding to the lottery result. Hereinafter, a game round in which a jackpot lottery is executed triggered by the entry of a game ball into the second starting opening 34 will also be referred to as a second starting opening game round.

Here, the time period from when the first symbol displayed on the first symbol display section 37a or the second symbol displayed on the second symbol display section 37b starts to be displayed in a variable manner until it is stopped and displayed. Also called variable time. Specifically, the time from the start of the variable display of the first symbol displayed on the first symbol display section 37a until the time when the first symbol is stopped and displayed is also called the first variation time, and The time period from the start of the variable display of the second symbol to the time it is stopped and displayed is also referred to as the second variable time.

The special figure unit 37 further includes a first reservation display section 37c and a second reservation display section 37d, which are made of LED lamps, at positions adjacent to the first symbol display section 37a and the second symbol display section 37b.

The first reservation display section 37c displays the number of reservations at the first starting port 33 by the color and combination of LED lamps to be lit. In this embodiment, up to four game balls that have entered the first starting port 33 are held.

The second reservation display section 37d displays the number of reservations at the second starting port 34 by the color and combination of LED lamps to be lit. In this embodiment, up to four game balls that have entered the second starting port 34 are held.

The general figure unit 38 is constituted by a light emitting display section in which a plurality of LED lamps are arranged in a predetermined manner. When the electric accessory opening lottery is held triggered by passing through the through gate 35, the common figure unit 38 causes the light-emitting display to display a lighting display, a blinking display, or a predetermined display mode. When the electric accessory opening lottery ends, the common map unit 38 displays a predetermined mode corresponding to the lottery result.

The round display section 39 is constituted by a light emitting display section in which a plurality of LED lamps are arranged in a predetermined manner, and displays the number of round games that occur in the opening/closing execution mode, or displays corresponding thereto. A round game is a game that is opened and closed until either the predetermined upper limit duration time elapses or the predetermined upper limit number of game balls enters the variable winning device 36. This is a game in which the door 36b remains open. The number of round games varies depending on the type of jackpot winning that triggered the transition. The round display section 39 starts displaying the number of round games when the opening/closing execution mode is started, and ends when the opening/closing execution mode ends.

Note that the special figure unit 37, the general figure unit 38, and the round display section 39 are not limited to being constituted by a segment display or a light emitting display using an LED lamp, and may be, for example, a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device, It may be constituted by various display devices such as a CRT or a dot matrix display capable of showing the drawing process and the drawing results.

The variable display unit 40 is arranged approximately at the center of the gaming area PA. The variable display unit 40 includes a symbol display device 41. The symbol display device 41 includes a liquid crystal display. The display content of the symbol display device 41 is controlled by the display control device 100. Note that the configuration of the display device included in the variable display unit 40 is not limited to the symbol display device 41, and may be configured by various display devices such as a plasma display device, an organic EL display device, or a CRT.

When the first symbol display section 37a displays a variable display or a predetermined display based on the entry of a game ball into the first starting port 33, the symbol display device 41 displays a variable display or a predetermined display of symbols in accordance with the variable display or a predetermined display. I do. Further, when the second symbol display section 37b displays a variable display or a predetermined display based on the entry of a game ball into the second starting port 34, the symbol display device 41 displays a variable display of the symbol or a predetermined display according to the variable display or a predetermined display. will be displayed. The symbol display device 41 is not limited to displaying a variable symbol or a predetermined display triggered by the entry of a game ball into the first starting port 33 or the second starting port 34, but also when a jackpot is won. It also displays effects during the transition to the opening/closing execution mode. The details of the symbol display device 41 will be explained below.

FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram showing symbols that are variably displayed on the symbol display device 41 and the display surface 41a. FIG. 3A is an explanatory diagram showing liquid crystal symbols that are variably displayed on the symbol display device 41. The liquid crystal pattern is an image displayed on the pattern display device 41, and corresponds to a first pattern displayed on the first pattern display section 37a and a second pattern displayed on the second pattern display section 37b. It is a design. When a game round triggered by the entry of a game ball into the first starting port 33 is being executed, a liquid crystal symbol corresponding to the first symbol displayed on the first symbol display section 37a is displayed on the display screen. 41a, and when a game round triggered by the entry of a game ball into the second starting port 34 is being executed, a liquid crystal display corresponding to the second symbol displayed on the second symbol display section 37b is displayed. The symbols for use are displayed on the display surface 41a.

As shown in FIG. 3(a), symbols representing numbers 1 to 8 are displayed in a variable manner on the symbol display device 41 as liquid crystal symbols. In addition, as the symbols to be displayed in a variable manner, a symbol in which a character or other image is attached to each symbol representing the numbers 1 to 8 may be used.

FIG. 3(b) is an explanatory diagram showing the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41. As illustrated, a main display area MA is displayed on the display surface 41a. Three symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 on the left, middle, and right are displayed in the main display area MA. In each symbol row Z1 to Z3, the symbols numbered 1 to 8 shown in FIG. A fluctuating display that scrolls upwards is displayed. As shown in FIG. 3(b), after the variable display by scrolling, one symbol in each symbol row is displayed in a stopped state on the active line L. Specifically, when a game ball enters the first starting hole 33 or the second starting hole 34, a variable display in which the symbols of each symbol row Z1 to Z3 periodically scroll in a predetermined direction is started. Then, each of the scrolling symbols switches from a variable display to a standby display in the order of symbol row Z1, symbol row Z3, and symbol row Z2, and finally, a predetermined symbol is stopped and displayed in each symbol row Z1 to Z3. . When the fluctuating display of symbols is finished and the display is stopped, if the result of the jackpot lottery by the main controller 60 is a jackpot, a predetermined combination of symbols will be on the active line L. It is formed. For example, a combination of the same symbols is formed on the active line L. Note that the mode of variable display of symbols in the symbol display device 41 is not limited to the above-mentioned mode, but may vary depending on the number of symbol rows, the number of active lines, the direction of fluctuating display of symbols in the symbol rows, and the symbols of each symbol row. Various modes can be adopted for displaying the symbols such as numbers in a variable manner.

Here, a game round refers to the period from the start of the variable display on the first symbol display section 37a or the second symbol display section 37b until the end of the variable display and the stop display, and until the stop display ends. This is one unit of processing for notifying the player of the lottery result of the jackpot lottery regarding the special information acquired based on the winning of either the first starting hole 33 or the second starting hole 34. In other words, the pachinko machine 10 notifies the player of the lottery result of one jackpot lottery every game. When the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment acquires special information based on the entry of a game ball into the first starting port 33 or the second starting port 34, the In either one of the two symbol display sections 37b, after the segment display is displayed in a variable manner, the segment display is stopped and displayed so that the display corresponds to the lottery result of the acquired special information. Furthermore, when the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment acquires special information based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 33 or the second starting port 34, the symbol display device 41 displays the following information for each game: After the symbol row is variably displayed as the first liquid crystal symbol or the second liquid crystal symbol, the symbol row is stopped and displayed so that the display corresponds to the lottery result of the acquired special information. Further, the time required for one game round is also called unit game time. The unit gaming time consists of a variable time, which is the time from when the variable display starts until the predetermined lottery result is stopped and displayed, and a stop time, which is the time during which the predetermined lottery result is stopped and displayed. There is.

As shown in FIG. 3(b), a first reservation display area Ds1 and a second reservation display area Ds2 are displayed on the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41. In the first hold display area Ds1, a display corresponding to the number of hold games based on winnings in the first start opening 33 is displayed. In the second hold display area Ds2, a display corresponding to the number of hold games based on winnings in the second start opening 34 is displayed. A pending game round is a game round that has not yet been executed, and is a variation for notifying the lottery result of a jackpot lottery regarding special information obtained based on winnings in the first starting slot 33 or the second starting slot 34. Refers to game times for which display has not started. The number of pending games that can be held based on winnings in the first starting slot 33 is four. Therefore, as shown in the figure, the first pending display area Ds1 can display pending displays (hereinafter also referred to as first pending game display) corresponding to the four pending game rounds. Further, the number of pending games that can be held based on winnings in the second start opening 34 is four. Therefore, as shown in the figure, in the second pending display area Ds2, pending displays corresponding to the four pending game rounds (hereinafter also referred to as second pending game round displays) can be displayed.

Further, on the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41, a first executed game round display area J1, a second executed game round display area J2, and a stage St are displayed. The first executed game round display area J1 and the second executed game round display area J2 indicate whether the game round to be executed (the game round in progress) is the game round based on winning in the first starting opening 33 or the second starting game round. Indicates whether the game is based on winnings in the slot 34 or not. The first executed game times display area J1 displays the game times based on winnings in the first starting opening 33, and the second executed gaming times display area J2 displays the gaming times based on winnings in the second starting opening 34. be done. In addition, when the pending gaming session displayed in the first pending display area Ds1 is executed as a gaming session, the image indicating the pending gaming session displayed in the first pending display area Ds1 is changed to the first executed gaming session. Move to display area J1. When the pending game time displayed in the second pending display area Ds2 is executed as a game time, the image indicating the pending game time displayed in the second pending display area Ds2 is displayed in the second executed game times display area. Move to J2. Hereinafter, the display shown in the first executed game times display area J1 will also be referred to as the first executed game times display, and the display shown in the second executed game times display area J2 will also be referred to as the second executed game times display.

Stage St is used for a point awarding performance that will be described later. The point awarding performance and how the stage St is used will be explained in detail later.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 3(b), on the display surface 41a, a blinking display and a lighting display synchronized with the fluctuating display and stop display of the first symbol displayed on the first symbol display section 37a of the special symbol unit 37. A first synchronized display section Sync1 performs display, and a second synchronized display performs blinking display and lighting display in synchronization with the fluctuating display and stop display of the second symbol displayed on the second symbol display section 37b of the special symbol unit 37. Sync2. Specifically, when the first symbol display section 37a is displaying a variable display, the first synchronization display section Sync1 displays a blinking display, and when the first symbol display section 37a is displaying a stop display, the first synchronization display section Sync1 displays a blinking display. 1 synchronization display section Sync1 displays lighting. Further, when the second symbol display section 37b is displaying a variable display, the second synchronization display section Sync2 displays a blinking display, and when the second symbol display section 37b is displaying a stop display, the second synchronization display section Sync2 displays a blinking display. The section Sync2 displays a lighting display.

In addition, in this embodiment, the display surface 41a includes the main display area MA, the first executed game times display area J1, the second executed game times display area J2, the stage St, the first synchronized display section Sync1, and the second Although the configuration is such that the synchronous display unit Sync2 is displayed, a configuration may be adopted in which the display surface 41a does not display part or all of these displays.

A2. Electrical configuration of gaming machine:
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be explained. In this description, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be explained using a block diagram.

FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. The pachinko machine 10 is mainly configured around a main control device 60, and also includes a sound emission control device 90 and a display control device 100. The main control device 60 includes a main control board 61 that controls the main control of the game. The main control board 61 includes an MPU 62 that includes elements having multiple functions. The MPU 62 includes a ROM 63 in which various control programs and fixed value data are recorded, and a RAM 64 which is a memory for temporarily storing various data etc. when executing the programs recorded in the ROM 63. The MPU 62 also includes an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input/output circuit, and a counter circuit as a random number generator. In addition, another element may be provided with some of the functions that the MPU 62 has. Further, details of various areas provided in the ROM 63 and RAM 64 will be described later.

The main control board 61 is provided with an input port and an output port, respectively. A payout control device 70 and a power failure monitoring circuit 86 provided in a power supply device 85 are connected to the input side of the main control board 61. The main control board 61 receives stable 24 V DC power from the power supply device 85 via the power failure monitoring circuit 86 . The power supply device 85 is connected to a commercial power source as an external power source, and converts the external power supplied from the commercial power source into operating power necessary for the main control device 60, payout control device 70, etc., and supplies it to each device. Supply electricity. In addition, on the input side of the main control board 61, various ball entry holes and through gates such as the general winning hole 32, the first starting hole 33, the second starting hole 34, the through gate 35, and the variable winning device 36 are provided. Various detection sensors are connected. Based on the signals from these detection sensors, the MPU 62 of the main control board 61 determines whether or not a game ball flowing down the game area PA has entered each ball entrance, and determines whether the game ball has passed through the through gate. Determine whether or not it has been done. Furthermore, the MPU 62 executes a jackpot lottery based on the entry of game balls into the first starting port 33 and the second starting port 34.

The output side of the main control board 61 includes a variable winning drive unit 36c that opens and closes the door 36b of the variable winning device 36, and an electric accessory drive unit 34b that opens and closes the electric accessory 34a of the second starting port 34. , an opening/closing door drive section 48b that opens and closes the opening/closing door 48a, and the main display section 45 are connected. The main control board 61 is provided with various driver circuits, and the MPU 62 executes drive control of various drive units through the driver circuits.

Specifically, in the opening/closing execution mode, the MPU 62 executes drive control of the variable prize winning drive unit 36c so that the opening/closing door 36b is opened and closed. Further, if the electric accessory opening lottery is won, the MPU 62 executes drive control of the electric accessory drive unit 44b so that the electric accessory 34a is released. Furthermore, in each game round, the MPU 62 executes display control of the first symbol display section 37a or the second symbol display section 37b in the main display section 45, and in the opening/closing execution mode, the MPU 62 performs round display on the main display section 45. Display control of section 39 is executed.

Further, a payout control device 70 and a sound emission control device 90 are connected to the transmission side of the main control board 61. For example, a prize ball command is transmitted to the payout control device 70 from the main control device 60 based on the ball entry determination result. When the main control device 60 transmits a prize ball command, the MPU 62 of the main control board 61 refers to the command information storage area 63f of the ROM 63. Specifically, when the entry of a game ball into the general prize opening 32 is identified, a prize ball command corresponding to the payout of 10 game balls is transmitted from the main control device 60 to the first starting opening 33. When the entry of game balls into the second starting port 34 is identified, a prize ball command corresponding to the payout of three game balls is transmitted from the main control device 60, and when the entry of game balls into the second starting port 34 is identified. A prize ball command corresponding to the payout of three game balls is transmitted from the main control device 60. The payout control device 70 controls the payout device 71 to pay out prize balls based on the prize ball command received from the main control device 60.

A firing control device 80 is connected to the dispensing control device 70 . The launch control device 80 controls the launch of the game ball launch mechanism 81. The game ball firing mechanism 81 is driven when predetermined firing conditions are met. Further, the operation handle 25 is connected to the launch control device 80 . As described above, the operating handle 25 includes a touch sensor 25a, a weight button 25b, and a variable resistor 25c. When the player grips the operating handle 25, the touch sensor 25a is turned on, and when the player rotates the operating handle 25, the resistance value of the variable resistor 25c changes in accordance with the amount of rotational operation. A game ball is fired from the game ball firing mechanism to the front of the game board with a strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor 25c. Furthermore, the game ball firing button 26 is connected to the firing control device 80. When the game ball firing button 26 is operated by the player, the game ball is fired onto the game board on condition that the touch sensor 25a is turned on.

The audio emission control device 90 receives various commands transmitted from the main control device 60, and executes processing corresponding to the received various commands. When the main controller 60 transmits various commands, it refers to the command information storage area 63f of the ROM 63. Details of these various commands will be explained later.

In addition, the audio light emission control device 90 controls the drive of various lamps 47 consisting of light emitting means such as LEDs arranged in the front door frame 14 and the drive control of the speaker 46 based on various commands received from the main control device 60. At the same time, the display control device 100 is controlled. Further, a performance operation button 24 is connected to the sound emission control device 90, and when the performance operation button 24 is operated by a player at a predetermined timing, a game performance that reflects the operation is performed. It controls various lamps 47, speakers 46, display control device 100, etc.

The display control device 100 executes display control of the symbol display device 41 based on various commands received from the audio emission control device 90. Specifically, the display control device 100 grasps the fluctuation time of the symbols on the symbol display device 41 and the type of combination of symbols to be finally stopped and displayed based on various commands received from the audio emission control device 90. , the presence or absence of a reach, the contents of the reach effect, and the contents of the effect executed while the first liquid crystal symbol and the second liquid crystal symbol are being displayed in a variable manner are grasped. In addition, in this embodiment, the stop time which is the time when the 1st liquid crystal pattern or the 2nd liquid crystal pattern is stopped and displayed is fixed. Therefore, by determining the variable time, the unit game time, which is the time required for one game, is uniquely determined. The electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 has been described above.

FIG. 5 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of various counters used for jackpot lottery and the like. The various counter information is used when the MPU 62 performs the jackpot lottery, setting the display on the main display section 45, setting the symbol display on the symbol display device 41, and the like. Specifically, the jackpot random number counter C1 is used for the jackpot lottery. A jackpot type counter C2 is used when sorting the jackpot types. A reach random number counter C3 is used to determine whether or not to generate a reach when the symbol row displayed on the symbol display device 41 is changed.

A random number initial value counter CINI is used to set the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1. Further, when determining the fluctuation time in the first symbol display section 37a and the second symbol display section 37b of the main display section 45 and the symbol display device 41, a variation type counter CS is used. Further, an electric accessory opening counter C4 is used for an electric accessory release lottery to decide whether or not to open the electric accessory 34a of the second starting port 34.

Each of the counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS, and C4 is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the counter value each time the counter value is updated, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. Each counter is updated at short intervals, and the updated value is appropriately stored in a lottery counter buffer 64a set in a predetermined area of the RAM 64.

Further, the RAM 64 is provided with a pending information storage area 64b and a determination processing execution area 64c. The reservation information storage area 64b is provided with a first reservation area Ra and a second reservation area Rb. In this embodiment, when a game ball enters the first starting port 33, each value of the jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, reach random number counter C3, and fluctuation type counter CS at the timing of ball entry is stored in the pending information storage area. 64b is stored in the first reservation area Ra in chronological order. Further, when a game ball enters the second starting port 34, each value of the jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, reach random number counter C3, and fluctuation type counter CS at the timing of ball entry is set to the number 1 in the pending information storage area 64b. 2 storage area Rb in chronological order.

Details of the jackpot random number counter C1 will be explained. The jackpot random number counter C1 is used for the jackpot lottery as described above. For example, the jackpot random number counter C1 is configured to increment sequentially by 1 within the range of 0 to 1199, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value. Further, when the jackpot random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the random number initial value counter CINI at that time is read as the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1. Note that the random number initial value counter CINI is a loop counter similar to the jackpot random number counter C1 (value=0 to 1199).

The jackpot random number counter C1 is updated regularly, and the updated value is stored in the first holding area Ra of the holding information storage area 64b at the timing of the ball entering the first starting port 33. When a game ball enters the second starting port 34, it is stored in the second holding area Rb of the holding information storage area 64b at the timing of the ball entering.

The value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the first holding area Ra is moved to the execution area AE of the determination process execution area 64c, and is compared with the win/fail table stored in the win/fail table storage area 63a of the ROM 63, and is determined to be a jackpot. It is determined whether or not. In addition, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the second holding area Rb is moved to the execution area AE of the determination process execution area 64c, and is compared with the win/fail table stored in the win/fail table storage area 63a of the ROM 63, It is determined whether or not it will be a jackpot.

In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the first holding area Ra or the second holding area Rb is determined by the value of the game ball entering the first starting port 33 or the second starting port 34. As a result, the execution areas AE of the determination processing execution area 64c are moved in the order in which they were acquired. Then, the jackpot random number counter C1 moved to the execution area AE is compared with the win/fail table stored in the win/fail table storage area 63a of the ROM 63, and it is determined whether or not there is a jackpot.

Next, details of the jackpot type counter C2 will be explained. The jackpot type counter C2 is used when determining the jackpot type. The jackpot type counter C2 is configured to be sequentially incremented by 1 within the range of 0 to 39, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

The jackpot type counter C2 is updated regularly, and when a game ball enters the first starting port 33, the updated value is stored in the first holding area Ra of the holding information storage area 64b at the timing of the ball entering. When a game ball enters the second starting port 34, it is stored in the second holding area Rb of the holding information storage area 64b at the timing of the ball entering.

As described above, the MPU 62 performs the jackpot lottery using the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the determination processing execution area 64c, and when the result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot, the MPU 62 performs the jackpot lottery using the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the determination processing execution area 64c. The jackpot type is determined using the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the jackpot type counter C2. Furthermore, the MPU 62 uses the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 and the value of the jackpot type counter C2 to determine the display mode of the segment display to be stopped and displayed on the first symbol display section 37a and the second symbol display section 37b. . In making this determination, the stop result table stored in the stop result table storage area 63e of the ROM 63 is referred to.

Next, details of the reach random number counter C3 will be explained. The reach random number counter C3 is used when determining whether or not a reach occurs when the result of the jackpot lottery is not a jackpot. The reach random number counter C3 is configured to increment sequentially by 1 within the range of 0 to 238, for example, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

The reach random number counter C3 is updated regularly, and the updated value is stored in the first holding area Ra of the holding information storage area 64b at the timing when a game ball enters the first starting port 33, and the updated value is stored in the first holding area Ra of the holding information storage area 64b. The game ball is stored in the second holding area Rb of the holding information storage area 64b at the timing when the game ball enters the ball. After moving to the determination processing execution area 64c, the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the first holding area Ra is compared with the reach determination table stored in the reach determination table storage area 63c of the ROM 63, and the reach It is determined whether or not this occurs. After moving to the determination processing execution area 64c, the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the second holding area Rb is compared with the reach determination table stored in the reach determination table storage area 63c of the ROM 63, and the reach It is determined whether or not this occurs. However, if the result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot and the mode is shifted to the opening/closing execution mode, the MPU 62 determines that a reach is occurring regardless of the value of the reach random number counter C3.

Reach means that some combinations of symbols that have the possibility of forming a combination of symbols that correspond to a jackpot are stopped for some of the multiple symbol arrays displayed on the display screen of the symbol display device 41. It refers to a display state in which symbols are displayed and in that state, symbols are displayed variably in the remaining symbol rows. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, the combination of symbols that corresponds to a jackpot refers to a combination of the same symbols on a predetermined active line. As a specific example, in the main display area MA of the display surface 41a in FIG. 3(b), a symbol is first stopped and displayed in the symbol row Z1, and then the same symbol as Z1 is stopped and displayed in the symbol row Z3. A reach line is formed, and in a situation where the reach line is formed, a variable display of symbols is performed in the symbol row Z2, resulting in a reach state. When a jackpot occurs, the same symbols as those forming the reach line are stopped and displayed in the symbol row Z2.

In addition, in the reach, the reach line is formed, and the remaining symbol rows are displayed with fluctuating symbols, and a predetermined character or the like is displayed as a video on the background screen to create a reach effect. This includes a method in which a combination of symbols in which a reach line is formed is displayed in a reduced size or hidden, and a predetermined character or the like is displayed as a moving image on substantially the entire display surface 41a to perform a reach effect. In addition, when a reach effect is being performed or before a reach display, a decision is made as to whether or not to display a preview using a predetermined image such as a predetermined character using the reach random number counter C3 or other counters. It's okay.

Next, details of the variation type counter CS will be explained. The variation type counter CS is used when the MPU 62 determines the variation time in the first symbol display section 37a and the second symbol display section 37b and the symbol variation time in the symbol display device 41. The variation type counter CS is configured to be incremented one by one within the range of 0 to 198, for example, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

The variation type counter CS is updated once every time a normal process (described later) is executed once, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time within the normal process. Then, the buffer value of the variation type counter CS is acquired when determining the variation pattern at the start of the variation display on the first symbol display section 37a or the second symbol display section 37b and at the time the symbol display device 41 starts variation of the symbol. When determining the fluctuation time in the first symbol display section 37a and the second symbol display section 37b, a fluctuation time table stored in the fluctuation time table storage area 63d of the ROM 63 is used.

Next, details of the electric accessory opening counter C4 will be explained. The electric accessory opening counter C4 is configured to increment sequentially by 1 within the range of 0 to 465, for example, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The electric accessory release counter C4 is updated regularly and is stored in the electric role holding area 64d of the RAM 64 at the timing when a game ball enters the through gate 35. Then, at a predetermined timing, after the value of the electric accessory opening counter C4 stored in the electric accessory holding area 64d moves to the electric accessory execution area 64e, the electric accessory is released in the electric accessory execution area 64e. A lottery is held using the value of the counter C4 to determine whether or not to control the electric accessory 34a to the open state. For example, if C4=0 or 1, the electric accessory 34a is controlled to be in the open state, and if C4=2 to 465, the electric accessory 34a is maintained in the closed state.

Note that at least one of the acquired value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the value of the jackpot type counter C2, the value of the reach random number counter C3, the value of the electric accessory release counter C4, and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS is special information in the present invention. corresponds to In addition, at least one of the value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the value of the jackpot type counter C2, the value of the reach random number counter C3, and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS stored in the first holding area Ra and the second holding area Rb is held. Also called information.

Next, the validity table will be explained. The win/fail table is table data for comparing with the jackpot random number counter C1 when performing a jackpot lottery based on the jackpot random number counter C1. The pachinko machine 10 is set to a low probability mode and a high probability mode as lottery modes for jackpot drawings, and when drawing jackpots in the low probability mode, the win/fail table for the low probability mode is referred to, and During the jackpot lottery in the probability mode, the high probability mode win/fail table is referred to. In addition, in the present embodiment, the pachinko machine 10 compares the game ball with the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the first holding area Ra of the holding information storage area 64b at the timing when the game ball enters the first starting port 33. The success/failure table of , and the success/failure table for comparing with the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the determination processing execution area 64c at the timing when the game ball enters the second starting port 34 are stored as separate table data. ing. Specifically, the pachinko machine 10 has a win/fail table for the first starting port (for low probability mode), a winning/failure table for the first starting port (for high probability mode), and a winning/failure table for the second starting port (for low probability mode). Four validity tables are stored in the validity table storage area 63a of the ROM 63, including a validity table for the second starting port (for the high probability mode) and a validity table for the second starting port (for the high probability mode).

FIG. 6 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of the validity table for the first starting port. FIG. 6(a) shows a success/failure table for the first starting port (for low probability mode), and FIG. 6(b) shows a success/failure table for the first starting port (for high probability mode).

As shown in FIG. 6(a), five values from 0 to 4 are set in the win/fail table for the first starting opening (for low probability mode) as the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 that will be a jackpot. There is. Among the values from 0 to 1199, values other than the five values from 0 to 4 (5 to 1199) are outliers. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 6(b), 16 values from 0 to 15 are set in the win/fail table (for high probability mode) for the first starting opening as the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 that will be a jackpot. has been done. Among the values from 0 to 1199, values other than the 16 values from 0 to 15 are outliers. In this way, the high probability mode has a higher probability of winning a jackpot in the jackpot lottery than the low probability mode.

FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of the validity table for the second starting port. FIG. 7(a) shows a success/failure table for the second starting port (for low probability mode), and FIG. 7(b) shows a success/failure table for the second starting port (for high probability mode).

As shown in FIG. 7(a), five values from 0 to 4 are set in the win/fail table for the second starting opening (for low probability mode) as the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 that is the jackpot. There is. Among the values from 0 to 1199, values other than the five values from 0 to 4 (5 to 1199) are outliers. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 7(b), 16 values from 0 to 15 are set in the win/fail table for the second starting port (for high probability mode) as the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 that is the jackpot. has been done. Among the values from 0 to 1199, values other than the 16 values from 0 to 15 are outliers. In this way, the high probability mode has a higher probability of winning a jackpot in the jackpot lottery than the low probability mode.

In addition, in this embodiment, the value group of the jackpot random number counter C1 set as a jackpot in the win/fail table for the low probability mode is the value group of the jackpot random number counter C1 set as a jackpot in the win/fail table for the high probability mode. included in the group. However, as long as the probability of winning a jackpot is higher in the high probability mode than in the low probability mode as a result of the jackpot lottery, the number and value of random numbers set as a jackpot are arbitrary.

Although not adopted in the win/fail table in this embodiment, a "small win" may be provided as a result of the jackpot lottery.

A "small win" is a win/fail result that triggers a transition to the opening/closing execution mode in which the variable winning device 36 is opened/closed, but does not trigger a transition to both the lottery mode and the support mode. On the other hand, "losing" is a win/fail result that does not trigger a transition to the opening/closing execution mode, and also does not trigger a transition to the lottery mode or support mode.

Next, the jackpot type will be explained. A plurality of types of jackpots can be set in the pachinko machine 10. Specifically, for example, by providing differences in the following three aspects or modes, it is possible to set a plurality of types of jackpots.
(1) Number of times the opening/closing door 36b of the variable prize winning device 36 is opened/closed in the opening/closing execution mode (number of rounds)
(2) Aspects of opening/closing control of the variable prize winning device 36 in the opening/closing execution mode (3) Lottery mode for jackpot lottery after the opening/closing execution mode ends (low probability mode or high probability mode)

As an aspect of the opening/closing control of the variable winning device 36 in the above (2) opening/closing execution mode, the occurrence of a game ball entering the variable winning device 36 (winning) between the start and end of the opening/closing execution mode. A high-frequency winning mode and a low-frequency winning mode can be set so that the frequencies are relatively high or low. For example, in the high-frequency winning mode, one opening of the opening/closing door 36b in the opening/closing execution mode is set to continue until 30 seconds have elapsed or until the number of game balls entering the opening/closing door 36b reaches 10. can do. On the other hand, in the low-frequency winning mode, the opening/closing door 36b is set to continue opening once in the opening/closing execution mode until 1.6 seconds have elapsed or until the number of balls entering the opening/closing door 36b reaches 10. I can do it.

The opening limit time for one opening of the opening/closing door 36b and the opening limit number for one opening are based on the frequency of occurrence of balls entering the variable prize winning device 36 from the start to the end of the opening/closing execution mode. As long as the winnings in the high-frequency winning mode are higher than in the low-frequency winning mode, the door 36b can be opened in any manner. Specifically, it is only necessary that the high-frequency winning mode has a longer opening time limit for one opening or a larger opening limit number for one opening than the low-frequency winning mode. In order to clarify the difference between the high-frequency winning mode and the low-frequency winning mode, a configuration may be adopted in which winnings to the variable winning device 36 do not substantially occur in the opening/closing execution mode of the low-frequency winning mode.

In addition, in this embodiment, multiple types of winning modes are not provided as the opening/closing execution mode, and during the opening/closing execution mode, the above-mentioned high frequency winning mode is used. That is, one opening of the opening/closing door 36b in the opening/closing execution mode is set to continue until 30 seconds pass or until the number of game balls entering the opening/closing door 36b reaches 10.

In this embodiment, when the jackpot lottery results in a jackpot, the jackpot type is sorted using the jackpot type counter C2. The distribution of the jackpot type corresponding to the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is stored as a distribution table in the distribution table storage area 63b of the ROM 63.

FIG. 8 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of the distribution table. FIG. 8(a) shows a distribution table for the first starting port, and FIG. 8(b) shows a distribution table for the second starting port. The sorting table for the first starting hole is referred to in the jackpot lottery based on the entry of game balls into the first starting hole 33, and the sorting table for the second starting hole is referred to when the game ball enters the first starting hole 33. It is referred to during the jackpot lottery based on the number of game balls entered.

As shown in the allocation table for the first starting opening in FIG. 8(a), in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, 8R certain variable jackpot and 8R normal jackpot are set as jackpot types based on the first starting opening 33. ing.

In the 8R definite variable jackpot, the mode of opening/closing control of the variable prize winning device 36 in the opening/closing execution mode is a high frequency winning mode, the win/fail lottery mode after the opening/closing execution mode ends is a high probability mode, and This is a jackpot where the support mode becomes the high-frequency support mode.

In the 8R normal jackpot, the mode of opening/closing control of the variable prize winning device 36 in the opening/closing execution mode is a high frequency winning mode, the win/fail lottery mode after the opening/closing execution mode is a low probability mode, and This is a jackpot where the support mode becomes the high-frequency support mode.

In the distribution table for the first starting opening, among the values of the jackpot type counter C2 of "0 to 39", "0 to 24" correspond to the 8R probability variable jackpot, and "25 to 39" correspond to the 8R normal jackpot. It corresponds to

As shown in the distribution table for the second starting opening in FIG. 8(b), in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, 16R certain variable jackpot and 16R normal jackpot are set as jackpot types based on the second starting opening 34. ing. In the distribution table for the second starting opening, among the values of the jackpot type counter C2 of "0 to 39", "0 to 24" correspond to the 16R probability variable jackpot, and "25 to 39" correspond to the 16R normal jackpot. It corresponds to

In this way, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the distribution of the jackpot type in the case of a jackpot is as follows: This is different from the case where a jackpot is achieved based on the entry of a game ball into the second starting hole 34, and there is a clear difference in the advantage for the player.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, four types of jackpots are set as jackpot types. Therefore, the aspects of jackpots are diversified. When these four types of jackpots are compared, the degree of advantage for the player is the highest for the 16R probability variable jackpot, followed by the 8R probability variable jackpot, the next highest, the 16R regular jackpot, and finally the 8R regular jackpot. By setting a plurality of types of jackpots with different degrees of advantage for the player in this way, it is possible to prevent the game from becoming monotonous and to increase the degree of attention to the game.

As described above, the MPU 62 performs a jackpot lottery using the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE, and also determines the jackpot type using the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE. Furthermore, the MPU 62 uses the values of the jackpot random number counter C1 and the jackpot type counter C2 to determine the segment display to be stopped and displayed on the first result display section 37a and the second result display section 37b. Decide the display mode. In making this determination, the stop result table stored in the stop result table storage area 63e of the ROM 63 is referred to.

In the pachinko machine 10, as an aspect of the support mode of the electric accessory 34a of the second starting port 34 after the above-mentioned (3) opening/closing execution mode ends, the firing of game balls into the gaming area PA continues in the same manner. When compared in the situation where can be set.

Specifically, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, the probability of winning the electric role opening in the electric role-playing object opening lottery using the electric role-playing object opening counter C4 is different between the high-frequency support mode and the low-frequency support mode. . In the high-frequency support mode, the probability of winning the electric role-playing role in the electric role-playing object lottery is made higher than in the low-frequency support mode. Furthermore, in the high-frequency support mode, the time for one opening of the electric accessory 34a is set longer than in the low-frequency support mode when the electric role is won.

Although not adopted in this embodiment, in the case where the electric role is won in the high-frequency support mode and the electric role is opened several times, the electric role is opened several times. The closing time until the open state starts may be set shorter than the opening time for one time. Furthermore, in the high-frequency support mode, the time secured from when one electric accessory lottery is held until the next electric accessory lottery is held is set to be relatively shorter than in the low-frequency support mode. It's okay.

As described above, in the high-frequency support mode, the probability that a game ball will enter the second starting port 34 is higher than in the low-frequency support mode. That is, the high frequency support mode functions as an auxiliary game state that assists in fulfilling the special information acquisition condition.

FIG. 9 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of a win/fail table (win/fail table for electric accessory lottery) used when executing the electric accessory lottery.

FIG. 9A shows a winning/failure table (for low-frequency support mode) for electric accessory opening lottery used in low-frequency support mode. As shown in FIG. 9(a), the winning/failure table for electric accessory opening lottery (for low-frequency support mode) has two values of 0 and 1 as the value of electric accessory opening counter C4, which is the winning of electric accessory opening. Value is set. 464 values from 2 to 465 are set as the value of the electric accessory release counter C4 that is a failure. That is, when the game ball passes through the through gate 35 during the low-frequency support mode and the electric role opening lottery is executed, the electric role opening lottery will be won with a probability of 1/233. In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, when an electric role opening win occurs during the low-frequency support mode, the electric role model 34a is opened once, and the opening time is 1.4 seconds.

FIG. 9(b) shows a win/fail table (for high-frequency support mode) for electric accessory opening lottery used in high-frequency support mode. As shown in FIG. 9(b), the winning/failure table for electric accessory opening lottery (for high-frequency support mode) contains 462 values from 0 to 461 as the value of the electric accessory opening counter C4 that is the winning electric accessory. Value is set. Four values from 462 to 465 are set as the value of the electric accessory release counter C4 that is a failure. That is, when the game ball passes through the through gate 35 during the high-frequency support mode and the electric role opening lottery is executed, the electric role opening lottery will be won with a probability of 231/233. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when an electric role opening win occurs during the high-frequency support mode, the electric role accessory 34a is opened once, and the opening time is 1.6 seconds.

In this way, the probability of a game ball entering the second starting port 34 is set to be higher in the high-frequency support mode than in the low-frequency support mode by the electric accessory opening lottery table. .

A3. Overview of processing by gaming machines:
Next, an overview of the processing executed by the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment will be explained.

FIG. 10 is a time chart illustrating the point award performance (case 1) executed by the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment. The point award performance is a performance that gives points at a predetermined timing during the execution of a game round. Then, every time 10 points are accumulated, a button press effect is executed. The button press performance is a performance that prompts the player to press the performance operation button 24. Then, when the player presses the performance operation button 24 during the period in which the button press performance is being performed, or after the period in which the button press performance is being performed, a jackpot is won in the jackpot lottery related to the game round. A production that suggests the possibility (expectation level) of winning is executed. In addition, only when the player presses the performance operation button 24 during the period when the button press performance is executed, a performance that suggests the possibility (expectation level) of winning the jackpot in the jackpot lottery related to the game round. may be executed. Hereinafter, the point award performance (case 1) will be specifically explained along the time chart.

FIG. 10 shows, as a time chart, a point award performance and a button press performance executed in one game round. In the game round shown in FIG. 10, the effect a1 is executed at the same time as the variation of symbols is started. By executing the effect a1, an image showing a change in the liquid crystal pattern or a predetermined character image is displayed on the display surface 41a. Furthermore, along with the display of these images, audio output and lamp lighting are also executed. After the start of the fluctuation, as shown in the figure, point awarding performance X1 is executed at a predetermined timing. The illustrated [+4P] indicates that 4 points are awarded in the point awarding performance.

FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing how the point awarding effect X1 is executed. As shown in FIG. 11(a), an image corresponding to the effect a1 is displayed in the main display area MA of the display surface 41a. Thereafter, while the effect a1 is being executed, the turtle character passes over the top of the display surface 41a from right to left. As shown in FIG. 11(b), at the timing when the turtle character is positioned at the upper center of the display surface 41a, a pearl is dropped on which the number of points to be awarded is displayed. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 11(c), the image corresponding to the dropped pearl is changed to an image of the number of pearls corresponding to the number of points awarded at the timing when the dropped pearl reaches the stage St at the center of the lower part of the display surface 41a. changes and accumulates. That is, the number of pearls displayed on stage St corresponds to the number of accumulated points. At this time, the color of stage St changes from white to red. The change in color of stage St will be explained in detail later.

The number of points to be awarded in the point granting performance is first notified to the player at the timing when the turtle character passes through the upper center of the display surface 41a and an image of a pearl on which the number of points to be awarded is displayed is displayed. Ru. Therefore, it is possible to give the player a sense of anticipation regarding the number of points to be awarded during the period from when the point award performance is started until the turtle character passes through the upper center of the display surface 41a. Note that as a modification, a configuration may be adopted in which the number of points to be awarded is not displayed on the image of the pearl dropped by the turtle character. By doing this, the players will feel the expectation regarding the number of points during the period until the dropped pearls reach the stage St and the images of the number of pearls corresponding to the number of points awarded are displayed. can be granted. Furthermore, as will be described later, in this embodiment, a point awarding effect in which no points are awarded may be executed (see FIG. 18). In this case, the turtle character passes from the right end to the left end of the display surface 41a without dropping a pearl, which means giving points. Therefore, if a configuration is adopted in which the number of points to be awarded is not displayed on the image of the pearl dropped by the turtle character, as in this modification, as a first step, the turtle character appears from the right end of the display surface 41a. At this point, the player can be made aware that the point awarding performance will be executed, and a sense of anticipation can be imparted to the player. Then, as a second step, when the turtle character drops the pearl, the player can be made aware that the executed point awarding performance is not a point awarding performance in which no points are awarded, and the player is further It can give a sense of expectation. After that, when the pearls dropped by the turtle reach stage St and images of pearls corresponding to the number of points awarded are displayed, the player who has recognized the number of points awarded will feel a sense of anticipation. It can give a feeling of elation. That is, when this modification is adopted, the timing at which the turtle character appears, the timing at which the turtle character drops a pearl that means giving points, and the timing at which the dropped pearls reach stage St and are awarded points are determined. A sense of anticipation can be given to the player in stages at three timings, including the timing at which a number of pearl images corresponding to the number of points received are displayed.

The explanation returns to FIG. 10. In FIG. 10, the number of points accumulated by executing the point awarding effect is shown as "accumulated points." Since 4 points have been accumulated by executing the point award effect X1 that gives 4 points, <4P> is shown as the accumulated points.

After the point award performance X1 is executed, the point award performance X2 is executed at a predetermined timing. As shown in FIG. 10, three points are awarded in the point award performance.

FIG. 12 is an explanatory diagram showing how the point awarding effect X2 is executed. As shown in FIG. 12(a), in the point granting performance X2, similarly to the point granting performance X1, the turtle character passes over the upper part of the display surface 41a from right to left during execution of the performance a1. do. Then, at the timing when the turtle character is located at the center of the upper part of the display surface 41a, a pearl on which the number of points to be awarded is displayed is dropped. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 12(c), the image corresponding to the dropped pearl changes to images of the number of pearls corresponding to the number of points awarded at the timing when the stage St is reached, and is accumulated. By executing the point awarding performance X2, 3 points are awarded, the accumulated points become 7 points, and 7 pearls corresponding to the number of accumulated points are displayed on the stage St.

As shown in FIG. 10, after the point awarding performance X2 is executed, the point awarding performance X3 is executed at a predetermined timing. As shown in the figure, 5 points are awarded in the point award performance.

FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing how the point awarding effect X3 is executed. As shown in FIG. 13(a), in the point granting performance X3, similarly to the point granting performance X1 and the point granting performance Pass to the left. Then, at the timing when the turtle character is located at the center of the upper part of the display surface 41a, a pearl on which the number of points to be awarded is displayed is dropped. After that, as shown in FIG. 13(c), the image on stage St is changed to an image of one shell and two images representing two points at the timing when the image corresponding to the dropped pearl reaches stage St. The image of the pearl changes and is displayed. The total number of accumulated points is 12 points, but since the accumulated points are 10 or more points, in this embodiment, the 10 accumulated points are displayed as one shell image. Furthermore, a timer indicating the time until the button press effect is executed is displayed below the shellfish image. A display in which a shellfish and a timer are displayed is also called a timer display.

FIG. 14 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a timer effect and a button press effect. FIG. 14(a) shows how the timer effect is executed. As shown in the figure, an image of a shellfish representing 10 accumulated points is displayed near the stage St. The image of the shellfish indicates that a button press effect will be executed later. Furthermore, a timer indicating the time until the button press effect is executed is displayed below the shellfish image. The timer counts down over time. In addition, among the accumulated points that became 12 points due to the execution of point granting performance Appears as a pearl.

Even during the period when the timer effect is being executed, the effect a1 is executed in the main display area MA of the display surface 41a. Then, when the remaining time of the timer indicated by the timer effect becomes 0 (zero), the button press effect is executed.

FIG. 14(b) shows how the button press effect is executed. The button press performance is a performance that prompts the player to press the performance operation button 24. Specifically, the image of the open shell that was displayed in the timer effect is displayed, and the words "Push!" are displayed.

In addition, in this example, immediately before the button press effect is started, that is, immediately before the remaining time of the timer due to the timer effect reaches 0, the liquid crystal symbol fluctuatingly displayed in the main display area MA as effect a1 is displayed as a pseudo The vehicle is in a permanently stopped state (hereinafter also referred to as a pseudo-stopped state). Then, a button press effect is executed while the liquid crystal symbols are in a pseudo-stop state, and when the player presses the effect operation button 24 at a predetermined timing, effect a2 is started as shown in FIG. 14(c). , the LCD pattern begins to fluctuate again.

Note that in the pseudo-stop state, the liquid crystal symbols are not completely stopped but are slightly fluctuating, and in the internal processing of the pachinko machine 10, the liquid crystal symbols are being displayed in a fluctuating manner. The pseudo-stop state of the liquid crystal symbols is a display state for the purpose of making the player perceive the liquid crystal symbols as if they had shifted to a stopped display. In this way, by pseudo-stopping the symbols and starting fluctuations again within one game round, the player is made to perceive it as if the preview effect is being executed continuously across the game rounds. In the present embodiment, this presentation is also referred to as a pseudo-continuous notice presentation.

That is, in this description, the button press performance is used as an opportunity to switch from the pseudo continuous preview performance to the execution of performance a2. By using the button press effect in this way, a player who temporarily recognizes that the jackpot lottery was a loss by visually recognizing the liquid crystal symbol that has stopped in a pseudo manner, will be able to By pressing the performance operation button 24 by the player himself/herself, the player can be made to feel as if he/she has temporarily avoided the unsuccessful result of the jackpot lottery, and it is possible to give the player a sense of relief and anticipation.

Further, when a point awarding effect is executed during the execution of a game round, points are awarded and the points are accumulated. Then, a timer effect is started every time 10 points are accumulated, and a button press effect is executed at the timing when the remaining time of the timer reaches 0. Therefore, each time the point award performance is executed in a game round, it is possible to give a sense of anticipation to the player. In addition, when 10 points are accumulated, a button press effect is executed, and by the player pressing the button at the timing when the button press effect is executed, the LCD symbol indicating a pseudo-stopped miss result is displayed again. Since various performances are performed, such as a fluctuating performance and a performance that suggests the degree of expectation for the game round, it is possible to give the player a sense of anticipation and tension.

Furthermore, after the button press effect is executed, the display of shell images corresponding to the timer effect and button effect disappears, and two pearl images indicating the remaining two accumulated points are displayed. becomes.

Even though the point granting effect has been executed and points have been accumulated, if the game round ends without accumulating 10 or more points, the accumulated points will be reset (accumulated points: 0). In some cases, it is carried over to the next game. Whether the accumulated points are reset or carried over at the end of a game round is determined by a predetermined process by the pachinko machine 10. This process will be explained in detail later.

Further, the pachinko machine 10 does not execute point awarding performance in all game rounds, but executes point awarding performance in some game rounds. In particular, it is executed with high frequency in game rounds that are a reach (a jackpot lottery is a "miss") and game rounds that are a jackpot.

FIG. 15 is a time chart illustrating the point award performance (case 2) executed by the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment. In this explanation, a case will be explained in which the accumulated points awarded in the point imparting performance are accumulated over multiple game rounds.

As shown in the figure, in the game round U1, variation is started and the performance b1 is executed. In the effect b1, an image showing a change in a liquid crystal pattern or a predetermined character image is displayed on the display surface 41a. Thereafter, at a predetermined timing, point awarding effect Y1 is executed. As shown in the figure, 5 points are awarded in the point award performance. Therefore, the accumulated points will be 5 points. Thereafter, the fluctuation of the game time U1 ends. At this time, in the point award performance (case 2), when the fluctuation of the game round U1 ends, the accumulated points are carried over to the next executed game round U2 without being reset.

In addition, in this embodiment, as shown in the "Color of stage St" column in FIG. The color of stage St is controlled as follows.
(1) If no points are accumulated, stage St is set to white.
(2) If points are accumulated and the accumulated points are carried over, stage St is set to yellow.
(3) If points are accumulated and the accumulated points are not carried over, stage St is set to orange.
The color of stage St is controlled as described in (1) to (3) above.

As shown in the "Color of stage St" column in FIG. 15, in the case of point awarding performance (case 2), stage St changes from white to yellow when points are first accumulated in game round U1. . Thereafter, even in the game round U2, the accumulated points are carried over to the game round U3, so the color of the stage St remains yellow. Then, when the game round U3 is started, the color of the stage St changes from yellow to orange because the accumulated points in the game round U3 are not carried over to the next game round. Thereafter, the game round U3 ends with the points accumulated to the end, so the color of the stage St remains orange while the game round U3 is being executed.

FIG. 16 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the colors of stage St. FIG. 16(a) shows stage St when no points are accumulated. The color of stage St is set to white. FIG. 16(b) shows a stage St when points are accumulated and the accumulated points are carried over. The color of stage St is set to yellow. FIG. 16(c) shows a stage St when points are accumulated but the accumulated points are not carried over. The color of stage St is set to orange. In this way, the color of the stage St is used to visually indicate to the player whether the accumulated points will be carried over or not.

By indicating to the player whether or not the accumulated points will be carried over, for example, if the color of stage St is yellow indicating that the accumulated points will be carried over, the accumulated points will be carried over in the current game round. Even if you do not get 10 points or more, there is a high possibility that the accumulated points will be 10 points or more in the next game due to the accumulated points carried over from the relevant game and the points awarded in the next game. It is possible to make the player guess, giving the player a sense of expectation.

The explanation returns to FIG. 15. When the game round U1 ends and the game round U2 starts, the effect b2 is executed. Thereafter, point awarding effect Y2 is executed at a predetermined timing. As shown in the figure, 6 points are awarded in the point award performance. Therefore, the accumulated points will be 11 points. At this time, since the accumulated points have reached 10 points or more, the image of 10 pearls changes to an image of a shellfish, but during the execution of game round U2, the timer indicating the time until the button press effect is not displayed. The message "Waiting" is displayed. Hereinafter, the effect in which the characters "waiting" are displayed will also be referred to as the standby effect.

FIG. 17 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the standby effect. As shown in the figure, when the standby effect is executed, the words "waiting" are displayed below the shellfish image. The standby performance indicates that the button press performance will not be executed in the current game round, but that the button press performance corresponding to the 10 accumulated points will be executed in the next and subsequent game rounds. Then, when the game moves to the game round where the button press effect corresponding to the 10 accumulated points is executed, a timer effect is executed in place of the standby effect, and the button press corresponding to the 10 accumulated points is executed. A countdown of the time until the performance is executed is executed.

As shown in FIG. 15, after the point awarding performance Y2 ends, the point awarding performance Y3 is executed at a predetermined timing. In the point awarding performance, 0 points are awarded. That is, even though the point award performance is executed, no points are awarded. Therefore, the accumulated points remain at 11 points.

FIG. 18 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a point awarding performance in which no points are assigned. FIG. 18 shows a point awarding effect Y3 executed in the game round U2.

When the point award performance is started, the turtle character appears from the upper right end of the display surface 41a and advances toward the center, similarly to the normal point award performance. Then, as shown in FIG. 18(b), even when the turtle character is located at the top center of the display surface 41a, the turtle character does not do anything and as shown in FIG. 18(c), It continues to the left and advances to the upper left end of the display surface 41a. By executing the point awarding effect [0P] in this manner, it is possible to add tone to the player's sense of expectation. After that, the symbols stop and the game round U2 ends. Note that the points accumulated in the game round U2 are set to be carried over to the next game round (game round U3).

When the game round U3 is started, the performance b3 is executed, and a timer performance is executed in place of the standby performance that was executed in the game round U2. In FIG. 15, this is expressed as timer effect 1 to distinguish it from another timer effect that will be executed later. Timer performance 1 is a performance corresponding to button press performance 1 that is executed most recently. That is, the time displayed on the timer in timer effect 1 is the time until button press effect 1 is executed.

As shown in FIG. 15, point awarding performance Y4 [+3P] and point awarding performance Y5 [+7P] are executed at a predetermined timing after the game round U3 is started. A total of 10 points will be awarded through these two point awarding performances. Therefore, the accumulated points will be 21 points. As described above, the button press effect is executed once for every 10 accumulated points, so in the game round U3, in addition to the button press effect 1, the button press effect 2 is executed. Therefore, at the point in time when point granting effect Y5 is executed and 21 accumulated points are accumulated, timer effect 2 corresponding to button press effect 2 is executed.

FIG. 19 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a timer effect and a button press effect executed in game round U3. FIG. 19(a) shows how timer effect 1 and timer effect 2 are executed. As illustrated, the shellfish image and timer corresponding to timer effect 2 are displayed to the left of the shellfish image and timer corresponding to timer effect 1. As described above, the timer corresponding to timer effect 1 counts down and displays the time until button press effect 1 is executed. The timer corresponding to timer effect 2 counts down and displays the time until button press effect 2 is executed. Therefore, the time displayed on the timer corresponding to timer effect 1 and the time displayed on the timer corresponding to timer effect 2 are different. In this way, by displaying a plurality of images corresponding to the timer effect, it is possible to indicate to the player that the button press effect will be executed twice, and it is possible to further give the player a sense of anticipation. .

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 15, button press effect 1 is executed. FIG. 19(b) shows how the button press effect 1 is executed. When the button press effect 1 is started, the image of the opened shellfish that was displayed in the timer effect 1 is displayed, and the words "Press!" are displayed. Note that the image corresponding to timer effect 2 is displayed as is.

As shown in FIG. 15, after button press effect 1 ends, effect b4 is executed. Even while the effect b4 is being executed, the timer effect 2 counts down and displays the time until the button press effect 2 is executed. Thereafter, when the countdown time is displayed as 0 in timer effect 2, button press effect 2 is executed. FIG. 19(c) shows how the button press effect 2 is executed. When button press effect 2 is executed, the image of the open shell that was displayed in timer effect 2 is displayed, and the words "Press!" are displayed.

As shown in FIG. 15, after the button press effect 2 is executed, the effect b5 is executed, and then the symbols stop and the game round U3 ends. The point awarding performance (case 2) has been described above.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the result of the jackpot lottery in a game round is a jackpot than when it is not a jackpot, the probability that the button press effect will be executed in the game round is set to be higher. There is.

As explained above, in this embodiment, by executing the button press effect, when the button press effect is executed, the result of the jackpot lottery becomes a "jackpot" or a "miss (reach occurrence)". It is possible to make the player guess that the probability is high and give the player a sense of expectation. In addition, by executing the point awarding effect, we create a sense of anticipation for players who recognize that the button press effect will be executed when the accumulated points reach 10 points or more. can be granted.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, there are cases in which the accumulated points accumulated in a game round are reset as a trigger for the end of the game round, and cases in which they are carried over to the next game round without being reset. Accumulated points may be reset at the end of the game round, thereby making the player desire to accumulate 10 points or more by the end of the game round, and increasing the player's expectations regarding the point award performance. The feeling can be further increased. In addition, when a game round has started and the player recognizes that points have been accumulated by executing a point awarding effect, the player should be aware of the timing of the end of the game round, which may reset the accumulated points. This makes it possible to draw attention to the manner in which accumulated points are accumulated, that is, the manner in which point awarding effects are executed.

In addition, since the accumulated points may be carried over to the next game round, even if the accumulated points do not accumulate over 10 points in the current game round, if they are carried over to the next game round, the relevant game round Since the points accumulated in the above are valid, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's expectation that the accumulated points do not accumulate more than 10 points.

A4. Various processes executed in the main controller:
Next, an example of a specific process executed in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment will be explained. First, the processing executed in the main control device 60 will be explained, and then the processing executed in the audio emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 will be explained.

<Timer interrupt processing>
FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing. As described above, the timer interrupt process is activated periodically (for example, every 2 msec) by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60.

In step S10101, reading processing for various detection sensors is executed. That is, the state of various detection sensors connected to the main control device 60 is read, the state of the sensor is determined, and the detection information (winning detection information) is saved. After that, the process advances to step S10102.

In step S10102, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated. Specifically, 1 is added to the random number initial value counter CINI, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value, it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the random number initial value counter CINI is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 64. After that, the process advances to step S10103.

In step S10103, the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, reach random number counter C3, and electric accessory opening counter C4 are updated. Specifically, 1 is added to each of the jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, reach random number counter C3, and electric accessory release counter C4, and when each of these counter values reaches the maximum value, Clear to 0. Then, the updated values of each counter C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 64. After that, the process advances to step S10104. Note that the change type counter CS updates its value in normal processing (FIG. 26), which will be described later.

In step S10104, a prize winning process for the starting hole is executed in conjunction with a winning in the first starting hole 33 and the second starting hole 34. Details of the winning process for the starting opening in step S10104 will be described later. After executing step S10104, the process advances to step S10105.

In step S10105, a through prize winning process is executed in conjunction with a winning through gate 35. The details of the winning process for through in step S10105 will be described later. After executing step S10105, the MPU 62 ends the timer interrupt processing.

<Winning process for starting gate>
Next, the winning process for the starting opening will be explained. The winning process for the starting opening is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of timer interrupt processing (FIG. 20: S10104).

FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing the winning process for the starting opening. In step S10201, it is determined whether the game ball has won a prize (starting prize) in the first starting hole 33 based on the detection state of the detection sensor corresponding to the first starting hole 33. In step S10201, if it is determined that the game ball has entered the first starting port 33 (S10201: YES), the process advances to step S10202, and a prize ball command is issued to make the payout control device 70 pay out three game balls. Set. After that, the process advances to step S10203.

In step S10203, external signal setting processing is performed to output a signal to the management control device on the gaming hall side that the game ball has won in the first starting port 33. After that, the process advances to step S10204.

In step S10204, the starting pending number RaN (hereinafter also referred to as the first starting pending number RaN), which is the value stored in the pending number storage area of the first holding area Ra, is read, and the first starting pending number RaN will be described later. Set as a processing target. The first starting pending number RaN indicates the number of pending winnings based on winnings to the first starting opening 33. After that, the process advances to step S10209.

In step S10201, if it is determined that the game ball has not entered the first starting port 33 (S10201: NO), the process advances to step S10205, where it is determined whether the game ball has entered the second starting port 34 or not. The determination is made based on the detection state of the detection sensor corresponding to the second starting port 34.

In step S10205, if it is determined that the game ball has entered the second starting port 34 (S10205: YES), the process proceeds to step S10206, and a prize ball command is issued to make the payout control device 70 pay out three game balls. Set. After that, the process advances to step S10207. On the other hand, in step S10205, if it is determined that the game ball has not entered the second starting hole 34 (S10205: NO), the winning process for the main starting hole is ended.

In step S10207, external signal setting processing is performed in order to output a signal to the management control device on the gaming hall side that the game ball has won in the second starting port 34. After that, the process advances to step S10208.

In step S10208, the starting pending number RbN (hereinafter also referred to as the second starting pending number RbN), which is the value stored in the pending number storage area of the second holding area Rb, is read, and the second starting pending number RbN will be described later. Set as a processing target. The second starting reservation number RbN indicates the number of reservations based on winnings to the second starting opening 34. After that, the process advances to step S10209.

In step S10209, it is determined whether or not the start pending number N (RaN or RbN) set in step S10204 or step S10208 described above is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment). In step S10209, if the start pending number N is not less than the upper limit value (S10209: NO), the winning process for the main start opening is ended.

On the other hand, in step S10209, if the start pending number N is less than the upper limit (S10209: YES), the process advances to step S10210, where 1 is added to the start pending number N of the corresponding holding area, and then the process advances to step S10211. , 1 is added to the value stored in the total reservation number storage area (hereinafter referred to as total reservation number CRN). The total pending number CRN indicates the total value of the first starting pending number RaN and the second starting pending number RbN. After that, the process advances to step S10212.

In step S10212, each value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3 updated in step S10103 (FIG. 20), and the fluctuation type counter CS updated in the normal process (FIG. 26) is It is stored in the first storage area among the free storage areas of the corresponding reservation area, that is, the storage area corresponding to the number of reservations to which 1 was added in step S10210. Specifically, when the first start pending number RaN is set as the processing target, the jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, reach random number counter C3, and Each value of the variation type counter CS is stored in the first storage area among the free storage areas of the first reservation area Ra, that is, the storage area corresponding to the first start reservation number RaN to which 1 was added in step S10210. In addition, when the second starting pending number RbN is set as a processing target, the jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, reach random number counter C3, and fluctuation type counter updated in step S10103 (FIG. 20) Each value of CS is stored in the first storage area among the free storage areas of the second reservation area Rb, that is, the storage area corresponding to the second start reservation number RbN to which 1 was added in step S10210. After executing step S10212, the process advances to step S10213.

In step S10213, a destination determination process is executed. The destination determination process is based on the information (pending information) of each value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the fluctuation type counter CS (pending information), and the jackpot lottery result (lottery result). This is a process in which determinations such as the type of game, presence or absence of reach, variation time of game rounds, etc. are executed before the pending information becomes a target of the jackpot lottery by the main control device 60. Details of the destination determination process will be described later. After executing step S10213, the process advances to step S10214.

In step S10214, processing for setting a pending command is executed. Specifically, the determination result (first determination information) of the first determination process executed based on the information (pending information) of each value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the fluctuation type counter CS. ) as a pending command.

The hold command indicates that a winning has occurred in the first starting port 33 or the second starting port 34 and the judgment result (first judgment information) of the first judgment process based on the holding information acquired based on the winning. This is a command to have the sub-side control device confirm the information before it becomes a target of the jackpot lottery by the main control device 60. The hold command is transmitted to the audio emission control device 90 in command output processing (FIG. 26: step S10703) of normal processing, which will be described later.

In addition, when the voice emission control device 90 receives a hold command transmitted based on winning to the first start opening 33, the display in the first hold display area Ds1 of the symbol display device 41 is increased by an increase in the number of hold items. A command is sent to the display control device 100 to make the change correspond to the above. The display control device 100 that has received the command changes the display in the first pending display area Ds1 of the symbol display device 41 in accordance with the increase in the pending number. On the other hand, when receiving the hold command transmitted based on the winning to the second starting port 34, the voice emission control device 90 suspends the display in the second hold display area Ds2 of the symbol display device 41 by increasing the number of hold items. A command is sent to the display control device 100 to make the change correspond to the above. The display control device 100 that has received the command changes the display in the second reservation display area Ds2 of the symbol display device 41 in accordance with the increase in the number of reservations.

After executing step S10214, the main MPU 62 ends the winning process for the main start opening.

<First judgment process>
Next, the destination determination process will be explained. The first determination process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 21: S10213) of the winning process for the starting opening.

FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing the destination determination process. As mentioned above, the preliminary determination process is based on the pending information, and the pending information is used to determine whether or not the jackpot lottery is correct, to determine the type of jackpot, to determine whether reach has occurred, to determine the fluctuation time of the playing times, etc. This is a process executed before becoming a target of the jackpot lottery by the control device 60.

In step S10301, jackpot/reach information acquisition processing is executed. This process is a process of determining the success or failure of a jackpot lottery, determining the type of jackpot, and determining whether a reach has occurred. Details of the jackpot/reach information acquisition process will be described later. After executing step S10301, the process advances to step S10302.

In step S10302, variation time information acquisition processing is executed. This process is a process for determining the variation time of the game. Details of the fluctuating time information acquisition process will be described later.

After executing step S10302, the primary determination process ends.

<Jackpot/reach information acquisition process>
Next, the jackpot/reach information acquisition process will be explained. The jackpot/reach information acquisition process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the advance determination process (FIG. 22: S10301).

FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing the jackpot/reach information acquisition process. In step S10401, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the storage area due to a winning in the starting opening in the winning process for the starting opening (FIG. 21) is read out. After that, the process advances to step S10402, and the lottery mode at the time when the jackpot lottery based on the current prize winning is executed as a game round is determined. Specifically, the judgment result of the previous judgment process executed for the winning prize before the current winning is read from the corresponding storage area, and it is determined whether there is a probability-variable jackpot that occurs before the jackpot lottery due to the current winning. By this, the lottery mode at the time when the jackpot lottery based on the current prize winning is executed as a game round is determined.

In step S10402, if it is determined that the lottery mode is the low probability mode when the jackpot lottery based on the current winning is executed as a game round (S10402: YES), the process advances to step S10403, and the win/fail table storage area is The low probability mode validity table stored in 63a is referred to. Thereafter, the process advances to step S10405, and as a result of referring to the low probability mode win/fail table, it is determined whether or not the information of the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 read this time corresponds to a jackpot.

On the other hand, in step S10402, if it is determined that the lottery mode is not the low probability mode at the time when the jackpot lottery based on the current prize winning is executed as a game round (S10402: NO), the process advances to step S10404, and the lottery mode is set to the high probability mode. As a result of referring to the success/failure table, it is determined whether the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 read this time corresponds to a jackpot. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S10405, and as a result of referring to the high probability mode win/fail table, it is determined whether the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 read this time corresponds to a jackpot.

In step S10405, if it is determined that the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 read this time corresponds to a jackpot (S10405: YES), the process advances to step S10406, and the value is stored in the storage area due to the winning in the starting slot this time. The value of the jackpot type counter C2 is read out. Thereafter, the process advances to step S10407, and the distribution table stored in the distribution table storage area 63b is referred to. Specifically, if the jackpot type counter C2 to be distributed this time is acquired based on winning in the first starting opening 33, refer to the distribution table for the first starting opening, If the award is obtained based on a winning in the second starting hole 34, the distribution table for the second starting hole is referred to. After executing step S10407, the process advances to step S10408.

In step S10408, as a result of referring to the distribution table, it is determined whether the value of the jackpot type counter C2 read this time corresponds to a variable probability jackpot. In step S10408, if it is determined that it corresponds to a variable probability jackpot (S10408: YES), the process proceeds to step S10409, and the probability variable jackpot information is stored in the previous determination processing result storage area 64f. Thereafter, the destination determination process ends. On the other hand, in step S10408, if it is determined that the probability variable jackpot is not supported (S10408: NO), the process proceeds to step S10410, and normal jackpot information is stored in the previous judgment processing result storage area 64h. Thereafter, the destination determination process ends.

In step S10405, if it is determined that the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 read this time does not correspond to a jackpot (S10405: NO), the process advances to step S10411, and is stored in the storage area by winning the starting slot this time. The value of the reach random number counter C3 is read out. Thereafter, the process advances to step S10412, and the reach determination table stored in the reach determination table storage area 63c is referred to. Thereafter, the process advances to step S10413, and as a result of referring to the reach determination table, it is determined whether the value of the reach random number counter C3 read this time corresponds to the occurrence of a reach.

In step S10413, if it is determined that it corresponds to the occurrence of a reach (S10413: YES), the process advances to step S10414, and the reach occurrence information is stored in the previous determination processing result storage area 64h. Thereafter, the destination determination process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S10413 that it does not correspond to the occurrence of a reach (S10413: NO), the first determination process is ended.

<Fluctuating time information acquisition process>
Next, the fluctuating time information acquisition process will be explained. The variable time information acquisition process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the destination determination process (FIG. 22: S10302).

FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing the fluctuating time information acquisition process. In step S10501, the value of the variation type counter CS stored in the storage area by winning the starting hole in the winning process for the starting hole (FIG. 21) is acquired. After that, the process advances to step S10502.

In step S10502, it is determined whether or not the jackpot lottery for the current game round is a win. Specifically, the presence or absence of a jackpot is determined based on the lottery result of the jackpot lottery determined by the jackpot/reach information acquisition process, and if it is a jackpot (S10502: YES), the process advances to step S10503.

In step S10503, with reference to the variable time table for jackpot stored in the variable time table storage area 63d of the ROM 63, variable time information corresponding to the value of the current variable type counter CS is obtained. After executing step S10503, the process advances to step S10507.

In step S10507, the acquired variation time information is stored in the previous determination processing result storage area 64h of the RAM 64. Thereafter, this variation time information acquisition process ends.

In step S10502, if it is determined that the lottery result of the jackpot lottery is not a jackpot (step S10502: NO), the process proceeds to step S10504, and it is determined whether or not a reach occurs. In step S10504, if it is determined that reach occurs (S10504: YES), the process advances to step S10505.

In step S10505, the variable time table for reach occurrence stored in the variable time table storage area 63d of the ROM 63 is referred to to obtain variable time information corresponding to the value of the current variable type counter CS. Thereafter, the process advances to step S10507, and after storing the acquired variation time information in the previous determination processing result storage area 64h of the RAM 64, the present variation time information acquisition process is ended.

In step S10504, if it is determined that reach does not occur in the current game round (step S10504: NO), the process advances to step S10506, and the variable time table for non-reach occurrence stored in the variable time table storage area 63d is With reference to this, the fluctuation time corresponding to the current value of the fluctuation type counter CS is obtained. Thereafter, the process advances to step S10507, and after storing the acquired variation time information in the previous determination processing result storage area 64h of the RAM 64, the present variation time information acquisition process is ended.

In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, the variable time information stored in the variable time table is set such that the larger the values of the first start hold number RaN and the second start hold number RbN, the shorter the change time. There is. In other words, even if the value of the fluctuation type counter CS is the same, the data of the fluctuation time table to be referenced depends on the values of the first starting pending number RaN and the second starting pending number RbN when determining the varying time of the relevant game round. are different. At the time of executing the variable time acquisition process as a process of the first determination process, that is, at the time of acquiring the variable time of the pending game that is the target of the first determination process, the pending game that is the target of the process The number of pending pieces at the time when the round is executed as a game round is unknown. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the fluctuation time is obtained when it is assumed that the first pending starting number RaN=0 (and the second starting pending number RbN=0). Therefore, the variation time acquired by this variation time acquisition process is the actual variation time when the pending game session that was the target of the previous determination process is executed as a game session (the variation obtained in the variation time setting process described later). The value may be different from the time). In this embodiment, the variation time acquired in the variation time acquisition process executed as one process of the advance determination process is also referred to as a "provisional variation time." In this embodiment, the value of the provisional fluctuation time is used in the processing performed when performing the point awarding effect. Processing using the temporary variation time will be described later.

In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, the fluctuation time information stored in the fluctuation time table is set such that the larger the values of the first start hold number RaN and the second start hold number RbN, the shorter the change time. However, for example, the larger the value of the total pending number CRN, the shorter the fluctuation time may be. Further, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, a configuration may be adopted that does not depend on the total number of reservations CRN, and the fluctuation time may be set to be shorter as the total number of reservations CRN is smaller. In addition, when the second starting pending number RbN is "0", the larger the first starting pending number RaN is, the shorter the fluctuation time is, and when the second starting pending number RbN is "1" or more, may be set such that the larger the second start pending number RbN, the shorter the fluctuation time. In addition, when the second starting pending number RbN is "0", the larger the first starting pending number RaN, the longer the fluctuation time, and when the second starting pending number RbN is "1" or more. may be set such that the larger the number of second start-up reservations RbN is, the longer the fluctuation time is, or it may be set to be constant regardless of the respective reservation numbers RaN and RbN.

In addition, in a situation where the support mode is high-frequency support mode, compared to a situation where the support mode is low-frequency support mode, when the number of pending information is the same, a shorter variation time is selected so that no reach occurs. A variable time table may also be set. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the selected variation times may be the same, or the above relationship may be reversed.

Furthermore, the above configuration may be applied to the fluctuation time when a reach occurs, and the fluctuation time that is likely to be selected and the fluctuation time that is difficult to be selected may be different when winning a jackpot and when winning a reach. good. Further, a variable time table for a variable probability jackpot, a variable time table for a normal jackpot, a variable time table for a missed reach, and a variable time table for a complete miss may each be set individually.

<Winning process for through>
Next, the winning process for the through game will be explained. The through winning process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a timer interrupt process subroutine (FIG. 20: Step S10105).

FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing the winning process for the through game. In step S10601, it is determined whether the game ball has entered the through gate 35 or not. In step S10601, if it is determined that the game ball has entered the through gate 35 (S10601: YES), the process advances to step S10602 and determines whether or not the number of reserved accessories SN is less than the upper limit (4 in this embodiment). Determine whether Note that the number of stored accessories SN is a value indicating the number of prizes entered into the through gate 35 that are reserved for conducting the electric accessory opening lottery. In this embodiment, the maximum value of the number SN of accessory objects on hold is four. On the other hand, in step S10601, if it is determined that the game ball has not won in the through gate 35 (S10601: NO), the winning process for the main through is ended.

In step S10602, if it is determined that the number SN of accessory items on hold is less than the upper limit value (less than 4) (S10602: YES), the process advances to step S10603, and 1 is added to the number SN of accessory items on hold. After that, the process advances to step S10604.

In step S10604, the value of the electric accessory opening counter C4 updated in step S10103 (FIG. 20) is stored in the first storage area among the empty storage areas of the electric accessory holding area 64c of the RAM 64. Thereafter, the winning process for the through game ends.

On the other hand, in step S10602, if it is determined that the value of the number of accessory items held SN is not less than the upper limit value (S10602: NO), that is, if it is determined that the value of the number SN of accessory items held is the upper limit value, the electric The through winning process is ended without storing the value of the accessory opening counter C4.

<Normal processing>
Next, normal processing will be explained. The normal process is a process that is started by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 when the power is turned on. In the normal processing, the main processing of the game is executed.

FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing normal processing. In step S10701, startup processing is executed. Specifically, initial settings of each control device upon power-on, determination of validity of data stored in the RAM 64, etc. are executed. After that, the process advances to step S10702.

In step S10702, a startup command is set. The start-up command is a command for causing each sub-side control device to start a demonstration video when the power is turned on. After that, the process advances to step S10703.

In step S10703, output data such as the start-up command set in step S10702, the command set in timer interrupt processing, or the previously executed normal processing, etc., is transmitted to each sub-side control device. Specifically, the presence or absence of a prize ball command is determined, and if a prize ball command is set, it is transmitted to the payout control device 70. Further, if commands related to production such as a startup command, a variation command, a type command, a hold command, etc. are set, they are transmitted to the audio emission control device 90. After executing step S10703, the process advances to step S10704.

In step S10704, the variation type counter CS is updated. Specifically, 1 is added to the variation type counter CS, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value, the counter value is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the variation type counter CS is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 64. After that, the process advances to step S10705.

In step S10705, the prize ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 70 are read, and the process proceeds to step S10706. In step S10706, a game round control process is executed to control the game in each game round. In the game round control process, a jackpot lottery, setting of variable display of symbols by the symbol display device 41, display control of the first result display section 37a, second result display section 37b, etc. are performed. Details of the game time control process will be described later. After executing step S10706, the process advances to step S10707.

In step S10707, a gaming state transition process for shifting the gaming state is executed. By executing the gaming state transition process, the gaming state shifts to an opening/closing execution mode, a high probability mode, a high frequency support mode, or the like. Details of the gaming state transition process will be described later. After that, the process advances to step S10708.

In step S10708, electric utility support processing for driving and controlling the electric accessory 34a provided at the second starting port 34 is executed. In the electric accessory support process, it is determined whether or not the electric accessory 34a is to be in an open state. Details of the electric support support process will be described later. After that, the process advances to step S10709.

In step S10709, it is determined whether a predetermined time (4 msec in this embodiment) has elapsed since the start of the current normal process (strictly speaking, the start of the command output process in step S10703). That is, it is determined whether the timing for executing the next normal process has arrived. In step S10709, if it is determined that the predetermined time (4 msec) has not elapsed since the start of the current normal process (S10709: NO), in step S10710 and step S10711, the process continues until the execution timing of the next normal process. Within the remaining time, the random number initial value counter CINI and the fluctuation type counter CS are repeatedly updated. Specifically, in step S10710, 1 is added to the random number initial value counter CINI, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value, it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the random number initial value counter CINI is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 64. Further, in step S10711, 1 is added to the variation type counter CS, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value, it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the variation type counter CS is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 64. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S10709 that the predetermined time (4 msec) has elapsed since the start of the current normal process (S10709: YES), the process returns to step S10703 and each process from step S10703 to step S10708 is performed. Execute.

Note that since the execution time of each process from step S10703 to step S10708 changes depending on the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next normal process is not constant but fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the random number initial value counter CINI and the variation type counter CS using this remaining time, the values of these counters can be updated at random.

<Game time control processing>
Next, the game time control process will be explained. The game time control process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine of the normal process (FIG. 26: S10706).

FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing the game time control process. In step S10801, it is determined whether or not a special gaming state is in progress. Specifically, it is determined whether any of the opening period flag, opening/closing execution mode flag, and ending period flag in the various flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64 is ON. The opening period flag is turned ON at the start of the opening period and turned OFF at the end of the opening period. The opening/closing execution mode flag is turned ON when the gaming state is transferred to the opening/closing execution mode in the gaming state transition process described later, and is turned OFF when the opening/closing execution mode is ended in the gaming state transition process. The ending period flag is turned ON at the end of the opening/closing execution mode in the special game state (at the start of the ending period), and turned OFF at the end of the ending period.

If it is determined in step S10801 that any of the opening period flag, opening/closing execution mode flag, and ending period flag is ON (S10801: YES), it is determined that the special gaming state is in progress, and the processing from step S10802 onward is performed. The main game round control process is ended without executing any of them. That is, when the special game state is in progress, the game round will not be started regardless of whether or not a winning has occurred in the first starting hole 33 or the second starting hole 34. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S10801 that the special gaming state is not in progress (S10801: NO), the process advances to step S10802.

In step S10802, it is determined whether the main display section 45 is displaying a variable display. Specifically, it is determined whether either the first result display section 37a or the second result display section 37b is displaying a variable display. This determination is made by determining whether or not the variable display flag in the variable display flag storage area in the various flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64 is ON. The fluctuating display flag is turned ON when a fluctuating display is started for either the first result display section 37a or the second result display section 37b, and is turned OFF when the fluctuating display ends.

In step S10802, if it is determined that the main display section 45 is not in variable display (S10802: NO), the process advances to steps S10803 to S10805 for starting the game round. In step S10803, it is determined whether the total number of reservations CRN is "0". The case where the total reservation number CRN is "0" means that the number of startup reservations for both the first starting port 33 and the second starting port 34 is "0". Therefore, in step S10803, if it is determined that the total pending number CRN is "0" (S10803: YES), the main game round control process is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S10803 that the total pending number CRN is not "0" (S10803: NO), the process advances to step S10804.

In step S10804, data setting processing is executed to set the data stored in the first reservation area Ra or the second reservation area Rb to the state after the start of fluctuation, and the process advances to step S10805. Details of the data setting process will be described later.

In step S10805, a fluctuation start process for starting the fluctuation display on the main display section 45 and the fluctuation display on the symbol display device 41 is executed. Note that details of the fluctuation start process will be described later. After that, the process advances to step S10806.

In step S10806, the value of the number of games counter PNC is subtracted by 1. The number of games counter PNC is a counter for counting the number of games played in the high frequency support mode. After executing step S10806, the main game round control process is ended.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S10802 that the main display section 45 is displaying a variable display (S10802: YES), the processing for progressing the game round in steps S10807 to S10809 is executed.

In step S10807, it is determined whether the variable time of the current game round has elapsed. As mentioned above, the fluctuation time is the time from when the symbol row starts to fluctuate until all the symbol rows stop, and is a part of the unit game time. Specifically, in step S10807, it is determined whether the value of the fluctuation time information stored in the fluctuation time counter area (various counter areas 64f) of the RAM 64 has become "0". The value of the variable time information is set in a variable time setting process (FIG. 30) described later. The value of this set variable time information is subtracted by 1 each time the timer interrupt process is activated.

In step S10807, if it is determined that the fluctuation time has not elapsed (S10807: NO), the process advances to step S10808, and a fluctuation display process is executed. The variable display process is a process for changing the display mode on the result display section for the current game round. After executing step S10808, the game time control process ends.

In step S10807, if it is determined that the fluctuation time has elapsed (S10807: YES), the process advances to step S10809, and fluctuation end processing is executed. The variation end process changes the result display section so that the pattern to be displayed on the result display section determined in the variation start process (FIG. 29), which will be described later, is displayed on the result display section for the current game round. Control display. After executing step S10809, the main game round control process is ended.

<Data setting process>
Next, data setting processing will be explained. The data setting process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 27: S10804) of the game time control process.

FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing the data setting process. In step S10901, it is determined whether the holding area to which the data setting process is to be performed is the first holding area Ra. Specifically, the reservation information stored earliest among the reservation information chronologically stored in the first reservation area Ra (FIG. 5) (the reservation stored in the first area of the first reservation area Ra) information) is the earliest stored reservation information (stored in the first area of the second reservation area Rb) among the reservation information chronologically stored in the second reservation area Rb (FIG. 5). If it is stored in the reservation area before the reservation information (reservation information), it is determined that the reservation area to be processed is the first reservation area Ra. On the other hand, the earliest among the reservation information stored in the second reservation area Rb is the first among the reservation information stored in the second reservation area Rb in chronological order. If the stored reservation information is stored in the reservation area first, the reservation area to be processed is determined to be the second reservation area Rb. That is, by executing the process of step S10901, the reservation information can be processed in the order in which it is stored in the first reservation area Ra or the second reservation area Rb.

In step S10901, if it is determined that the processing target holding area is the first holding area Ra (step S10901: YES), data setting processing for the first holding area in steps S10902 to S10907 is executed. On the other hand, in step S10901, if it is determined that the processing target holding area is not the first holding area Ra, that is, if it is determined that the processing target holding area is the second holding area Rb (step S10901: NO ), the data setting process for the second reservation area in steps S10908 to S10913 is executed.

In step S10902, after the first starting reservation number RaN of the first reservation area Ra is subtracted by 1, the process proceeds to step S10903, and the total reservation number CRN is subtracted by 1. After that, the process advances to step S10904. In step S10904, the data stored in the first area of the first reservation area Ra is moved to the execution area AE. After that, the process advances to step S10905.

In step S10905, processing is performed to shift the data stored in the storage area of the first reservation area Ra. This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the first to fourth areas to the lower area side. Specifically, while clearing the data in the first area, the data in each area is shifted in the following order: second area → first area, third area → second area, fourth area → third area. After executing step S10905, the process advances to step S10906.

In step S10906, if the second result display section flag in the various flag storage area 64g is ON, the flag is turned OFF, and if it is not ON, that state is maintained. The second result display section flag is information for specifying whether the current variable display is to be started in the first result display section 37a or the second result display section 37b. After that, the process advances to step S10907.

In step S10907, a shift command is set. The shift command is a command that includes information for causing the audio emission control device 90, which is a sub-side control device, to recognize that the data in the holding area has been shifted. In this case, information is obtained from the command information storage area 63f of the ROM 63 that the holding area that is the target of the current data shift corresponds to the first holding area Ra, that is, it corresponds to the first starting port 33. A shift command that includes information that there is a shift command is selected, and the selected shift command is set as a command to be transmitted to the audio emission control device 90. Thereafter, the data setting process ends.

The shift command set in step S10907 is sent to the audio emission control device 90 in step S10703 in normal processing (FIG. 26). Based on the received shift command, the audio emission control device 90 sends a command to the display control device 100 to change the display in the first reservation display area Ds1 of the symbol display device 41 in accordance with the decrease in the number of reservations. do. The display control device 100 that has received the command changes the display in the first reservation display area Ds1 of the symbol display device 41 in accordance with the decrease in the number of reservations.

In step S10901, if it is determined that the processing target reservation area is not the first reservation area Ra, that is, if it is determined that the processing target reservation area is the second reservation area Rb (step S10901: NO), The process advances to step S10908.

In step S10908, the second start hold number RbN of the second hold area Rb is subtracted by 1. After that, the process advances to step S10909. In step S10909, the total pending number CRN is subtracted by 1, and the process proceeds to step S10910, in which the data stored in the first area of the second pending area Rb is moved to the execution area AE. After that, the process advances to step S10911.

In step S10911, processing is performed to shift the data stored in the storage area of the second reservation area Rb. This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the first to fourth areas to the lower area side. Specifically, while clearing the data in the first area, the data in each area is shifted in the following order: second area → first area, third area → second area, fourth area → third area. After executing step S10911, the process advances to step S10912.

In step S10912, if the second result display section flag in the various flag storage area 64g is not ON, the flag is turned ON, and if it is ON, that state is maintained. After that, the process advances to step S10913.

In step S10913, a shift command is set. The shift command is a command that includes information for causing the audio emission control device 90, which is a sub-side control device, to recognize that data in the holding area has been shifted. In this case, information is obtained from the command information storage area 63f of the ROM 63 that the holding area that is the target of the current data shift corresponds to the second holding area Rb, that is, it corresponds to the second starting port 34. A shift command that includes information that there is a shift command is selected, and the selected shift command is set as a command to be transmitted to the audio emission control device 90. After that, this data setting process ends.

The shift command set in step S10913 is sent to the audio emission control device 90 in step S10703 in normal processing (FIG. 26). Based on the received shift command, the audio emission control device 90 issues a command to the display control device 100 to change the display in the second reservation display area Ds2 of the symbol display device 41 in accordance with the decrease in the number of reservations. Send. The display control device 100 that has received the command changes the display in the second reservation display area Ds2 of the symbol display device 41 in accordance with the decrease in the number of reservations.

<Fluctuation start processing>
Next, the fluctuation start process will be explained. The fluctuation start process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 27: S10805) of the game time control process.

FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing the fluctuation start process. In step S11001, it is determined whether the win/fail lottery mode is the high probability mode. Specifically, it is determined whether the high probability mode flag in the various flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64 is ON. The high probability mode flag is a flag used by the MPU 62 to specify whether or not the win/fail lottery mode is the high probability mode. , and then it will be turned off if you win a regular jackpot. In step S11001, if it is determined that the mode is high probability mode (S11001: YES), the process advances to step S11002.

In step S11002, the validity determination is made with reference to the validity table for the high probability mode. Specifically, it is determined whether the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE matches the value set as a jackpot win in the high probability mode win/fail table shown in FIG. 6(b). Determine whether After that, the process advances to step S11004. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S11001 that the mode is not high probability mode (S11001: NO), the process advances to step S11003.

In step S11003, the validity determination is made with reference to the validity table for the low probability mode. Specifically, it is determined whether the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE matches the value set as a jackpot win in the low probability mode win/fail table shown in FIG. 6(a). Determine whether After that, the process advances to step S11004.

In step S11004, it is determined whether or not the result of the success/failure determination (big hit lottery) in step S11002 or step S11003 is a jackpot win. In step S11004, if the result of the judgment is a jackpot win (S11004: YES), in steps S11005 to S11012, processing for setting a gaming result and a stop result in the case of a jackpot win is performed. Execute the process.

In step S11005, it is determined whether the second result display section flag in the RAM 64 is ON. If it is determined in step S11005 that the second result display section flag is not ON (S11005: NO), the process advances to step S11006, and the distribution table for the first starting port (see FIG. 8(a)) is referred to. to make a distribution judgment. Specifically, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE is in the numerical range of 16R probability variable jackpot, the numerical range of 8R probability variable jackpot, the numerical range of 16R normal jackpot, or the numerical range of 8R normal jackpot. Determine whether it is included in

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S11005 that the second result display section flag is ON (S11005: YES), the process proceeds to step S11007, and the allocation table for the second starting port (see FIG. 8(b)) Make a distribution decision by referring to the . Specifically, it is determined whether the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE is included in the numerical range of 16R probability variable jackpot or the numerical range of 8R normal jackpot. After executing the process of step S11006 or step S11007. The process advances to step S11008.

In step S11008, it is determined whether the type of jackpot distributed in step S11006 or step S11007 is a variable probability jackpot. In step S11008, if it is determined that the game result is a variable jackpot (S11008: YES), the process advances to step S11009.

In step S11009, a stop result setting process for a probability variable jackpot is executed. The stop result setting process for a definite variable jackpot is a change with whichever stop result is displayed on the first result display section 37a or the second result display section 37b in the current game round in which you will win a fixed variable jackpot. This is a process for setting whether to end the display. Specifically, by referring to the stop result table for probability-variable jackpots stored in the stop result table storage area 63e, the address information of the stop result data corresponding to the type of jackpot distributed in step S11006 or step S11007 is obtained. The address information is stored in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 64. After executing step S11009, the process advances to step S11010.

In step S11010, a flag (jackpot type flag) corresponding to the type of jackpot distributed in step S11006 or step S11007 is turned ON. Specifically, if it is a 16R probability variable jackpot, the 16R probability variation flag is turned ON, and if it is an 8R probability variation jackpot, the 8R probability variation flag is turned ON. After that, the process advances to step S11016.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S11008 that the type of jackpot distributed in step S11006 or step S11007 is not a probability variable jackpot (S11008: NO), that is, if the type of jackpot distributed is a normal jackpot, step Proceed to S11011.

In step S11011, a stop result setting process for normal jackpot is executed. The normal jackpot stop result setting process means that in the current game round in which the normal jackpot is won, either the stop result is displayed on the first result display section 37a or the second result display section 37b. This is a process for setting whether to end the display. Specifically, by referring to the stop result table for normal jackpots stored in the stop result table storage area 63e, the address information of the stop result data corresponding to the type of jackpot distributed in step S11006 or step S11007 is obtained. The address information is stored in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 64. After executing step S11011, the process advances to step S11012.

In step S11012, a flag (jackpot type flag) corresponding to the type of jackpot distributed in step S11006 or step S11007 is turned ON. Specifically, if it is a 16R normal jackpot, the 16R normal flag is turned ON, and if it is an 8R normal jackpot, the 8R normal flag is turned ON. After that, the process advances to step S11016.

In step S11004, if the result of the jackpot lottery in step S11002 or step S11003 is not a jackpot (S11004: NO), the process advances to step S11013, and it is determined whether or not a reach occurs in the game round. Specifically, the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the execution area AE is the same as the value set as a reach occurrence in the reach determination table stored in the reach determination table storage area 63c. Determine whether or not it is correct.

In step S11013, if it is determined that reach occurs in the game round (S11013: YES), the process advances to step S11014.

In step S11014, stop result setting processing for reach is executed. This is a process for setting which stop result is displayed on the first result display section 37a or the second result display section 37b in the current game round, which is the stop result for reach, to end the variable display. be. Specifically, by referring to the stop result table for reach in the stop result table storage area 63e, the address information of the stop result data corresponding to the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the execution area AE is obtained. , and stores the address information in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 64. After executing step S11014, the process advances to step S11016.

In step S11013, if it is determined that reach does not occur in the game round (S11013: NO), the process advances to step S11015.

In step S11015, stop result setting processing for failure is executed. The stop result setting process for when the result is a loss is to end the variable display with either the stop result displayed on the first result display section 37a or the second result display section 37b in the current game round where the result is a loss. This is the process to set the Specifically, by referring to the stop result table for loss in the stop result table storage area 63e, address information of the stop result data corresponding to the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE is obtained. Then, the address information is stored in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 64. After executing step S11015, the process advances to step S11016.

In step S11016, variable time setting processing is executed. The variable time setting process is for setting the variable time, which is the time required for the current game round, in the first result display section 37a or the second result display section 37b, based on the presence or absence of a jackpot or the occurrence of a reach. This is the process. Details of the variable time setting process will be described later. After executing step S11016, the process advances to step S11017.

In step S11017, it is determined whether the second result display section flag in the RAM 64 is ON. In step S11017, if it is determined that the second result display section flag in the RAM 64 is not ON (S11017: NO), the process advances to step S11018, and a first variation command is set. The first variation command includes information indicating that the current game round is related to pending information acquired based on winnings in the first start opening 33, and whether or not a reach has occurred. information and information on the fluctuation time set in step S11016 are included.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S11017 that the second result display section flag is ON (S11017: YES), the process advances to step S11019, and a second variation command is set. The second variation command includes information indicating that the current game round is related to pending information acquired based on winnings in the second start opening 34, and whether or not a reach has occurred. information and information on the fluctuation time set in step S11016 are included. After executing step S11018 or step S11019, the process advances to step S11020.

In step S11020, a type command is set. The type command includes information on the presence or absence of a jackpot, the result of the distribution determination, and the presence or absence of a reach. In other words, the type command includes information on the type of jackpot, such as 16R probability variable jackpot information, 8R probability variable jackpot information, 16R normal jackpot information, 8R normal jackpot information, or information on the presence or absence of reach occurrence, and information on the loss result. Contains information.

The variation command and type command set in steps S11018 to S11020 are sent to the audio emission control device 90 in step S10703 in the normal process (FIG. 26). The audio emission control device 90 determines the content of the performance in the game round based on the received variation command and type command, and controls various devices so that the determined content of the performance is executed. After executing step S11020, the process advances to step S11021.

In step S11021, the result display section corresponding to the current game round of the first result display section 37a and the second result display section 37b starts displaying symbols in a variable manner. Specifically, if the second result display section flag in the RAM 64 is not ON, the first result display section 37a is identified as the result display section corresponding to the current game round, and variable display is started; When the second result display section flag is ON, the second result display section 37b is specified as the result display section corresponding to the current game round, and variable display is started. After executing step S11021, this fluctuation start process ends.

<Variable time setting process>
Next, the process of setting the variable time will be explained. The fluctuation time setting process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the fluctuation start process (FIG. 29: S11016).

FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing the variable time setting process. In step S11101, the value of the variation type counter CS stored in the execution area AE is acquired. After that, the process advances to step S11102.

In step S11102, it is determined whether or not the jackpot lottery for the current game round is a win. Specifically, it is determined whether the probability variable jackpot flag or the normal jackpot flag in the RAM 64 is ON, and if either flag is ON (S11102: YES), the process advances to step S11103.

In step S11103, with reference to the variable time table for jackpot stored in the variable time table storage area 63d of the ROM 63, variable time information corresponding to the value of the current variable type counter CS is obtained. Thereafter, the process advances to step S11107, and the acquired variable time information is set in the variable time counter area provided in the various counter areas 64f of the RAM 64. Thereafter, the variable time setting process ends.

In step S11102, if it is determined that the jackpot lottery related to the current game round is not a win (S11102: NO), the process proceeds to step S11104, and it is determined whether or not a reach occurs in the current game round. Since this process (S11104) is executed when the jackpot lottery related to the current game round has not been won in step S11102, in step S11104, a reach occurs among the game rounds that have not won the jackpot lottery. It is determined whether or not it is a game time. Specifically, when the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the execution area AE is a value corresponding to the occurrence of a reach, it is determined that a reach occurs (S11104: YES), and the process proceeds to step S11105. In addition, when specifying the presence or absence of the occurrence of a reach using the value of the reach random number counter C3, the reach determination table stored in the reach determination table storage area of the ROM 63 is referred to.

In step S11105, the variable time table for reach generation stored in the variable time table storage area 63d of the ROM 63 is referred to to obtain variable time information corresponding to the value of the current variable type counter CS. In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, the fluctuation time for generating a reach is constant. Thereafter, the process advances to step S11107, and the acquired variable time information is set in the variable time counter area provided in the various counter areas 64f of the RAM 64. Thereafter, the variable time setting process ends.

In step S11104, if it is determined that reach does not occur in the current game round (S11104: NO), the process advances to step S11106, and the variable time table for non-reach occurrence stored in the variable time table storage area 63d is referred to. Then, the fluctuation time corresponding to the current value of the fluctuation type counter CS is obtained. Thereafter, the process advances to step S11107, and the acquired variable time information is set in the variable time counter area provided in the various counter areas 64d of the RAM 64. Thereafter, the variable time setting process ends.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the fluctuation time information stored in the fluctuation time table shows that the larger the values of the first start hold number RaN and the second start hold number RbN, the longer the change time becomes. It is set to be short. In other words, even if the value of the fluctuation type counter CS is the same, the data of the fluctuation time table to be referenced depends on the values of the first starting pending number RaN and the second starting pending number RbN when determining the varying time of the relevant game round. are different.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the variation time information stored in the variation time table is set such that the larger the values of the first start pending number RaN and the second start pending number RbN, the shorter the variation time. However, for example, the larger the value of the total pending number CRN, the shorter the fluctuation time may be. Further, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, a configuration may be adopted that does not depend on the total number of reservations CRN, and the fluctuation time may be set to be shorter as the total number of reservations CRN is smaller. In addition, when the second starting pending number RbN is "0", the larger the first starting pending number RaN is, the shorter the fluctuation time is, and when the second starting pending number RbN is "1" or more, may be set such that the larger the second start pending number RbN, the shorter the fluctuation time. In addition, when the second starting pending number RbN is "0", the larger the first starting pending number RaN, the longer the fluctuation time, and when the second starting pending number RbN is "1" or more. may be set such that the larger the number of second start-up reservations RbN is, the longer the fluctuation time is, or it may be set to be constant regardless of the respective reservation numbers RaN and RbN.

In addition, in a situation where the support mode is high-frequency support mode, compared to a situation where the support mode is low-frequency support mode, when the number of pending information is the same, a shorter variation time is selected so that no reach occurs. A variable time table may also be set. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the selected variation times may be the same, or the above relationship may be reversed.

Furthermore, the above configuration may be applied to the fluctuation time when a reach occurs, and the fluctuation time that is likely to be selected and the fluctuation time that is difficult to be selected may be different when winning a jackpot and when winning a reach. good. Further, a variable time table for a variable probability jackpot, a variable time table for a normal jackpot, a variable time table for a missed reach, and a variable time table for a complete miss may each be set individually.

<Game state transition processing>
Next, the game state transition process will be explained. The game state transition process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine of the normal process (FIG. 26: S10707).

FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing the gaming state transition process. In step S11201, it is determined whether the ending period flag is ON. The ending period flag is turned ON at the end of the opening/closing execution mode in the special game state (at the start of the ending period), and turned OFF at the end of the ending period. The ending period is a period for executing the ending performance in the special game state.

In step S11201, if it is determined that the ending period flag is not ON (S11201: NO), the process advances to step S11202, and it is determined whether the opening/closing execution mode flag is ON. As described above, the opening/closing execution mode flag is turned ON when the gaming state is transferred to the opening/closing execution mode, and is turned OFF when the opening/closing execution mode is ended.

In step S11202, if it is determined that the opening/closing execution mode flag is not ON (S11202: NO), the process proceeds to step S11203, and it is determined whether the opening period flag is ON. The opening period flag is turned ON at the start of the opening period and turned OFF at the end of the opening period.

In step S11203, if it is determined that the opening period flag is not ON (S11203: NO), the process advances to step S11204, and the timing at which the fluctuating display of symbols in the first result display section 37a or the second result display section 37b ends Determine whether or not. In step S11204, if it is determined that it is not the timing at which the variable display has ended (S11204: NO), the main game state transition process is ended as it is.

In step S11204, if it is determined that it is the timing at which the variable display has ended (S11204: YES), the process advances to step S11205, and the game result of the current game round (result of the jackpot lottery) is changed to the opening/closing execution mode. Determine whether it is compatible. Specifically, it is determined whether any of the 16R variable probability flag, 8R variable probability flag, 16R normal flag, and 8R normal flag in the RAM 64 is ON. If it is determined that none of the above flags is ON (S11205: NO), the main gaming state transition process is ended.

In step S11205, if it is determined that the game result of the current game round (result of the jackpot lottery) corresponds to the transition to the opening/closing execution mode (S11205: YES), the process advances to step S11206, and the high probability mode Turn off the flag. After that, the process advances to step S11207.

In step S11207, opening time setting processing is executed. The opening time setting process is a process for setting the temporal length of the opening period (hereinafter also referred to as opening time) in the special gaming state. In this embodiment, an opening time of the same constant length is set in each opening period. Specifically, "3000" (ie, 6 seconds) is set in the third timer counter area T3 that determines the opening time. Note that the third timer counter area T3 is provided in the various counter areas 64f of the RAM 64. After executing step S11207, the process advances to step S11208.

In step S11208, an opening command is set. The set opening command is sent to the audio emission control device 90 in step S10703 in the normal process (FIG. 26). This opening command includes information on the set opening time and the number of rounds in the current opening/closing execution mode. The audio emission control device 90 determines the contents of the performance corresponding to the opening time and opening/closing execution mode based on the received opening command, and controls various devices so that the determined contents are executed. After executing step S11208, the process advances to step S11209 and the opening period flag is turned ON. After that, the main game state transition process is ended.

If it is determined in step S11203 that the opening period flag is ON (S11203: YES), the process advances to step S11210.

In step S11210, it is determined whether the opening period has ended. Specifically, it is determined whether the value of the third timer counter area T3 is "0". In step S11210, if it is determined that the opening period has ended (S11210: YES), the process advances to step S11211 and the opening period flag is turned OFF. After that, the process advances to step S11212.

In step S11212, a round display start process is executed to notify the type of the current opening/closing execution mode. Specifically, the address information stored in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 64 is checked. Then, based on the confirmed address information, the stop result data corresponding to the address information is specified from among the stop result data group stored in the ROM 63, and the content of the number of rounds is determined from the specified stop result data. confirm. Thereafter, the content of the confirmed number of rounds is output to the round display section 39 in the main display section 45. As a result, the round display section 39 displays information on the round related to the above output. After executing step S11212, the process advances to step S11213.

In step S11213, the number of rounds in the current opening/closing execution mode is determined. Specifically, the jackpot type flags (16R probability variable flag, 8R probability variable flag, 16R normal flag, 8R normal flag) stored in the RAM 64 are checked. In step S11213, if it is determined that the jackpot type flag stored in the RAM 64 is the 16R probability variable flag or the 16R normal flag (S11213: YES), the process advances to step S11214, and the jackpot type flag stored in the RAM 64 is set in the various counter areas 64f. Set "16" in the first round counter area RC1. The first round counter area RC1 is a counter area for counting the number of times the opening/closing door 36b is opened.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S11213 that the jackpot type flag stored in the RAM 64 is the 8R probability variable flag or the 8R normal flag (S11213: NO), the process advances to step S11215, and the jackpot type flag stored in the RAM 64 is set in the various counter areas 64d. "8" is set in the first round counter area RC1. After executing step S11214 or step S11215, the process advances to step S11216.

In step S11216, the opening/closing execution mode flag is turned ON. After that, the main game state transition process is ended.

In step S11202, if it is determined that the opening/closing execution mode flag is ON (S11202: YES), the process proceeds to step S11217, and the big winning opening opening/closing process is executed. Specifically, when the grand prize opening 36a is closed, the variable prize driving section 36c is brought into the driving state on the condition that the first round counter area RC1 is "1" or more, thereby winning the grand prize. The mouth 36a is opened. In addition, when the big winning opening 36a is open, the variable winning drive unit 36c is stopped, and the big prize opening 36a is closed. Details of the opening/closing process of the grand prize opening will be described later. After executing step S11217, the process advances to step S11218.

In step S11218, it is determined whether the value of the first round counter area RC1 is "0". If it is determined that the value of the first round counter area RC1 is not "0" (S11219: NO), the main game state transition process is immediately ended. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the first round counter area RC1 is "0" (S11218: YES), the process advances to step S11219, and the opening/closing execution mode flag is turned OFF. After executing step S11219, the process advances to step S11220.

In step S11220, round display termination processing is executed. In this process, display control of the round display section 39 in the main display section 45 is ended so that the round display section 39 is turned off. After executing step S11220, the process advances to step S11221.

In step S11221, ending time setting processing is executed. The ending time setting process is a process for setting the temporal length of the ending period in the special game state (hereinafter also referred to as ending time). In this embodiment, the same fixed length of ending time is set for each ending period. Specifically, "3000" (ie, 6 seconds) is set in the fourth timer counter area T4 that determines the ending time. Note that the fourth timer counter area T4 is provided in the various counter areas 64f of the RAM 64. After executing step S11221, the process advances to step S11222.

In step S11222, an ending command is set. This set ending command is sent to the audio emission control device 90 in step S10603 in the normal process (FIG. 26). The audio light emission control device 90 ends the performance corresponding to the opening/closing execution mode based on receiving the ending command. After executing step S11222, the process advances to step S11223.

In step S11223, the ending period flag is turned on. After that, the main game state transition process is ended.

In step S11201, if it is determined that the ending period flag is ON (S11201: YES), the process advances to step S11224.

In step S11224, it is determined whether the ending period has ended. Specifically, in the ending time setting process (S11223), it is determined whether the value of the fourth timer counter area T4 set as the ending time is "0". In step S11224, if it is determined that the value of the fourth timer counter area T4 set as the ending time is "0" (S11224: YES), the process advances to step S11225.

In step S11225, the ending period flag is turned OFF. After that, the process advances to step S11226, and transition processing at the end of the ending period is executed. The transition process at the end of the ending period is a process for setting various modes for the game after the current ending period ends. Details of the transition process at the end of the ending period will be described later. After executing step S11226, the main gaming state transition process is ended.

On the other hand, in step S11224, if it is determined that the value of the fourth timer counter area T4 set as the ending time is not "0" (S11224: NO), the main game state transition process is ended.

<Big prize opening opening/closing process>
Next, the big winning opening opening/closing process will be explained. The grand prize opening/closing process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 31: 11217) of the gaming state transition process.

FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing the big winning opening opening/closing process. In step S11301, it is determined whether or not the big prize opening 36a is being opened. Specifically, the determination is made based on the driving state of the variable prize winning driving section 36c. In step S11301, if it is determined that the big prize opening 36a is not open (S11301: NO), the process proceeds to step S11302, and it is determined whether the value of the first round counter area RC1 is "0". In step S11302, if it is determined that the value of the first round counter area RC1 is "0" (S11302: YES), the main winning opening opening/closing process is directly ended. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S11302 that the value of the first round counter area RC1 is not "0" (S11302: NO), the process advances to step S11303.

In step S11303, it is determined whether the value of the first timer counter area T1 provided in the various counter areas 64d of the RAM 64 is "0". In this case, the first timer counter area T1 is used as a parameter for measuring the closing duration of the big prize opening 36a. In step S11303, if it is determined that the value of the first timer counter area T1 is not "0" (S11303: NO), the main prize opening opening/closing process is directly ended. On the other hand, in step S11303, if it is determined that the value of the first timer counter area T1 is "0" (S11303: YES), the process proceeds to step S11304, and the variable winning drive unit 36c is in a driving state. After that, the process advances to step S11305.

In step S11305, setting processing for each round is executed. In the case of the pachinko machine 10 in this embodiment, all the set winning modes are high-frequency winning modes, so "15000" (that is, 30 sec) is set in the first timer counter area T1. Furthermore, in order to count the number of winnings of game balls into the big winning opening 36a, "10" is set in the winning counter area PC provided in the various counter areas 64d of the RAM 64. The count value set in the first timer counter area T1 is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process is activated, that is, every 2 msec. If the pachinko machine 10 is set to the low-frequency winning mode, for example, "100" (i.e., 0.2 seconds) is set in the first timer counter area T1, and "6" is set in the winning counter area PC. ” may be set. After executing step S11305, the process advances to step S11306.

In step S11306, a release command is set. After that, the main prize opening opening/closing process ends. The opening command is a command that includes information for making the audio emission control device 90 and the display control device 100, which are sub-side control devices, recognize that the opening of the big prize opening 36a has started, and is a command that includes information for making the audio emission control device 90 and display control device 100, which are sub-side control devices, recognize that the opening of the big prize opening 36a has started. It is transmitted to the audio emission control device 90 through external output processing (FIG. 26: Step S10703). Based on the received opening command, the audio emission control device 90 specifies that the opening of the grand prize opening 36a for one round has started, and also controls the content of the performance on the various lamps 47 and the speaker 46 to open the grand prize opening 36a. The contents are updated to correspond to the fact that the opening of the site has started. Further, the audio emission control device 90 transmits the above-mentioned release command to the display control device 100 while maintaining its information format. Based on the received opening command, the display control device 100 specifies that the opening of the big winning hole 36a for one round has started, and also changes the presentation content on the symbol display device 41 to indicate that the opening of the big winning hole 36a has started. Update the content to correspond to what has started.

In step S11301, if it is determined that the big prize opening 36a is open (step S11301: YES), the process advances to step S11307, and it is determined whether the value of the first timer counter area T1 is "0" or not. do. In this case, the first timer counter area T1 is used as a parameter for measuring the opening duration of the big prize opening 36a. If it is determined in step S11307 that the value of the first timer counter area T1 is not "0" (S11307: NO), the process advances to step S11308.

In step S11308, it is determined based on the detection state of the detection sensor corresponding to the variable winning device 36 whether or not a game ball has won in the big winning hole 36a. In step S11308, if it is determined that no winning has occurred (S11308: NO), the main winning opening opening/closing process is directly ended. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S11308 that a winning has occurred (S11308: YES), the process advances to step S11309, and the value of the winning counter area PC is subtracted by 1. After that, the process advances to step S11310.

In step S11310, it is determined whether the value of the winning counter area PC is "0". In step S11310, if it is determined that the value of the winning counter area PC is not "0" (S11310: NO), the main winning opening opening/closing process is directly ended.

If it is determined in step S11307 that the value of the first timer counter area T1 is "0" (S11307: YES), or if it is determined that the value of the prize winning counter area PC is "0" in step S11310 (S11310: YES), the process proceeds to step S11311 and executes the big winning opening closing process. Specifically, in order to close the big winning a prize opening 36a, the variable winning a prize driving section 36c is brought into a non-driving state. After that, the process advances to step S11312.

In step S11312, the value of the first round counter area RC1 is subtracted by 1. Thereafter, the process advances to step S11313, and it is determined whether the value of the first round counter area RC1 is "0". In step S11313, if it is determined that the value of the first round counter area RC1 is "0" (S11313: YES), the main winning opening opening/closing process is directly ended. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S11313 that the value of the first round counter area RC1 is not "0" (S11313: NO), "1000" (ie, 2 seconds) is set in the first timer counter area T1. In this case, the first timer counter area T1 is used as a parameter for measuring the closing duration of the big prize opening 36a. After executing step S11314, the process advances to step S11315 and a closing command is set. After that, the big winning opening opening/closing process ends.

This set closing command is a command that includes information for making the audio emission control device 90 and the display control device 100, which are sub-side control devices, recognize that the opening of the big prize opening 36a has been completed, and is a command that includes information for making the audio emission control device 90 and the display control device 100, which are sub-side control devices, recognize that the opening of the big prize opening 36a has been completed. In the external output process (FIG. 26: Step S10703), the signal is transmitted to the audio emission control device 90. Based on the received closing command, the audio emission control device 90 specifies that the opening of the grand prize opening 36a for one round has been completed, and also changes the presentation content on the various lamps 47 and the speaker 46 to the grand prize opening 36a. The content is updated to correspond to the completion of release. Further, the audio light emission control device 90 transmits the closing command to the display control device 100 while maintaining its information format. Based on the received closing command, the display control device 100 specifies that the opening of the grand prize opening 36a for one round has ended, and also indicates the performance content on the symbol display device 41 as follows: Update the content to correspond to what happened.

<Transition processing at the end of the ending period>
Next, the transition process at the end of the ending period will be explained. The transition process at the end of the ending period is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine of the gaming state transition process (FIG. 31: S11226).

FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing the transition process at the end of the ending period. In step S11401, it is determined whether or not a flag corresponding to a variable probability jackpot is set in the RAM 64 as a jackpot type flag. That is, it is determined whether the 16R probability variation flag or the 8R probability variation flag in the RAM 64 is ON.

In step S11401, if it is determined that the 16R variable probability flag or the 8R variable probability flag in the RAM 64 is ON (S11401: YES), the process proceeds to step S11402, and flag deletion processing is executed. Specifically, if the 16R definite variable flag, 8R definite variable flag, 16 normal flag, 8R normal flag, and high frequency support mode flag are ON, they are turned OFF, and if they are not ON, the state is maintained. . After executing step S11402, the process advances to step S11403.

In step S11403, the high probability mode flag is turned on, and then the process advances to step S11404, where the high frequency support mode flag is turned on. As a result, after the opening/closing execution mode is ended, a transition is made to a gaming state in which the win/fail lottery mode is a high probability mode and the support mode is a high frequency support mode. Note that these high probability modes and high frequency support modes are maintained at least until the next jackpot win occurs. After that, the process advances to step S11405.

In step S11405, a game number counter PNC provided in the various counter areas 64d of the RAM 64 is set to 100. The value set in the number of games counter PNC is a value indicating the number of games played when the high frequency support mode is executed with a limited number of games played. After that, the process advances to step S11406.

In step S11406, a high probability mode command, which is a command including information for making the sub-side control device recognize that the win/fail lottery mode is a high probability mode, is set as a command to be transmitted to the audio emission control device 90. do. After that, the process advances to step S11410.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S11401 that the 16R normal flag or 8R normal flag is ON in the RAM 64 (S11401: NO), the process advances to step S11407 and flag deletion processing is executed. Specifically, if the 16R definite variable flag, 8R definite variable flag, 16 normal flag, 8R normal flag, and high frequency support mode flag are ON, they are turned OFF, and if they are not ON, the state is maintained. . After that, the process advances to step S11408.

In step S11408, after turning on the high-frequency support mode flag, the process proceeds to step S11409, and 100 is set in the game number counter PNC provided in the various counter areas 64d of the RAM 64. After that, the process advances to step S11410.

In step S11410, a high-frequency support mode command, which is a command that includes information for making the sub-side control device recognize that the support mode is the high-frequency support mode, is sent as a command to be transmitted to the audio emission control device 90. Set. Thereafter, the transition process at the end of the ending period ends.

<Processing for electric support>
Next, the processing for electric support will be explained. The electric support support process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the normal process (FIG. 26: S10708).

FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing the electric support support process. In step S11501, it is determined whether it is supported. Specifically, it is determined whether the supported flag in the various flag storage area 64e of the RAM 64 is ON. The support flag is a flag that is turned ON when the electric accessory 34a of the second starting port 34 is brought into the open state, and turned OFF when the electric accessory 34a of the second starting port 34 is returned to the closed state. If it is determined in step S11501 that the supported flag is not ON (S11501: NO), the process advances to step S11502.

In step S11502, it is determined whether the support winning flag in the various flag storage area 64e of the RAM 64 is ON. The support winning flag is a flag that is turned ON when the open state is won in the electric accessory opening lottery to determine whether or not to open the electric accessory 34a, and is turned OFF when the supporting flag is ON. It is. In step S11502, if it is determined that the support winning flag is not ON (S11502: NO), the process advances to step S11503.

In step S11503, it is determined whether the value of the second timer counter area T2 provided in the various counter areas 64d of the RAM 64 is "0". In this case, the second timer counter area T2 is used as a parameter for measuring the fluctuation time of the general map unit 38. The count value set in the second timer counter area T2 is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process is activated, that is, every 2 msec.

In step S11503, if it is determined that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is not "0" (S11503: NO), this electronic role support process is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is "0" (S11503: YES), the process advances to step S11504.

In step S11504, it is determined whether or not it is the end timing of the fluctuating display of symbols in the common symbol unit 38. In step S11504, if it is determined that it is the end timing of the variable display (S11504: YES), the process advances to step S11505, sets the out-of-line display, and then ends the main electric role support process. By setting the missing display, the fluctuating display of the symbols in the regular pattern unit 38 is ended with the missing display being stopped and displayed. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S11504 that it is not the end timing of the variable display (S11504: NO), the process advances to step S11506.

In step S11506, it is determined whether the value of the number of reserved accessory objects SN is greater than "0". In step S11506, if it is determined that the value of the number of reserved accessories SN is "0" (S11506: NO), this electronic role support process is directly ended. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S11506 that the value of the number of reserved accessories SN is greater than "0" (S11506: YES), the process advances to step S11507.

In step S11507, it is determined whether or not the opening/closing execution mode is in progress, and then the process proceeds to step S11508, in which it is determined whether or not the high-frequency support mode is in progress. If it is not the opening/closing execution mode in step S11507 (S11507: NO), and if it is the high-frequency support mode in step S11508 (S11508: YES), the process advances to step S11509, and an electric accessory opening lottery is performed. Specifically, when the value stored in the electric accessory holding area 64c is shifted and the value of the electric accessory opening counter C4 shifted to the execution area is 0 to 461, the electric accessory opening lottery is entered. The winner is the winner (see Figure 9(b)). Further, at the same time as the electric accessory opening lottery, "750" (ie, 1.5 sec) is set in the second timer counter area T2. The second timer counter area T2 is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process is activated. After that, the process advances to step S11510.

In step S11510, it is determined whether the result of the electric accessory opening lottery in step S11509 is a support win. In step S11510, if it is determined that the result of the electric accessory opening lottery is a support win (S11510: YES), the process advances to step S11511, where the support win flag is turned ON and the support win flag is set in the various counter areas 64d of the RAM 64. "3" is set in the second round counter area RC2. The second round counter area RC2 is a counter area for counting the number of times the electric accessory 34a is released. After that, the process advances to step S11512. On the other hand, in step S11510, if it is determined that the result of the electric accessory opening lottery is not a support win (S11510: NO), the process proceeds to step S11512 without executing the process of step S11511.

In step S11512, it is determined whether the win/fail lottery mode is the low probability mode. In step S11512, if it is determined that the win/fail lottery mode is the low probability mode (S11512: YES), the process advances to step S11513. On the other hand, in step S11512, if it is determined that the win/fail lottery mode is not the low probability mode (S11512: NO), the main electronic win support process is ended.

In step S11513, it is determined whether the number of games counter area is "0". The number of games counter is decremented by 1 each time one game is completed in the low probability mode and the high frequency support mode. In step S11513, if it is determined that the number of games counter area is not "0" (S11513: NO), this electronic role support process is directly ended. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S11513 that the number of games counter area is "0", the process advances to step S11514 and the high frequency support mode flag is turned OFF. After that, the process advances to step S11515.

In step S11515, a low-frequency support command, which is a command that includes information for making the sub-side control device recognize that the support mode is the low-frequency support mode, is set as a command to be transmitted to the audio emission control device 90. do. After that, the electric support support process ends.

The low frequency support command set in step S11515 is transmitted to the audio emission control device 90 in the external output process (FIG. 26: step S10703) of the normal process. The audio emission control device 90 specifies that the support mode is the low-frequency support mode based on receiving the low-frequency support command, and executes processing corresponding to the low-frequency support mode.

If it is determined that the opening/closing execution mode is in step S11507 (S11507: YES), or if it is determined that it is not the high-frequency support mode in step S11518 (S11508: NO), the process advances to step S11516, and the electric accessory opening lottery I do. Specifically, when the value stored in the electric accessory holding area 64c is shifted and the value of the electric accessory opening counter C4 shifted to the execution area is 0 to 190, the electric accessory opening lottery is entered. Will be elected. Furthermore, "14750" (ie, 29.5 seconds) is set in the second timer counter area T2 at the same time as the electric accessory opening lottery. After that, the process advances to step S11517.

In step S11517, it is determined whether the result of the electric accessory opening lottery in step S11516 is a support win. In step S11517, if it is determined that the support has not been won (S11517: NO), the main electric role support process is directly ended. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S11517 that support has been won (S11517: YES), the process proceeds to step S11518, where the support win flag is turned ON, and after setting "1" in the second round counter area RC2, , ends this electronic support process.

In step S11502, if it is determined that the support winning flag is ON (S11502: YES), the process advances to step S11519, and it is determined whether the value of the second timer counter area T2 is "0". In this case, the second timer counter area T2 is used as a parameter for measuring the fluctuation time of the general map unit 38. In step S11519, if it is determined that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is not "0" (S11519: NO), since the symbol is being displayed in a fluctuating manner in the general drawing unit 38, the main electric role support processing is performed as it is. end. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S11519 that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is "0" (S11519: YES), the process advances to step S11520.

In step S11520, a winning display is set. As a result, the fluctuating display of the symbols in the normal pattern unit 38 is ended with the win display being stopped and displayed. Thereafter, the process advances to step S11521, where the supporting flag is turned on and the support winning flag is turned off. Thereafter, the main power support process is ended.

In step S11501, if it is determined that the support flag is ON (S11501: YES), the process advances to step S11522, and an electric utility opening/closing control process for controlling opening/closing of the electric accessory 34a is executed. Thereafter, the main power support process is ended.

<Electric opening/closing control processing>
Next, the power opening/closing control process will be explained. The power opening/closing control process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the power support process (FIG. 34: S11522).

FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing the power opening/closing control process. In step S11601, it is determined whether the electric accessory 34a is open. Whether or not the electric accessory 34a is open is determined by whether or not the electric accessory drive section 34b is in a driving state. If it is determined that the electric accessory 34a is open (S11601: YES), the process advances to step S11602.

In step S11602, it is determined whether the value of the second timer counter area T2 is "0". In this case, the second timer counter area T2 is used as a parameter for measuring the open duration time of the electric accessory 34a. In step S11602, if it is determined that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is not "0" (S11602: NO), the main power switch opening/closing control process is ended. That is, if the opening duration time of the electric accessory 34a has not ended, the electric accessory opening/closing control process ends.

In step S11602, if it is determined that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is "0" (S11602: YES), the process proceeds to step S11603, where a closing process is performed to control the electric accessory 34a to a closed state, "250" (ie, 0.5 sec) is set in the second timer counter area T2. That is, when the second timer counter area T2 as a means for measuring the open duration time of the electric accessory 34a is "0", the electric accessory 34a is closed and the second timer counter area T2 is turned on. It is used as a parameter for measuring the closing duration time of the accessory 34a, and "250" is set in the second timer counter area T2. After executing step S11603, the process advances to step S11604.

In step S11604, after subtracting 1 from the value of the second round counter area RC2, the process proceeds to step S11605, and it is determined whether the value of the second round counter area RC2 is "0". In step S11605, if it is determined that the value of the second round counter area RC2 is not "0" (S11605: NO), the present electric role opening/closing control process is directly ended. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S11605 that the value of the second round counter area RC2 is "0" (S11605: YES), the process advances to step S11606 and the support flag is turned OFF. After that, the main power switch opening/closing control process ends.

In step S11601, if it is determined that the electric accessory 34a is not open (S11601: NO), the process advances to step S11607, and it is determined whether the second timer counter area T2 is "0". In this case, the second timer counter area T2 is used as a parameter for measuring the closing duration of the electric accessory 34a. In step S11607, if it is determined that the second timer counter area T2 is not "0" (S11607: NO), the main power opening/closing control process is ended. On the other hand, in step S11507, if it is determined that the second timer counter area T2 is "0" (S11607: YES), the process advances to step S11608, and an opening process is executed to control the electric accessory 34a to an open state. . After that, the process advances to step S11609.

In step S11609, it is determined whether or not the opening/closing execution mode is in progress. If it is determined that the opening/closing execution mode is not in progress (S11609: NO), the process proceeds to step S11610, and it is determined whether or not the opening/closing execution mode is in the high frequency support mode. do.

In step S11610, if it is determined that the high-frequency support mode is in effect (S11610: YES), the process advances to step S11611, and "800" (ie, 1.6 sec) is set in the second timer counter area T2. After that, the main power switch opening/closing control process ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S11609 that the opening/closing execution mode is selected (S11609: YES), or if it is determined that the high frequency support mode is not selected in step S11610 (S11610: NO), the process advances to step S11612, and the second Set "100" (ie, 0.2 sec) in the timer counter area T2. After that, the main power switch opening/closing control process ends.

A5. Electrical configuration of the audio emission control device and display control device:
Next, the electrical configurations of the audio emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 will be explained.

FIG. 36 is a block diagram mainly showing the electrical configurations of the audio emission control device 90 and the display control device 100. Note that some components such as the power supply device 85 are omitted. An MPU 92 is mounted on a sound light emission control board 91 provided in the sound light emission control device 90 . The MPU 92 is an element that includes a ROM 93, a RAM 94, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input/output circuit, and the like.

The ROM 93 stores various control programs executed by the MPU 92, fixed value data, tables, and the like. For example, a part of the ROM 93 is provided with a performance pattern table storage area 93a, a variable display pattern table storage area 93b, and the like.

The RAM 94 is a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when executing the control program stored in the ROM 93. For example, a part of the area of the RAM 94 is provided with various jackpot flag storage areas 94a, various counter areas 94b, lottery counter areas 94c, and the like. Note that it is not essential that the ROM 93 and RAM 94 are integrated into one chip for the MPU 92, and each may be integrated into separate chips.

The MPU 92 is provided with an input port and an output port, respectively. The main controller 60 is connected to the input side of the MPU 92 . Various commands are received from the main controller 60. The output side of the MPU 92 is connected to the production operation button 24, the speaker 46, and various lamps 47, as well as the display control device 100.

A display control board 101 provided in the display control device 100 includes an MPU 102 which is an element in which a program ROM 103 and a work RAM 104 are combined into a chip, a video display processor (VDP) 105, a character ROM 106, and a video RAM 107. is installed. Note that it is not essential that the program ROM 103 and work RAM 104 are integrated into one chip for the MPU 102, and each may be integrated into separate chips.

The MPU 102 analyzes various commands received from the audio emission control device 90 or performs predetermined arithmetic processing based on the received various commands to control the VDP 105 (specifically, generate internal commands for the VDP 105). .

The program ROM 103 is a memory for storing various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 102, and also stores JPEG format image data for a background image.

The work RAM 104 is a memory for temporarily storing work data, flags, etc. used when the MPU 102 executes various programs.

The VDP 105 is a type of drawing circuit, and directly operates an image processing device as a liquid crystal display driver built into the symbol display device 41. The VDP 105 is also called a "drawing chip" because it is implemented as an IC chip, and is a type of microcomputer chip containing firmware dedicated to drawing processing. The VDP 105 adjusts the timing of each of the MPU 102, the video RAM 107, etc. and intervenes in reading and writing data, and also reads image data to be stored in the video RAM 107 from the character ROM 106 at a predetermined timing and displays it on the symbol display device 41.

The character ROM 106 serves as an image data library for storing character data such as symbols displayed on the symbol display device 41. This character ROM 106 stores bitmap format image data of various display symbols, a color palette table that is referred to when determining the expression color of each dot of the bitmap image, and the like. It is also possible to provide a plurality of character ROMs 106 and store image data and the like in each character ROM 106. Further, it is also possible to have a configuration in which the JPEG format image data for the background image stored in the program ROM 103 is stored in the character ROM 106.

The video RAM 107 is a memory for storing display data to be displayed on the symbol display device 41, and by rewriting the contents of the video RAM 107, the display contents of the symbol display device 41 are changed.

Hereinafter, the MPU 62, ROM 63, and RAM 64 of the main control device 60 are also referred to as the main side MPU 62, main side ROM 63, and main side RAM 64, respectively, and the MPU 92, ROM 93, and RAM 94 of the audio/light emission control device 90 are referred to as the sound-light side MPU 92 and the sound-light side MPU 92, respectively. The ROM 93 is also called the audio/light side RAM 94, and the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 is also called the display side MPU 102.

A6. Various processes executed in the audio emission control device and display control device:
<Timer interrupt processing>
First, the timer interrupt process executed by the audio-optical side MPU 92 will be described.

FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing executed in the audio-optical side MPU 92. The timer interrupt process is repeatedly executed at a relatively short cycle (for example, 2 msec). The processing of each step executed in the timer interrupt processing will be described below.

In step S11701, command storage processing is executed. The command storage process is a process for storing the received command in the sound/light side RAM 94 when a command is received from the main side MPU 62 . The sound/light side RAM 94 is provided with a ring buffer to enable storage and reading of commands received from the main side MPU 62, and the commands received from the main side MPU 62 are sequentially stored in the ring buffer and , are sequentially read out according to the stored order. After executing step S11701, the process advances to step S11702.

In step S11702, command corresponding processing is executed. The command corresponding process is a process executed in response to a command received from the main MPU 62. Details of the command corresponding processing will be described later. After executing step S11702, the process advances to step S11703.

In step S11703, point awarding performance execution processing is executed. The point award performance execution process is a process for executing various processes related to the point award performance during execution of a game round. Details of the point awarding performance execution process will be described later. After executing step S11703, the process advances to step S11704.

In step S11704, light emission control processing for controlling light emission of various lamps 47 is executed. In the light emission control process, the light emission control of the various lamps 47 is performed based on the light emission data read out in the command corresponding process of step S11702 and the point giving performance execution process of step S4703. After executing step S11704, the process advances to step S11705.

In step S11705, audio output control processing for controlling the audio output of the speaker 46 is executed. In the audio output control process, the audio output of the speaker 46 is controlled based on the audio output data read out in the command corresponding process of step S11702. After executing step S11705, this timer interrupt processing ends.

<Command compatible processing>
Next, command corresponding processing will be explained. The command corresponding process is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a timer interrupt processing subroutine (FIG. 37: S11702).

FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing command corresponding processing. In step S11801, it is determined whether a hold command has been received from the main MPU 62. In step S11801, if it is determined that a hold command has been received (S11801: YES), the process advances to step S11802. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S11801 that no pending command has been received (S11801: NO), the process advances to step S11806.

In step S11802, update processing at the time of winning is executed. In the update process at the time of winning, the number of pieces of pending information acquired based on winning in the first starting opening 33, the number of holding information acquired based on winning in the second starting opening 34, and these pending Processing is executed to enable the total number of pieces of information to be specified in the sound-light side MPU 92. Details of the update process at the time of winning in step S11802 will be described later. Hereinafter, the number of pieces of pending information acquired based on winnings in the first starting port 33 will also be referred to as "first pending number", and the number of pieces of pending information acquired based on winnings in the second starting port 34 will be referred to as the "first pending number". It is also called the "second number of pending items", and the total number of the first number of pending items and the second number of pending items is also called the "total number of pending items". After executing step S11802, the process advances to step S11803.

In step S11803, a hold display control process is executed. Specifically, the number of pieces of pending information acquired based on winnings to the first starting opening 33 identified in step S11802, and the number of pieces of holding information acquired based on winnings to the second starting opening 34. Based on this, the display mode of the first hold display area Ds1 and the second hold display area Ds2 is controlled. After executing step S11803, the process advances to step S11804.

In step S11804, the content of the pending command is stored in the game time setting information storage area 94d. That is, the information acquired by the destination determination process executed by the main side MPU 62 is transmitted to the sound-light side MPU 92 by a hold command, and the information of the destination determination process included in the transmitted hold command is stored in the game time setting information storage area. 94d.

FIG. 39 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the configuration of the game time setting information storage area 94d. The game time setting information storage area 94d has a game time setting information storage area for the first starting opening and a gaming time setting information storage area for the second starting opening. FIG. 39(a) shows the game time setting information storage area for the first starting opening, and FIG. 39(b) shows the gaming time setting information storage area for the second starting opening. Note that since the first starting opening game time setting information storage area and the second starting opening game time setting information storage area have the same configuration, the first starting opening gaming time setting shown in FIG. 39(a) The information storage area will be described, and the description of the second starting opening game time setting information storage area shown in FIG. 39(b) will be omitted.

As shown in the figure, the game time setting information storage area for the first starting opening is divided into a previous determination information area and a performance information area. Further, each piece of information stored in the first starting opening game time setting information storage area is stored for each reserved game time. The pending game times (n=1 to 4) shown in the game time setting information storage area for the first starting port are from the pending game times (n=1) of the first starting port to the pending game times (n=1) of the first starting port ( Pending game rounds are executed in the order of n=4).

The destination determination information area of the game time setting information storage area for the first starting port contains information (hereinafter referred to as , also referred to as previous determination information) is stored. The destination determination information is information acquired by the destination determination process executed by the main side MPU 62, and is information transmitted from the main side MPU 62 to the audio/light side MPU 92 by the hold command. The sound and light side MPU 92 stores the information included in the hold command in the destination determination information area of the first starting opening game time setting information storage area.

The performance information area of the game time setting information storage area for the first starting opening is a storage area in which information set by a performance information setting process to be described later is stored based on the information stored in the previous determination information area. The performance information area will be described later.

In the destination determination information area of the game round setting information storage area for the first starting opening, for each pending game round, the presence or absence of a jackpot, the type of jackpot, the presence or absence of a reach occurrence, and a provisional fluctuation time are stored. As mentioned above, the provisional fluctuation time is the duration of the pending game round when it is assumed that the first starting pending number RaN = 0 and the second starting pending number RbN = 0 at the time when the relevant pending gaming round is executed as a gaming round. is the fluctuation time of

The destination determination information stored in the destination determination information area and the performance information stored in the performance information area are linked to each pending game round itself, and each time a game round is executed, the area to be stored is Shift to the storage area for the reserved game times. For example, as shown in FIG. 39(a), when a game round is executed once, the destination determination information and production information stored in the storage area of the held game round (n=2) are transferred to the held game round (n=2). The destination judgment information and performance information stored in the storage area of the pending game session (n=3) are shifted to the storage area of the pending game session (n=2), and the information is shifted to the storage area of the pending game session (n=2), and The destination determination information and performance information stored in the storage area for the game time (n=4) are shifted to the storage area for the suspended game time (n=3).

The explanation returns to FIG. 38. After executing step S11804, the process advances to step S11805. In step S11805, performance information setting processing is executed. The performance information setting process is a process of making various determinations based on the information stored in the game round setting information storage area and setting various matters regarding the performance to be executed in each game round. Details of the performance information setting process will be described later. After executing step S11805, the process advances to step S11806.

In step S11806, it is determined whether a variation command and a type command have been received. In step S11806, if it is determined that the variation command and the type command have been received (S11806: YES), the process advances to step S11807.

In step S11807, effect setting processing is executed. The performance setting process is a process for setting the performance to be executed in the relevant game round. The effect setting process will be described later. After executing step S11807, the process advances to step S11808.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S11806 that the variation command and type command have not been received (S11806: NO), the process advances to step S11808 without executing step S11807.

In step S11808, processing for responding to other commands received from the main MPU 62 is executed. After executing step S11808, this command corresponding processing is ended.

<Update process when winning a prize>
Next, the update process when winning a prize will be explained. The update process at the time of winning is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine of command corresponding processing (FIG. 38: S11802).

FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing update processing when winning a prize. In step S11901, it is determined whether or not the pending command to be read this time is the one transmitted based on winning to the first starting port 33. In step S11901, if it is determined that the pending command to be read this time is the one transmitted based on the winning to the first starting port 33 (S11901: YES), the process advances to step S11902, and the sound/light Update processing of the first pending number counter area provided in the various counter areas 94b of the side RAM 94 is executed. The first reservation number counter area is a counter area for specifying the number of reservation information acquired based on winnings to the first start opening 33 in the sound-light side MPU 92. In the process of updating the first pending quantity counter area, the information in the first pending quantity counter area is updated to the information of the pending quantity included in the pending command that is currently read. After executing step S11902, the process advances to step S11904.

In step S11901, if it is determined that the pending command to be read this time is not transmitted based on winning to the first starting port 33 (S11901: NO), that is, the pending command is If it is determined that the transmission has been made based on the winning of No. 34, the process proceeds to step S11903, and updates processing of the second pending number counter area provided in the various counter areas 94b of the sound-light side RAM 94 is executed. . The second reservation number counter area is a counter area for specifying the number of reservation information acquired based on winnings to the second start opening 34 in the sound-light side MPU 92. In the process of updating the second pending quantity counter area, the information in the second pending quantity counter area is updated to the information of the pending quantity included in the command that is currently read. After executing step S11903, the process advances to step S11904.

The reason why steps S11902 and S11903 are performed as described above will be explained. In this embodiment, while the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut off, backup power is supplied to the RAM 64 of the main control device 60, while backup power is supplied to the RAM 94 of the sound emission control device 90. Not done. Therefore, if the power is cut off in a situation where pending information related to winnings to the first starting port 33 or the second starting port 34 is stored in the RAM 64 of the main controller 60, the main controller 60 stores the pending information. In contrast, the audio emission control device 90 recognizes that there is no pending information. In this case, if a configuration is adopted in which the first pending quantity counter area or the second pending quantity counter area is incremented each time a pending command is received in the audio emission control device 90, the main control device 60 actually stores the pending quantity. An inconvenience may occur that the number of pending information that has been displayed does not match the number of pending information that the audio emission control device 90 is aware of. On the other hand, as in the present embodiment described above, the main controller 60 transmits a hold command including information on the number of items on hold, and the audio emission control device 90 converts the command into a hold command every time it receives a hold command. By adopting a configuration in which information on the number of held items included is set in the first held item counter area or the second held item counter area, the occurrence of the above-mentioned inconvenience can be suppressed.

In step S11904, a process for updating the total pending number counter area provided in the various counter areas 94b of the audio/light side RAM 94 is executed. The total pending number of pieces counter area is the sum of the number of pieces of pending information acquired based on winnings in the first starting opening 33 and the number of pieces of holding information acquired based on winnings in the second starting opening 34. This is a counter area for specifying in the side MPU 92. In this update process, the information in the total number of pending items counter area is changed to the sum of the information on the number of items on hold measured in the first number of pending items counter area and the information on the number of items on hold measured in the second number of pending items counter area. Update to. After executing step S11904, the update process at the time of the actual winning is ended.

<Production information setting process>
Next, the production information setting process will be explained. The production information setting process is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine of the command corresponding process (FIG. 38: S11805).

As described above, the performance information setting process is a process of making various determinations based on the information stored in the game round setting information storage area and setting various matters regarding the performance to be executed in each game round. Then, the various set items are stored in the performance information area of the game time setting information storage area. For convenience of explanation, we will first explain the performance information area (see FIG. 39) of the game time setting information storage area (the game time setting information storage area for the first starting opening, the gaming time setting information storage area for the second starting opening). do. After that, the production information setting process will be explained.

As shown in FIG. 39(a), the performance information area of the game time setting information storage area for the first starting opening includes a point awarding performance flag, a continuous performance final game time flag, and a carryover game time flag for each pending game time. , the total number of points awarded, the performance scenario number, and the storage area for the point awarding scenario number.

The point award effect flag will be explained. The point award performance flag is a flag that is turned ON when the game round is set to the game time in which the point award performance is executed.

The continuous performance final game round flag will be explained. In this embodiment, the continuous performance is a point awarding performance in which accumulated points are carried over across game rounds and accumulated points are used over a plurality of game rounds. The last game round of the game rounds in which the continuous performance is executed is also referred to as the final game round of the continuous performance. The continuous performance final game round flag is a flag that turns ON when the game round is set as the continuous performance final game round.

The carryover game times flag will be explained. In this embodiment, a carryover game round is a game round that is executed before the last game round of continuous performance among game rounds in which continuous performance is executed, that is, a game round in which accumulated points are carried over. The carryover game round flag is a flag that turns ON when the game round is set as the carryover game round.

In addition, the above-mentioned point giving performance flag, continuous performance last game round flag, and carryover game round flag stored in the performance information area will be used to set the performance of the game round corresponding to these flags in the performance setting process described later. After that, it is turned off (reset) by updating the game time setting information storage area (FIG. 51: S12112).

To explain more specifically about the final game round and carryover game round of the continuous performance, for example, in the case of the point awarding performance (case 2) in FIG. Since it is used in three game rounds, the point awarding performance is a continuous performance that is executed over three game times. Since the game round U1 and the game round U2 are the game rounds in which the accumulated points are carried over, they are carryover game rounds. Since the game round U3 is the last game round among the game rounds in which the continuous performance is executed, it is the final game round of the continuous performance. Furthermore, in this embodiment, the number of games in which the continuous performance is executed is called the number of games to be played Np. In the case of the point award performance (case 2) shown in FIG. 15, the continuous performance is executed using three game rounds, so Np=3. The number of games played Np is used in the process (performance information setting process).

The production scenario number (hereinafter also referred to as production scenario number) will be explained. In this embodiment, the performance scenario refers to various aspects related to the performance to be performed in the game round to be processed, such as the type of video to be performed in the game round to be processed, the timing to run the video, the timing to perform the point awarding performance, etc. This is a program in which the following items are set. The sound and light side ROM 93 stores a plurality of performance scenarios. The performance scenario number is a code assigned to each performance scenario, and is used to identify one performance scenario.

The point award scenario number (hereinafter also referred to as point award scenario number) will be explained. In the present embodiment, the point awarding scenario is a program in which the number of points to be awarded in the point awarding performance set for each performance scenario is set. The sound and light side ROM 93 stores a plurality of point awarding scenarios. The point awarding scenario No. is a code assigned corresponding to each point awarding scenario, and is used to identify one point awarding scenario. The performance information area of the game time setting information storage area has been explained above.

Next, the production information setting process will be explained. In the performance information setting process, the performance information stored in the performance information area corresponding to the pending game time being processed (point award performance flag, continuous performance last game time flag, carryover game time flag, total number of points awarded) , production scenario number, and point awarding scenario number).

FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing the production information setting process. The processes executed in the production information setting process are roughly composed of three processing groups.

The processing group from step S12003 to step S12008 is a processing group that sets performance information for the target game round when the result of the jackpot lottery for the target game round is "jackpot" or "missing (reach occurrence)". be.

The processing group of steps S12011 to S12015 is performed when the result of the jackpot lottery of the game round to be processed is "missing (no reach occurrence)" and the game round to be processed is set as the final game round of continuous performance. This is a processing group for setting performance information for the game round to be processed.

The processing group from step S12016 to step S12018 is performed when the result of the jackpot lottery in the game round to be processed is "missing" (no reach), and there is continuity with other game rounds in the game round to be processed. This is a processing group for setting performance information for the game round to be processed when performing a point-granting performance that does not include a continuous performance (when not executing a continuous performance) or when not performing a point-granting performance.

The details of the production information setting process will be explained below, but for the convenience of explanation, after explaining the process for determining which of the three processing groups described above to execute (step S12001, step S12002, step S12010), first , the processing group from step S12016 to step S12018 will be explained, next the processing group from step S12003 to step S12008 will be explained, and finally the processing group from step S12011 to step S12015 will be explained.

In step S12001, information stored in the game time setting information storage area is read. If the game time to be processed is based on the entry of a game ball into the first starting port 33, the information recorded in the game time setting information storage area for the first starting port is read, and the game time to be processed is based on the entry of a game ball into the first starting port 33. When based on the entry of the game ball into the starting port 34, the information recorded in the game time setting information storage area for the second starting port is read. After executing step S12001, the process advances to step S12002.

In step S12002, based on the information in the destination determination information area corresponding to the game time to be processed in the game time setting information storage area, the result of the jackpot lottery for the game time to be processed is "jackpot" or "missing (reach occurrence)". Determine if there is. In step S12002, when it is determined that the result of the jackpot lottery for the game round to be processed is neither a "big hit" nor a "miss (reach occurrence)", that is, when it is determined that it is a "miss (reach non-occurrence)" (S12002: NO), the process advances to step S12010.

In step S12010, it is determined whether or not the continuous performance final game round flag of the pending game round (preceding pending game round) immediately before the game round to be processed is ON. By executing this process, the pending game session (preceding pending game session) immediately before the game session to be processed is set as the carryover game session, and the continuous performance is set in which the game session to be processed is set as the final game session of the continuous performance. Determine whether it is executable. In this embodiment, when executing a continuous performance in which the game run in which the result of the jackpot lottery is "missing (no reach)" is set as the final game run of the continuous performance, the number of game runs in which the continuous performance is executed ( Since the number of executed games (Np) is set to 2, the preceding game period that is subject to determination as to whether or not the continuous performance final game period flag is ON is the preceding pending game immediately before the game period to be processed. Only once.

At the time when the performance information setting process for the game round to be processed is executed, if the setting is such that the point awarding performance is not executed in the preceding pending game round one before the game round to be processed, or When the setting is to execute the point awarding performance (not to execute the continuous performance) in one game, the continuous performance final game round flag of the advance pending game round is set to OFF. In addition, at the time when the performance information setting process for the game time to be processed is executed, the previous pending game time before the game time to be processed is not set as the carryover game time in the continuous performance, and the game time to be processed is There is no case where the continuous performance final game round flag of the preceding held game time is set to OFF because the preceding held game time is a carryover game time. The reason for this will be explained below.

At the time when the performance information setting process for the game round to be processed is executed, the performance information for the preceding pending game round has already been set, but in this embodiment, the performance information setting process for the game round to be processed is executed. Accordingly, the effect information of the previously set advance pending game round may be corrected (reset). In this embodiment, after the final continuous performance game round is set, the advance pending game round to be executed before the continuous performance final game round is set (reset) as a carryover game round. . Therefore, at the time when the performance information setting process for the game round to be processed is executed (that is, at the time when the performance information for the game round to be processed has not yet been set), the previous pending game round before the game round to be processed is It is never set as a carryover game time in a continuous performance. Note that the case where the performance information of the already set advance pending game round is corrected (reset) will be explained in detail when describing the processing group of steps S12003 to S12008 and the processing group of steps S12011 to S12015.

In step S12010, if it is determined that the continuous effect final game round flag of the preceding pending game round one before the game round to be processed is ON (S12010: YES), the process advances to step S12016. That is, the process advances to the processing group of steps S12016 to S12018 described above. As mentioned above, the processing group of steps S12016 to S12018 is performed when the result of the jackpot lottery for the game round to be processed is "missing (no reach occurrence)", and the game round to be processed is different from other game rounds. This is a processing group for setting performance information for the game round to be processed when a point awarding performance that does not have continuity is executed (when a continuous performance is not executed) or when a point awarding performance is not executed. In this embodiment, at the time of setting the performance of the game round to be processed, for the advance pending game round that has already been set as the final game round of continuous performance, the setting of the final game round of continuous performance takes priority, and It will not be corrected (reset) in the carryover game times in continuous performances. Therefore, in step S12010, if the continuous performance final game round flag of the preceding pending game round one before the processing target game round is ON, the processing target game round does not have continuity with the preceding pending game round. A processing group for setting effects (processing group of steps S12016 to S12018) is executed.

In step S12016, it is determined by lottery whether or not a point awarding performance is to be executed in the game round to be processed. The point award performance in this process is a point award performance that has no continuity with other game times and is executed in one game time to be processed. In this embodiment, the lottery in this process is performed using predetermined random numbers, and is set so that the probability of a lottery result in which a point awarding effect is executed is 50%. After executing step S12016, the process advances to step S12017.

In step S12017, the result of the lottery in step S12016 is determined, and if it is determined that the lottery result is that a point awarding performance will be executed in the game round to be processed (S12017: YES), the process advances to step S12018.

In step S12018, the total number of points to be awarded (total awarded points) in the point-granting performance executed in one game to be processed is determined. In this process, the total awarded points are determined by a predetermined lottery, and the total awarded points are set to be between 0 points and 9 points. That is, the settings are made so that the button press effect will not be executed due to accumulation of 10 accumulated points in the game round to be processed. This is to prevent unnecessary expectations from being given to the player by executing a button press performance in a game round where the result of the jackpot lottery is neither a "big hit" nor a "miss (reach occurrence)". After executing step S12018, the process advances to step S12009.

On the other hand, in step S12017, the result of the lottery in step S12016 is determined, and if it is determined that the lottery result is that the point awarding effect will not be executed in the game round to be processed (S12017: NO), step S12018 is not executed, The process advances to step S12009.

In step S12009, the effect information area of the game time setting information recording area is updated. Specifically, the matters determined in steps S12016 to S12018 are recorded in the performance information area of the game time setting information recording area. For example, when it is determined to perform a point awarding performance in one game to be processed, the point awarding performance flag is set to ON, the continuous performance final game round flag is set to OFF, and the carryover game round flag is set to OFF. The total awarded points are set to the value of the total awarded points determined in step S12018. The production scenario number and the point awarding scenario number are set to NULL. In this embodiment, only in the game round in which the continuous performance final game round flag is ON, a performance pattern of the performance to be executed in the game round is generated from the performance scenario and the point awarding scenario. Regarding the performance to be executed in the game round where the continuous performance final game round flag is not ON, a predetermined performance pattern is read out from a performance pattern table prepared in advance and set. The performance pattern table that is set when executing the point awarding performance in one game to be processed will be described later.

Further, when it is determined not to perform the point award performance in the game round to be processed, the point award performance flag is set to OFF, the continuous performance final game round flag is set to OFF, and the carryover game round flag is set to OFF. The total awarded points will not be set and will be NULL. The production scenario number and the point awarding scenario number are not set and are NULL.

In step S12009, after updating the effect information area of the game time setting information recording area, the effect information setting process is ended.

Next, the processing group of steps S12003 to S12008 will be explained. As described above, the processing group of steps S12003 to S12008, when the result of the jackpot lottery for the game round to be processed is a "jackpot" or "missing (reach occurrence)", performs performance information for the game round to be processed. This is the processing group to be set.

As described above, in step S12002, based on the information in the destination determination information area corresponding to the game time to be processed in the game time setting information storage area, the result of the jackpot lottery for the game time to be processed is "jackpot" or "missing". (reach occurrence)" is determined. Then, in step S12002, if it is determined that the result of the jackpot lottery for the game round to be processed is a "jackpot" or "missing (reach occurrence)" (S12002: YES), the process advances to step S12003.

In step S12003, the continuous performance final game round flag of the preceding pending game round before the processing target game round in the game round setting information storage area is read, and the continuous performance final game round flag is OFF continuously from the viewpoint of the processing target game round. Specify the number of advance pending games for which . In this process, by identifying the number of consecutive performance final game rounds in which the continuous performance final game round flag is OFF from the viewpoint of the game round to be processed, the preceding hold game round before the game round to be processed is used as a carryover game round, and it is determined whether a continuous performance using the processing target game round as the final game round of the continuous performance can be executed. Although the performance information of the preceding pending game round before the game round to be processed has already been set, in this embodiment, the continuous performance final game round flag is turned OFF continuously from the viewpoint of the game round to be processed. The preceding reserved game time is determined to be a game time that can be reset as a carryover game time. Hereinafter, the number of advance pending game times in which the continuous performance final game time flag is OFF when viewed from the processing target game time is also referred to as the resettable game number Fn.

For example, in the case of the game time setting information storage area for the first starting opening shown in FIG. 39(a), if the game time to be processed is a pending game time (n=4), ), the consecutive performance final game round flags of the suspended game round (n = 3) and the suspended game round (n = 2), which are consecutive game rounds, are continuously OFF, so in this case, the resettable game The number of times Fn=2. Note that the game time setting information storage area for the first starting opening shown in FIG. The information in the performance information area for the suspended game round (n=4) is not set yet. That is, the information in the performance information area is set by this performance information setting process.

Furthermore, if the number of advance pending games in which the continuous performance final game round flag is OFF from the viewpoint of the processing target game round is 0, set the resettable number of games Fn = 0. do.

After executing step S12003, the process advances to step S12004.

In step S12004, the number of games that can be used for continuous production (hereinafter referred to as the number of executed games Np) is determined based on the resettable number of games Fn specified in step S12003. In this embodiment, the number of games played Np is determined by lottery using random numbers. As mentioned above, the reconfigurable number of games Fn is the number of games that can be used as a carryover effect, so the maximum value that can be taken as the number of executed games Np is the number of games that can be reset Fn plus the final number of consecutive effects. This is the value obtained by adding 1 as the game time. Therefore, in step S12004, the number of games to be played Np, which is a value equal to or less than Fn+1, is determined by a predetermined lottery. The random numbers used for the lottery may be acquired when a game ball enters the starting slot corresponding to the game round to be processed, or when executing the lottery. Note that when the resettable number of games Fn=0, the number of executed games Np is inevitably 1. After executing step S12004, the process advances to step S12005.

In step S12005, a production scenario is determined based on the provisional variation time of the game round to be processed. As mentioned above, the performance scenario includes various matters regarding the performance to be performed in the game round to be processed, such as the type of video to be performed in the game round to be processed, the timing to run the video, the timing to perform the point awarding performance, etc. This is a program that has been set. In this embodiment, the production scenario is determined by referring to the jackpot production scenario table or the reach production scenario table stored in the sound-light side ROM 93. If the result of the jackpot lottery in the game to be processed is a "jackpot", the performance scenario is determined using the jackpot performance scenario table, and if the result of the jackpot lottery is "missing (reach occurrence)", the reach performance scenario is determined. Decide on the production scenario using a table.

FIG. 42 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the jackpot performance scenario table. As shown in the figure, in the jackpot performance scenario table, four types of performance scenarios correspond to one variable time (temporary variable time) that can be set in the game round to be processed. FIG. 43 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the reach effect scenario table. Similar to the jackpot performance scenario table, four types of performance scenarios correspond to one variable time (temporary variable time) that can be set in the game round to be processed.

FIG. 44 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a production scenario corresponding to the tentative variation time T=t4 of the jackpot production scenario table as an example. FIG. 44(a) shows a performance scenario for a jackpot (performance scenario Esc (D1) to performance scenario Esc (D4)) corresponding to the tentative variation time T=t4. As shown in the figure, each of the four types of performance scenarios is set corresponding to the length of the temporary variation time T = t4, and the type of performance to be performed, the point award performance, and the button press performance are executed. The timing etc. are different. Note that "pseudo-continuous" shown in the figure indicates a pseudo-continuous effect, "Bt" indicates a button press effect, and "Pe" indicates a point awarding effect.

Furthermore, the fluctuation time of the game session varies depending on the number of pending game sessions at the time when the game session corresponding to the performance scenario is executed. In this embodiment, the larger the number of pending games, the shorter the fluctuation time of the games. Therefore, in this embodiment, each performance scenario is prepared for each number of pending games.

In FIG. 44(b), it will be explained that one type of production scenario (production scenario Esc (D1)) is prepared for each number of pending games (first start pending number RaN: 0 to 4). It is an explanatory diagram. As shown in the figure, each production scenario has the same production video and the same number of point-granting productions, but the production scenario that is applied when there is a large number of pending games has a shorter execution time. It is set to be.

In step S12005 (FIG. 41), from the jackpot performance scenario table (or reach performance scenario table), four types of performance scenarios corresponding to the tentative variation time of the game round to be processed are identified, and the four specified performance scenarios are One performance scenario is determined from among them by a predetermined lottery using random numbers. Note that the process of selecting one of the five performance scenarios shown in FIG. 44(b) is selected according to the number of pending game times immediately before the game time corresponding to the performance scenario is executed. After executing step S12005, the process advances to step S12006.

In step S12006, a point awarding scenario corresponding to the number of games played Np is determined based on the determined performance scenario. The point award scenario is a program in which the number of points to be awarded in the point award performance set for each performance scenario is set. In this process, a point awarding scenario is determined based on the jackpot/reach point awarding scenario table stored in the sound-light side ROM 93.

FIG. 45 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a jackpot/reach point granting scenario table. As shown in the figure, two point awarding scenarios are set corresponding to each performance scenario and each number of executed games Np (1 to 4) determined in step S12004. In this process, two point awarding scenarios are specified based on the determined production scenario and the number of executed games Np, and one point awarding scenario is selected from the two specified point awarding scenarios by a predetermined lottery using random numbers. decide. Actually, as shown in FIG. 45, in the jackpot/reach point award scenario table, two point award scenario numbers are set corresponding to each number of executed games Np, and the number of point award scenarios to be executed is set. When the point granting scenario No. is determined, the point giving scenario corresponding to the point giving scenario No. is read out from the sound-light side ROM 93.

FIG. 46 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a jackpot/reach point granting scenario. As shown in the figure, in each point awarding scenario, the value of awarding points that is suitable for the production scenario to be executed in the target game round is set in the order of execution of the point awarding production set in the production scenario, and the number of executed games. The total number of points to be awarded in each preceding game round is set corresponding to Np. For example, as shown in FIG. 45, the point awarding scenario Psc (A2g) is when the performance scenario set in the game round to be processed is Esc (A2), and when the number of executed games Np = 4. selected. In Psc(A2g), the number of points to be awarded in the game round to be processed is set for each point-granting performance to be executed. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 46, the first point awarding performance in the game round to be processed is 1 point, the second point awarding performance is 2 points, the third point awarding performance is 3 points, and the fourth point awarding performance is 1 point. 1 point is awarded for the point awarding performance, and 2 points are awarded for the 5th point awarding performance.

Further, each point awarding scenario is set with the total number of points awarded in the point awarding performances executed in the preceding game rounds 1 to 3. In addition, in FIG. 46, the game run executed one time before the relevant game time (game time to be processed) is expressed as preceding game time 1, and the game time executed one time before the preceding game time 1 is indicated as preceding game time 1. It is written as the preceding game round 2, and the game round that is executed one time before the preceding game round 2 is written as the preceding game round 3. In the case of the point granting scenario Psc (A2g) in FIG. 46, which was given as an example earlier, the total number of points awarded in the preceding game round 1, which is executed one game before the processing target game round, is 5 points, and The total number of points awarded in the preceding game round 2, which is executed immediately before the previous game round, is 4 points, and the total number of points awarded in the preceding game round 3, which is executed immediately before the preceding game round 2, is 1 point. The timing of executing the point award performance in each preceding game time 1 to advance game time 3 and the number of points awarded in one point award performance are determined by the fluctuation time of each preceding game time and the total award points in the performance setting process described later. Determined based on number. After executing step S12006, the process advances to step S12007.

In step S12007, it is determined whether the number of games played Np determined in step S12004 is 2 or more. That is, it is determined whether or not a continuous performance in which the processing target game time is set as the final game time of the continuous performance and the preceding game time is set as the carryover game time is to be executed. To explain more specifically, when a continuous performance is executed in which the preceding game time is set as the carryover game time, it is necessary to reset (correct) the performance information of the preceding game time that has already been set. By determining whether the number of executed games Np is 2 or more, it is determined whether or not resetting is necessary. In step S12007, if it is determined that the number of games played Np is 2 or more (S12007: YES), the process advances to step S12008.

In step S12008, the total points awarded for each preceding game session stored in the point award scenario set for the game session to be processed is read. That is, the total points awarded in the point award performance executed in each preceding game round are read. After executing step S12008, the process advances to step S12009.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S12007 that the number of games played Np is not 2 or more (S12007: NO), the process proceeds to step S12009 without executing step S12008.

In step S12009, the effect information area of the game time setting information recording area is updated. Specifically, the matters determined in steps S12003 to S12008 are recorded in the performance information area of the game time setting information recording area. For example, if it is decided to use the preceding pending game time before the game time to be processed as a carryover game time, and to execute a continuous performance using the game time to be processed as the final game time of the continuous performance, it is used as a carryover game time. The point giving performance flag of the performance information corresponding to the preceding game round is set to ON, the continuous performance final game round flag is set to OFF, and the carryover game round flag is reset to ON. The total awarded points are reset to the total awarded points for each preceding game read in step S12008. The production scenario number and the point awarding scenario number are reset to NULL. As described above, in this embodiment, only in the game round in which the continuous performance final game round flag is ON, the performance pattern of the performance to be executed in the game round is created from the performance scenario and the point awarding scenario. Regarding the performance to be executed in the game round where the continuous performance final game round flag is not ON, a predetermined performance pattern is read out from a performance pattern table prepared in advance and set. The performance pattern table prepared for the performance to be executed in the game round where the continuous performance final game round flag is not ON will be described later.

Then, the point giving performance flag of the performance information corresponding to the processing target game round used as the final game round of continuous performance is set to ON, the continuous performance final game round flag is set to ON, and the carryover game round flag is set to OFF. The total awarded points are set to NULL. The total points awarded is a parameter used to determine the performance to be executed in the game round where the continuous performance final game round flag is not ON.In the continuous performance final game round, the performance scenario and points are calculated for each point granting performance in the continuous performance final game round. Since the granting scenario is set, there is no need to set the total granted points. The performance scenario number is set to the performance scenario number corresponding to the performance scenario determined in step S12005. The point granting scenario number corresponds to the point granting scenario determined in step S12006.

In addition, in this embodiment, if the result of the jackpot lottery of the game round to be processed is "jackpot" or "missing (reach occurrence)", the continuous performance final game when the game round executes the continuous performance Even if the number of executed games is not Np=1, it is assumed that a continuous performance with the number of executed games Np=1 is executed, and this game round is treated as the final continuous performance game time. In other words, if the result of the jackpot lottery for the game round to be processed is "jackpot" or "missing (reach occurrence)", the continuous performance final game round flag in the performance information area corresponding to the game round is always turned ON. Set. By doing this, when the game round in which the result of the jackpot lottery is "big hit" or "missing (reach occurrence)" is determined, the carryover game is This has been avoided from being reconfigured as often. Therefore, in this embodiment, the accumulated points in a game round in which the result of the jackpot lottery is "big hit" or "miss (reach occurrence)" will not be carried over to a later game round.

In step S12009, after updating the effect information area of the game time setting information recording area, the effect information setting process is ended.

Next, the processing group of steps S12011 to S12015 will be explained. As described above, the processing group of steps S12011 to S12015 is performed when the result of the jackpot lottery of the game round to be processed is "missing (no reach occurrence)", and the game round to be processed is executed as the final continuous performance game. This is a processing group that sets performance information for the game time to be processed when it is set to the game time.

As described above, in step S12010, it is determined whether or not the continuous performance final game round flag of the pending game round (preceding pending game round) immediately before the game round to be processed is ON. Then, in step S12010, if it is determined that the continuous effect final game round flag of the preceding pending game round one before the game round to be processed is not ON (S12010: NO), the process advances to step S12011. In other words, it is determined that it is possible to execute a continuous production in which the pending game session (preceding pending game session) before the game session to be processed is set as the carryover game session, and the game session to be processed is set as the final game session of the continuous performance. If so, the process advances to step S12011.

As mentioned above, in this embodiment, when executing a continuous performance in which the game round in which the jackpot lottery result is "missing" (no reach) is set as the final game round of the continuous performance, the continuous performance is The number of games to be played (number of games played Np) is set to 2. This is to avoid giving unnecessary expectations to the player by reducing the number of times the continuous performance is executed when the result of the jackpot lottery is a "miss" (no reach occurrence). In addition, when the number of consecutive games is executed three or more times, the player is notified that the result of the jackpot lottery in the final game of the consecutive performance is a "jackpot" or "missing (reach occurrence)". This gives the player the pleasure of counting the number of times the continuous performance is performed, and increases the player's sense of expectation as the number of times the continuous performance is performed increases. In addition, in this embodiment, when executing a continuous performance in which the game time in which the jackpot lottery result is "missing (no reach)" is set as the final game time of the continuous performance, the game time in which the continuous performance is executed is Although the configuration in which the number of games played (Np) is set to 2 is adopted, the present invention is not limited to such a configuration, and a configuration in which the number of games played Np is set to 3 or 4 may be adopted.

In step S12011, the pending game session (preceding pending game session) immediately before the game session to be processed is set as the carryover game session, and the continuous performance is set as the final game session of the continuous performance, that is, the execution game. It is determined whether or not to execute the continuous performance for the number of times Np=2. In this embodiment, the determination is made by a predetermined lottery using random numbers. In this embodiment, the probability of a lottery result of executing a continuous performance is set to 20%. In other words, the continuous performance (carrying over of accumulated points) will be executed with a high probability when the result of the jackpot lottery is a "big hit" or "missing (reach occurrence)", and if the result of the jackpot lottery is "missing" (reach non-occurring), it will be executed with a high probability. )", the settings are set so that it will be executed with a low probability. By setting in this manner, it is possible to give a strong sense of anticipation to the player who recognizes that the accumulated points have been carried over during the execution of the game round. After executing step S12011, the process advances to step S12012.

In step S12012, it is determined whether or not it was determined in step S12011 to perform a continuous effect (Np=2).

In step S12011, if it is determined that the continuous effect (Np=2) is not to be performed (S12012: NO), the process advances to step S12016. In other words, when the result of the jackpot lottery in the game round to be processed is a "miss" (no reach), a point awarding performance is executed in the game round to be processed that has no continuity with other game rounds. Since this is possible, the processing group of steps S12016 to S12018 is executed. Since the processing group from step S12016 to step S12018 has been described above, the description thereof will be omitted.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S12011 that the continuous effect (Np=2) is to be performed (S12012: YES), the process advances to step S12013.

In step S12013, a production scenario is determined based on the temporary variation time of the game round to be processed. In this embodiment, the performance scenario is determined by referring to the non-reach performance scenario table stored in the sound and light side ROM 93.

FIG. 47 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a non-reach performance scenario table. As shown in the figure, in the non-reach performance scenario table, two types of performance scenarios correspond to one variable time (temporary variable time) that can be set in the game round to be processed.

FIG. 48 is an explanatory diagram illustrating, as an example, a performance scenario corresponding to the temporary variation time T=t24 of the non-reach performance scenario table. As shown in the figure, each performance scenario has a variable time set corresponding to T=t24, and the type of performance to be performed, the timing at which the point awarding performance is performed, etc. are different. Further, the button press performance is not set in the non-reach performance scenario. That is, the point awarding scenario described later is set so that the points awarded by the point awarding performance do not accumulate more than 10 points. In other words, 10 or more points are accumulated only when the result of the jackpot lottery is a "jackpot" or a "miss (reach occurrence)." By doing so, it is possible to give the player a strong sense of expectation when the accumulated points are accumulated by 10 points or more.

Furthermore, similar to the jackpot performance scenario and the reach performance scenario described above, the fluctuation time of the game round varies depending on the number of pending game rounds at the time when the game round corresponding to the performance scenario is executed. In this embodiment, the larger the number of pending games, the shorter the fluctuation time of the games. Therefore, in this embodiment, each performance scenario is prepared for each number of pending games. After executing step S12013, the process advances to step S12014.

In step S12014, a point awarding scenario is determined based on the determined performance scenario. In this process, a point awarding scenario is determined based on the non-reach point awarding scenario table stored in the sound-light side ROM 93.

FIG. 49 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a non-reach point granting scenario table. As shown in the figure, one point awarding scenario is set corresponding to each presentation scenario. In fact, as shown in FIG. 49, in the non-reach point granting scenario table, one point granting scenario number is set corresponding to each performance scenario, and the point granting scenario of the point granting scenario to be executed is set. The point giving scenario corresponding to No is read from the sound-light side ROM 93.

FIG. 50 is an explanatory diagram illustrating each point granting scenario for non-reach. As shown in the figure, in each point awarding scenario, the value of awarding points that is suitable for the production scenario to be executed in the game round to be processed is set in the order of execution of the point awarding production set in the production scenario, and The total number of points to be awarded in the preceding game run is set.

After executing step S12014, the process advances to step S12015.

In step S12015, the total points awarded for the preceding game session stored in the point award scenario set for the game session to be processed is read. That is, the total points awarded in the point award performance executed in the preceding game round are read. After executing step S12015, the process advances to step S12009.

In step S12009, the effect information area of the game time setting information recording area is updated. Specifically, the matters determined in steps S12011 to S12015 are recorded in the performance information area of the game time setting information recording area. In other words, the preceding pending game round that is one previous game round to be processed is used as a carryover game round, and a continuous performance is executed using the game round to be processed as the final game round for continuous performance, so the preceding game used as a carryover game round. The point giving performance flag of the performance information corresponding to the round is set to ON, the continuous performance final game round flag is set to OFF, and the carryover game round flag is reset to ON. The total awarded points are reset to the total awarded points in the previous game round read in step S12015. The production scenario number and the point awarding scenario number are reset to NULL. As described above, in this embodiment, only in the game round in which the continuous performance final game round flag is ON, the performance pattern of the performance to be executed in the game round is created from the performance scenario and the point awarding scenario. Regarding the performance to be executed in the game round where the continuous performance final game round flag is not ON, a predetermined performance pattern is read out from a performance pattern table prepared in advance and set.

Then, the point giving performance flag of the performance information corresponding to the processing target game round used as the final game round of continuous performance is set to ON, the continuous performance final game round flag is set to ON, and the carryover game round flag is set to OFF. The total awarded points are set to NULL. As mentioned above, the total awarded points is a parameter used when determining the performance to be executed in the game round where the continuous performance final game round flag is not ON, and in the continuous performance final game round, the total awarded points are Since the production scenario and point award scenario are set, there is no need to set the total award points. As the performance scenario number, a performance scenario number corresponding to the performance scenario determined in step S12013 is set. The point granting scenario number corresponds to the point granting scenario determined in step S12014.

In step S12009, after updating the effect information area of the game time setting information recording area, the effect information setting process is ended.

<Production setting process>
Next, the effect setting process will be explained. The effect setting process is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine of the command corresponding process (FIG. 38: S11807).

FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing the effect setting process. In step S12101, based on the game time setting information storage area (FIG. 39), it is determined whether the continuous performance final game time flag of the game time to be processed in this process is ON. In step S12101, if it is determined that the continuous performance final game round flag of the game round to be processed is ON (S12101: YES), the process advances to step S12102.

In step S12102, based on the game time setting information storage area (FIG. 39), the performance scenario and point award scenario set for the game time to be processed are read. At this time, the performance scenario corresponding to the number of pending games at the time of this process is read (see FIG. 44(b)). After executing step S12102, the process advances to step S12103.

In step S12103, a performance pattern is generated based on the performance scenario and point awarding scenario set for the game round to be processed.

FIG. 52 is an image diagram of a performance pattern generated based on the performance scenario and point awarding scenario set for the game round to be processed. The performance scenario records the timing at which each point awarding performance is performed and the timing at which the button press performance is performed. The point awarding scenario records the number of points awarded for each point awarding performance set in the performance scenario. The sound and light side MPU 92 generates a performance pattern by reading the performance scenario and point awarding scenario set for the game round to be processed, and sets it as the performance pattern for the game round to be processed. As described above, in this embodiment, only in the game round in which the continuous performance final game round flag is ON, the performance pattern of the performance to be executed in the game round is generated from the performance scenario and the point awarding scenario. Regarding the performance to be executed in the game round where the continuous performance final game round flag is not ON, a predetermined performance pattern is read out from a performance pattern table prepared in advance and set. After executing step S12103, the process advances to step S12107.

On the other hand, in step S12101, if it is determined that the continuous performance final game round flag of the game round to be processed is not ON (S12101: NO), the process advances to step S12104.

In step S12104, based on the game time setting information storage area (FIG. 39), it is determined whether the point award effect flag of the game time to be processed in this process is ON. In step S12104, if it is determined that the point award effect flag for the game round to be processed is ON (S12104: YES), the process advances to step S12105. In other words, if the game time to be processed is set as a carryover game time when a continuous performance is executed, or if it is set to execute a point awarding performance in one of the game times to be processed. Then, the process advances to step S12105.

In step S12105, the performance pattern for the game round to be processed is determined based on the fluctuation time of the game round to be processed and the total number of points awarded. Specifically, a performance pattern corresponding to the variation time and the total number of points awarded is specified from the performance pattern table for point award performance stored in advance in the sound and light side ROM 93, and set as the performance pattern for the game round to be processed. .

FIG. 53 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a performance pattern table for point giving performance. As shown in the figure, a performance pattern (a performance pattern for point awarding performance) is stored in the performance pattern table for point awarding performance in correspondence with the variation time of the game round and the total awarding points.

FIG. 54 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a performance pattern for point granting performance recorded in the performance pattern table for point granting performance. As shown in the figure, in the performance pattern recorded in the performance pattern table for point granting performance, in addition to the timing at which the point granting performance is executed, the number of points to be awarded in each point granting performance is also set. In this embodiment, in a game round in which the continuous performance final game round flag is ON, a performance pattern of the performance to be executed in the game round is generated from the performance scenario and the point awarding scenario, so that in each point awarding performance. The number of points to be awarded is set, but in the game round where the continuous performance final game round flag is not ON, as shown in FIG. is available.

In this way, if the game time to be processed is set as a carryover game time when a continuous performance is executed, or if the point award performance is set to be executed in one of the game times to be processed. Since the same performance pattern table can be used in all cases, the data capacity can be reduced. In addition, if it is set as a carryover game time when a continuous performance is executed, the accumulated points are carried over to the next game time, and the point award performance is set to be executed in one of the target game times. If the accumulated points are carried over, the accumulated points need to be reset at the end of the relevant game round, but the display control when carrying over the accumulated points and the display control when the accumulated points are not carried over can be done by setting the carryover game round flag in the point accumulation process, which will be explained later. Since it is realized by using the system, there are two cases: when it is set as a carryover game time when a continuous performance is executed, and when it is set to execute a point award performance in one of the game times to be processed. The same production pattern can be applied. After executing step S12105 (FIG. 51), the process advances to step S12107.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S12104 that the point award effect flag for the game round to be processed is not ON (S12104: NO), the process advances to step S12106. That is, if the game round to be processed is a game round in which the result of the jackpot lottery is "missing (no reach occurrence)" and no point award performance is executed, the process advances to step S12106.

In step S12106, a production pattern is determined based on the fluctuation time of the game to be processed. Specifically, the performance pattern corresponding to the variable time is specified from the performance pattern table for normal performance stored in advance in the sound and light side ROM 93, and set as the performance pattern for the game round to be processed. In the performance pattern table for normal performance, one performance pattern is stored in association with each variable time of the game. After executing step S12016, the process advances to step S12107.

In step S12107, a process for setting a liquid crystal pattern to be stopped is executed. In the liquid crystal symbol setting process, if the result of the jackpot lottery for the current game round is a 16R probability-variable jackpot, 8R probability-variable jackpot, 16R regular jackpot, or 8R regular jackpot, the same symbol is placed on the active line L. The information corresponding to the stop result in which the combination is established is set as the information of the current stop symbol. Specifically, if the result of the jackpot lottery in this game is a 16R probability-variable jackpot or an 8R probability-variable jackpot, the same odd-numbered symbol combination can be selected as the same symbol combination, and the same A combination of even symbols may be selected. In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, this selection rate is the same for the same combination of odd symbols and the same combination of even symbols, but instead, the former is selected more than the latter. A configuration may be adopted in which the selection rate is higher, or a configuration in which the latter has a higher selection rate than the former. Further, the combination of "7" symbols is selected only in the case of a 16R probability-variable jackpot. Further, if the result of the jackpot lottery in the current game round is a 16R normal jackpot or an 8R normal jackpot, the same even-numbered pattern combination is selected as the same pattern combination.

If the result of the jackpot lottery in the current game round is a losing result, it is determined from the contents of the variation command whether or not a reach has occurred. If it is determined that it corresponds to a reach occurrence, it is a stop result in which a combination of the same symbols is not established on the active line L, and corresponds to a stop result in which a combination of reach symbols is established on the active line L. The information is determined as the current stop result information. On the other hand, if it is determined that it does not correspond to the reach occurrence, the stop result is that the combination of the same symbols is not established on the active line L, and the stop result is that the combination of the reach symbols is not established on the active line L. The corresponding information is set as the information of the current stopped symbol. After executing step S12107, the process advances to step S12108.

In step S12108, a variable display pattern setting process is executed. In this process, the information on the fluctuation time of the current game round is specified from the content of the fluctuation command received this time, and the information on the fluctuation time and the information on the stop symbols specified in the above step S12107 are combined. Select the corresponding variation display pattern. When selecting this variable display pattern, the variable display pattern table stored in the variable display pattern table storage area 93b of the audio/light side ROM 93 is referred to. After executing step S12108, the process advances to step S12109.

In step S12109, the effect pattern set in the processing of steps S12103, S12105, and S12106, the liquid crystal symbol to be stopped, and the variable display pattern are set as an effect command, and the process proceeds to step S12110.

In step S12110, the set effect command is transmitted to the display side MPU 102. The display side MPU 102 executes a process of displaying the performance content corresponding to the received performance command on the symbol display device 41. After that, the process advances to step S12111.

In step S12111, pending information update processing is performed. Specifically, the information in the total number of pending items counter area is updated so that the total number of pending items stored in the total number of pending items counter area of the audio/light side RAM 94 is subtracted by one. After executing step S12111, the process advances to step S12112.

In step S12112, updating processing of the game time setting information storage area 94d (FIG. 39) is executed. If the game time to be processed is a game time triggered by the ball entering the first starting port 33, the game time setting information (previous determination) stored in the first starting port game time setting information storage area information and performance information) to the storage area of the adjacent reserved game time as shown in FIG. 39(a). If the game time to be processed is a game time triggered by the entry of a ball into the second starting port 34, the game time setting information (previous determination) stored in the game time setting information storage area for the second starting port 34 information and performance information) to the storage area of the adjacent reserved game time as shown in FIG. 39(b). After executing step S12110, the effect setting process is ended.

<Point granting performance execution process>
Next, the point giving performance execution process will be explained. As described above, the point award performance execution process is a process for executing various processes related to the point award performance during execution of a game round. The point award performance execution process is executed by the MPU 92 of the audio emission control device 90 as a subroutine of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 37: S11703).

FIG. 55 is a flowchart showing the point awarding performance execution process. In step S12201, point accumulation processing is executed. The point accumulation process is a process that controls the start of the execution of the point awarding performance and controls the display to display the points awarded in the point awarding performance as a pearl image indicating the accumulated points on the stage St. be. Details of the point accumulation process will be described later. After executing step S12201, the process advances to step S12202.

In step S12202, point filling control processing is executed. In the point filling control process, when 10 accumulated points are accumulated (filled), it is determined whether to use the filling as a trigger to execute a standby effect or a timer effect, and select one of the points. This is a process that controls the performance. Details of the point filling control process will be described later. After executing step S12202, step S12203 is executed.

In step S12203, button press effect processing is executed. The button press effect process is a process for controlling the execution of the button press effect. Details of the button press effect processing will be described later. After executing step S12203, the process advances to step S12204.

In step S12204, point reset processing is executed. The point reset process is a process that determines whether the accumulated points are to be reset or carried over when a game round ends, and controls the execution of the reset of the accumulated points. Details of the point reset process will be described later. After executing step S12204, the process advances to step S12205.

In step S12205, stage display control processing is executed. The stage display control process is a process for controlling the color of the stage St. Details of the stage display control process will be described later. After executing step S12205, this point giving performance execution process is ended.

<Point accumulation process>
Next, the point accumulation process will be explained. The point accumulation process is executed by the sound and light side MPU 92 of the sound and light emission control device 90 as a subroutine (FIG. 55: S12201) of the point giving performance execution process.

FIG. 56 is a flowchart showing point accumulation processing. In step S12301, it is determined whether the point award effect flag is ON. The point award performance flag is a flag that is turned ON when execution of one point award performance is started during the execution of a game round, and is turned OFF when the point award performance is completed. In step S12301, if it is determined that the point award effect flag is not ON, that is, if it is determined that the point award effect has not been started (S12301: NO), the process advances to step S12302.

In step S12302, it is determined whether or not it is the timing to start the point awarding performance based on the performance pattern set for the game round to be processed. In step S12302, if it is determined that it is the timing to start the point awarding performance (S12302: YES), the process advances to step S12303. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S12302 that it is not the timing to start the point awarding performance (S12302: NO), this point accumulation process is ended.

In step S12303, the number of points to be awarded in the starting point awarding performance is read from the performance pattern set for the game round to be processed. After executing step S12303, the process advances to step S12304.

In step S12304, a point awarding performance video display start command corresponding to the number of points to be awarded is transmitted to the display side MPU 102. When the display-side MPU 102 receives the video display start command for point granting performance, it executes a process of displaying a performance video of a point granting performance corresponding to the number of points to be given on the symbol display device 41. After executing step S12304, the process advances to step S12305.

In step S12305, output of audio corresponding to the point awarding performance video corresponding to the number of points to be awarded is started, and control is started to cause the various lamps 47 to emit light corresponding to the point awarding performance video. . After executing step S12305, the process advances to step S12306.

In step S12306, the point award performance execution flag is turned ON. After executing step S12306, this point accumulation process ends.

On the other hand, in step S12301, if it is determined that the point granting effect flag is ON, that is, if it is determined that the point giving effect has been started (S12301: YES), the process advances to step S12307.

In step S12307, it is determined whether or not it is the timing at which point provision has been completed in the point provision performance that has been started. Specifically, in the point awarding performance, after the pearl with the number of awarded points displayed is dropped by the turtle character (see Figure 11), at the timing when the pearl with the number of awarded points displayed reaches stage St. Determine whether it exists or not. In step S12307, if it is determined that it is not the timing at which point provision has been completed in the started point provision performance (S12307: NO), this point accumulation processing is ended. On the other hand, in step S12307, if it is determined that it is the timing at which point provision has been completed in the started point provision performance (S12307: YES), the process advances to step S12308.

In step S12308, the value of the accumulated point counter Cpnt is updated according to the number of points awarded. The accumulated point counter Cpnt is a counter for counting the value of accumulated points. In step S12308, when points are awarded in the point assignment performance, a value corresponding to the number of awarded points is added to the accumulated point counter Cpnt. After executing step S12308, the process advances to step S12309.

In step S12309, it is determined whether the value of the accumulated point counter Cpnt is 10 or more. That is, it is determined whether or not points are awarded by the point assignment performance, and the accumulated points are 10 points or more. If it is determined in step S12309 that the value of the accumulated point counter Cpnt is not 10 points or more (S12309: NO), the process advances to step S12310.

In step S12310, a point accumulation video display start command corresponding to the value of the accumulation point counter Cpnt is transmitted to the display side MPU 102. The point accumulation video is a video in which images of pearls corresponding to the number of accumulated points are displayed on stage St. When the display side MPU 102 receives the point accumulation video display start command, it executes a process of causing the symbol display device 41 to display an effect animation that displays the number of pearl images corresponding to the accumulated point counter Cpnt on the stage St. After executing step S12310, the process advances to step S12311.

In step S12311, output of audio corresponding to the point accumulation video is started, and control for causing the various lamps 47 to emit light corresponding to the point accumulation video is started. After executing step S12311, the process advances to step S12312.

In step S12312, the point award performance execution flag is turned OFF. After that, this point accumulation process ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S12309 that the value of the accumulated point counter Cpnt is 10 points or more (S12309: YES), the process advances to step S12313.

In step S12313, the value of the filled counter Cw is added (incremented) by one. The filled counter Cw is a counter that is incremented by 1 every time 10 points are accumulated. After executing step S12313, the process advances to step S12314.

In step S12314, the value of the accumulated point counter Cpnt is subtracted by 10. After executing step S12314, the process advances to step S12315.

In step S12315, the unprocessed flag is turned ON. The unprocessed flag indicates that when 10 accumulated points have been accumulated, it has not yet been determined whether to perform a standby effect or a timer effect for the 10 accumulated points. This flag is turned ON when there is no such flag, and turned OFF when the determination process is completed. Note that the process of determining whether to perform the standby performance or the timer performance for the 10 points worth of accumulated points is performed in the point filling time control process that will be described later. After executing step S12315, the process proceeds to step S12309 again.

That is, the processes of steps S12313 to S12315 are repeated until the value of the accumulated point counter Cpnt becomes less than 10. Then, the value of the filled counter Cw increases by the number of times steps S12313 to S12315 are executed. In other words, if 10 accumulated points are regarded as one accumulated point group, the number of accumulated point groups included in the accumulated points after points are awarded by the point awarding performance is counted, and the accumulated point group is is added to the filled counter Cw (S12313), and the accumulated points corresponding to the number of accumulated point groups added to the filled counter Cw are subtracted from the accumulated point counter Cpnt (S12314).

After executing the processes of steps S12313 to S12315, the process proceeds to step S12309 again, and if it is determined that the value of the accumulated point counter Cpnt is not 10 points or more (S12309: NO), the process proceeds to step S12310. Since the processing after step S12310 has been described above, the explanation will be omitted.

<Control processing when filling points>
Next, the point filling control process will be explained. The point filling time control process is executed by the sound and light side MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine (FIG. 55: S12202) of the point provision performance execution process.

FIG. 57 is a flowchart showing the point filling control process. In step S12401, it is determined whether the unprocessed flag is ON. As mentioned above, the unprocessed flag determines whether to execute a standby effect or a timer effect for the 10 accumulated points when 10 accumulated points are accumulated. This flag is turned ON when no processing has been performed yet, and turned OFF when the judgment processing is completed.

If it is determined in step S12401 that the unprocessed flag is ON (S12401: YES), the process advances to step S12404. The processing from step S12404 to step S12411 is a process of determining whether to execute a standby effect or a timer effect for the accumulated points of 10 points, and controlling the execution of either effect. be. Therefore, if it is determined that the unprocessed flag is ON, that is, if it is determined that 10 accumulated points have been accumulated, by executing the processes from step S12404 to step S12411, the accumulated points will be accumulated for 10 points. It is determined whether to execute a standby performance or a timer performance for the points, and the execution of either of the performances is controlled.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S12401 that the unprocessed flag is not ON (S12401: NO), the process advances to step S12402.

In step S12402, it is determined whether a variation command/type command has been received. That is, it is determined whether or not it is time to start a new game round. In step S12402, if it is determined that the variation command/type command has been received, that is, if it is determined that it is time to start a new game round (S12402: YES), the process advances to step S12403.

In step S12403, it is determined whether the filled counter Cw=0. If it is determined in step S12403 that the filled counter Cw is not 0 (S12403: NO), the process advances to step S12404. That is, if there is one or more accumulated point groups corresponding to the 10 accumulated points described above, the process advances to step S12404.

Here, if it is determined in step S12402 that the fluctuation command/type command has been received (S12402: YES), and if it is determined in step S12403 that the filled counter Cw is not 0 (S12403: NO) , the reason for proceeding to step S12404 will be explained.

In this embodiment, the trigger for executing either the standby performance or the timer performance is the timing when 10 or more accumulated points are accumulated, as well as the timing when a new game round is started. When the game round in which the standby performance is being executed ends and the next new game round starts, and the new game round is the last game round of the continuous performance, the standby performance is executed. Instead, a timer effect is executed. To explain with reference to FIG. 15, the standby performance that started to be executed in the game round U2, which is the carryover game round, is switched to the timer performance 1 at the timing when the game round U3, which is the final game round of continuous performance, is started.

Therefore, even if it is determined in step S12401 that the unprocessed flag is not ON (S12401: NO), by executing step S12402, it is determined that a new game round has started (S12402: YES), and if it is determined by executing step S12403 that there is one or more accumulated point group (accumulated points worth 10 points) (S12403: NO), the process advances to step S12404, and steps S12404 to S12411 By executing the process, it is necessary to determine whether to execute the standby effect or the timer effect for the 10 accumulated points. Therefore, if it is determined in step S12402 that the variation command/type command has been received (S12402: YES), and if it is determined in step S12403 that the filled counter Cw is not 0 (S12403: NO). , the process advances to step S12404.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S12402 that the fluctuation command/type command has not been received (S12402: NO), and if it is determined in step S12403 that the filled counter Cw=0, (S12403: YES) ), this point filling control process ends.

In step S12404, it is determined whether the carryover game round flag of the game round to be processed is ON. In step S12404, if it is determined that the carryover game round flag of the game round to be processed is ON (S12404: YES), the process advances to step S12405.

In step S12405, a standby performance video display start command corresponding to the value of the filled counter Cw is transmitted to the display side MPU 102. When the display-side MPU 102 receives the standby performance video display start command, it executes a process of displaying a waiting performance video corresponding to the value of the filled counter Cw on the symbol display device 41. For example, when the filled counter Cw=1, one image (see FIG. 17) showing a waiting effect is displayed. When the filled counter Cw=2, two images showing a waiting effect are displayed. After executing step S12405, the process advances to step S12406.

In step S12406, outputting of audio corresponding to the moving image for standby effect is started, and control for causing the various lamps 47 to emit light corresponding to the moving image for standby effect is started. After executing step S12406, the process advances to step S12411.

In step S12411, if the unprocessed flag is ON, the unprocessed flag is turned OFF. Thereafter, this point filling control process is ended.

On the other hand, in step S12404, if it is determined that the carryover game round flag of the game round to be processed is not ON (S12404: NO), the process advances to step S12407.

In step S12407, the time until the button effect is executed is obtained based on the effect pattern of the game round to be processed. For example, if one button press effect is executed in the game round to be processed, the time until the button press effect is executed is obtained, and when two button press effects are executed in the game round to be processed. In this case, the time required to execute the two button press effects is obtained. After executing step S12407, the process advances to step S12408.

In step S12408, a timer effect video display start command corresponding to the remaining time until each button press effect is transmitted to the display side MPU 102. When the display side MPU 102 receives the timer performance video display start command, it executes a process of displaying a timer performance video corresponding to the remaining time until each button press performance on the symbol display device 41. For example, when one button press effect is executed in the game round to be processed, a timer effect animation is displayed in which the time until the button press effect is executed is counted down. When executing a button press effect twice in the game round to be processed, a timer effect video is displayed that counts down the time until the first button press effect is executed, and a timer effect video is displayed that displays the time until the second button press effect is executed. A timer effect animation is displayed in which the time until the press effect is executed is counted down (see FIG. 19(a)). After executing step S12408, the process advances to step S12409.

In step S12409, output of audio corresponding to each timer effect moving image is started, and control for causing the various lamps 47 to emit light corresponding to the timer effect moving image is started. After executing step S12409, the process advances to step S12410.

In step S12410, the value of the filled counter Cw is reset to zero. After executing step S12410, the process advances to step S12411.

As described above, in step S12411, if the unprocessed flag is ON, the unprocessed flag is turned OFF. Thereafter, this point filling control process is ended.

<Button press effect processing>
Next, the button press effect processing will be explained. The button press effect processing is executed by the sound and light side MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine (FIG. 55: S12203) of the point giving effect execution process.

FIG. 58 is a flowchart showing button press effect processing. In step S12501, it is determined whether or not it is the timing to start the button press effect based on the effect pattern set for the game round to be processed. In step S12501, if it is determined that it is the timing to start the button press effect (S12501: YES), the process advances to step S12502. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S12501 that it is not the timing to start the button press effect (S12501: NO), this button press effect process is ended.

In step S12502, a button press animation display start command is sent to the display side MPU 102. When the display side MPU 102 receives the button press effect video display start command, it executes a process of displaying the button press effect video (see FIG. 14(b)) on the symbol display device 41. After executing step S12502, the process advances to step S12503.

In step S12503, output of audio corresponding to the button press effect animation is started, and control for causing the various lamps 47 to emit light corresponding to the button press effect animation is started. After executing step S12503, this button press effect processing is ended.

<Point reset processing>
Next, the point reset process will be explained. The point reset process is executed by the sound and light side MPU 92 of the sound and light emission control device 90 as a subroutine (FIG. 55: S12204) of the point grant performance execution process.

FIG. 59 is a flowchart showing point reset processing. In step S12601, it is determined whether or not it is the timing to end the game round based on the performance pattern set for the game round to be processed. In step S12601, if it is determined that it is the timing to end the game round (S12601: YES), the process advances to step S12602.

In step S12602, it is determined whether the carryover game times flag is ON. In step S12602, if it is determined that the carryover game times flag is not ON (S12602: NO), the process advances to step S12603.

In step S12603, the accumulated point counter Cpnt is reset (Cpnt←0). That is, since the accumulated points are not carried over in game rounds other than the carryover game round which is the game round in which accumulated points are carried over, the accumulated point counter Cpnt corresponding to the accumulated points in the relevant game round is set to 0 at the end of the relevant game round. After executing step S12603, this point reset process ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S12601 that it is not the timing to end the game round (S12601: NO), and if it is determined in step S12602 that the carryover game round flag is ON (S12602: YES), the accumulated point counter This point reset processing ends without resetting Cpnt.

<Stage display control processing>
Next, stage display control processing will be explained. The stage display control process is a process for controlling the color of the stage St. The stage display control process is executed by the sound and light side MPU 92 of the sound and light emission control device 90 as a subroutine (FIG. 55: S12205) of the point giving performance execution process.

FIG. 60 is a flowchart showing stage display control processing. In step S12701, it is determined whether the value of the accumulated point counter Cpnt is 0 or not. If it is determined in step S12701 that the value of the accumulated point counter Cpnt is 0 (S12701: YES), the process advances to step S12702.

In step S12702, a stage video display start command with the color of stage St set to white is transmitted to the display-side MPU 102. When the display side MPU 102 receives the stage video display start command, it executes a process of displaying the stage video in which the color of the stage St is set to white on the symbol display device 41. In this embodiment, if points are not accumulated, the stage St is set to white even if the game round to be processed is a carryover game round or the final game round of continuous performance. After executing step S12702, this stage display control process ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S12701 that the value of the accumulated point counter Cpnt is not 0 (S12701: NO), the process advances to step S12703.

In step S12703, it is determined whether the carryover game round flag of the game round to be processed is ON. In step S12703, if it is determined that the carryover game round flag of the game round to be processed is ON (S12703: YES), the process advances to step S12704.

In step S12704, a stage video display start command in which the color of stage St is set to yellow is transmitted to the display-side MPU 102. When the display-side MPU 102 receives the stage video display start command, it executes a process of displaying the stage video in which the color of the stage St is set to yellow on the symbol display device 41. As described above, in this embodiment, when points are accumulated in the carryover game round, the color of stage St is set to yellow. After executing step S12704, this stage display control process ends.

In step S12703, if it is determined that the carryover game round flag of the game round to be processed is not ON (S12703: NO), the process advances to step S12705.

In step S12705, a stage video display start command in which the color of stage St is set to orange is transmitted to the display-side MPU 102. When the display side MPU 102 receives the stage video display start command, it executes a process of displaying the stage video in which the color of the stage St is set to orange on the symbol display device 41. As described above, in this embodiment, if points are accumulated in the final game of the continuous performance, the color of the stage St is set to orange. After executing step S12705, this stage display control process ends.

<Various processes executed in the display control device>
Next, processing executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 will be described.

The processes executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 are mainly a main process that is repeatedly executed after the power is turned on until the power is turned off, and a main process that is executed when a command is received from the audio emission control device 90. There are command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing that is executed when a V interrupt signal transmitted from the VDP 105 is detected. The V interrupt signal is a signal sent from the VDP 105 to the MPU 102 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process for one frame of images is completed.

The MPU 102 executes main processing after power is turned on, and executes command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing in response to receiving a command or detecting a V interrupt signal. Note that if command reception and V interrupt signal detection are performed at the same time, command interrupt processing is executed with priority. Therefore, it is possible to quickly reflect the contents of the command received from the audio emission control device 90 and execute the V interrupt process.

<Main processing>
Next, the main processing executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 will be described.

FIG. 61 is a flowchart showing the main processing executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100. As described above, the main process is a process that is executed when the power is turned on and continues to be executed until the power is turned off. The processing of each step executed in the main processing will be described below.

In step S12801, initial setting processing is executed. Specifically, first, the MPU 102 is initialized and the memories in the work RAM 104 and video RAM 107 are cleared. Then, the compressed character information stored in the character ROM 106 is read out, the read character information is decompressed, and the decompressed character information is stored in the character area of the video RAM 107. Furthermore, in order to display the initial screen, information corresponding to the initial screen is extracted from the character information written in the video RAM 107, and the extracted character information is written into the frame buffer area of the video RAM 107. Also perform other settings necessary for initialization. After that, the process advances to step S12802.

In step S12802, interrupt permission setting is executed. After the interrupt permission setting is executed, the main process executes an infinite loop process until the power is turned off. As a result, after the interrupt permission is set, command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing, which will be described below, are executed in accordance with command reception and V interrupt signal detection.

<Command interrupt processing>
Next, command interrupt processing executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 will be described. As described above, the command interrupt process is a process that is executed every time a command is received from the audio emission control device 90.

FIG. 62 is a flowchart showing command interrupt processing executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100. In step S12901, command storage processing is executed. In the command storage process, received command data is extracted and the extracted command data is stored in a command storage area provided in the work RAM 104. Various commands stored in the command storage area by the command storage process are read out by the command determination process of the V interrupt process, which will be described later, and the process corresponding to the command is executed.

<V interrupt processing>
Next, V interrupt processing executed in the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 will be described.

FIG. 63 is a flowchart showing V interrupt processing executed in the MPU 102 of the display control device 100. As described above, the V interrupt process is a process that is executed when the V interrupt signal from the VDP 105 is detected. In the V-interrupt processing, various processes corresponding to the commands stored in the command storage area by the command interrupt processing are executed, and after specifying an image to be displayed on the symbol display device 41, drawing and drawing of the image on the VDP 105 are performed. Execute the displayed instructions.

As described above, the V interrupt signal is a signal that is generated in the VDP 105 every 20 milliseconds when rendering processing for one frame of image is completed, and is also transmitted to the MPU 102. Therefore, by the MPU 102 executing the V interrupt processing in synchronization with this V interrupt signal, a drawing instruction to the VDP 105 is issued every 20 milliseconds when the drawing processing of one frame of image is completed. For this reason, the VDP 105 does not receive instructions to draw the next image before the image drawing or display processing has finished, so it may start drawing a new image in the middle of drawing an image, or display It is possible to prevent an image from being developed in accordance with a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer area in which image information is stored. The details of each step of the V interrupt processing will be described below.

In step S13001, command corresponding processing is executed. In the command corresponding processing, the contents of the command stored in the command storage area by the command interrupt processing (FIG. 62) are analyzed, and processing corresponding to the command is executed. Specifically, for example, if a production command is stored, control of image drawing and display is started so that the production mode specified by the production command is displayed on the symbol display device 41.

If the production operation command is stored, it is determined whether or not it is the acceptance period for pressing the production operation button 24, and if it is determined that it is the acceptance period for pressing the production operation button 24, the production operation is executed. Image drawing and display control is started so that the effect mode corresponding to the pressing of the button 24 is displayed on the pattern display device 41. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not the acceptance period for pressing the production operation button 24, the content of the next command is analyzed without executing the process.

Note that in the command correspondence processing (S13001), all commands stored in the command storage area at that time are analyzed, and processing corresponding to all the analyzed commands is executed. The reason for this will be explained. This is because the command determination process is performed at 20 millisecond intervals during which the V interrupt process is executed, so it is highly likely that a plurality of commands are stored in the command storage area during those 20 milliseconds. In particular, when the content of the production is set by the audio emission control device 90 and the production is started, there is a high possibility that various commands for specifying the content of the production are simultaneously stored in the command storage area. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands at the same time, it is possible to quickly grasp the mode of presentation such as a preview effect or a pattern for LCD set by the sound emission control device 90, and to design a presentation image according to the mode. Drawing of an image can be controlled so that it is displayed on the display device 41.

In step S13002, display setting processing is executed. In the display setting process, the content of the image for one frame to be displayed next on the symbol display device 41 is specified based on the type of screen to be displayed on the symbol display device 41 set by the command corresponding process (S13001) etc. . After that, the process advances to step S13003.

In step S13003, task processing is executed. In the task process, based on the content of the next frame of image to be displayed on the pattern display device 41, which is specified by the display setting process (S13002), the type of character (sprite, display object) constituting the image is determined. At the same time, for each character (sprite), various parameters necessary for drawing such as display coordinate position, magnification, rotation angle, etc. are determined. After that, the process advances to step S13004.

In step S13004, drawing processing is executed. In the drawing process, the types of characters that make up one frame and the parameters necessary for drawing each character, which are determined by the task process (S13003), are transmitted to the VDP 105. The VDP 105 executes the image drawing process based on this information, and also sends the image along with the drive signal in order to display the image drawn based on the information received during the previous V interrupt process on the pattern display device 41. The image data is transmitted to the symbol display device 41. Thereafter, the process advances to step S13005, and after other processing is executed, the V interrupt processing is ended.

As explained above, according to the present embodiment, the performance scenario is set so that the button press performance is executed when the result of the jackpot lottery is "big hit" or "missing (reach occurrence)". ing. Therefore, by executing the button press effect, the player recognizes that there is a high probability that the result of the jackpot lottery will be a ``jackpot'' or a ``miss (reach occurrence)'' if the button press effect is executed. It is possible to create a sense of expectation.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, if execution of a button press effect is set in the effect scenario, by executing the point granting effect until the button press effect is executed, the accumulated points will be 10 points. Points will be awarded in accordance with the above. Therefore, by executing the point awarding effect, a feeling of anticipation is created each time the point awarding effect is executed for the player who has recognized that the button press effect will be executed when the accumulated points reach 10 points or more. can be granted.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, there are cases in which the accumulated points accumulated in a game round are reset at the end of the game round, and cases in which they are carried over to the next game round without being reset. Accumulated points may be reset at the end of the game round, thereby making the player desire to accumulate 10 or more points by the end of the game round, and increasing player's expectations regarding the point award performance. The feeling can be further increased. Furthermore, when a player recognizes that a game round has started and points have been accumulated by executing a point awarding effect, the player is made aware of the timing of the end of the game round when the accumulated points may be reset. It is possible to draw attention to the manner in which accumulated points are accumulated, that is, the manner in which point awarding effects are executed.

In addition, since the accumulated points may be carried over to the next game round, even if the accumulated points do not accumulate over 10 points in the current game round, if they are carried over to the next game round, the relevant game round Since the points accumulated in the above are valid, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's expectation that the accumulated points do not accumulate more than 10 points.

In this embodiment, the color of stage St indicates to the player whether or not the accumulated points will be carried over, so even if the accumulated points do not accumulate over 10 points, the accumulated points will be 10 points or more in the next game session. It is possible to give the player a sense of expectation that there is a possibility of accumulating more than 10 points, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's sense of expectation in a game round in which the accumulated points do not accumulate more than 10 points.

In this embodiment, a button press effect is adopted as a process to be executed when 10 or more accumulated points are accumulated. When 10 points or more have been accumulated and the player feels a sense of accomplishment, a button press effect is executed to make the player actively participate in the game, draw more attention to the game, and increase the player's expectations. can be further increased.

In this embodiment, the accumulated points are suggested to the player as an image of a pearl on the stage St, so that the player can always be aware of the accumulated points.

In this embodiment, since a timer effect is executed, during the period from when the timer effect is executed to when the button press effect is executed, the button that is executed after the time suggested by the timer effect has elapsed is continuously pressed. It is possible to create a sense of expectation regarding the press effect. In addition, the timer effect counts down the remaining time until the button press effect, so the suggested remaining time decreases, increasing the player's sense of anticipation as the timing for the button press effect approaches. can.

Also, even if 10 accumulated points are accumulated, the standby effect may start and the timer effect may not be executed immediately after 10 accumulated points are accumulated, so the timer effect may not be executed immediately after 10 accumulated points are accumulated. By recognizing whether or not the button press effect will be executed, it is possible to give the player the pleasure of guessing the timing at which the button press effect will be executed.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the timer effect is executed in the game round in which the button press effect is executed, so when the timer effect is executed in the game round, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the game round, and the player can look forward to it. It can give a feeling.

In this embodiment, when 10 accumulated points are accumulated and the timer effect is to be executed in the next and subsequent game rounds, the standby effect is executed prior to the execution of the timer effect. Therefore, even during the period from when 10 accumulated points are accumulated until the timer effect is executed, the timer effect is made aware that the timer effect will be executed in a later game by executing the standby effect. It is possible to maintain the player's expectations for the game.

In this embodiment, whether or not a point awarding performance is executed in a predetermined game round, the number of points awarded in the point awarding performance, whether or not accumulated points are carried over, whether or not a standby performance is executed, whether or not a timer performance is executed, Each processing content in the game round, such as in which game round the button press effect is to be executed, is determined based on special information of the game round to be executed after the relevant game round (hereinafter also referred to as subsequent game round). . More specifically, if the result of the jackpot lottery in the subsequent game round is a "big hit" or "missing (reach occurrence)", a continuous performance is executed in which the subsequent game round is set as the final game round of the continuous performance. In that case, the game round is set as a carryover game round. That is, the processing content of the game round is determined based on the special information of the subsequent game round. By doing this, you can determine whether or not to perform a point awarding performance, the number of points to be awarded in the point granting performance, whether or not accumulated points are carried over, whether or not to perform a standby performance, whether to perform a timer performance, button press performance, etc. It is possible to make each process related to each other over a plurality of game rounds. By creating a relationship between the processing content of each game round and the processing content of other game rounds, for example, when a predetermined process is executed in the current game round, the predetermined process and the processing content of the relevant game round can be linked. To make a player guess not only about the relevance to the progress of the game, but also about the relevance between the predetermined processing and the progress of a subsequent game round. That is, no matter how the game progresses in the current game round, it is possible to maintain various possibilities for the progress of subsequent game rounds, thereby maintaining the player's sense of anticipation.

In addition, in this embodiment, the more times the button press effects are executed in the continuous effect, the more the effects executed after each button press effect develop (the degree of expectation of winning the jackpot lottery suggested by the effect). By preparing a performance scenario set so that the performance increases (increasing), the player's expectation for the game can be increased each time the player presses the performance operation button 24 in the button press performance. Therefore, even if the execution period of a continuous performance is long, by increasing the number of button press performances according to the length of the execution period of the continuous performance, a decline in the player's concentration can be suppressed and the sense of anticipation can be further increased. can be increased.

A7. Modification of the first embodiment:
The present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiments, and can be implemented in various forms without departing from the spirit thereof. For example, the following modifications are also possible. In addition, in the modified example described below, description of the same configuration and processing as in the above embodiment will be omitted.

A7-1. Variation 1:
In the first embodiment, a configuration may be adopted in which points are always given when a specific performance is performed. As an example of realizing this configuration, it can be realized by setting it in advance in the production scenario and the point awarding scenario.

Specifically, after a predetermined performance (for example, a normal reach performance), a performance scenario is used to determine the case where a point award performance where the award points are not 0 is executed and the case where a point award performance where the award points are 0 is executed. and set in the point granting scenario. In this case, a case where a point awarding performance where the awarding point is not 0 and a case where a point awarding performance where the awarding point is 0 may be set in one production scenario and a point awarding scenario, or each It may be set to another production scenario and point awarding scenario. Furthermore, instead of the configuration in which a point granting performance in which the points awarded are 0 is executed after a predetermined performance, a configuration in which the point granting performance is not executed after a predetermined performance may be adopted, or both may be adopted. Good too.

On the other hand, the performance scenario and the point granting scenario are set so that after a specific performance (for example, a super reach performance), a point granting performance in which the granted points are not 0 is always executed. As a specific production, a specific reach production or a specific cut-in production may be adopted, or a special production may be adopted to suggest that a point award production where the award points are not 0 will be executed. good.

By doing this, if a specific performance is executed in a game round, points will always be awarded in that game round, so players who wish to receive points will be able to It is possible to create a sense of expectation for the game and draw attention to the game. Further, when a specific performance is executed, it is possible to give a feeling of exhilaration to the player who wanted to be given points, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

For example, if the accumulated points are 9 points, and if one more point is awarded, the accumulated points will become 10 points or more and a button press effect is executed, the player may can give a strong sense of expectation. Further, in such a situation, if a specific performance is executed and points are awarded, a strong sense of accomplishment can be given to the player.

A7-2. Variation 2:
In the first embodiment, a configuration may be adopted in which, when accumulated points in a game session in progress are carried over to the next game session, points are always awarded in the game session after the game session. As an example of realizing this configuration, it can be realized by setting it in advance in the production scenario and the point awarding scenario.

Specifically, a point award performance in which the award points are not 0 is always set in the performance scenario and point award scenario set in the final game of the continuous performance. Further, in the point awarding scenario, the total number of points awarded is always set to a point number that is not 0 for the carryover game times after the carryover game time executed first among the carryover game times in the continuous performance.

By doing so, it is possible to give players who wish to receive points a sense of expectation that the accumulated points will be carried over at the end of the game round. Therefore, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the game even at the end of the game round. Additionally, in the event that accumulated points are carried over at the end of a gaming session, it is expected that points will be awarded to players who desired to receive points in a gaming session that will be executed after the applicable gaming session. It is possible to give a sense of excitement and a feeling of exhilaration, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

For example, if the player is aware that if the accumulated points are carried over, points will always be awarded in the next game round, and the game round is about to end even though the accumulated points are 9 points. In some cases, if accumulated points are carried over, points will always be awarded and a button press effect will be executed in a later game, giving players a strong sense of expectation that accumulated points will be carried over. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in expectations when the accumulated points do not reach 10 points in the game round being executed. Further, in such a situation, if the accumulated points are carried over, it is possible to give the player a strong sense of accomplishment.

In addition, if accumulated points in the current game round are carried over to the next game round, points are not necessarily awarded in the game round after the current game round; A configuration may be adopted in which when a predetermined performance (for example, a performance in which a blue crayfish character appears) is executed, points are always awarded in a game after the relevant game. By doing so, it is possible to give a player who has executed a predetermined performance in the current game round a sense of anticipation for the next game round.

A7-3. Variation 3:
In the first embodiment, a configuration may be adopted in which a limit is placed on the number of times a point awarding performance in which the awarding point is 0 is executed in a point awarding performance executed in a series of game rounds in which continuous performances are performed. Alternatively, in a point award performance that is executed only once in a game, a configuration may be adopted in which a limit is placed on the number of times a point award performance in which the award points are 0 is executed. As an example of realizing this configuration, it can be realized by setting it in advance in the production scenario and the point awarding scenario.

I will explain in detail. As described above, in the point awarding scenario, the number of points awarded is set for each point awarding performance executed in the final game round of the continuous performance. Therefore, a limit is set on the number of points that can be set to "0" as the value of the number of points to be awarded for each point granting performance. For example, the number of points awarded is limited to a value of "0" which is set no more than three times.

In addition, in the performance pattern used for carryover game times and game times in which point awarding effects are executed only in one game time, "0" is set as the value of the number of points awarded for each point granting effect. Set limits.

By doing this, a player who recognizes that the number of executions of a point awarding performance in which the number of awarded points is 0 has reached the upper limit is given a strong sense of expectation that the point awarding performance will be executed. Can be done. This is because, if the number of executions of a point awarding performance in which the awarding point is 0 reaches the upper limit, points will always be awarded when the point awarding performance is executed thereafter. Therefore, even if a point awarding performance is executed in which the awarding points are 0, the player is given a sense of expectation that the number of executions of the point awarding performance in which the awarding points are 0 will reach the upper limit. be able to.

In other words, when a point awarding performance is executed, if the number of awarded points is not 0, points are awarded, which can give the player a sense of elation, and if the number of awarded points is 0, then the player is given a sense of elation. Even if this is the case, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation (a sense of expectation that the number of executions of a point awarding performance in which the number of award points is 0 will reach the upper limit). As a result, the player's sense of expectation is increased regardless of whether a point awarding performance in which the awarding points are not 0 is executed or a point awarding performance in which the awarding points are 0 is executed. Can be done.

A7-4. Modification example 4:
It may be configured such that a performance executed when accumulated points do not reach 10 points in a predetermined game round (hereinafter also referred to as an unfilled performance) can be executed during the game round. Further, the unfilled effect may be configured to be executed at a predetermined rate when the accumulated points do not reach 10 points.

Furthermore, when an unfilled effect is executed, the more points accumulated immediately before the unfilled effect is executed, the higher the expectation level (probability) that the result of the jackpot lottery in the relevant game round will be a "jackpot". It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the value is high.

Specifically, when the result of the jackpot lottery in the game round is a "jackpot", it is set so that the performance scenario in which the unfilled performance is executed is likely to be selected. For example, if the production scenario is selected by lottery using random numbers for lottery and lottery table data, the lottery table is set so that if the result of the jackpot lottery is a "jackpot", the unfilled production is executed. Set the data. Then, the lottery table data is set so that the probability that the performance scenario is selected is low (for example, less than 30%) except when the result of the jackpot lottery is a "big win". Furthermore, if the result of the jackpot lottery is a "jackpot", the point granting scenario applied to the performance scenario has a relatively large number of points accumulated just before the unfilled performance is executed (for example, 8 points or 9 points). ) Apply the point award scenario set so that On the other hand, if the result of the jackpot lottery is "missing (reach occurrence)", the point granting scenario applied to the relevant performance scenario has relatively few points accumulated just before the unfilled performance is executed (for example, 4 points or 5 points) is applied.

By doing this, even if the accumulated points do not reach 10 points or more in a predetermined game round and the button press effect is not executed, if the unfilled effect is executed, the more accumulated points, the more In the predetermined game round, the expectation level (probability) that the result of the jackpot lottery will be a "jackpot" is high, and a sense of expectation can be given to the player. In other words, if the accumulated points do not reach 10 points or more in a predetermined game round and the button press effect is not executed, and if the accumulated points are relatively large, the player has expectations that the unfilled effect will be executed. It can give a feeling.

Further, the unfilled performance may have a configuration in which the content of the performance differs depending on the amount of accumulated points before the unfilled performance is executed.

By doing so, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the content of the unfilled performance regardless of the amount of accumulated points, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Furthermore, the following configuration may be adopted. That is, it may be configured such that a performance executed after the unfilled performance (hereinafter also referred to as an unfilled development performance) can be executed in a game round. Also, when the accumulated points are less than 10 points and the unfilled development effect is executed after the unfilled effect is executed, it is better to do so than when the accumulated points are 10 points or more and the button press effect is executed. A configuration may be adopted in which the expectation level (probability) that the result of the jackpot lottery in the relevant game round is a "jackpot" is high. For example, if the performance scenario is selected by lottery using random numbers and lottery table data, if the result of the jackpot lottery is a "jackpot", the unfilled performance and unfilled development performance will be executed. Set lottery table data. Then, when the result of the jackpot lottery is other than "jackpot", the lottery table data is set so that the probability that the performance scenario will be selected is low (for example, less than 5%). Furthermore, if the result of the jackpot lottery is other than "jackpot", the lottery table data is set so that the probability that the performance scenario is selected is lower than the probability that the performance scenario including the button press performance is selected. By doing so, the configuration can be realized.

By doing this, the degree of expectation (probability) that the result of the jackpot lottery of the game round will be a "jackpot" is higher when the unfilled development effect is executed than when the button press effect is executed. is a high configuration. Therefore, even if the accumulated points do not reach 10 points in a game round and the button press effect is not executed, if the unfilled effect is executed, then the unfilled development effect will be executed for the player. It can give a strong sense of expectation about what will happen. Furthermore, when the unfilled development effect is executed, the expectation level (probability) that the result of the jackpot lottery in the gaming session is a "jackpot" is higher than when the button press effect is executed, so the unfilled development effect It is possible to give a stronger sense of expectation to the player who recognizes that the game has been executed. In summary, when the accumulated points reach 10 points or more, the button press effect is executed, so it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation, and even when the accumulated points do not reach 10 points, the button press effect is executed. , gives the player a sense of expectation that the unfilled performance will be executed, and further gives the player a strong expectation that the unfilled development performance will be executed when the unfilled performance is executed. can do. Therefore, no matter what the gaming situation is, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation.

A7-5. Variation 5:
In the first embodiment, the first executed game times display is shown in the first executed game times display area J1, the first pending game times display is shown in the first pending display area Ds1, and the second executed game times display is shown in the second executed game times display area J2. A configuration is adopted in which the display mode of each display (hereinafter collectively referred to as the game times display) of the second executed game times display and the second pending game times display shown in the second pending display area Ds2 is adopted. It's okay. Furthermore, a configuration may be adopted in which there is a temporal correlation between the timing at which points are awarded (that is, the timing at which the point assignment performance is executed) and the timing at which the display mode of the game round display is changed.

In this case, the display mode of the game round display may indicate the possibility (expectation level) of winning a jackpot in the jackpot lottery related to the game round corresponding to each game round display.

In this way, by changing the display mode of the game round display and awarding points in a manner that correlates with the timing, it is possible to synergistically increase the player's sense of expectation.

For example, a configuration may be adopted in which, during execution of a game round, the display mode of the game round display is changed and then a point awarding effect is executed within a predetermined time (for example, within one second). In this case, by making players who have increased their expectations upon realizing that the display format of the game times display has changed, make them realize that the point awarding effect has been executed within a predetermined time, the player can have an even stronger experience. It can give a sense of anticipation and elation. Note that if the game round for which the display mode of the game round display is to be changed is a game round that is currently being executed, it is possible to give the player a stronger sense of anticipation and elation.

Further, a configuration may be adopted in which the timing of changing the display mode of the game round display and the timing of executing the point award performance are performed at the same time during the execution of the game round. In this case, by making the player simultaneously aware of the change in the display mode of the game round display and the execution of the point award performance, the player's sense of expectation can be synergistically increased. Note that if the game round for which the display mode of the game round display is to be changed is a game round that is currently being executed, it is possible to give the player a stronger sense of anticipation and elation.

In addition, a configuration may be adopted in which the display mode of the game round display is changed within a predetermined period of time (for example, within 1 second) after the point award performance is executed during the execution of the game round. In this case, by making the players who have increased their expectations after realizing that the point awarding effect has been executed, make them aware that the display format of the game play display has changed within a predetermined time, It can give a sense of anticipation and elation. Furthermore, if the game round for which the display mode of the game round display is to be changed is a game round that is currently being executed, it is possible to give the player a stronger sense of anticipation and elation.

Furthermore, a configuration may be adopted in which the display mode after the game times display is changed and the number of points awarded by the point award performance have a correlation. By doing this, if the display mode after the change in the game times display is in a mode that meets the player's expectations, in other words, a display that suggests that the display mode after the change in the game times display has a high expectation level In this case, and in the case where the number of points awarded through the point award performance is relatively large, it is possible to give the player an even stronger sense of expectation and superiority.

Furthermore, the higher the level of expectation suggested by the display mode after the change in the game session display, the greater the number of points awarded by the point awarding performance that is executed in a temporal correlation with the change in the display mode of the game session display. configuration may be adopted. That is, when the display mode after the change in the display mode of game times is the first display mode, the number of points awarded by the point awarding performance that is executed in a temporal correlation with the change in the display mode is set as the first display mode. If the display mode after the change in the game times display is the second display mode that suggests a higher level of expectation than the first display mode, then the change in the display mode and the time Adopts a configuration in which when the second number of points is the number of points awarded by the point awarding performance executed with correlation, the average value of the second number of points is larger than the average value of the first number of points. You may.

By doing this, when the expectation level (probability) that the result of the jackpot lottery in the game round is a "jackpot" is high, the probability of changing the display mode of the game round display to the second display mode is high, and further , when the game times display changes to the second display mode, points are awarded in a temporal correlation with the change in the display mode of the game times display, compared to when the game times display changes to the first display mode. Since there are many cases in which a large number of points are awarded depending on the effect, by correlating the timing of the change in the display mode of the game round display and the execution of the point award effect, it is possible to It is possible to synergistically increase a player's sense of expectation.

It should be noted that all of the above configurations can be realized by setting the display mode of the game round display to the performance scenario. For example, by using a performance scenario that is set so that the display mode of the game round display changes from white to red at the same time as the point awarding performance is executed, during the execution of the game round, which is one of the configurations described above, It is possible to realize a configuration in which the timing of changing the display mode of the game round display and the timing of executing the point award performance are made at the same time.

In addition, for a performance scenario that is set to change the display mode of the game session display to a display mode that suggests a high level of expectation, points are executed in a temporal correlation with the change in the display mode of the game session display. By applying a point award scenario in which the value of the number of points awarded by the award effect is set to a large value, the expectation level suggested by the display mode after the change in the game times display, which is one of the configurations described above, is It is possible to realize a configuration in which the higher the value, the greater the number of points awarded by the point award performance executed in temporal correlation with the change in the display mode of the game round display. Note that shapes, patterns, colors, characters, etc. can be adopted as display modes for displaying game times.

Furthermore, the performance that has a temporal correlation with the timing of changing the display mode of the game time display is not limited to the configuration in which the point awarding performance is performed. A configuration may be adopted in which the timing at which a predetermined effect (for example, a reach effect) is executed has a temporal correlation. Even in this manner, it is possible to synergistically increase the player's expectations regarding the result of the jackpot lottery.

A7-6. Variation 6:
In the first embodiment, the number of points to be awarded is set in advance in the point granting scenario (see FIG. 46) for each point granting performance executed in the final game of the continuous performance. A configuration may be adopted in which the number of points to be given in each point giving performance is set in real time during execution. For example, in the point awarding scenario, the number of executions of the point awarding performance executed in the final game of the continuous performance and the total number of points awarded in the final game of the continuous performance are set as information, and the total value of the number of points awarded in the final game of the continuous performance is set as information. After the start of the round, a lottery may be held based on the information to determine the number of points to be awarded in each point award performance. By doing so, it is difficult for the player to guess the pattern in which points are awarded, and it is possible to draw the player's attention to the game.

A7-7. Modification example 7:
In the first embodiment, a configuration may be adopted in which an effect is performed to reduce accumulated points. By doing so, it is possible to give tone to the player's expectations for the game. In addition, in this embodiment, a configuration is adopted in which a button press effect is executed when the points increase and reach 10 points, but a predetermined number of points have been accumulated from the start of the game round, and the points are A configuration may be adopted in which a subtraction effect is executed, and when the accumulated points reach a predetermined number of points or less, a button press effect is executed. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which 10 points are accumulated at the start of a game round, and the points are reduced as needed by the effect of subtracting points, and when the point reaches 0 points, a button press effect is executed.

A7-8. Modification example 8:
In the embodiment described above, the timing for executing the point award performance is set in advance in the performance scenario, but is not limited to such a configuration, and other configurations may be adopted. This will be explained in detail below.

In the first embodiment described above, when setting the performance for the final game of continuous performance, a configuration was adopted in which a performance scenario in which the timing for executing the point awarding performance was set in advance was used, but in this modification, A configuration is adopted in which a performance scenario in which one or more timings (hereinafter also referred to as candidate timings) are set as timings at which the point awarding performance can be executed, that is, timings that are candidates for the timing at which the point awarding performance is executed is used. In addition, in the first embodiment, when setting a performance for a game round in which a point granting performance is executed using only one game round, and when setting a performance for a carryover game round, the point granting performance is Although we have adopted a configuration in which a performance pattern is used in which the timing to execute and the number of points to be awarded in each point granting performance are set in advance, in this modification, similarly to the case where the performance for the final game of the continuous performance is set, A configuration is adopted in which a production scenario in which one or more candidate timings are set is used.

FIG. 64 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the production scenario and point awarding scenario of the final continuous production game in Modification 8. FIG. 64 shows, as an example, a performance scenario and a point awarding scenario for a carryover game round and a continuous performance final game round for a continuous performance in which the number of executed games (Np)=2. In this modification as well, similarly to the first embodiment, the performance scenario of the continuous performance final game round is set based on the temporary variation time of the game round set as the continuous performance final game round. As mentioned above, in the production scenario in this modified example, the timing to execute the button press production is set, but the timing to execute the point award production is not set, and the timing to execute the point award production is set. A plurality of candidate timings are set. In the performance scenario of FIG. 64, candidate timings are indicated by dashed arrows. The sound and light side MPU 92 selects one or more timings (hereinafter referred to as (also called execution timing).

In addition, in the first embodiment, as shown in the point granting scenario table for jackpot/reach in FIG. Scenarios are set, and after determining the number of executions of the continuous performance, one of the two point awarding scenarios set corresponding to the number of executions is determined by lottery. On the other hand, in this modification, one point granting scenario is set for each number of games played (Np) with respect to the point granting scenario corresponding to each performance scenario. FIG. 64 shows a point awarding scenario in which the number of consecutive games played is two (that is, the number of games played Np=2). As shown in the figure, the point granting scenario in this modification includes the total number of points to be awarded for each period up to each button press performance set in the performance scenario (hereinafter referred to as For the carryover game round, the value of the total awarded points, which is the total number of points to be awarded in the relevant game round, is set, as in the above embodiment.

The sound and light side MPU 92 determines the execution timing of the point award performance for the final game round of the continuous performance based on the total points awarded during the period and a plurality of candidate timings up to the period of each button press performance set in the performance scenario. , and the number of points to be awarded in each point granting performance. In the case of the example shown in FIG. 64, 13 points are set in the point granting scenario as the total points awarded during the period from the start of the final game of continuous performance to button press performance 1 (Bt1 in the figure), and candidates are There are 10 timings set in the production scenario. Therefore, for example, one or more execution timings are determined from 10 candidate timings, then the number of points to be awarded in the point granting performance to be executed at each determined execution timing is determined, and finally, each point granting performance to be executed is determined. A configuration is adopted in which the number of points to be awarded in the performance is determined by a lottery using random numbers.

In addition, various methods can be used to determine the execution timing of each point awarding performance and the number of points to be awarded in each point awarding performance. For example, an arbitrary value with an upper limit of 13 points, which is the total points awarded during the period from the start of the last game of the continuous performance to button press performance 1, is determined by lottery, and the determined value is used for the first point-granting performance. The number of points to be awarded will be determined. Next, an arbitrary value is determined by lottery, with the upper limit being the value obtained by subtracting the number of points awarded in the first point awarding performance from 13 points of the total points awarded for the period, and the determined value is used for the second point awarding performance. The number of points to be awarded is determined by In this way, the number of points to be given in the point awarding performance is determined by lottery in order, and the determined number of points is subtracted from the total number of points awarded for the period, which is 13 points, and finally the remaining number of points is 0. The lottery will be held until the There are 10 candidate timings from the start of the final continuous performance game to button press performance 1, so if the remaining points awarded have not reached 0 by the end of the 9th lottery, the final The number of points awarded in the 10th point award performance is automatically determined to be the remaining number of points. In this way, after determining the number of times the point awarding performance is executed and the number of points to be awarded in each point awarding performance, a number of execution timings corresponding to the number of times the point awarding performance is executed are selected by lottery from among the candidate timings of the production scenario. Determined by

As in this modified example, by determining the timing to execute the point awarding performance and the number of points to be awarded in each point awarding performance by lottery, even if the performance scenario is the same, the timing of executing the point awarding performance and the number of points to be awarded in each point awarding performance are determined by lottery. Since there is no pattern in the number of points given, players can be prevented from becoming bored, and can be made to make various guesses, giving them a sense of anticipation. For this reason, in this modification, only one point awarding scenario is set for each number of games played (Np) with respect to the point awarding scenario corresponding to each performance scenario. That is, in this modified example, even if only one point awarding scenario is set for each number of executed games (Np) with respect to the point awarding scenario corresponding to each performance scenario, multiple point awarding patterns are set. Is possible.

In addition, in the above explanation, the timing to execute the point award performance in the final game of the continuous performance and the method of determining the number of points to be awarded in each point award performance were described. It can also be adopted in times. In the first embodiment, the execution timing of the point awarding effect when executing the point awarding effect in a carryover game round and when executing the point giving effect during a single game round is set in advance in the effect pattern. However, as in this modification, the execution timing of the point award performance and the number of points to be awarded in each point award performance may be determined by lottery. In this case, first, a production scenario is determined based on the variation time of the carryover game times. As shown in FIG. 64, a plurality of candidate timings are set in the performance scenario prepared for the carryover game round, similar to the performance scenario for the above-described continuous performance final game round. Then, based on the candidate timing set in the production pattern of the game round and the total points awarded for the game round, a point award performance is executed by lottery, similar to the final game round of the continuous performance described above. The timing to do so and the number of points to be given in each point giving performance are determined. In the first embodiment described above, a performance pattern was used in which the execution timing of the point granting performance and the number of points to be given in each point granting performance were set in advance. However, as in this modification, the timing to execute the point granting performance By determining the number of points to be awarded in each point awarding performance by lottery, multiple candidates can be created in the same way as in the final game of the continuous performance of this modification, without using the performance pattern as in the first embodiment. A production scenario with set timing can be used. By doing this, even in a performance scenario in which the same performance is performed, the execution timing of the point award performance and the number of points awarded do not become patterned, which prevents the player from getting bored and prevents the player from getting bored. It is possible to make people make various guesses, and it is possible to give a sense of expectation.

In addition, in the first embodiment, the performance pattern of the carryover game round corresponds to the total award points set in the point grant scenario determined based on the last game round of continuous performance and the fluctuation time in the carryover game round. The performance pattern was determined by referring to the point award performance pattern table. On the other hand, in this modification, regardless of the total awarded points, the performance pattern is determined based on the fluctuation time in the carryover game round, and the performance pattern is determined based on the candidate timing set in the determined performance pattern and the total awarded points. Then, the execution timing of the point award performance and the number of points to be awarded in each point award performance are determined. Therefore, it is not necessary to provide a point award effect pattern table corresponding to the variable time of carryover game times and the total award points, and it is possible to provide a point award effect pattern table corresponding only to the variable time. That is, it is possible to provide a plurality of types of performance patterns that are suitable only for variable time without considering the total awarded points. Furthermore, since the timing at which points are awarded for each performance pattern is determined by lottery, the performance pattern and the timing at which points are awarded do not match, and players can always have a sense of anticipation. .

A7-9. Modification example 9:
In the above modification example 8, the point award scenario records the total points awarded in the relevant game round for the period corresponding to the carryover game round, and for the final game round of the continuous performance, each button press performance is recorded. Although the total points awarded for the period until execution is recorded, the configuration is not limited to this, and for example, the following configuration can be adopted.

FIG. 65 is an explanatory diagram illustrating modification example 9. In this modification, the point award scenario does not set the total points to be awarded for the period corresponding to the carryover game round, and the points will be awarded from the start of the carryover game round to the most recent button press performance. The number of points to be given, or the number of points to be given from one button press performance to the next button press performance, that is, the total points given for a period is set. Therefore, in the case of the example shown in FIG. 65, the total points awarded for the period from the start of the carryover game round until the button press performance (Bt1) of the final game round of the continuous performance is executed is set.

The structure of the production scenario is the same as in the eighth modification. That is, one or more candidate timings are set in the performance scenario of the carryover game round and the performance scenario of the final game round of continuous performance. The timing to execute the point awarding performance and the number of points awarded in each point awarding performance are determined by the number of points awarded by the time of pressing each button set in the point awarding scenario and each button set in the production scenario. Based on the candidate timing up to the press effect, it is determined by lottery as in the above modification 8. By doing this, the timing to execute the point awarding performance across the carryover game round and the final consecutive game round and the number of points to be given in each point granting performance are determined by lottery, so compared to the above modification 8. As a result, it is possible to further suppress patterning of the execution timing of the point award performance and the number of points awarded.

A7-10. Modification 10:
The point awarding performance is not limited to the presentation mode shown in the first embodiment (the presentation in which the turtle character awards points), and various modes can be adopted.

FIG. 66 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the point awarding effect in Modification 10. As shown in FIG. 66(a), for example, an image showing a roulette wheel for determining points to be awarded may be displayed on the display surface 41a. Numbers (for example, 0 to 19) corresponding to the number of points that may be awarded are displayed on the roulette wheel. After rotating the roulette, as shown in FIG. 66(b), the rotation of the roulette is stopped, and as shown in FIG. 66(c), the number of points corresponding to the number pointed by the arrow stopped on the roulette is awarded. do. By making the point award performance in this manner, it is possible to give the player a sense of anticipation for the points that will be awarded during the period when the roulette wheel is spinning. Further, since roulette includes "0 (zero)" as the number of points awarded, it is possible to give the player a sense of urgency as well as a sense of anticipation.

Furthermore, a configuration may be adopted in which the point award performance spans a plurality of game rounds. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which the rotation of the roulette is not stopped in the game round in which the rotation of the roulette has started, and the rotation of the roulette is stopped in the game round after the game round. In this way, by executing a point awarding effect that spans multiple gaming sessions (hereinafter also referred to as a carryover point awarding presentation), players can feel a sense of anticipation and tension regarding the points that will be awarded to them over a long period of time across multiple gaming sessions. can be granted.

For example, if a game round is on hold and it is decided that points will be awarded in that game round, a carryover point awarding effect will be applied in a game round to be executed before the relevant game round (preceding game round). A process is executed to set the performance scenario of the preceding game so that the roulette animation shown in FIG. 1 is displayed on the display screen 41a. At the time when it is decided to award points in a suspended gaming session (pending gaming session), if the preceding gaming session has not yet been executed, a carryover point awarding effect will be executed in the preceding gaming session. Set in the performance scenario. In addition, at the time when it is decided to award points for a game session that is on hold (pending game session), if a preceding game session that is to be executed prior to the pending game session has already been executed, then at that time In real time, a roulette video showing a carryover point award performance in the preceding game round being executed is started to be displayed. By displaying the roulette video layer showing the carryover point granting performance as a layer higher than the video layer of the performance in the preceding game round, the point granting performance can be started from the preceding game round. In this case, for example, by displaying the roulette video showing the carryover point award performance at a position close to the periphery of the display surface 41a, it is possible to suppress the difficulty for the player to visually recognize the display of the video for the performance in the preceding game round. can do.

In addition, in the carryover point granting performance of this modified example, the first performance is a performance in which the roulette is rotated and then until the roulette stops rotating, that is, a performance that suggests that points will be awarded. stops rotating, the points to be awarded are announced, and the pearl image indicating the accumulated points on stage St changes to display the accumulated points after the points have been awarded. In other words, the points are not awarded. If the second performance is a performance that indicates that the first performance is started in the preceding game round, and the second performance is executed in the game round that is executed after the preceding game round, Various aspects can be adopted.

By adopting a configuration in which the first performance is started in the preceding game round and the second performance is executed in the game round executed after the preceding game round, the following effects can be created. The first effect can give the player a sense of expectation that there is a possibility that points will be awarded. Since the second performance is a performance indicating that points will be awarded, the player who recognizes the second performance will be made to recognize that points have been awarded, and will be given a sense of superiority and satisfaction. Can be done. Further, by combining the configuration of the first embodiment and the configuration of this modification, the following effects can be created. If the preceding game round is the first game round, and the game round executed after the preceding game round is the second game round, then the first effect corresponding to the points awarded in the second game round is the first game round. There are cases where it starts in the game round and cases where it starts at the second game round. In other words, if the first performance is executed in a predetermined game round, points will be awarded in the predetermined game round, and points will be awarded in the game round executed after the predetermined game round. When the player recognizes that the first effect has been executed, he or she can make a guess as to which of the cases is the case, thereby creating a sense of anticipation.

In addition, in a configuration in which the first performance is started in the preceding game round and the second performance is executed in the game round executed after the preceding game round, the period from the start to the end of the first performance is the first game. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the second effect is executed in the first game round and the second effect is executed from the start to the end in the second game time, or the first effect shows the roulette spinning as the first effect. A configuration may be adopted in which a performance starts in a game round and the rotating roulette stops in the first performance, and a configuration in which the second performance is executed from the start to the end in the second game round. Moreover, any of these configurations may be employed simultaneously. If either configuration is adopted and a configuration in which the point awarding performance does not span game rounds is also used, the player who recognizes that the first performance has started in a predetermined game round will receive a roulette To provide a feeling of enjoyment and anticipation of guessing whether or not the rotation of will stop in the relevant game round. If the roulette wheel stops in the relevant game round, whether the points corresponding to the number of awarded points indicated by the stoppage of the roulette wheel will be awarded in the relevant game round or in the game round after the relevant game round. Adds the fun and anticipation of guessing what will be granted. Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with a sense of enjoyment and anticipation in stages.

Furthermore, as described in the first embodiment, the accumulated points may or may not be reset at the end of the game round, so the accumulated points may be accumulated by the player even at the end of the game round. You can draw attention to the points. Furthermore, according to this modification, when the first performance is executed, points are awarded in the predetermined game round and points are awarded in the game round executed after the predetermined game round. This allows players to pay attention to the transition between game rounds. Therefore, it is possible to give the player various expectations at the time of transition between game rounds.

Note that the first effect and the second effect in this modification are not limited to the configuration described in this modification, and various effects can be adopted. For example, among the point awarding effects in the first embodiment, the effect from when a turtle character appears from the right end of the display surface 41a to dropping a pearl on which the number of points to be awarded is displayed is adopted as the first effect. Then, a turtle character drops a pearl with the number of points to be awarded displayed, the pearl reaches stage St, changes to an image of a pearl corresponding to the accumulated points, and the point awarding performance ends. It may also be adopted as a second performance.

A7-11. Modification example 11:
In the above-described first embodiment, a configuration may be adopted in which the aspect of the point award performance differs depending on the size of the number of points provided in the point award performance. For example, the color of the shell of a turtle, which is a character displayed in a point awarding performance, is displayed in white when the number of points awarded is 0 to 2 points, and yellow when the number of points awarded is 3 to 6 points. If the number of points awarded is 7 to 9, it will be displayed in blue, if the number of points awarded is 10 to 15, it will be displayed in green, and if the number of points awarded is 16 to 20, it will be displayed in blue. In some cases, a configuration may be adopted in which the information is displayed in red. Such a configuration can be realized, for example, by the following processing. In step S12303 of the point accumulation process (FIG. 56), after reading the number of awarded points, the color of the turtle's shell to be displayed in the point assignment presentation is determined according to the size of the loaded awarded points. Then, in step S12304, a video display start command for point awarding performance includes information on the color of the turtle's shell to be displayed in the point awarding performance, and is transmitted to the display side MPU 102. When the display side MPU 102 receives the video display start command for point awarding performance, it reads the information on the color of the turtle's shell included in the video display start command for point awarding performance, and displays the color of the shell according to the information. Processing is executed to display on the pattern display device 41 a performance video of a point award performance in which a turtle is displayed. By doing so, this configuration can be realized. With such a configuration, in addition to displaying the number of points displayed in the point award performance, the color of the turtle's shell can give the player a sense of expectation and superiority.

In addition, for example, in the first embodiment, a configuration is adopted in which the number of points awarded by the point granting performance is displayed on the pearl dropped by the turtle character in the point granting performance. A configuration may also be adopted in which the number is not displayed and the color of the pearls dropped by the turtle varies depending on the size of the number of points awarded in the point assignment performance. Such a configuration can also be realized by a process similar to the above-described process of displaying the color of the turtle's shell in a different color depending on the size of the number of points awarded in the point award performance. That is, in step S12303 of the point accumulation process (FIG. 56), after reading the number of awarded points, the color of the pearl to be displayed in the point granting performance is determined according to the size of the loaded awarded points. Then, in step S12304, a video display start command for point awarding effect includes information on the color of the pearl to be displayed in the point awarding effect, and is transmitted to the display side MPU 102. When the display side MPU 102 receives the video display start command for point awarding performance, it reads the information on the color of the pearl included in the video display start command for point awarding performance, and displays the pearl of the color according to the information. A process for displaying a video for a point giving performance on the pattern display device 41 is executed. In the case of this modification, since the number of points is not displayed on the pearls dropped by the turtle character in the point awarding performance, the display side MPU 102 performs the point awarding performance in which the number of points is not displayed on the pearls dropped by the turtle character. A process for displaying a moving image on the symbol display device 41 is executed. By doing this, even when the execution of the point awarding effect starts, the player cannot clearly understand the points that will be awarded, so the player is given a sense of expectation regarding the number of points that will be awarded. be able to. Furthermore, since the color of the pearls dropped by the turtles differs depending on the size of the number of points to be awarded, the player is given the pleasure of guessing the number of points to be awarded based on the color of the pearls. Can be done.

In addition, a configuration may be adopted in which the characters displayed in the point granting performance differ depending on the size of the number of points awarded in the point granting performance. For example, if the points to be awarded are 0 to 2 points, the character to be displayed in the point granting performance is set to a turtle character, and if the points to be awarded is 3 to 6 points, the character to be displayed is set to be an octopus character. , if the points awarded are 7 to 9 points, set it to the crab character, and if the points awarded are 10 to 15 points, set it to the shark character, and the points awarded are 16 to 20 points. In this case, a configuration may be adopted in which the character is set as a whale. This configuration is also realized by the same processing as the configuration described above, that is, the configuration in which the color of the turtle's shell and the color of the pearls dropped by the turtle are changed depending on the size of the number of points awarded in the point awarding performance. be able to.

In addition, when the accumulated points exceed the threshold (10 points) due to the point granting performance being executed and points being awarded, the point granting performance that is executed is the same as the point granting performance that is executed in other cases. A configuration may be adopted in which the settings are set in a different manner. For example, if the accumulated points are 3 points and a point awarding effect that awards 9 points is executed, the accumulated points will exceed 10 points, so the character displayed in the point awarding effect will be changed to the normal character. A configuration may be adopted in which a whale character is set in place of the turtle character displayed during the point awarding performance. In addition, if the accumulated points exceed the threshold (10 points) due to the execution of the point granting performance and points are awarded, and the number of points awarded by the point granting performance is greater than or equal to a predetermined value. In some cases, a configuration may be adopted in which the point awarding effect is set in a different manner from that executed in other cases. For example, if the accumulated points exceed the threshold (10 points) as a result of a point granting performance being executed and points being awarded, and the number of points awarded by the point granting performance is 8 points or more, , the character displayed in the point awarding performance is set to be a crab character instead of a turtle character, and the crab character is set to drop a larger pearl than usual. Good too.

Such a configuration can be realized, for example, by the following processing. In the point accumulation process (FIG. 56), based on the performance scenario and the point granting scenario, it is determined whether the point granting performance to be executed is the last point granting performance to be executed before the button press performance, and the point is awarded. This can be realized by determining whether the points awarded in the performance are equal to or greater than a predetermined value (for example, 8 points). That is, in the point accumulation process (FIG. 56), based on the performance scenario and the point award scenario, the point award performance to be executed is the last point award performance to be executed before the button press performance, and in the point award performance, When it is determined that the points to be awarded are equal to or greater than a predetermined size (for example, 8 points), the crab character starts displaying a video for point awarding effects that is set to drop a larger pearl than usual. The command is sent to the display side MPU 102. When the display-side MPU 102 receives the video display start command for point awarding performance, it executes processing for displaying on the pattern display device 41 a video for producing a point awarding performance in which a crab character drops a larger pearl than usual. do. By doing so, this configuration can be realized. With this configuration, when a crab character drops a larger pearl than usual, the player is more impressed than when a normal point awarding effect is executed. It can give a sense of expectation and superiority. In addition, it is possible to give players a sense of anticipation that a point awarding performance will be performed during the game, and it is also possible to create a point granting performance in which the crab character drops a larger pearl than usual. It is possible to give the player a sense of expectation.

In addition, the following configuration may be adopted. For example, when a point granting effect is executed and points are awarded, accumulated points exceed a threshold (10 points), and a super reach effect is executed after a button press effect that is executed when accumulated points exceed the threshold. In this case, a configuration may be adopted in which the mode of the point awarding performance executed before the super reach production is set to be different from the mode of the point awarding performance executed in other cases. . More specifically, in a state where the accumulated points are 5 points, a point awarding effect in which 9 points are awarded is executed and the accumulated points exceed the threshold (10 points), and the accumulated points exceed the threshold. When a super reach effect is executed after a button press effect executed by , the character displayed in the point award effect executed before the super reach effect is displayed during the normal point award effect. A configuration may be adopted in which a whale character is set instead of a turtle character. Note that the normal reach performance is a performance that is executed when the symbol is in the reach state. The super reach performance is a performance that suggests to the player that the expectation level (probability) of winning the jackpot lottery is higher than when only the normal reach performance is executed. In addition, with the special reach effect described below, the expectation (probability) of winning the jackpot lottery is higher than when only the normal reach effect is executed or when the super reach effect is executed in addition to the normal reach effect. This is a performance that suggests this to the player.

In addition, this configuration is executed after the accumulated points exceed the threshold (10 points) by executing the point granting effect and giving points, and after the button press effect is executed when the accumulated points exceed the threshold. This is not limited to the case where the performance is a super reach performance, but also when the performance executed after a button press performance that is executed when the accumulated points exceeds a threshold is a special reach performance, or when the performance is a special reach performance. It may be applied to a case where an immediate announcement is made (hereinafter also referred to as a one-shot announcement effect). In other words, the accumulated points exceed the threshold (10 points) by executing the point awarding effect and giving points, and after the button press effect executed when the accumulated points exceed the threshold, the special reach effect is executed. or when a one-shot announcement performance is executed, a configuration is adopted in which the mode of the point awarding performance to be executed is set to be different from the mode of the point awarding performance executed in other cases. do.

Such a configuration can be realized, for example, by the following processing. In the point accumulation process (FIG. 56), it is determined based on the performance scenario and the point granting scenario whether the point granting performance to be executed is the last point granting performance to be executed before the button press performance. Then, if it is determined that the point awarding performance to be executed is the last point awarding performance to be executed before the button press performance, based on the performance scenario, after the button press performance after the point awarding performance is executed, The type of performance is determined, and if it is determined that the performance is a specific type of performance, such as a normal reach performance, super reach performance, special reach performance, or one-shot announcement performance, depending on the type of each performance. Then, a point award performance in a special manner different from that in other cases is set as a point award performance before the button press performance. By doing so, the above configuration can be realized.

In this way, the accumulated points exceed the threshold (10 points) when the point granting effect is executed and points are awarded, and the effect is executed after the button press effect that is executed when the accumulated points exceed the threshold. Depending on the type of performance, points may be awarded by adopting a configuration in which the point awarding performance executed before the relevant production is different from the point awarding performance executed in other cases. In addition to giving the player a sense of expectation, it is possible to give the player a sense of other expectations and the fun of guessing the subsequent game. Furthermore, since there are a plurality of types of point awarding effects, it is possible to attract the attention of the player to the point awarding effects that are executed each time.

That is, in this modification, the performance scenario set for a game round is determined based on the jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, reach random number counter C3, and fluctuation type counter CS corresponding to the game round. Then, a point awarding scenario is determined based on the performance scenario determined based on the jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, reach random number counter C3, and fluctuation type counter CS corresponding to the game round, and the point awarding scenario and the points Based on the awarding scenario, the mode of point awarding performance to be executed in the relevant game round is determined.

A7-12. Modification example 12:
In the first embodiment, a configuration may be adopted in which the manner in which points are awarded indicates the subsequent progress of the game. For example, the mode of awarding points in which 3 points, 4 points, and 1 point are awarded according to each point awarding effect three times suggests that a special reach effect will be executed after the button press effect that is executed afterwards. 7 points, 7 points, 7 points are awarded according to the configuration and the three point award performances, and the one-shot announcement performance is executed after the button press performance that is executed afterwards. A configuration that suggests this can be adopted. Such a configuration can be realized, for example, as follows.

For point awarding scenarios that are linked to production scenarios in which specific productions such as special reach productions and one-shot announcement productions are set to be executed, each point awarding production set in the point awarding scenario is This configuration can be realized by setting the number of points to be awarded to a value of 3, 4, or 1 in advance, for example. By doing so, it is possible to draw the player's attention even more to the number of points awarded in each point awarding performance. Further, based on the manner in which points are awarded, the player can make various guesses about the subsequent progress of the game, and it is possible to give the player a greater sense of anticipation.

Note that the content suggested by the manner of awarding points is not limited to the performance that will be performed after that. For example, it may suggest the number of points that will be awarded in the performance that will be performed after that. It may indicate the result of a lottery, or it may indicate the carryover of accumulated points.

A7-13. Modification example 13:
In the first embodiment, a configuration may be adopted in which information regarding the mode of awarding points that have already been awarded (hereinafter also referred to as point awarding mode information) is displayed. For example, the history of the manner in which points are awarded may be displayed as the point granting manner information. Then, the history of the manner in which the points were given may be displayed using colors, characters, or the like.

FIG. 67 is an explanatory diagram illustrating modification example 13. FIG. 67 shows how the pearl image showing the points accumulated on stage St in the point giving performance displays the history of the manner in which the points were given.

FIG. 67(a) shows the accumulated points of stage St after the first (first) point awarding performance is executed and 4 points are awarded after the accumulated points are reset and a new game round is started. Ta. In this modification, the points accumulated by executing the first point award performance after the accumulated points are reset and a new game round is started are displayed as a white pearl image on the stage St.

FIG. 67(b) shows the accumulated points of stage St after the second point awarding performance is executed and 2 points are awarded from the state where the accumulated points are reset and a new game round is started. In this modification, the points accumulated by executing the second point award performance after the accumulated points are reset and a new game round is started are displayed as a yellow pearl image on the stage St.

FIG. 67(c) shows the accumulated points of stage St after the third point awarding effect is executed and 3 points are awarded after the accumulated points are reset and a new game round is started. In this modification, the points accumulated by executing the third point awarding performance after the accumulated points have been reset and a new game round has been started are displayed as a yellow-green pearl image on stage St. .

In this way, points are awarded by differentiating the images showing the points accumulated by executing each point awarding performance by color for each point awarding performance that triggered the award of the accumulated points. A history of aspects can be displayed. For example, when the player visually recognizes the pearl image indicating the accumulated points shown in stage St in FIG. 67(c), the player is awarded points in the order of 4 points → 2 points → 3 points. be able to recognize that.

This modification is realized, for example, by providing the sound and light side RAM 94 of the sound and light emission control device 90 with an award history storage area that is a storage area for storing the history of points given by the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment. be able to.

FIGS. 68 and 69 are explanatory diagrams illustrating the provision history area. As shown in FIG. 68(a), the award history storage area contains the number of points awarded (the number of times the point award effect is executed) and the number of times each award is given since the accumulated points are reset and a new game round is started. The color (display color) for displaying the pearl image corresponding to the points accumulated by the corresponding point awarding performance is set in advance, and each time the point awarding performance is actually executed, the storage area of the awarded points is (hereinafter also referred to as the awarded point storage area) stores a value indicating the awarded points. In the case of the award history area shown in Figure 68(a), 4 points are awarded by the first point awarding performance, 2 points are awarded by the second point awarding performance, and 3 points are awarded by the third point awarding performance. You can see that it has been granted.

FIG. 68(b) shows the awarding history storage area when the point awarding effect is executed one more time from the state of FIG. 68(a) and 6 points are awarded. In the award history storage area of this modification, each time 10 points are accumulated, the awarded points are stored in the storage area on the right side of the award point storage area. Since 9 points have already been accumulated in the first to third granting times, as shown in FIG. The points are stored in the storage area in the same column as the first to third points, and the remaining 5 points are stored in the storage area in the column to the right. When displaying an image of a pearl corresponding to the accumulated points on stage St, the display color corresponding to the awarded points in the rightmost column of the awarded point storage area and the number of grants is read, and the image of the pearl is displayed on stage St. Display. In this way, by dividing the storage area into 10-point units, when 10 points are accumulated, a timer effect (or standby effect) is executed, the accumulated points are subtracted by 10 points, and a new stage is added to stage St. Even if points are accumulated, the display color corresponding to the actual number of points awarded after the accumulated points have been reset and a new game session has started will be displayed in stage St to correspond to the accumulated points. Images of pearls can be displayed. Furthermore, the award history storage area shown in this modification can also accommodate a case where 10 or more points are awarded in one point award performance.

FIG. 69 shows the award history storage area when the point award effect is executed one more time from the state of FIG. 68(b) and 17 points are awarded. In this case, 5 points out of 17 points are stored in the second column of the awarded point storage area, so that the storage area in the second column has 10 points. Of the remaining 12 points, 10 points are stored in the third column of the awarded point storage area, and the remaining 2 points are stored in the fourth column of the awarded point storage area. In this way, even if 10 or more points are awarded in one point awarding performance, the display color corresponding to the award points in the rightmost column of the award point storage area and the number of award points is read. By this, it is possible to display an image of a pearl corresponding to the accumulated points on stage St in a display color corresponding to the number of points awarded actually performed after the accumulated points have been reset and a new game round has started. .

Also, the timing of storing, the timing of reading, and the timing of resetting the points to be given in the giving history storage area will be explained. When storing awarded points in the assignment history storage area, for example, when the number of awarded points to be executed is read in step S12302 of the point accumulation process (FIG. 56), the awarded points are stored in the assignment history storage area. A configuration in which information is stored in an area can be adopted. At this time, as explained above, each time 10 accumulated points are accumulated, the awarded points are stored in the storage area to the right of the awarded point storage area.

For reading the award history storage area, for example, in step S12310 of the point accumulation process (FIG. 56), the display color corresponding to the award points and the number of award points in the rightmost column of the award point storage area in the award history storage area is displayed. A point accumulation video display start command for displaying a pearl image (point accumulation video) in a display color corresponding to the number of points awarded is sent to the display MPU 102. The display-side MPU 102, which has received the point accumulation video display start command, displays an image of a pearl corresponding to the accumulated points on stage St in a display color corresponding to the number of points awarded.

Regarding the reset of the grant history storage area, for example, after the accumulated point counter Cpnt is reset in step S12603 of the point reset process (FIG. 59), the grant history storage area is reset. By executing such processing, the configuration in the modification can be realized.

By adopting the configuration of the modified example, it is possible for the player to check the history of the manner in which points are awarded, such as the number of times point awarding performance is executed and the number of points awarded in one point awarding performance. Furthermore, it is possible to make the player who has confirmed the history of the manner in which points are awarded guess the number of point awarding effects that will be executed afterwards, the number of points that will be awarded, etc., and give a sense of anticipation for the game. . In addition, as in Modification 12 above, if a configuration is adopted in which the manner of awarding points indicates the subsequent progress of the game, the history of the manner in which points are awarded as in this modification is available to the player. By allowing the player to confirm the game, it is possible to further encourage the player to speculate about the subsequent progress of the game, draw the player's attention to the game, and give the player a sense of anticipation. can do.

In addition, in this modification, the history of the manner in which points are awarded is displayed by the color of the pearl image indicating the accumulated points, but it is also displayed by a character that distinguishes the points awarded for each point assignment performance. Alternatively, they may be distinguished by marks, patterns, etc. Further, the points awarded for each point awarding performance may be directly displayed in numbers. For example, if 3 points, 4 points, and 1 point are awarded through three point assignment performances, "3, 4, 1" is displayed on the display surface 41a. In this way, as long as the history of the manner in which points are awarded can be recognized by the player, various display manners can be adopted.

Further, as the point grant mode information, information that allows only the number of points awarded during the execution of the most recently executed point grant performance may be displayed. For example, among the images of pearls displayed as accumulated points on stage St, only the images of pearls whose number corresponds to the number of points awarded during the most recently executed point-granting performance are different from other images of pearls. Configurations with different colors, patterns, shapes, etc. may be adopted.

A7-14. Modification example 14:
As the point award performance in the first embodiment, a mode may be adopted in which points are awarded multiple times in one point award performance. For example, among point awarding performances, the production in which a turtle character appears from the right end of the display surface 41a and drops a pearl displaying the number of points to be awarded is called a point awarding suggestion production, and the number of points to be awarded is called a point awarding production. A turtle character drops a pearl on which is displayed, the pearl reaches stage St, changes to a pearl image corresponding to the accumulated points, and the performance until the point granting performance ends is called a point grant execution performance. After the point provision suggestion performance is performed once, the point provision execution performance is performed twice.

FIG. 70 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an example of point awarding performance in modification example 14. As illustrated, FIG. 70(a) shows a state in which a point award suggestion performance is being executed among the point award performances. That is, it shows how a turtle character appears from the right end of the display surface 41a and an effect is performed until the point where the number of points to be awarded is displayed and the drop of pearls is started. FIG. 70(b) shows a state in which the first point grant execution performance is executed after the point grant suggestion performance is executed. As shown in the figure, the point grant execution performance is a performance indicating that 4 points will be awarded. FIG. 70(c) shows a state in which a second point granting performance is executed after the first point granting performance is performed. As shown in the figure, the point grant execution performance is a performance indicating that 5 points will be awarded. FIG. 70(d) shows a state in which the point awarding performance ends at the same time as the second point awarding execution performance ends.

By adopting such a configuration, a player who recognizes the point award suggestion performance is given a sense of expectation as to how many times the point award execution performance will be performed, that is, how many times points will be awarded. It can give a sense of expectation. In addition, if the point granting execution performance is executed multiple times after the point granting suggestion performance is executed once, it will be recognized that the point granting suggestion performance has been executed, and then the point granting execution performance will be executed once. It is possible to give surprise and surprise to the player who had guessed that the game would happen.

In addition, in FIG. 70, an example has been described in which two point award execution effects are executed for one point award suggestion effect, but N (N≧2) The point award execution effect may be executed an integer number of times. Further, the value of N may be different every time for each point awarding performance.

The point award performance in this modification can be realized, for example, as follows. For example, in the case where the point award execution performance is executed twice in response to one point award suggestion performance, in the point award scenario applied in the first embodiment, the points corresponding to the one point award suggestion performance are Divide the value (for example, 9 points) into two (for example, 4 points and 5 points), award one point (4 points) of the divided point value in the first point award execution performance, and execute the second point award. This can be achieved by giving the other point (5 points) of the point values divided by the performance. According to such processing, it is sufficient to obtain one point value set in the point provision scenario corresponding to the point provision suggestion performance to be executed. That is, even if the point award execution effect is executed N times for one point award suggestion effect, it is sufficient to obtain one point value set in the point award scenario. Then, the obtained point value is divided into N parts and used for each point award execution performance. Therefore, even if the point grant execution performance is executed N times in one point grant performance, the process from the point grant scenario to the process of obtaining the value of the points to be given is the same regardless of the value of N. Therefore, processing can be simplified. Furthermore, the value of points to be set in advance in the point granting scenario can also be set regardless of the value of N, making it possible to simplify the setting of the number of points to the point granting scenario.

In addition, the point award performance in this modification can be realized, for example, as follows. For example, in the case where two point award execution effects are executed for one point award suggestion effect, in the point award scenario applied in the first embodiment, the points corresponding to the two point award effects are Get the value. For example, if the number of points set as the first point awarding performance in the point awarding scenario is 4 points, and the number of points set as the second point awarding performance in the point awarding scenario is 5 points, , obtains the point value corresponding to the two point giving performances. Then, after performing one point granting suggestion performance, a first point granting execution performance is executed using 4 points, which is the number of points set as the first point granting performance in the point granting scenario, and then In the point granting scenario, the second point granting performance is executed using 5 points, which is the number of points set as the second point granting performance. The above configuration can also be achieved in this way. According to such processing, when performing N point award execution effects for one point award suggestion effect, the number of point award execution effects to be executed (N times) is determined from the point award scenario. Since it is only necessary to obtain the corresponding number (N) of point values, there is no need to perform processing such as dividing the point value corresponding to one point giving performance into N parts as in the above configuration. Processing can be simplified.

A7-15. Modification example 15:
In the first embodiment described above, the aspect of the point awarding performance was a manner suggesting that the addition process is executed to the accumulated points already accumulated on the stage St. For example, to explain the point awarding performance shown in FIG. A point awarding effect is executed in a manner indicating that the displayed number of points (3 points) is added to the already accumulated number of points (4 points). In this way, the aspect of the point awarding performance in the first embodiment is a mode that suggests that newly awarded points are added to the accumulated points already accumulated on stage St (hereinafter also referred to as addition mode). ). Then, when the point granting performance in the addition mode is executed, the points awarded by the point granting performance in the addition mode are added to the points displayed as accumulated points, and the resulting number of points becomes the new accumulated points. will be displayed as . However, the mode of point awarding performance is not limited to the addition mode, and other modes may be adopted. For example, a point awarding effect in a mode (hereinafter also referred to as a multiplication mode) that suggests that a multiplication process is performed on accumulated points already accumulated in stage St may be adopted.

FIG. 71 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the point award performance in the multiplication mode. The point awarding effect in the multiplication mode is as shown in FIG. 71(a), after a turtle character appears from the right end of the display surface 41a, the turtle character drops a pearl as shown in FIG. 71(b). However, "x2" indicating multiplication processing is displayed on the pearl. Then, as shown in FIG. 71(c), when the pearl displayed as "x2" reaches stage St, it has already reached stage St as an accumulated point corresponding to "x2" displayed on the pearl. The number of points (8 points) resulting from multiplying the displayed 4 points by 2 is displayed as a new accumulated point.

Such a configuration can be realized as follows. For example, in a point award scenario, a point value corresponding to a point award performance in a multiplication mode is set. At this time, the value of the accumulated points up to the point awarding performance of the multiplication mode is set to X, the value by which the accumulated points are multiplied in the point awarding performance of the multiplication mode is A, and the point awarding performance of the multiplication mode set in the point awarding scenario. When the value of points corresponding to is Y, the value of Y calculated as Y=XA−X is set in the point awarding scenario as the value of points corresponding to the point awarding effect in the multiplication mode. Further, the performance scenario is set so that a multiplication mode point awarding performance is executed. By doing so, the above configuration can be realized.

By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to give a sense of expectation to the player who recognizes the point awarding performance in the multiplication mode with respect to the value by which the accumulated points are multiplied, and the player who recognizes the point awarding performance in the multiplication mode can be given a sense of expectation regarding the value by which the accumulated points are multiplied. can attract people's attention. In addition, when the point awarding performance in the multiplication mode is executed, the player who recognized that the turtle character appeared on the display surface 41a and assumed that the point awarding effect in the addition mode would be executed. , it can add surprise and greatly improve expectations.

Further, a configuration may be adopted in which the aspect of the point granting effect of the multiplication aspect is controlled (changed) in an aspect according to the magnitude of the value by which the accumulated points are multiplied. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which the color of the pearls dropped by the turtle varies depending on the value multiplied by the accumulated points, or a configuration in which the characters that appear differ (for example, an octopus appears instead of a turtle). Good too. By doing so, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the multiplication mode point awarding performance even more.

Furthermore, when a multiplication mode point granting performance is executed, a configuration may be adopted in which a number of points greater than the number of points resulting from multiplying the already accumulated accumulated points is displayed as new accumulated points. For example, in a case where 4 points have already been accumulated, a point awarding performance in a multiplication mode is executed. In the point awarding performance in the multiplication mode, "x2" indicating multiplication processing is displayed on the pearls dropped by the turtles. In this case, normally, 8 points (4 points x 2) will be displayed as new accumulated points when "x2" indicating multiplication processing reaches stage St, but in this point awarding performance, , the number of accumulated points greater than 8 points (for example, 10 points) is displayed. By doing so, it is possible to give a sense of surprise and happiness to the player who recognizes new accumulated points that are greater than the accumulated points obtained by multiplying the already accumulated accumulated points.

In addition, there are two types of point awarding performance: one is an addition style point awarding performance, and the other is a multiplication style point awarding performance. It is possible to give a sense of urgency and suspense as to whether the point awarding performance in multiplication mode will be executed or not.

Furthermore, when a point granting performance in an addition mode is executed, a configuration may be adopted in which a number of points greater than the number of points resulting from addition to already accumulated accumulated points is displayed as new accumulated points. By doing so, it is possible to give a sense of surprise and happiness to the player who recognizes new accumulated points that are greater than the accumulated points resulting from addition to the accumulated points that have already been accumulated.

Note that the mode of point awarding performance is not limited to addition mode or multiplication mode, and a configuration may be adopted that executes point awarding performance of various calculation modes, such as point awarding performance of subtraction mode or division mode. By doing so, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the point award performance that is executed, and it is also possible to add tone to the player's sense of expectation.

In addition, a configuration may be adopted in which the aspect of the point awarding performance changes during the execution of one point awarding performance. For example, during the execution of one point awarding performance, the addition mode changes to the multiplication mode, or from the multiplication mode to the addition mode, or during the execution of one point awarding production, the point awarding production changes. A configuration in which the aspect changes multiple times may be adopted. In this way, it is possible to make the player recognize that the calculation method executed by the point award performance has changed, and it is possible to give the player a sense of surprise. In addition, depending on the calculation method executed by the point award performance, the value of the new accumulated points after the calculation process is executed may vary greatly, so by changing the aspect of the point award performance, it is possible to It is possible to give a sense of urgency to the game, and to add tone to the player's sense of expectation.

As an example, FIG. 72 shows an image of a pearl dropped by a turtle (hereinafter also simply referred to as an image of a pearl) when the mode changes between an addition mode and a multiplication mode during execution of one point awarding performance. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a display mode. FIG. 72(a) shows an image of pearls in a case where the point award presentation mode is an addition mode. In the image of the pearl, "+", which is an arithmetic symbol indicating addition, is displayed, indicating that the point awarding performance is an addition mode. FIG. 72(b) shows an image of pearls in a case where the point awarding effect is a multiplication mode. In the image of the pearl, an arithmetic symbol "x" indicating multiplication is displayed, thereby suggesting that the point awarding effect is a multiplication mode.

For example, when changing the mode from an addition mode to a multiplication mode during execution of a point awarding performance, rotate the arithmetic symbol "+" indicating addition displayed on the pearl image in Fig. 72(a). Then, the image of the pearl shown in FIG. 72(b) is changed to an arithmetic symbol "x" indicating multiplication. On the other hand, if you want to change the mode from multiplication mode to addition mode during execution of the point awarding effect, rotate the "x" which is the arithmetic symbol indicating multiplication displayed on the pearl image in Fig. 72(b). Then, the symbol is changed to "+", which is an arithmetic symbol indicating addition, which is displayed on the pearl image in FIG. 72(a). By adopting such a configuration, the meaning of almost the same line drawing symbols, such as "+" and "×", can be changed significantly by rotating them. It is possible to give a great sense of urgency to the game, and also to add tone to the player's sense of expectation.

In addition, if the mode is changed multiple times between the addition mode and the multiplication mode during the execution of one point awarding performance, the arithmetic symbol displayed on the image of the falling pearl dropped by the turtle. The "+" (or "x") may be rotated continuously. Then, the rotation of the arithmetic symbol is stopped at a predetermined timing (for example, the timing when the pearl reaches stage St), and when the rotation of the arithmetic symbol is stopped, the amount of the operation is applied to the accumulation point by the operation (addition or multiplication) indicated by the arithmetic symbol. Equivalent points (images of pearls indicating accumulated points) are displayed on stage St. By doing so, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the point award performance even more.

A7-16. Modification example 16:
In the first embodiment described above, one point is displayed as an image of one pearl on the stage St as a display mode of the accumulated points, but it is not limited to such a configuration, and the accumulated points can be displayed. It can be displayed in various ways.

FIG. 73 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a display mode of accumulated points. The display mode of accumulated points shown in this modification is a display mode in which a meaningful shape (image) is displayed only when the number of accumulated points reaches a threshold value (10 points). 73(a) to 73(j) show how points are accumulated from 1 point to 10 points in order. In the case of the display mode shown in FIG. 73, a single pearl image is displayed only when the number of accumulated points reaches 10 points. By adopting such a display mode, players are given a desire to improve by creating one meaningful image from partial images, and the number of accumulated points is 10 points. When this is achieved and one meaningful image is formed, a sense of accomplishment can be given to the player.

In addition, in FIG. 73, a boundary line (outline) of a partial image of a pearl corresponding to one point is displayed, but the display mode is not limited to this, and the pearl corresponding to one point can be displayed. A display mode may be adopted in which the boundary line of the partial image is not displayed.

FIG. 74 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a display mode in which the boundary line of a partial image of a pearl corresponding to one point is not displayed as a display mode of accumulated points. As shown in the figure, since the boundary line of the partial image of the pearl corresponding to one point is not displayed, it is difficult for the player to recognize the number of accumulated points. Therefore, the accumulated points may reach the threshold value unknowingly by the player, which can give the player a surprise.

In addition, as a display mode of accumulated points, as explained in FIGS. 73 and 74, a form (image) that has a meaning is displayed only when the number of accumulated points reaches a threshold (10 points). However, a mode may also be adopted in which a shape (image) that becomes meaningful only when the number of accumulated points reaches a threshold value (10 points) is changed at a predetermined timing. For example, as shown in FIG. 73, the accumulated points are displayed in a display mode in which an image of one pearl is displayed only when the number of accumulated points reaches 10 points, and then when the accumulated points reach a threshold value, the pearl is displayed. The image changes to a shell image indicating a timer effect or a shell image indicating a standby effect, and the accumulated points on stage St shift to 0 points again, and new accumulated points are accumulated from the 0 point state. In this case, as shown in FIG. 75, the new accumulated points are displayed in a display mode in which an image of one whale is displayed only when the number of accumulated points reaches 10 points. may be adopted. By doing so, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the accumulated points of stage St. In addition, players are asked to imagine what kind of shape (image) will be formed each time a shape (image) that only becomes meaningful once the number of accumulated points reaches a threshold (10 points) is changed. This can give players a new sense of expectation.

Further, for example, a configuration may be adopted in which the shape (image) formed in the process of accumulating the accumulated points differs depending on the expectation level (probability) of winning a jackpot lottery in a game round. For example, if a one-shot announcement effect is executed after the accumulated points reach the threshold and the button press effect is executed, an image of a single sunfish is used as the shape that is formed in the process of accumulating the accumulated points. adopt. For example, if the special reach effect is executed after the accumulated points reach the threshold and the button press effect is executed, an image of one shark is used as the shape formed in the process of accumulating the accumulated points. adopt. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to draw the player's attention even more to the accumulated points of stage St, and to increase the player's sense of anticipation in the process of forming an image showing the accumulated points. can be done.

A7-17. Modification example 17:
In the first embodiment, a countable amount called "points" is used as the object to be given, but an uncountable amount may also be used. For example, instead of the point awarding performance, a performance in which liquid is added to a container displayed on the stage St may be adopted.

A7-18. Modification example 18:
In the first embodiment, a configuration is adopted in which the threshold value of accumulated points for executing a button press effect is 10 points, but the accumulation points for executing a button press effect are not limited to such a configuration. Any positive value can be adopted as the threshold value.

A7-19. Modification example 19:
In the first embodiment, a configuration is adopted in which a button press effect is executed when the accumulated points reach a threshold value, but the configuration is not limited to the button press effect, and a configuration in which other effects are executed may be adopted. . For example, when the accumulated points reach a threshold value, a predetermined reach effect may be performed instead of the button press effect. That is, when 10 accumulated points are accumulated, it is always a reach, so each time points are awarded, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation for a reach. Further, even if the accumulated points reach a threshold value, a configuration may be adopted in which specific processing such as button press effect is not executed. By doing so, it is possible to make the player guess whether or not a specific process such as a button press effect will be executed after the accumulated points reach the threshold value, thereby giving the player a sense of urgency.

A7-20. Modification example 20:
In the first embodiment, the suggestion as to whether or not the accumulated points are to be carried over was made by changing the color of the stage St, but it may be given by other methods such as lighting, blinking, or changing the shape of the stage St. In addition, a dedicated lamp or the like may be provided to indicate whether or not accumulated points should be carried over.

A7-21. Modification example 21:
In the first embodiment, the performance operation button 24 is operated in accordance with the timing at which the player presses the performance operation button 24 during the period allocated to the button press performance (hereinafter also referred to as the button press performance period). An aspect may be adopted in which the effect executed during the period from after the button press effect ends to the end of the button press effect period is changed. The time from the start of the button press performance period to the timing when the player presses the performance operation button 24 is measured, and according to the measured value, the button press performance period starts after the performance operation button 24 is operated. This can be realized by reading out and executing the image data for presentation from the presentation storage area in which the presentation corresponding to the period until the end is recorded. By doing this, it is possible to prevent the button press performance from becoming patterned and to draw the player's attention to the button press performance.

A7-22. Modification example 22:
In the first embodiment, the only position (image) that has the function of accumulating the given points is the stage St displayed on the display surface 41a, but the position that has the function of accumulating the given points is A configuration may be adopted in which a plurality of (images) are displayed on the display surface 41a (at a plurality of locations).

FIG. 76 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a configuration in which a plurality of positions (images) having a function of accumulating awarded points are displayed on the display surface 41a. As shown in FIG. 76(a), a first stage St1, a second stage St2, and a third stage St3 are displayed on the display surface 41a as positions (images) that have the function of accumulating the assigned points. has been done. In this modification, each stage St has a different performance function. Specifically, the effects executed when the number of points accumulated in each stage St reaches a threshold value are different.

If the points accumulated in the first stage St1 reach the threshold value, then a timer effect (or standby effect) and a button press effect are executed. Then, after the button press effect is executed, the one-shot announcement effect is executed. As described above, the one-shot announcement performance is a performance that immediately announces that the player has won the jackpot lottery. Therefore, the player who recognizes that the points accumulated in the first stage St1 have reached the threshold value executes a button press effect triggered by the point accumulated in the first stage St1 reaching the threshold value. It is possible to recognize that the player has won the jackpot lottery in the game round.

If the points accumulated in the second stage St2 reach the threshold value, then a timer effect (or standby effect) and a button press effect are executed. Then, after the button press effect is executed, a special reach effect is executed. As mentioned above, the special reach effect increases the expectation level (probability) of winning the jackpot lottery compared to when only the normal reach effect is executed or when the super reach effect is executed in addition to the normal reach effect. This is a presentation that suggests to the player that the price is high. Therefore, the player who recognizes that the points accumulated in the second stage St2 have reached the threshold value executes a button press effect triggered by the point accumulated in the second stage St2 reaching the threshold value. It can be recognized that the expectation level (probability) of winning the jackpot lottery in the game round is high.

If the points accumulated in the third stage St3 reach the threshold value, then a timer effect (or standby effect) and a button press effect are executed. Then, after the button press effect is executed, the normal reach effect is executed. The normal reach performance is a performance that suggests to the player that the expectation level (probability) of winning the jackpot lottery is higher than when the normal reach performance is not performed. Therefore, the player who recognizes that the points accumulated in the third stage St3 have reached the threshold value executes a button press effect triggered by the point accumulated in the third stage St3 reaching the threshold value. In the game round, it can be recognized that at least the normal reach effect is executed.

Due to the characteristics of each stage St, when points are awarded, the player desires to accumulate the most points in the first stage St1 among the three stages St, and then It is desired that points be accumulated in the second stage St2, and finally, it is desired that points be accumulated in the third stage St3.

In the point award performance shown in FIG. 76, when the turtle character appears from the right end of the display surface 41a, the pearl image on which the number of points to be awarded is displayed is not displayed. The turtle character advances from the right end to the left end on the display surface 41a.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 76(b), when the turtle character passes over the target stage St for accumulating points in the point awarding performance, the number of points to be awarded is displayed. Drop a pearl. As shown in FIG. 76(c), after the dropped pearl reaches the target stage St for accumulating points in the point awarding performance, it changes to an image of a pearl indicating accumulated points, and the pearl image changes to the image of the pearl that indicates the accumulated points, will be accumulated as accumulated points.

Such a performance is based on the stage St (first stage St1) in which points are accumulated in each point granting performance executed in the game round, in the performance scenario and point granting scenario set in the game round in which the relevant performance is executed. , second stage St2, and third stage St3) can be realized by setting them in advance.

By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to draw the attention of the player to the position where points are accumulated (stage St) in the point award performance, and it is possible to provide the player with new enjoyment. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 76(a), points are accumulated in any stage St for a player who recognizes that a turtle character has appeared on the display screen 41a in a point awarding performance. It is possible to give a sense of expectation as to how many points will be awarded, as well as a sense of expectation as to the number of points that will be awarded. After that, as shown in FIG. 76(b), the player who recognizes that the turtle character is passing over the top of each stage St has expectations regarding the position where points will be accumulated (stage St). It is possible to give a sense of urgency and sense of urgency, and also give a sense of expectation regarding the number of points to be awarded. Furthermore, for example, if a pearl displaying the number of points awarded by the turtle character is dropped on the stage St (for example, the first stage St1) that the player expected, the player , can give a sense of superiority.

In addition, in the point awarding performance explained in FIG. 76, as shown in FIG. 76(a), when the turtle character appears from the right end of the display surface 41a, a pearl with the number of points to be awarded is displayed. Although the configuration is such that no image is displayed, the present invention is not limited to such a configuration. For example, when a turtle character appears from the right end of the display surface 41a, an image of a pearl on which the number of points to be awarded is displayed is displayed. A configuration may also be adopted.

FIG. 77 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a point award performance in which the number of award points is displayed at the start. As shown in FIG. 77(a), in this point awarding performance, when the turtle character appears from the right end of the display surface 41a, a pearl indicating the number of points to be awarded is displayed. After that, as shown in FIG. 77(b), when the turtle character passes over the top of each stage St, the pearl on which the number of points to be awarded is displayed is displayed on the three stages St (first stage St1, 2nd stage St2 and 3rd stage St3). Then, as shown in FIG. 77(c), after the pearl on which the number of points to be awarded is displayed reaches the target stage St for accumulating the points to be awarded in the point granting performance, an image of the pearl indicating the accumulated points is displayed. , and are accumulated as accumulation points in the stage St.

This kind of performance differs from the point award performance shown in FIG. 76 in that the number of awarded points is displayed at the start of the point award performance. In this case, the player who has recognized the number of awarded points does not necessarily want the points to be accumulated in the first stage St1, and the point granting performance executed this time may cause the stage St where the accumulated points reach the threshold value to be In some cases (for example, second stage St2 shown in FIG. 77), it may be desired to accumulate points in the stage St. In this way, in the case of the point awarding performance shown in FIG. 77, the player can determine which stage St has the highest expectation level (probability) of winning the jackpot lottery when the accumulated points reach the threshold value. In addition to this consideration, the stage St for which points are desired to be accumulated is determined by also considering the current point accumulation status of each stage St. Therefore, by executing such a point awarding performance, it is possible to give the player the pleasure of understanding the state of the game from various angles.

Additionally, in addition to the effect of awarding points (point award effect), a configuration may be adopted in which other effects related to points are performed. For example, an effect (hereinafter also referred to as a threshold reaching effect) that causes the accumulated points of any of the three stages St to reach a threshold without fail when executed may be executed.

FIG. 78 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an example of a threshold reaching effect. As shown in FIG. 78(a), when the threshold reaching effect is started, a crab character passes from the right end to the left end of the display surface 41a holding a pearl. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 78(b), the crab character drops a pearl on the target stage St to make the accumulated points reach the threshold value. When the dropped pearl reaches the stage St, as shown in FIG. 78(c), the accumulated points of the target stage St for which the accumulated points are to reach the threshold value change to a display indicating that the accumulated points have reached the threshold value. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 78(d), a timer effect corresponding to the stage St that has reached the threshold value is executed. In the example of FIG. 78, the accumulated points of the first stage St1 reach the threshold value, and the timer effect image (whale character and timer image) prepared for the first stage St1 is displayed. As described above, when the points accumulated in the first stage St1 reach the threshold value, a timer effect (or standby effect) and a button press effect are then executed, and the button press effect is executed. After that, a one-shot announcement performance is executed.

Such a configuration can be realized by setting the threshold reaching performance in advance in the performance scenario and point awarding scenario that are set for the game round in which the threshold reaching performance is executed.

By adopting such a configuration, in addition to the point award performance, it is possible to give the player a new sense of expectation regarding the points. Specifically, the result of the game differs greatly depending on which stage St the executed threshold reaching effect is to reach the threshold, giving the player a great sense of anticipation and urgency. be able to.

In addition, in the first stage St1, the second stage St2, and the third stage St3, the effects that are executed when the points accumulated in the relevant stage St reach the threshold are one-shot announcement effects and special reach effects, respectively. Although the presentation and normal reach presentation are described above, the present invention is not limited to such a configuration, and a configuration in which other presentations or processes are executed may be adopted.

In addition, points accumulated in each of the first stage St1, second stage St2, and third stage St3 may or may not be carried over across game rounds, as in the first embodiment. May be adopted. As in the first embodiment, since the accumulated points may not be carried over, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation that the accumulated points on each stage will reach the threshold value by the end of the game round. In addition, players who recognize that point accumulation has started in at least one of each stage are made aware of when the game round ends, and are made to pay attention to the manner in which accumulated points are awarded on each stage. be able to. In addition, since accumulated points may be carried over across game rounds, even if the accumulated points on at least one of the three stages in a game round do not reach the threshold value. , the accumulated points are not reset at the end of a game round and are maintained until the next game round, giving the player a sense of expectation that there is a possibility of reaching the threshold value in the next game round. That is, it is possible to give such a sense of expectation to each accumulated point on the three stages, and this provides an opportunity to give the player a sense of expectation even more than in the first embodiment. can be increased.

A7-23. Modification example 23:
In the first embodiment, an effect may be performed that makes it appear as if the game session being executed has been changed from a non-carry-over game session to a carry-over game session (hereinafter also referred to as a carry-over change effect).

FIG. 79 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an example of a carryover change effect. In the game round shown in FIG. 79(a), the color of stage St is orange, indicating that the game round is not a carryover game round. When the carryover change effect is executed in the game round, an octopus character riding on a yellow stage appears from the right end of the display surface 41a. Note that when the yellow stage is displayed at the position of stage St on the display surface 41a, it indicates that the relevant game round is a carryover game round.

After the octopus character riding on the yellow stage appears, the yellow stage falls at the timing when the yellow stage and the octopus character pass over the top of stage St, as shown in FIG. 79(b). Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 79(c), the image of the yellow stage is superimposed on the orange stage St, and then the color of the stage St changes from orange to yellow. That is, by executing the carryover change effect, the color of stage St changes from the color (orange) indicating that it is not a carryover game round to the color (yellow) indicating that it is a carryover game round.

By adopting such a configuration, a player who recognizes the execution of a carryover change performance is made to recognize that the relevant game round has been changed from a game round that is not a carryover game round to a carryover game round. It is possible to create a sense of anticipation for the game round.

In addition, in this modification, an octopus character riding on a yellow stage appears, similar to the carryover change production, and the yellow stage and octopus character pass over the top of stage St, but the yellow stage does not fall. Instead, a dummy performance is also performed in which the yellow stage and the octopus character simply pass from the right end to the left end of the display surface 41a, that is, a dummy performance disguised as a carryover change performance. By executing a dummy performance disguised as a carryover change performance, the player who recognized that an octopus character riding on a yellow stage had appeared, guessed whether the image of the yellow stage would fall or not. By making the player guess whether the game round will change to a carryover game round or not, it is possible to give a sense of urgency. When the yellow stage falls, it is possible to give the player a sense of superiority and expectation.

In such a configuration, the carryover change effect is set in advance in the performance scenario and point award scenario that are set for the game round in which the carryover change effect is executed, and the carryover change effect is set in advance in the stage display control process (FIG. 60). When the performance is executed, this can be achieved by executing a process that sets the color of stage St when point accumulation starts to the color of stage St (orange) when it is not a carryover game round. can.

A7-24. Modification example 24:
In the first embodiment, an effect in which the remaining time indicated by the timer effect is extended (hereinafter also referred to as a timer time extension effect) may be performed.

FIG. 80 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a timer time extension effect. In the game round shown in FIG. 80(a), a timer effect is being executed. When the timer time extension effect is started, as shown in FIG. 80(a), a fish character with a hanging timer (hereinafter also referred to as an extension timer) appears from the right end of the display surface 41a. Then, as shown in FIG. 80(b), when the fish character with the extension timer hanging from it passes over the image of the shell and timer that shows the timer effect, the extension timer that the fish character was hanging falls down. and superimposes it on the timer image showing the timer effect. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 80(c), the remaining time until the button press effect indicated by the timer image representing the timer effect is extended.

That is, in terms of processing, the remaining time until the button press effect before being extended is the time set as a dummy remaining time (hereinafter also referred to as dummy remaining time). Then, at the timing when the remaining time of the dummy remaining time approaches 0 (zero), or after reaching 0 (zero), a timer time extension effect is executed, and the remaining time indicated by the timer of the timer effect is changed to the true remaining time. Update on time. By doing so, the configuration of this modification can be realized.

This type of timer time extension performance is possible by indicating the remaining time indicated by the dummy remaining time by indicating the time until the intermediate break in the currently running performance or the end of the currently running performance. It is possible to give credibility to the dummy remaining time and make the player trust the dummy remaining time. Then, by executing the timer time extension performance and updating the remaining time indicated by the timer of the timer performance from the dummy remaining time to the true remaining time, it is possible to give the player a sense of surprise and expectation.

In addition, in this modification, a fish character with a hanging extension timer appears, similar to the timer time extension production, and the fish character with the extension timer hanging passes over the top of stage St, but the extension timer is A performance in which a fish character with a hanging extension timer passes from the right end to the left end of a display surface 41a without falling, that is, a dummy performance disguised as a timer time extension performance is also performed. By executing a dummy performance disguised as a timer time extension performance, the timer performance is performed by having the player who recognizes that a fish character with a timer has appeared guess whether the timer will fall or not. It is possible to give a sense of urgency by making the player guess whether the remaining time indicated by the symbol will be extended or not. When the extension timer falls, it is possible to give the player a sense of superiority and expectation.

A7-25. Modification example 25:
In the first embodiment, the greater the number of times the accumulated points are carried over consecutively, that is, the number of times the carryover game times are executed consecutively, the larger the number of times the accumulated points are carried over, the more the number of times the accumulated points are carried over, the more the number of times the accumulated points are carried over, the more the number of times the carried over game times are consecutively executed, the more the jackpot lottery of the final consecutive performance game executed after that. Control may be performed to increase the expectation of winning the jackpot. As a specific example, compared to the case where the continuous effect final game round is executed after one carryover game round is executed, the continuous effect final game round is executed after three carryover game rounds are consecutively executed. Control is performed so that the degree of expectation of winning a jackpot in the jackpot lottery of the final game of the continuous performance is higher when this is executed.

For example, if it is determined that a jackpot has been won in the jackpot lottery for a pending game session through the earlier determination process, the larger the number of game sessions (preceding game sessions) that are executed before the pending game session, the more the Control is performed so that continuous performances are more likely to be executed from the game round to be executed after it is determined that a jackpot has been won in the jackpot lottery of the hold game round through the hold game round through determination processing. Specifically, in the production information setting process, when the number of games to be played Np is determined by lottery based on the number of re-settable games Fn, it is better to , Table data for a lottery for determining the number of games to be played Np is set so that the probability that the value of the number of games to be played Np becomes larger is higher than in the case of a loss (reach occurrence). By doing this, control is performed so that the more times the carryover game is executed in succession, the higher the expectation of winning the jackpot in the jackpot lottery of the final game of the continuous performance that will be executed afterwards. can do. By employing such a configuration, the more the carryover game rounds are executed consecutively, the more the player's expectations can be increased.

Furthermore, the more times the accumulated points are carried over from one game to another without reaching the threshold (10 points), the more you will win the jackpot in the jackpot lottery of the final game of the continuous performance that will be executed afterwards. It is also possible to execute control that increases the level of expectation. For example, in the case where it is determined that a jackpot has been won in the jackpot lottery of the suspended game in the previous determination process, and in the performance information setting process, when determining the performance scenario and point awarding scenario corresponding to the number of executed games Np. Compared to the case where the pending game round (game round to be processed) is a jackpot, the accumulated points from the carryover game round to the final game round of continuous performance are higher than the threshold value, compared to the case where the pending game round (game round to be processed) is a jackpot. Table data for a lottery for determining a performance scenario and a point granting scenario is set so that the probability of determining a performance scenario and a point granting scenario that do not reach (10 points) is high. By doing this, the more times the accumulated points are carried over from one game to the next without reaching the threshold (10 points), the more you win the jackpot in the final game of the continuous performance that will be executed afterwards. Control can be executed to increase the expectation of winning a jackpot in a lottery.

By doing this, it is possible to give a sense of anticipation to the player who recognizes that the accumulated points are being carried forward from one game to another without the accumulated points reaching the threshold (10 points). . As a result, it is possible to prevent the player's sense of expectation from decreasing in a state where the accumulated points have not reached the threshold value.

A7-26. Modification example 26:
In the first embodiment described above, a configuration may be adopted in which the threshold value of accumulated points for executing the button press effect is changed. Specifically, even though 10 accumulated points have been accumulated, the timer effect or standby effect is not executed, the accumulated points exceed 10 points, and the predetermined number of points exceeding 10 points is accumulated. A configuration in which a timer effect, standby effect, or button press effect is executed at the timing (for example, 15 points), or a timer effect, standby effect, or button press effect even though 10 accumulated points have not been accumulated. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which this is executed. Further, in this case, it is preferable to adopt a configuration in which the player is not informed that the threshold value of accumulated points for executing the button press effect has been changed. In such a configuration, a production scenario and a point awarding scenario specialized for the process in which the threshold value is changed are prepared in advance, and only when the process is executed, the value set as the threshold value in each process (usually The process can be executed by setting the threshold value (“10”) to the changed threshold value (for example, “15”) and executing it. By employing such a configuration, it is possible to perform a button press effect at a timing that the player does not expect, and as a result, it is possible to provide surprise to the player.

Further, a configuration may be adopted in which a process in which such a threshold value is changed is executed when the lottery result of the jackpot lottery in the game round in which the process is executed is a jackpot or a miss (reach occurrence). By adopting such a configuration, a player who recognizes that the threshold value has been changed, that is, a player who recognizes that accumulated points have exceeded 10 points, and a player whose accumulated points are 10 points. It is possible to give a sense of anticipation to a player who recognizes that a button press performance has been executed despite a state in which no accumulation has occurred.

In addition, a configuration may be adopted in which the player is notified by a presentation that the threshold value of accumulated points for executing the button press presentation is changed. For example, an effect suggesting that the threshold value of accumulated points for executing the button press effect is changed from 10 points to 5 points is executed. By doing so, it is possible to make the player expect that the button press effect will be executed more easily than when the threshold value of accumulated points for executing the button press effect is 10 points. Additionally, in a state where a predetermined number of points have already been accumulated (for example, 6 points have been accumulated), the accumulated point threshold for executing the button press effect will be changed from 10 points to 5 points. If a performance suggesting this is executed, the number of points necessary for executing the button press performance has already been accumulated. In this case, immediately after the performance suggesting that the threshold of accumulated points for executing the button press performance is changed from 10 points to 5 points, the timer performance is executed prior to the button press performance. In this case, it is possible to give the player a sense of surprise and expectation. Such a configuration can be realized by setting the production scenario and the point awarding scenario in advance.

A7-27. Modification example 27:
In the first embodiment described above, the first executed game times display shown in the first executed game times display area J1, the first pending game times display shown in the first pending display area Ds1, and the second executed game times display area J2. In each game round, in association with each display (hereinafter collectively referred to as a game round display) of the second executed game round display shown in the figure and the second pending game round display shown in the second hold display area Ds2. A configuration may be adopted in which the number of points to be awarded is displayed. More specifically, when points are awarded in a predetermined game round, a symbol is displayed in the vicinity of the game round display corresponding to the predetermined game round (for example, directly above the game round display) in the relevant game round. A display corresponding to the number of points to be awarded (a display suggesting points to be awarded) may be displayed. In this case, an award point suggestion display may be displayed for all displayed game times, or an award point suggestion display may be displayed for some of the displayed game times. You may. By employing such a configuration, it is possible to give a player who has recognized the award point suggestion display various guesses and expectations regarding the game round corresponding to the displayed award point suggestion display. For example, if an award point suggestion display is displayed in association with a game session display corresponding to a pending game session, a player who recognizes the award point suggestion display may be asked to make various guesses regarding the pending game session. It can give a sense of expectation. Also, for example, if points are awarded in the range of less than 10 points in the game round being executed, it corresponds to the award point suggestion display that is displayed corresponding to the game round display corresponding to the game round to be executed next. If the sum of the number of points to be played and the number of points currently awarded is 10 points or more, the award point suggestion display that is displayed corresponding to the game round display corresponding to the next game round will not be displayed. This can make the player even more eager to carry over the points to the next gaming session than in the case where the points are carried over, and if the points are carried over, it gives the player a great sense of expectation. can do.

In addition, after displaying the award point suggestion display corresponding to a predetermined game time in association with the game time display corresponding to a game time different from the predetermined game time, the display corresponds to the game time display corresponding to the predetermined game time. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which a message is attached and displayed. For example, at a predetermined timing, an image of a number displayed as a suggestion display for awarding points is displayed directly above the game times display corresponding to the reserved game times (n=1) for the first starting opening. n = 2).

By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to overturn the player's guess based on the award point suggestion display displayed in association with the game round display corresponding to the game round different from the predetermined game round, and the player's It is possible to add surprise to the

Such a configuration is such that after displaying an award point suggestion display corresponding to a predetermined game time in association with a game time display corresponding to a game time different from the predetermined game time, a game time corresponding to the predetermined game time is displayed. This can be realized by setting in advance the production scenario and the point awarding scenario to be displayed in association with the times displayed.

In addition, a configuration is adopted in which after displaying an award point suggestion display corresponding to a different number of points to be awarded in a predetermined game round, a display indicating an award point suggestion corresponding to the number of points to be awarded in a predetermined game round is displayed. You may. For example, at a predetermined timing, an image of the number "5" that was displayed as a suggestion display for awarding points is displayed directly above the game times display corresponding to the reserved game times (n=1) for the first starting opening. Change the image to "7".

It is possible to overturn the player's guess based on the award point suggestion display that corresponds to a different number of points than the number of points awarded in a predetermined game round, and it is possible to give surprise to the player, It is possible to give tone to the player's expectations.

Such a configuration can also be realized by setting in advance the production scenario and the point awarding scenario.

B. Second embodiment:
B1. Structure of gaming machine:
The structure of the gaming machine in this embodiment will be explained. Note that components having the same functions as those in the above embodiment will be described using the same reference numerals.

FIG. 81 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment. The pachinko machine 10 includes a wooden outer frame 11 assembled into a substantially rectangular shape. When the pachinko machine 10 is installed in a game hall, this outer frame 11 is fixed to the island equipment of the game hall. Further, the pachinko machine 10 includes a pachinko machine main body 12 rotatably supported by an outer frame 11. The pachinko machine main body 12 includes an inner frame 13 and a front door frame 14 arranged in front of the inner frame 13. The inner frame 13 is rotatably supported by a metal hinge 15 with respect to the outer frame 11. The front door frame 14 is rotatably supported by a metal hinge 16 with respect to the inner frame 13. On the back side of the inner frame 13, control devices for controlling the pachinko machine main body 12, such as a main control device, a sound emission control device, and a display control device, are arranged. Details of these control devices will be described later. Furthermore, the pachinko machine 10 is provided with a cylinder lock 17. The cylinder lock 17 has a function of locking the inner frame 13 to the outer frame 11 so that it cannot be opened, and a function of locking the front door frame 14 to the inner frame 13 so that it cannot be opened. Each lock is unlocked by performing a predetermined operation on the cylinder lock 17 using a dedicated key.

An open window portion 18 is formed approximately in the center of the front door frame 14. Around the window portion 18 of the front door frame 14, resin parts and illumination parts for decorating the pachinko machine 10 are provided. The illumination parts are constituted by light emitting means consisting of various lamps such as LEDs. The light emitting means plays a role of enhancing the presentation effect by lighting up or blinking when the pachinko machine 10 performs a winning lottery, winning a winning, reaching a reach, and the like. Further, a glass unit 19 made of two sheets of glass is arranged on the back side of the front door frame 14, and the opened window portion 18 is sealed by the glass unit 19. A game board, which will be described later, is removably attached to the inner frame 13, and a player of the pachinko machine 10 can view the game board from the front of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 19. Details of the game board will be described later.

The front door frame 14 is provided with an upper tray 20 and a lower tray 21 for storing game balls. The upper tray 20 is formed into a box shape with an open top surface, and stores game balls such as rental balls lent from a rental machine (not shown) and prize balls ejected from the pachinko machine main body 12. The game balls stored in the upper tray 20 are supplied to a game ball firing mechanism provided in the pachinko machine main body 12. The game ball firing mechanism is driven by the player's operation of the operating handle 25, and fires the game balls supplied from the upper tray 20 onto the front surface of the game board. The lower plate 21 is arranged below the upper plate 20, and is formed into a box shape with an open top surface. The lower tray 21 stores game balls that cannot be stored in the upper tray 20. A discharge port 22 for discharging game balls stored in the lower tray 21 is formed on the bottom surface of the lower tray 21. A lever 23 is provided below the outlet 22, and by operating the lever 23, the player can switch the outlet 22 between a closed state and an open state. When the player operates the lever 23 to open the discharge port 22, the game balls fall from the discharge port 22 and are discharged from the lower tray 21 to the outside.

A performance operation button 24 serving as an operation receiving means is provided in front of the peripheral edge of the upper plate 20. The performance operation button 24 is an operation section through which a player performs an input operation for a game performance performed by the pachinko machine 10. When the player operates the performance operation button 24 at a predetermined timing prepared by the pachinko machine 10, the pachinko machine 10 performs a game performance that reflects the operation.

Further, on the right side of the front door frame 14 when viewed from the front, an operating handle 25 is provided for the player to operate. When the player operates the operating handle 25 (rotating operation), a game ball is fired from the game ball firing mechanism to the front of the game board in conjunction with the operation. Inside the operating handle 25, there is a touch sensor 25a for permitting the driving of the game ball firing mechanism, a weight button 25b for stopping the firing of game balls by the game ball firing mechanism when pressed by the player, and the operating handle 25. A variable resistor 25c is provided for detecting the amount of rotational operation by a change in electrical resistance. When the player grasps the operation handle 25, the touch sensor 25a is turned on, and when the player rotates the operation handle 25 clockwise, the resistance value of the variable resistor 25c changes in accordance with the amount of rotation operation. Then, the game ball is fired from the game ball firing mechanism to the front of the game board with a strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor 25c.

Further, on the left side of the peripheral edge of the upper tray 20 when viewed from the front, a game ball firing button 26 is provided for the player to operate. When the game ball firing button 26 is operated by the player, the game ball is fired at a predetermined firing strength to the front of the game board, regardless of the amount of rotation of the operating handle 25 by the player. Specifically, when the player operates the game ball firing button 26, the game ball is fired to the front of the game board with the same firing strength as when the amount of rotational operation of the operating handle 25 is the maximum. In the case of this embodiment, when the game ball is fired by operating the game ball firing button 26, the game ball flows to the right side of the game board when viewed from the front, and also flows down the right side of the game board. That is, by operating the game ball firing button 26, the player can perform what is called a "right-handed hit." In the following explanation, the case where the game ball is fired by operating the operation handle 25, and the game ball flows to the left side of the game board when viewed from the front and also flows down the left side of the game board will be referred to as the case where the player It is sometimes expressed as ``hit''. Note that the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment is configured such that when the game ball firing button 26 is operated, the game ball is fired onto the game board on the condition that the touch sensor 25a is on. . That is, the player turns on at least the touch sensor 25a by gripping the operating handle 25, and then operates the game ball firing button 26 to fire the game ball triggered by the operation of the game ball firing button 26. can be realized.

In this embodiment, the game ball firing button 26 is arranged on the left side of the peripheral edge of the upper tray 20 when viewed from the front, but it is also possible to arrange the game ball firing button 26 at another position. May be adopted. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which the game ball firing button 26 is arranged inside (periphery) of the operating handle 25 similarly to the weight button 25b. By doing so, the player can operate the operating handle 25, the weight button 25b, and the game ball firing button 26 with only his right hand.

FIG. 82 is a front view of the game board 30. The game board 30 is made of plywood, and a game area PA is formed on the front surface thereof. An inner rail portion 31a and an outer rail portion 31b are attached to the game board 30 so as to partition a part of the outer edge of the game area PA. A guide rail 31 for guiding game balls is formed between the inner rail portion 31a and the outer rail portion 31b. The game ball fired from the game ball firing mechanism is guided by the guide rail 31 and released to the upper part of the game area PA, and then flows down the game area PA. In the game area PA, a plurality of nails 42 are planted substantially perpendicularly to the game board 30, and various accessories such as a windmill are arranged. These nails 42 and windmills disperse and organize the falling direction of the game balls flowing down the game area PA.

The game board 30 includes a general prize opening 32, an upper first starting opening 33 (hereinafter also simply referred to as the first starting opening 33), a lower first starting opening 44 (hereinafter also simply referred to as the first starting opening 44), A second starting port 34, a through gate 35, and a variable winning device 36 are provided. Furthermore, the game board 30 is provided with a variable display unit 40 and a main display section 45. The main display section 45 includes a special figure unit 37, a regular figure unit 38, and a round display section 39.

The general prize opening 32 is a ball entrance into which game balls can enter, and a plurality of them are provided on the game board 30. In this embodiment, when game balls enter the general winning hole 32, ten game balls are paid out from the payout device 71 as prize balls.

The upper first starting port 33 and the lower first starting port 44 are ball entry ports into which game balls can enter. The upper first starting port 33 is provided above the center of the game board 30, and the lower first starting port 44 is provided below the center of the game board 30. In this embodiment, when a game ball enters the upper first starting port 33 or the lower first starting port 44, three game balls are paid out as prize balls, and a winning lottery to be described later is executed. . Further, the lower first starting port 44 is provided with an electric accessory 44a consisting of a pair of left and right movable pieces. When the electric accessory 44a is in the closed state, the game ball cannot enter the lower first starting port 44. On the other hand, when the electric accessory 44a is in the open state, the game ball can enter the lower first starting port 44. The electric accessory 44a is configured to be in an open state for a predetermined period when the player wins a lottery that is executed when a game ball passes through the through gate 35.

The second starting port 34 is a ball entry port into which a game ball can enter, and is provided on the upper right side of the game board 30. Therefore, the second starting port 34 is provided at a position where the game ball enters when the player hits the ball to the right by operating the operating handle 25. In this embodiment, when a game ball enters the second starting port 34, one game ball is paid out as a prize ball, and a winning lottery to be described later is executed.

The through gate 35 is a through gate that becomes an opportunity to perform a lottery to open the electric accessory 44a. Specifically, when the game ball passes through the through gate 35, the main control device 60 uses the passing as a trigger to perform an internal lottery (electric accessory release lottery). If the electric role release is won as a result of the internal lottery, the electric role accessory 44a shifts to the electric role release state in which the electric role is opened in a predetermined manner. Since the through gate 35 is arranged upstream of the lower first starting port 44 with respect to the downward direction of the game ball, the game ball that has passed through the through gate 35 flows down the game area PA after passing through. The ball can enter the lower first starting port 44. In addition, in this embodiment, even if the game ball passes through the through gate 35, the payout of the prize ball is not executed.

The variable winning device 36 includes a big winning hole 36a that leads to the back side of the game board 30, and an opening/closing door 36b that opens and closes the big winning hole 36a. The opening/closing door 36b is normally in a closed state in which game balls cannot enter the big prize opening 36a. As described above, when a game ball enters the upper first starting port 33, the lower first starting port 44, or the second starting port 34, the main control device 60 executes a winning lottery (internal lottery). If a jackpot or small jackpot is won as a result of the winning lottery, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the opening/closing execution mode. The opening/closing execution mode is a mode in which opening/closing processing of the opening/closing door 36b of the variable prize winning device 36 is executed. Specifically, when the opening/closing door 36b of the variable prize winning device 36 shifts to the opening/closing execution mode, it transitions from a closed state in which game balls cannot enter into an open state in which game balls can enter, and a predetermined condition is satisfied. After that, it transitions to the closed state again. In this embodiment, when a game ball enters the big winning hole 36a of the variable winning device 36, the payout device 71 pays out 15 game balls as prize balls.

An out port 43 is provided at the bottom of the game board 30, and game balls that have not entered the various ball entry ports are discharged from the game area PA through the out port 43.

The special figure unit 37 includes a first symbol display section 37a and a second symbol display section 37b. The first symbol display section 37a and the second symbol display section 37b are each constituted by a segment display in which a plurality of segment light emitting sections are arranged in a predetermined manner.

The first symbol display section 37a is a display section for displaying the first symbol. The first symbol refers to a symbol that is displayed in a variable manner or in a stationary manner based on a winning lottery triggered by the entry of a game ball into the upper first starting port 33 or the lower first starting port 44. When a winning lottery is held triggered by the entry of a game ball into the upper first starting port 33 or the lower first starting port 44, the first symbol display section 37a displays a segment display corresponding to the lottery result. As a display mode until the display is performed, the first symbol is displayed in a variable manner or in a predetermined manner. When the lottery ends, the first symbol display section 37a causes the segment display to stop display the first symbol corresponding to the lottery result.

The second symbol display section 37b is a display section for displaying a second symbol. The second symbol refers to a symbol that is variably displayed or statically displayed based on a winning lottery triggered by the entry of a game ball into the second starting port 34. The second symbol display section 37b is configured as a display mode until the segment display displays a display corresponding to the lottery result when a winning lottery is performed triggered by the entry of a game ball into the second starting port 34. , a variable display or a predetermined display of the second symbol is performed. When the lottery ends, the second symbol display section 37b causes the segment display to stop display the second symbol corresponding to the lottery result.

Here, the time period from when the first symbol displayed on the first symbol display section 37a or the second symbol displayed on the second symbol display section 37b starts to be displayed in a variable manner until it is stopped and displayed. This is called variable time. Specifically, the time from the start of the variable display of the first symbol displayed on the first symbol display section 37a until the time when the first symbol is stopped and displayed is referred to as the first variation time, and The time period from the start of the variable display of the second symbol to the time it is stopped and displayed is referred to as the second variable time.

The special figure unit 37 further includes a first reservation display section 37c and a second reservation display section 37d, which are made of LED lamps, at positions adjacent to the first symbol display section 37a and the second symbol display section 37b.

The first reservation display section 37c displays the number of reservations at the first starting ports (the upper first starting port 33 and the lower first starting port 44) by the color and combination of the LED lamps to be lit. In this embodiment, the game balls that have entered the upper first starting port 33 or the lower first starting port 44 are retained up to a maximum of four as a total of the two first starting ports.

The second reservation display section 37d displays the number of reservations at the second starting port 34 by the color and combination of LED lamps to be lit. In this embodiment, up to four game balls that have entered the second starting port 34 are held.

The general figure unit 38 is constituted by a light emitting display section in which a plurality of LED lamps are arranged in a predetermined manner. When a game ball passing through the through gate 35 triggers an electric accessory opening lottery, the normal figure unit 38 causes the light emitting display to display a lighting display, a flashing display, or a predetermined display mode as a display mode. . When the electric accessory opening lottery ends, the common map unit 38 displays a predetermined mode corresponding to the lottery result.

The round display section 39 is constituted by a light emitting display section in which a plurality of LED lamps are arranged in a predetermined manner, and displays the number of round games that occur in the opening/closing execution mode, or displays corresponding thereto. A round game is a game that is opened and closed until either the predetermined upper limit duration time elapses or the predetermined upper limit number of game balls enters the variable winning device 36. This is a game in which the door 36b remains open. The number of round games varies depending on the type of jackpot winning that triggered the transition. The round display section 39 starts displaying the number of round games when the opening/closing execution mode is started, and ends when the opening/closing execution mode ends.

Note that the special figure unit 37, the general figure unit 38, and the round display section 39 are not limited to being constituted by a segment display or a light emitting display using an LED lamp, and may be, for example, a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device, It may be constituted by various display devices such as a CRT or a dot matrix display capable of showing the drawing process and the drawing results.

The variable display unit 40 is arranged approximately at the center of the gaming area PA. The variable display unit 40 includes a liquid crystal display device 41. The liquid crystal display device 41 includes a liquid crystal display. The display content of the liquid crystal display device 41 is controlled by the display control device 100. Note that the configuration of the display device included in the variable display unit 40 is not limited to the liquid crystal display device 41, and may be configured by various display devices such as a plasma display device, an organic EL display device, or a CRT.

When the first symbol display section 37a displays a variable display or a predetermined display based on the entry of a game ball into the upper first starting port 33 or the lower first starting port 44, the liquid crystal display device 41 adjusts the display accordingly. The symbol is displayed in a variable manner or in a predetermined manner. Further, when the second symbol display section 37b displays a variable display or a predetermined display based on the entry of a game ball into the second starting port 34, the liquid crystal display device 41 displays a variable display of symbols or a predetermined display according to the variable display or a predetermined display. will be displayed. The liquid crystal display device 41 is limited to displaying a changing pattern or a predetermined display triggered by a game ball entering the upper first starting port 33, the lower first starting port 44, or the second starting port 34. First, it also displays effects during the opening/closing execution mode, which is entered when a jackpot is won. The details of the liquid crystal display device 41 will be explained below.

FIG. 83 is an explanatory diagram showing symbols variably displayed on the liquid crystal display device 41 and the display surface 41a. FIG. 83(a) is an explanatory diagram showing a first liquid crystal pattern or a second liquid crystal pattern that is variably displayed on the liquid crystal display device 41. The first liquid crystal symbol is an image displayed on the liquid crystal display device 41, and is a symbol corresponding to the first symbol displayed on the first symbol display section 37a. The second liquid crystal symbol is an image displayed on the liquid crystal display device 41, and is a symbol corresponding to the first symbol displayed on the second symbol display section 37b.

As shown in FIG. 83(a), on the liquid crystal display device 41, symbols representing numbers 1 to 8 are variably displayed as the first liquid crystal symbol or the second liquid crystal symbol. In addition, as the symbols to be displayed in a variable manner, a symbol in which a character or other image is attached to each symbol representing the numbers 1 to 8 may be used.

FIG. 83(b) is an explanatory diagram showing the display surface 41a of the liquid crystal display device 41. As illustrated, a main display area MA and a sub display area SA are displayed on the display surface 41a. In the main display area MA, an image of the first liquid crystal pattern may be displayed, and an image of the second liquid crystal pattern may be displayed. Similarly, in the sub display area SA, as in the main display area MA, there are cases in which an image of the first liquid crystal pattern is displayed and an image of the second liquid crystal pattern is displayed. When the image of the first liquid crystal pattern is displayed in the main display area MA, the image of the first liquid crystal pattern is displayed in the sub display area SA, and the image of the second liquid crystal pattern is displayed in the main display area MA. If so, an image of the first liquid crystal symbol is displayed in the sub-display area SA. Which of the first liquid crystal symbols and second liquid crystal symbols are displayed in the main display area MA and the sub display area SA is determined by the state of the game.

Three symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 on the left, middle, and right are displayed in the main display area MA. In each symbol row Z1 to Z3, symbols numbered 1 to 8 as the first liquid crystal symbol or second liquid crystal symbol shown in FIG. 83(a) are arranged in ascending or descending numerical order, and each symbol A fluctuating display is performed in which the columns scroll periodically from top to bottom or from bottom to top. As shown in FIG. 83(b), after the variable display by scrolling, one symbol for each symbol row is displayed in a stopped state on the active line L1.

Specifically, when a game ball enters the first starting port (upper first starting port 33, lower first starting port 44) or second starting port 34, the symbols in each symbol row Z1 to Z3 become periodic. The variable display starts scrolling in a predetermined direction. Then, each of the scrolling symbols switches from a variable display to a standby display in the order of symbol row Z1, symbol row Z3, and symbol row Z2, and finally, a predetermined symbol is stopped and displayed in each symbol row Z1 to Z3. . When the fluctuating display of symbols ends and the display is stopped, if the result of the winning lottery by the main controller 60 is a jackpot, a predetermined combination of symbols is placed on the active line L1. It is formed. For example, a combination of the same symbols is formed on the active line L1. In addition, the aspect of the 1st liquid crystal pattern and the 2nd liquid crystal pattern in the main display area MA is not limited to the above-mentioned aspect. For example, the display mode of the first liquid crystal symbols and the second liquid crystal symbols, such as the number of symbol rows in the main display area MA, the number of active lines, the direction of fluctuating display of symbols in the symbol rows, and the number of symbols in each symbol row. can adopt various aspects.

Three symbol rows Z4, Z5, and Z6 on the left, middle, and right are displayed in the sub display area SA. In each of the symbol rows Z4 to Z6, symbols numbered 1 to 8 as the first liquid crystal symbol or second liquid crystal symbol shown in FIG. 83(a) are arranged in ascending or descending numerical order, and each symbol A fluctuating display is performed in which the columns scroll periodically from top to bottom or from bottom to top. As shown in FIG. 83(b), after the variable display by scrolling, one symbol for each symbol row is displayed in a stopped state on the active line L2.

Specifically, when a game ball enters the first starting port (upper first starting port 33, lower first starting port 44), the symbols in each symbol row Z4 to Z6 scroll periodically in a predetermined direction. The variable display will start. Then, each of the scrolling symbols switches from a variable display to a standby display in the order of symbol row Z4, symbol row Z6, and symbol row Z5, and finally, a predetermined symbol is stopped and displayed in each symbol row Z4 to Z6. . When the fluctuating display of symbols ends and the display is stopped, if the result of the winning lottery by the main controller 60 is a jackpot, a predetermined combination of symbols is placed on the active line L2. It is formed. For example, a combination of the same symbols is formed on the active line L2. In addition, the aspect of the 1st liquid crystal pattern and the 2nd liquid crystal pattern in the sub-display area SA is not limited to the above-mentioned aspect. For example, the display mode of the first liquid crystal symbols and the second liquid crystal symbols, such as the number of symbol rows in the sub-display area SA, the number of active lines, the direction of fluctuating display of symbols in the symbol rows, and the number of symbols in each symbol row. can adopt various aspects.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 83(b), a first reservation display area Ds1 and a second reservation display area Ds2 are displayed on the display surface 41a of the liquid crystal display device 41. In the first reservation display area Ds1, the number of reservations based on winnings in the first starting openings (upper first starting opening 33, lower first starting opening 44) is displayed. In the second reservation display area Ds2, the number of reservations based on winnings in the second start opening 34 is displayed. In addition, as mentioned above, in this embodiment, the number of reserved game balls that have entered the first starting opening (the upper first starting opening 33, the lower first starting opening 44) and the second starting opening 34 is the maximum, respectively. Up to four.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 83(b), on the display surface 41a, a flashing display and a lighting display synchronized with the fluctuating display and stop display of the first symbol displayed on the first symbol display section 37a of the special symbol unit 37. A first synchronized display section Sync1 performs display, and a second synchronized display performs blinking display and lighting display in synchronization with the fluctuating display and stop display of the second symbol displayed on the second symbol display section 37b of the special symbol unit 37. Sync2. Specifically, when the first symbol display section 37a is displaying a variable display, the first synchronization display section Sync1 displays a blinking display, and when the first symbol display section 37a is displaying a stop display, the first synchronization display section Sync1 displays a blinking display. 1 synchronization display section Sync1 displays lighting. Further, when the second symbol display section 37b is displaying a variable display, the second synchronization display section Sync2 displays a blinking display, and when the second symbol display section 37b is displaying a stop display, the second synchronization display section Sync2 displays a blinking display. The section Sync2 displays a lighting display.

In the present embodiment, the display surface 41a is configured to display the main display area MA, the sub display area SA, the first synchronized display section Sync1, and the second synchronized display section Sync2, but the display surface 41a A configuration may be adopted in which some or all of these displays are not displayed.

B2. Electrical configuration of gaming machine:
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be explained. In this description, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be explained using a block diagram.

FIG. 84 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. The pachinko machine 10 is mainly configured around a main control device 60, and also includes a sound emission control device 90 and a display control device 100. The main control device 60 includes a main control board 61 that controls the main control of the game. The main control board 61 includes an MPU 62 that includes elements having multiple functions. The MPU 62 includes a ROM 63 in which various control programs and fixed value data are recorded, and a RAM 64 which is a memory for temporarily storing various data etc. when executing the programs recorded in the ROM 63. The MPU 62 also includes an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input/output circuit, and a counter circuit as a random number generator. In addition, another element may be provided with some of the functions that the MPU 62 has. Further, details of various areas provided in the ROM 63 and RAM 64 will be described later.

The main control board 61 is provided with an input port and an output port, respectively. A payout control device 70 and a power failure monitoring circuit 86 provided in a power supply device 85 are connected to the input side of the main control board 61. The main control board 61 receives stable 24 V DC power from the power supply device 85 via the power failure monitoring circuit 86 . The power supply device 85 is connected to a commercial power source as an external power source, and converts the external power supplied from the commercial power source into operating power necessary for the main control device 60, payout control device 70, etc., and supplies it to each device. Supply electricity. In addition, on the input side of the main control board 61, a general winning opening 32, a first starting opening (upper first starting opening 33, lower first starting opening 44), a second starting opening 34, a through gate 35, a variable winning opening Various detection sensors provided at various ball entry ports and through gates such as the device 36 are connected. Based on the signals from these detection sensors, the MPU 62 of the main control board 61 determines whether or not a game ball flowing down the game area PA has entered each ball entrance, and determines whether the game ball has passed through the through gate. Determine whether or not it has been done. Furthermore, the MPU 62 executes a winning lottery based on the entry of game balls into the first starting ports (upper first starting port 33, lower first starting port 44) and second starting port 34.

On the output side of the main control board 61, there is a variable winning drive unit 36c that opens and closes the opening/closing door 36b of the variable winning device 36, and an electric accessory drive unit that opens and closes the electric accessory 44a of the lower first starting port 44. 44b, an opening/closing door driving section 48b that opens and closes the opening/closing door 48a, and the main display section 45 are connected. The main control board 61 is provided with various driver circuits, and the MPU 62 executes drive control of various drive units through the driver circuits.

Specifically, in the opening/closing execution mode, the MPU 62 executes drive control of the variable prize winning drive unit 36c so that the opening/closing door 36b is opened and closed. Further, as a result of the electric accessory opening lottery, when the electric accessory is won, the MPU 62 executes drive control of the electric accessory drive unit 44b so that the electric accessory 44a is released. Furthermore, in each game round, the MPU 62 executes display control of the first symbol display section 37a or the second symbol display section 37b in the main display section 45, and in the opening/closing execution mode, the MPU 62 performs round display on the main display section 45. Display control of section 39 is executed.

Further, a payout control device 70 and a sound emission control device 90 are connected to the transmission side of the main control board 61. For example, a prize ball command is transmitted to the payout control device 70 from the main control device 60 based on the ball entry determination result. When the main control device 60 transmits a prize ball command, the MPU 62 of the main control board 61 refers to the command information storage area 63f of the ROM 63. Specifically, when it is specified that a game ball enters the general prize opening 32, a prize ball command corresponding to the payout of 10 game balls is transmitted from the main controller 60, and the first starting opening (upper side When it is determined that a game ball enters the first starting port 33 or lower first starting port 44), a prize ball command corresponding to the payout of three game balls is transmitted from the main controller 60, and When the entry of a game ball into the second starting port 34 is specified, a prize ball command corresponding to the payout of one game ball is transmitted from the main control device 60. The payout control device 70 controls the payout device 71 to pay out prize balls based on the prize ball command received from the main control device 60.

A firing control device 80 is connected to the dispensing control device 70 . The launch control device 80 controls the launch of the game ball launch mechanism 81. The game ball firing mechanism 81 is driven when predetermined firing conditions are met. Further, the operation handle 25 is connected to the launch control device 80 . As described above, the operating handle 25 includes a touch sensor 25a, a weight button 25b, and a variable resistor 25c. When the player grips the operating handle 25, the touch sensor 25a is turned on, and when the player rotates the operating handle 25, the resistance value of the variable resistor 25c changes in accordance with the amount of rotational operation. A game ball is fired from the game ball firing mechanism to the front of the game board with a strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor 25c. Furthermore, the game ball firing button 26 is connected to the firing control device 80. When the game ball firing button 26 is operated by the player, the game ball is fired onto the game board on condition that the touch sensor 25a is turned on.

The audio emission control device 90 receives various commands transmitted from the main control device 60, and executes processing corresponding to the received various commands. When the main controller 60 transmits various commands, it refers to the command information storage area 63f of the ROM 63. Details of these various commands will be explained later.

In addition, the audio light emission control device 90 controls the drive of various lamps 47 consisting of light emitting means such as LEDs arranged in the front door frame 14 and the drive control of the speaker 46 based on various commands received from the main control device 60. At the same time, the display control device 100 is controlled. Further, a performance operation button 24 is connected to the sound emission control device 90, and when the performance operation button 24 is operated by a player at a predetermined timing, a game performance that reflects the operation is performed. It controls various lamps 47, speakers 46, display control device 100, etc.

The display control device 100 executes display control of the liquid crystal display device 41 based on various commands received from the audio emission control device 90. Specifically, the display control device 100 grasps the fluctuation time of the symbols on the liquid crystal display device 41 and the type of combination of symbols to be finally stopped and displayed based on various commands received from the audio emission control device 90. , the presence or absence of a reach, the contents of the reach effect, and the contents of the effect executed while the first liquid crystal symbol and the second liquid crystal symbol are being displayed in a variable manner are grasped. The electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 has been described above.

FIG. 85 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of various counters used for winning lottery and the like. The various counter information is used when the MPU 62 performs the winning lottery, setting the display on the main display section 45, setting the symbol display on the liquid crystal display device 41, and the like. Specifically, a jackpot random number counter C1 is used for the winning lottery. A jackpot type counter C2 is used when sorting the jackpot types. A reach random number counter C3 is used to determine whether or not to generate a reach when the symbol row displayed on the liquid crystal display device 41 is changed.

A random number initial value counter CINI is used to set the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1. Further, when determining the fluctuation time in the first symbol display section 37a and the second symbol display section 37b of the main display section 45 and the liquid crystal display device 41, a fluctuation type counter CS is used. Further, an electric accessory release counter C4 is used for an electric accessory release lottery to determine whether or not to open the electric accessory 44a of the second starting port 34.

Each of the counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS, and C4 is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the counter value each time the counter value is updated, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. Each counter is updated at short intervals, and the updated value is appropriately stored in a lottery counter buffer 64a set in a predetermined area of the RAM 64.

Further, the RAM 64 is provided with a pending information storage area 64b and a determination processing execution area 64c. The reservation information storage area 64b is provided with a first reservation area Ra and a second reservation area Rb. In this embodiment, when a game ball enters the upper first starting port 33 or the lower first starting port 44, the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 at the timing of ball entry are The information is stored chronologically in the first reservation area Ra of the reservation information storage area 64b. Furthermore, when a game ball enters the second starting port 34, the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 at the timing of ball entry are stored in the second reservation area Rb of the reservation information storage area 64b. Stored in chronological order.

Details of the jackpot random number counter C1 will be explained. The jackpot random number counter C1 is used for the winning lottery as described above. For example, the jackpot random number counter C1 is configured to increment sequentially by 1 within the range of 0 to 1199, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value. Further, when the jackpot random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the random number initial value counter CINI at that time is read as the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1. Note that the random number initial value counter CINI is a loop counter similar to the jackpot random number counter C1 (value=0 to 1199).

The jackpot random number counter C1 is updated regularly, and when a game ball enters the first starting port (upper first starting port 33 and lower first starting port 44), the entered ball When a game ball enters the second starting port 34, it is stored in the second holding area Ra of the holding information storage area 64b at the timing of the ball entering. It is stored in Rb.

The value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the first holding area Ra is moved to the first execution area of the determination process execution area 64c, and is compared with the win/fail table stored in the win/fail table storage area 63a of the ROM 63, and the jackpot is determined. It is determined whether or not. Further, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the second holding area Rb is moved to the second execution area of the determination processing execution area 64c, and is compared with the win/fail table stored in the win/fail table storage area 63a of the ROM 63. , it is determined whether or not it will be a jackpot.

In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, when a game ball enters the first starting port (upper first starting port 33 and lower first starting port 44), a jackpot stored in the first holding area Ra is generated. The value of the random number counter C1 is moved to the first execution area of the judgment processing execution area 64c, and is compared with the win/fail table stored in the win/fail table storage area 63a of the ROM 63 to determine whether or not it will be a jackpot. When a game ball enters the second starting port 34, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the second holding area Rb is moved to the second execution area of the determination process execution area 64c, A process of comparing the win/fail table stored in the win/fail table storage area 63a of the ROM 63 and determining whether or not there will be a jackpot is executed in parallel. Below, a process for determining whether or not a jackpot will occur when a game ball enters the first starting port (the upper first starting port 33 and the lower first starting port 44) and the second starting port 34 will be described. The process of determining whether or not a jackpot occurs when a game ball enters is executed in parallel, and the variable display on the first symbol display section 37a and the variable display on the second symbol display section 37b are executed in parallel. Pachinko machines that can be executed in parallel are also called simultaneous variation machines.

In addition, in the following explanation, the game (also referred to as a game round) that is executed when a game ball enters the first starting port (the upper first starting port 33 and the lower first starting port 44) is referred to as the first starting port. It may be expressed as a game round for the starting opening, and a game (also referred to as a gaming round) that is executed triggered by the entry of a game ball into the second starting opening 34 may be expressed as a gaming round for the second starting opening.

Next, details of the jackpot type counter C2 will be explained. The jackpot type counter C2 is used when determining the jackpot type. The jackpot type counter C2 is configured to be sequentially incremented by 1 within the range of 0 to 39, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

The jackpot type counter C2 is updated regularly, and when a game ball enters the first starting port 33, the updated value is stored in the first holding area Ra of the holding information storage area 64b at the timing of the ball entering. When a game ball enters the second starting port 34, it is stored in the second holding area Rb of the holding information storage area 64b at the timing of the ball entering.

As described above, the MPU 62 performs a winning lottery using the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the determination processing execution area 64c, and when the result of the winning lottery is a jackpot, the MPU 62 performs a winning lottery using the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the determination processing execution area 64c. The jackpot type is determined using the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the jackpot type counter C2. Furthermore, the MPU 62 uses the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 and the value of the jackpot type counter C2 to determine the display mode of the segment display to be stopped and displayed on the first symbol display section 37a and the second symbol display section 37b. . In making this determination, the stop result table stored in the stop result table storage area 63e of the ROM 63 is referred to.

Next, details of the reach random number counter C3 will be explained. The reach random number counter C3 is used to determine whether or not a reach occurs when the result of the winning lottery is not a jackpot. The reach random number counter C3 is configured to increment sequentially by 1 within the range of 0 to 238, for example, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

The reach random number counter C3 is updated regularly, and the updated value is stored in the pending information storage area 64b at the timing when a game ball enters the first starting port (upper first starting port 33 and lower first starting port 44). The game ball is stored in the first holding area Ra of the holding information storage area 64b, and is stored in the second holding area Rb of the holding information storage area 64b at the timing when the game ball enters the second starting port 34. After moving to the determination processing execution area 64c, the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the first holding area Ra is compared with the reach determination table stored in the reach determination table storage area 63c of the ROM 63, and the reach It is determined whether or not this occurs. After moving to the determination processing execution area 64c, the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the second holding area Rb is compared with the reach determination table stored in the reach determination table storage area 63c of the ROM 63, and the reach It is determined whether or not this occurs. However, when the result of the winning lottery is a jackpot and the mode is shifted to the opening/closing execution mode, the MPU 62 determines that the reach is generated regardless of the value of the reach random number counter C3.

Reach means that some combinations of symbols that have the possibility of forming a combination that corresponds to a jackpot are stopped for some of the multiple symbol arrays displayed on the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 41. It refers to a display state in which symbols are displayed and in that state, symbols are displayed variably in the remaining symbol rows. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, the combination of symbols that corresponds to a jackpot refers to a combination of the same symbols on a predetermined active line. As a specific example, in the main display area MA of the display surface 41a in FIG. 83(b), a symbol is first stopped and displayed in the symbol row Z1, and then the same symbol as Z1 is stopped and displayed in the symbol row Z3. A reach line is formed, and in a situation where the reach line is formed, a variable display of symbols is performed in the symbol row Z2, resulting in a reach state. When a jackpot occurs, the same symbols as those forming the reach line are stopped and displayed in the symbol row Z2.

As another specific example, in the sub-display area SA of the display surface 41a in FIG. 83(b), a symbol is first stopped and displayed in symbol row Z4, and then the same symbol as Z4 is stopped and displayed in symbol row Z6. As a result, a reach line is formed, and in a situation where the reach line is formed, a variable display of symbols is performed in the symbol row Z5, resulting in a reach. When a jackpot occurs, the same symbols as those forming the reach line are stopped and displayed in the symbol row Z5.

In addition, in the reach, the reach line is formed, and the remaining symbol rows are displayed with fluctuating symbols, and a predetermined character or the like is displayed as a video on the background screen to create a reach effect. This includes a method in which a combination of symbols in which a reach line is formed is displayed in a reduced size or hidden, and a predetermined character or the like is displayed as a moving image on substantially the entire display surface 41a to perform a reach effect. In addition, when a reach effect is being performed or before a reach display, a decision is made as to whether or not to display a preview using a predetermined image such as a predetermined character using the reach random number counter C3 or other counters. It's okay.

Next, details of the variation type counter CS will be explained. The variation type counter CS is used when the MPU 62 determines the variation time in the first symbol display section 37a and the second symbol display section 37b and the variation time of the symbol in the liquid crystal display device 41. The variation type counter CS is configured to be incremented one by one within the range of 0 to 198, for example, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

The variation type counter CS is updated once every time a normal process (described later) is executed once, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time within the normal process. Then, the buffer value of the variation type counter CS is acquired when determining the variation pattern at the start of the variation display on the first symbol display section 37a or the second symbol display section 37b and at the start of variation of the symbol on the liquid crystal display device 41. When determining the fluctuation time in the first symbol display section 37a and the second symbol display section 37b, a fluctuation time table stored in the fluctuation time table storage area 63d of the ROM 63 is used.

Next, details of the electric accessory opening counter C4 will be explained. The electric accessory opening counter C4 is configured to increment sequentially by 1 within the range of 0 to 465, for example, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The electric accessory release counter C4 is updated regularly and is stored in the electric role holding area 64d of the RAM 64 at the timing when a game ball enters the through gate 35. Then, at a predetermined timing, after the value of the electric accessory opening counter C4 stored in the electric accessory holding area 64d moves to the electric accessory execution area 64e, the electric accessory is released in the electric accessory execution area 64e. A lottery is held using the value of the counter C4 to determine whether or not to control the electric accessory 44a to the open state. For example, if C4=0 to 463, the electric accessory 44a is controlled to be in the open state, and if C4=464,465, the electric accessory 44a is maintained in the closed state.

Note that at least one of the acquired value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the value of the jackpot type counter C2, the value of the reach random number counter C3, and the value of the electric accessory release counter C4 corresponds to special information in the present invention. Further, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the value of the jackpot type counter C2, and the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the first reservation area Ra and the second reservation area Rb are also referred to as reservation information.

Next, the validity table will be explained. The win/fail table is table data for comparing with the jackpot random number counter C1 when performing a winning lottery based on the jackpot random number counter C1. The pachinko machine 10 is set to a low probability mode and a high probability mode as the lottery modes for winning lots, and when drawing a winning lottery in the low probability mode, the win/fail table for the low probability mode is referred to, and the winning lottery mode is set to a low probability mode and a high probability mode. When drawing a winning lottery in the probability mode, the winning/failure table for the high probability mode is referred to. In addition, in the present embodiment, the pachinko machine 10 operates the first starting port in the pending information storage area 64b at the timing when a game ball enters the first starting port (upper first starting port 33 and lower first starting port 44). A win/fail table for comparing with the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the holding area Ra and a jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the determination processing execution area 64c at the timing when the game ball enters the second starting port 34. and the validity table for each are stored as separate table data. Specifically, the pachinko machine 10 has a win/fail table for the first starting port (for low probability mode), a winning/failure table for the first starting port (for high probability mode), and a winning/failure table for the second starting port (for low probability mode). Four validity tables are stored in the validity table storage area 63a of the ROM 63, including a validity table for the second starting port (for the high probability mode) and a validity table for the second starting port (for the high probability mode).

FIG. 86 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of the validity table for the first starting port. FIG. 86(a) shows a success/failure table for the first starting port (for low probability mode), and FIG. 86(b) shows a success/failure table for the first starting port (for high probability mode).

As shown in FIG. 86(a), four values from 0 to 3 are set in the win/fail table for the first starting opening (for low probability mode) as the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 that will be a jackpot. There is. Among the values from 0 to 1199, values other than the four values 0 to 3 (4 to 1199) are outliers. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 86(b), 20 values from 0 to 19 are set in the win/fail table (for high probability mode) for the first starting opening as the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 that will be a jackpot. has been done. Among the values from 0 to 1199, values other than the 20 values from 0 to 19 are outliers. In this way, the high probability mode has a higher probability of winning a jackpot in the winning lottery than the low probability mode.

In addition, in this embodiment, the value group of the jackpot random number counter C1 set as a jackpot in the win/fail table for the low probability mode is the value group of the jackpot random number counter C1 set as a jackpot in the win/fail table for the high probability mode. included in the group. However, as long as the probability of a jackpot is higher in the high probability mode than in the low probability mode as a result of the winning lottery, the number and value of random numbers set as a jackpot are arbitrary.

FIG. 87 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of the validity table for the second starting port. FIG. 87(a) shows the validity table for the second starting port (for low probability mode), and FIG. 87(b) shows the validity table for the second starting port (for high probability mode).

As shown in FIG. 87(a), four values from 0 to 3 are set in the win/fail table for the second starting opening (for low probability mode) as the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 that will be a jackpot. . Further, 1192 values from 4 to 1195 are set as the values of the jackpot random number counter C1 that will be a small win, and 4 values from 1196 to 1199 are set as the values of the jackpot random number counter C1 that will be a loss.

Here, a "small win" is an opportunity to shift to the opening/closing execution mode in which the variable prize winning device 36 is opened/closed, but for both the lottery mode and support mode described later, it is a win/fail result that does not trigger a shift. be. On the other hand, "losing" is a win/fail result that does not trigger a transition to the opening/closing execution mode, and also does not trigger a transition to the lottery mode or support mode. Further, in this embodiment, the small win occurs once as the opening/closing execution mode, in which the variable winning device 36 is opened for an opening period of 1.6 seconds.

As shown in FIG. 87(b), 20 values from 0 to 19 are set in the win/fail table for the second starting opening (for high probability mode) as the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 that is a jackpot. . Further, 1176 values from 20 to 1195 are set as the values of the jackpot random number counter C1 that will be a small win, and 4 values from 1196 to 1199 are set as the values of the jackpot random number counter C1 that will be a loss.

In this way, in the win/fail table for the second starting gate, as well as the win/fail table for the first starting gate, the high probability mode has a higher probability of winning a jackpot in the winning lottery than the low probability mode. ing. Furthermore, in the win/fail table for the second starting opening, in both the win/fail table for the low probability mode and the win/fail table for the high probability mode, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 that is a small win is set, and 2. When a winning lottery is executed in response to a game ball entering the starting slot, it is set so that a small win will occur with a predetermined probability.

Next, the jackpot type will be explained. A plurality of types of jackpots can be set in the pachinko machine 10. Specifically, for example, by providing differences in the following three aspects or modes, it is possible to set a plurality of types of jackpots.
(1) Number of times the opening/closing door 36b of the variable prize winning device 36 is opened/closed in the opening/closing execution mode (number of rounds)
(2) Aspects of opening/closing control of the variable prize winning device 36 in opening/closing execution mode (3) Lottery mode for winning lottery after opening/closing execution mode (low probability mode or high probability mode)

As an aspect of the opening/closing control of the variable winning device 36 in the above (2) opening/closing execution mode, the occurrence of a game ball entering the variable winning device 36 (winning) between the start and end of the opening/closing execution mode. A high-frequency winning mode and a low-frequency winning mode can be set so that the frequencies are relatively high or low.

In addition to the above (1) to (3), it is also possible to set up a jackpot that requires execution of a specific process if the player wins. As will be described later, in this embodiment, a jackpot type of "specific probability variable jackpot" is set. A specific probability variable jackpot involves execution of a specific process when winning. Details will be described later.

In this embodiment, when a jackpot is obtained as a result of the winning lottery, the jackpot type is sorted using the jackpot type counter C2. The distribution of the jackpot type corresponding to the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is stored as a distribution table in the distribution table storage area 63b of the ROM 63.

FIG. 88 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of the distribution table. FIG. 88(a) shows a distribution table for the first starting port, and FIG. 88(b) shows a distribution table for the second starting port. The distribution table for the first starting port is referred to when drawing a winning lottery based on the entry of game balls into the first starting port (the upper first starting port 33 and the lower first starting port 44). The starting hole distribution table is referred to when a winning lottery is drawn based on the entry of game balls into the second starting hole 34.

As shown in FIG. 88(a), the distribution table for the first starting port includes information regarding the entry of game balls into the first starting port (upper first starting port 33 and lower first starting port 44). Based on the jackpot types, 10R certain probability variable jackpot, 10R specific probability variable jackpot, and 8R normal jackpot are set.

In the 10R definite variable jackpot, the number of times the opening/closing door 36b of the variable winning device 36 in the opening/closing execution mode is opened is 10 times (10 rounds), and the mode of opening/closing control of the variable winning device 36 in the opening/closing execution mode is the high frequency winning mode. . In addition, in the 10R probability variable jackpot, the lottery mode of the winning lottery after the opening/closing execution mode ends is the high probability mode, and the high probability mode continues until the jackpot is won in the winning lottery executed after that. Furthermore, in the 10R probability variable jackpot, after the opening/closing execution mode ends, the state becomes a high-frequency support mode, which will be described later, and the electric accessory 44a becomes easier to open than the state of the low-frequency support mode. In the case of a 10R probability-variable jackpot, the high-frequency support mode continues until the jackpot is won in the subsequent winning lottery. Details of the high-frequency support mode and the low-frequency support mode will be described later.

In the 10R specific probability variable jackpot, the number of times the opening/closing door 36b of the variable winning device 36 in the opening/closing execution mode is opened is 10 times (10 rounds), and the mode of opening/closing control of the variable winning device 36 in the opening/closing execution mode is in the high frequency winning mode. be. In addition, in the 10R specific probability variable jackpot, the lottery mode of the winning lottery after the opening/closing execution mode ends is the high probability mode, and the high probability mode continues until the jackpot is won in the winning lottery executed thereafter. Furthermore, in the 10R specific probability variable jackpot, after the opening/closing execution mode ends, the state becomes the high frequency support mode, and the electric accessory 44a becomes easier to open than the state of the low frequency support mode. In the case of a 10R specific probability variable jackpot, the high-frequency support mode continues until the jackpot is won in the subsequent winning lottery.

In addition, as described above, the 10R specific probability variable jackpot involves execution of a specific process when won. Details will be described later.

In the 8R normal jackpot, the number of times the opening/closing door 36b of the variable winning device 36 in the opening/closing execution mode is opened is 8 times (8 rounds), and the mode of opening/closing control of the variable winning device 36 in the opening/closing execution mode is the high frequency winning mode. . Further, in the 8R normal jackpot, the lottery mode of the winning lottery after the opening/closing execution mode is a low probability mode. In addition, in the 8R normal jackpot, after the opening/closing execution mode ends, the state becomes the high frequency support mode, and the electric accessory 44a becomes easier to open than the state of the low frequency support mode. However, in the case of an 8R normal jackpot, the number of games played in the high-frequency support mode is limited to 100, and if the total number of games played in the high-frequency support mode reaches 100. , the support mode shifts from high-frequency support mode to low-frequency support mode.

In the distribution table for the first starting opening, among the values of the jackpot type counter C2 of "0 to 39", "0 to 11" correspond to a 10R probability variable jackpot, and "12 to 19" correspond to a 10R specific probability variable jackpot. Correspondingly, "20-39" is set to correspond to the 8R normal jackpot.

As shown in FIG. 88(b), the distribution table for the second starting port includes 2R certain variable jackpot and 2R normal jackpot as jackpot types based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 34. It is set.

In the 2R definite variable jackpot, the number of times the opening/closing door 36b of the variable winning device 36 in the opening/closing execution mode is opened is 2 times (2 rounds), and the mode of opening/closing control of the variable winning device 36 in the opening/closing execution mode is the high frequency winning mode. . In addition, in the 2R probability variable jackpot, the lottery mode of the winning lottery after the opening/closing execution mode ends is a high probability mode, and the high probability mode continues until the jackpot is won in the winning lottery executed thereafter. Furthermore, in the 2R probability variable jackpot, after the opening/closing execution mode ends, the state becomes a high-frequency support mode, which will be described later, and the electric accessory 44a becomes easier to open than the state of the low-frequency support mode. In the case of a 2R probability-variable jackpot, the high-frequency support mode continues until a jackpot is won in the subsequent winning lottery. Details of the high-frequency support mode and the low-frequency support mode will be described later.

In the 2R normal jackpot, the number of opening/closing doors 36b of the variable winning device 36 in the opening/closing execution mode is opened twice (two rounds), and the mode of opening/closing control of the variable winning device 36 in the opening/closing execution mode is the high frequency winning mode. . Further, in the 2R normal jackpot, the lottery mode of the winning lottery after the opening/closing execution mode is a low probability mode. In addition, in the 2R normal jackpot, after the opening/closing execution mode ends, the state becomes the high-frequency support mode, and the electric accessory 44a becomes easier to open than the state of the low-frequency support mode. However, in the case of a 2R normal jackpot, the number of games played in the high-frequency support mode is limited to 100, and if the total number of games played in the high-frequency support mode reaches 100. , the support mode shifts from high-frequency support mode to low-frequency support mode.

In the distribution table for the second starting opening, among the values of the jackpot type counter C2 of "0 to 39", "0 to 19" correspond to the 2R probability variable jackpot, and "20 to 39" correspond to the 2R normal jackpot. is set to.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when a jackpot is achieved, the distribution of the jackpot type is based on the game to the first starting opening (the upper first starting opening 33 and the lower first starting opening 44). There is a difference between a case where a jackpot is achieved based on the ball entering the ball and a case where a jackpot is achieved based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 34, and there is a clear difference in the advantage for the player. A distinction is made.

In the pachinko machine 10, as a support mode of the electric accessory 44a of the lower first starting port 44 after the end of the opening/closing execution mode (3) described above, the game balls are launched into the game area PA in a similar manner. The high-frequency support mode and the low-frequency support mode are set so that the frequency at which the electric accessory 44a of the lower first starting port 44 is opened per unit time is relatively high or low when compared with the situation in which the lower first starting port 44 is opened. Frequency support mode and can be set.

Specifically, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, the probability of winning the electric role opening in the electric role-playing object opening lottery using the electric role-playing object opening counter C4 is different between the high-frequency support mode and the low-frequency support mode. . In the high-frequency support mode, the probability of winning the electric role-playing role in the electric role-playing object lottery is made higher than in the low-frequency support mode. Furthermore, in the high-frequency support mode, the time for one opening of the electric accessory 44a is set longer than in the low-frequency support mode when the electric role is won.

Although not adopted in this embodiment, in the case where the electric role is won in the high-frequency support mode and the electric role is opened multiple times, the next operation will be performed after one open state ends. The closing time until the open state starts may be set shorter than the opening time for one time. Furthermore, in the high-frequency support mode, the minimum secured time between one electric accessory opening lottery and the next electric accessory opening lottery is set shorter than the low-frequency support mode. It's okay.

As described above, in the high-frequency support mode, the probability that a game ball will enter the lower first starting port 44 is higher than in the low-frequency support mode, and the game ball will enter the lower first starting port 44. It becomes easier to ball. That is, the high frequency support mode functions as an auxiliary game state that assists in fulfilling the special information acquisition condition.

FIG. 89 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of a win/fail table (win/fail table for electric accessory release lottery) used when executing the electric accessory lottery.

FIG. 89(a) shows a win/fail table (for low-frequency support mode) for electric accessory opening lottery used in low-frequency support mode. As shown in FIG. 89(a), the winning/failure table for electric accessory opening lottery (for low-frequency support mode) has two values of 0 and 1 as the value of electric accessory opening counter C4, which is the winning of electric accessory opening. Value is set. 464 values from 2 to 465 are set as the value of the electric accessory release counter C4 that is a failure. That is, when the game ball passes through the through gate 35 during the low-frequency support mode and the electric role opening lottery is executed, the electric role opening lottery will be won with a probability of 1/233. In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, when an electric role opening win occurs during the low-frequency support mode, the electric role accessory 44a is opened once, and the opening time is 1.4 seconds.

FIG. 89(b) shows a win/fail table (for high-frequency support mode) for electric accessory opening lottery used in high-frequency support mode. As shown in FIG. 89(b), the winning/failure table for electric accessory opening lottery (for high-frequency support mode) has 462 values from 0 to 461 as the value of electric accessory opening counter C4 that is the electric accessory opening winning. Value is set. Four values from 462 to 465 are set as the value of the electric accessory release counter C4 that is a failure. That is, when the game ball passes through the through gate 35 during the high-frequency support mode and the electric role opening lottery is executed, the electric role opening lottery will be won with a probability of 231/233. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when an electric role opening win occurs during the high-frequency support mode, the electric role accessory 44a is opened once, and the opening time is 1.6 seconds.

In this way, the probability of a game ball entering the second starting port 34 is set to be higher in the high-frequency support mode than in the low-frequency support mode by the electric accessory opening lottery table. .

B3. Game flow:
Next, the general flow of the game of the gaming machine in this embodiment will be explained using FIG. 90.

FIG. 90 is an explanatory diagram showing the flow of the game in the gaming machine.

When the game starts, in step F101, the player is made to hit the ball to the left, causing the game ball to flow down to the left side of the game area PA, and enter the game ball into the upper first starting port 33. At this time, the lottery mode is a low probability mode, and the support mode is a low frequency support mode. When a game ball enters the upper first starting port 33, a game round for the first starting port is executed and a winning lottery is performed.

If the winning lottery in the game round for the first starting opening is a loss (F101: NO), the game ball is repeatedly entered into the upper first starting opening 33 to execute the game round for the first starting opening.

If you win a jackpot in the winning lottery executed in the game for the first starting opening (F102: YES), if the type of the won jackpot is a normal jackpot (F103: NO), you can play the game for the first starting opening. A round game is executed as a benefit given to the player after the round ends (F104). Specifically, a suggestion effect is performed to encourage the player to play right. The player executes a right-handed hit after the end of the game round for the first starting opening in accordance with the suggested performance, and enters the game ball into the big winning opening 36a to obtain a prize ball.

When the round game ends, the lottery mode becomes a low probability mode and the support mode becomes a high frequency support mode (limited to 100 games). A suggestion effect is executed to prompt the player to hit left, and the player hits left and enters the game ball into the first starting opening (upper first starting opening 33 and lower first starting opening 44). A game round for the first starting opening is executed (F105).

The high-frequency support mode continues until the game is played 100 times (F106: NO → F107: NO), and if a jackpot is won within 100 times (F106: YES), the game progresses from step F103. .

On the other hand, if the jackpot is not won within 100 games in the high-frequency support mode (F106: NO→F107: YES), the game proceeds from step F101.

The explanation returns to step F103. In step F103, if the jackpot type of the won jackpot is a certain probability variable jackpot (F103: YES), but not a specific probability variable jackpot (F108: NO), after the end of the first starting opening game round, A round game is executed as a benefit given to the player (F109). Specifically, a suggestion effect is performed to encourage the player to play right. The player executes a right-handed hit after the end of the game round for the first starting opening in accordance with the suggested performance, and enters the game ball into the big winning opening 36a to obtain a prize ball.

When the round game ends, the lottery mode becomes a high probability mode, and the support mode becomes a high frequency support mode (until the next jackpot win). A suggestion effect is executed to prompt the player to hit left, and the player hits left and enters the game ball into the first starting opening (upper first starting opening 33 and lower first starting opening 44). A game round for the first starting opening is executed (F110).

The high-frequency support mode continues until a jackpot is won in the winning lottery (F110→F111: NO).

When the game round for the first starting opening is executed and a jackpot is won (F110→F111: YES), the game proceeds from step F103.

The explanation returns to step F108. In step F108, if the jackpot type of the won jackpot is a specific probability variable jackpot (F108: YES), a round game is executed as a benefit given to the player after the end of the first starting opening game round. (F112). Specifically, a suggestion effect is performed to encourage the player to play right. The player executes a right-handed hit after the end of the game round for the first starting opening in accordance with the suggested performance, and enters the game ball into the big winning opening 36a to obtain a prize ball.

When the round game ends, the lottery mode becomes a high probability mode and the support mode becomes a high frequency support mode. A suggestion effect is executed to prompt the player to hit left, and the player hits left and enters the game ball into the first starting opening (upper first starting opening 33 and lower first starting opening 44). A game round for the first starting opening is executed (F113).

When the game round for the first starting opening is executed and a jackpot is won in the winning lottery in the game round for the first starting opening to be executed (F114: YES), the game round for the first starting opening is started. At some point, the support mode shifts from the high-frequency support mode to the low-frequency port mode (F115). In a normal gaming machine, if a jackpot is won in the winning lottery in the first starting slot game, after the first starting opening game ends, the high-frequency support mode is changed to the low-frequency port mode. However, in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, the support mode shifts from the high-frequency support mode to the low-frequency port mode at the start of the first starting slot game round.

Further, at this time, at the start of the game round for the first starting opening, a suggestion effect is executed to urge the player to play right.

During the period in which the game round for the first starting hole in which the jackpot has been won in the winning lottery is being executed, the player hits the right ball according to the suggestion presentation that urges him to hit the right hand, and inserts the game ball into the second starting hole 34. The player makes a ball and executes a game round for the second starting port (F116). At this time, the lottery mode is a high probability mode, and the support mode is a low frequency support mode.

In the game round for the second starting opening that is executed during the period in which the gaming round for the first starting opening that has won a jackpot in the winning lottery is being executed (hereinafter also referred to as the winning game round execution period for the first starting opening) If you win a small hit (F117: YES), one round of the round game is executed as a bonus for the small win (F118). The player enters the game ball into the grand prize opening 36a to obtain a prize ball.

On the other hand, even if you do not win a small hit in the game for the second starting port (F117: NO), if the game ball enters the second starting port 34, the second starting port will be played again. The oral game round is executed.

In the winning game round execution period for the first starting opening, the average value of the playing time of the gaming round for the second starting opening is compared with the average value of the gaming time of the gaming round for the second starting opening in other periods. It is set to be short, and a plurality of second starting opening game rounds can be executed during the winning game round execution period for the first starting opening. Also, as can be seen from the win/fail table for the second starting opening (for high probability mode) in Figure 87(b), when the game round for the second starting opening is executed, there is a high probability of winning a small hit. do. Therefore, it is possible to execute the game round for the second starting opening multiple times during the execution period of the winning game round for the first starting opening, and win the small win multiple times, and the player can receive the benefits provided by the small winning. It is possible to obtain multiple times. Hereinafter, the process of giving a bonus to the player by winning a small win in the game round for the second starting opening during the execution period of the winning game round for the first starting opening will also be referred to as "special bonus processing".

The special bonus process is executed until the winning game execution period for the first starting opening ends. In other words, the process is executed until the first starting opening game round in which the jackpot started in step F114 is won ends (F119: NO). When the game round for the first starting opening in which the jackpot has been won ends (F119: YES), the game proceeds from step F103. That is, the game progresses in different directions depending on whether the type of jackpot in the game round for the first starting opening in which the jackpot is won is a normal jackpot, a probability variable jackpot, or a specific probability variable jackpot. The special bonus process will be explained below using a time chart.

FIG. 91 is a time chart illustrating special bonus processing.

FIG. 91 shows the time from time T0 when the player starts playing until the end of the special bonus process. The illustrated time T0 corresponds to the progress state of the game in step F101 in FIG. 90. A player starts playing a game at time T0, and enters a game ball into the upper first starting port 33 to execute a game round for the first starting port. At this time, as shown in FIG. 91, the main display area MA of the display surface 41a (see FIG. 83(b)) of the liquid crystal display device 41 is displayed with an effect image (hereinafter referred to as the first A performance image for a starting opening (also referred to as a performance image for a starting opening) is displayed, and a performance image corresponding to a game round for a second starting opening (hereinafter also referred to as a performance image for a second starting opening) is displayed in the sub display area SA.

When the 8R specific probability variable jackpot is won in the game round for the first starting opening at time T1 (corresponding to F108: YES in FIG. 90), after the end of the first gaming round for the starting opening in which the 8R specific probability variable jackpot is won (time T2). , a round game is executed (corresponding to F112 in FIG. 90). As an internal process by the main control device 60, an opening/closing execution mode flag indicating that a round game is to be executed is turned ON. At this time, the liquid crystal display device 41 displays a round effect image triggered by a jackpot in the game round for the first starting opening.

At time T3, when the opening/closing execution mode flag is turned OFF and the round game ends, the high frequency support mode flag indicating the high frequency support mode is turned ON as an internal process by the main controller 60. Further, as an internal process by the main controller 60, a high probability mode flag indicating that the mode is a high probability mode is turned ON. Note that the state at time T3 in FIG. 91 corresponds to the game progress state at step F113 in FIG.

In the high frequency support mode and high probability mode, when the player hits the game ball to the left and enters the first starting port (upper first starting port 33, lower first starting port 44), the first A game round for one starting opening is executed. In the first starting slot game run executed at this time, the average value of the game time of the game run is short compared to other periods.

Thereafter, when the game round for the first start opening in which the jackpot has been won starts at time T4, a special bonus process is started. Specifically, when the game round for the first starting opening in which the jackpot has been won is started, the high-frequency support mode flag is turned OFF. In addition, in the winning game round execution period for the first starting opening, the average value of the playing time of the gaming round for the second starting opening is compared with the average value of the gaming time of the gaming round for the second starting opening in other periods. It is set to be shorter. In addition, a suggestion effect is executed to urge the player to play right-handed. Note that the processing at time T4 in FIG. 91 corresponds to step F114 and step F115 in FIG. Furthermore, as shown in the column of liquid crystal display device in FIG. 91, when the special bonus process is started, the effect image for the second starting opening is displayed in the main display area MA, and the effect image for the first starting opening is displayed in the sub display area SA. A performance image is displayed.

When the player hits the right ball and enters the game ball into the second starting hole 34 to execute the second starting hole game round and wins a small hit, each of the second starting hole game times that won the small hit. After the round game is finished, one round of the round game is executed, and as an internal process in the main control device 60, the opening/closing execution mode flag is turned ON after the game round for the second starting opening that resulted in each small win is turned ON, and is turned OFF after the round game is finished. becomes.

At this time, as shown in FIG. 91, the game round for the first starting opening is being executed, but during the period when the round game is being executed due to the small win in the gaming round for the second starting opening, the main controller 60 As an internal process, the measurement of the gaming time of the first starting opening gaming session is interrupted. The period during which the measurement of the gaming time of the game round for the first starting opening is interrupted is indicated by diagonal lines in the chart showing the gaming round for the first starting opening in FIG. As shown in the figure, during the execution period of the winning game round for the first starting opening, during the period when the opening/closing execution mode flag is ON due to a small win in the gaming round for the second starting opening, the winning game round for the first starting opening is Execution time measurement is interrupted.

Then, when the playing time of the game round for the first starting opening, which was measured by the internal processing, passes a predetermined time, the gaming round for the first starting opening ends at time T5, and the special bonus process ends. finish.

When the playing time of the game round for the first starting opening passes a predetermined predetermined time, the round game corresponding to the gaming round for the first starting opening that won the jackpot will be executed during the period from time T5 to time T6. The opening/closing execution mode flag is turned ON at time T5 and turned OFF at time T6.

In addition, after time T5, the game time set for the game round for the second starting opening is set to a value between 5 minutes and 10 minutes. Therefore, even if the player hits right and executes the game round for the second starting opening and wins a small win, the game time for one round is extremely long, which puts the player at a disadvantage. By doing so, it is possible to suppress the player's actions that do not follow the legal flow of the game on the pachinko machine 10.

As explained above, the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment executes the special bonus process, which is the process of giving a benefit during the execution of the first starting opening game round in which the jackpot has been won, so that the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment In addition to creating a feeling of anticipation regarding the round game (opening/closing execution mode) as a benefit that will be given after the end of the game round in which the jackpot has been won, it is also possible to It can also create a sense of expectation.

In addition, during the period in which the special bonus processing is executed, during the execution of the game round for the first starting opening in which the jackpot was won, the special bonus will be given as a result of winning a small hit in the gaming round for the second starting opening. As a bonus (1R round game) is given, even if you win a jackpot in the first starting slot game, you can still play the second starting slot game and win a small hit. By having the winner win, it is possible to give an even greater sense of expectation.

Furthermore, after the first starting opening game round in which the special bonus process is executed, a round game will be executed in response to the jackpot winning in the first starting opening game round, so the game will have even greater expectations. can be granted to a person.

Furthermore, since the pachinko machine 10 in this embodiment switches the support mode from the high-frequency support mode to the low-frequency support mode at the start of the first starting opening game round in which the special bonus process is executed, the special bonus process is executed. In this case, it is possible to prevent a situation from becoming excessively advantageous to the player.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the upper limit of the number of times the second starting slot game can be executed in the special bonus process is based on the playing time of the first starting slot game that corresponds to the period of the special bonus process. In other words, after winning a special probability variable jackpot, by controlling the playing time of the next game round in which the jackpot is won, it is possible to control the upper limit of benefits given to the player through special bonus processing.

In addition, if the type of jackpot at time T1 shown in FIG. Bonus processing is started.

B4. Various processes executed in the main controller:
Next, an example of a specific process executed in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment will be explained. First, the processing executed in the main control device 60 will be explained, and then the processing executed in the audio emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 will be explained.

<Timer interrupt processing>
FIG. 92 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing. The timer interrupt process is activated periodically (for example, every 2 msec) by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60.

In step S20101, reading processing for various detection sensors is executed. That is, the state of various detection sensors connected to the main controller 60 is read, the state of the sensor is determined, and the detection information (ball entrance detection information) is saved. After that, the process advances to step S20102.

In step S20102, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated. Specifically, 1 is added to the random number initial value counter CINI, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value, it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the random number initial value counter CINI is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 64. After that, the process advances to step S20103.

In step S20103, the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the electric accessory opening counter C4 are updated. Specifically, 1 is added to each of the jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, reach random number counter C3, and electric accessory release counter C4, and when each of these counter values reaches the maximum value, Clear to 0. Then, the updated values of each counter C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 64. After that, the process advances to step S20104. Note that the value of the variation type counter CS is updated in normal processing (FIG. 94), which will be described later.

In step S20104, ball entry processing for the starting ports is executed as the game balls enter the first starting ports (upper first starting port 33, lower first starting port 44) and second starting port 34. Details of the ball entry process for the starting port in step S20104 will be described later. After executing step S20104, the MPU 62 ends the timer interrupt processing.

<Ball entry process for starting port>
Next, the ball entry process for the starting port will be explained. The ball entry process for the starting port is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a timer interrupt process subroutine (FIG. 92: S20104).

FIG. 93 is a flowchart showing the ball entry process for the starting port. In step S20201, it is determined whether or not the game ball has entered the first starting port (upper first starting port 33, lower first starting port 44) (starting prize). 33, the determination is made based on the detection state of the detection sensor corresponding to the lower first starting port 44). In step S20201, if it is determined that the game ball has entered the first starting port (upper first starting port 33, lower first starting port 44) (S20201: YES), the process advances to step S20202, and the payout control is performed. A prize ball command for causing the device 70 to pay out three game balls is set. After that, the process advances to step S20203.

In step S20203, an external signal is sent to output a signal to the management control device on the gaming hall side that the game ball has entered the first starting port (upper first starting port 33, lower first starting port 44). Perform setting processing. After that, the process advances to step S20204.

In step S20204, the starting pending number RaN (hereinafter also referred to as the first starting pending number RaN), which is the value stored in the pending number storage area of the first holding area Ra, is read, and the first starting pending number RaN will be described later. Set as a processing target. The first starting pending number RaN indicates the number of balls being held based on balls entering the first starting ports (upper first starting port 33, lower first starting port 44). After that, the process advances to step S20209.

In step S20201, if it is determined that the game ball has not entered the first starting port (upper first starting port 33, lower first starting port 44) (S20201: NO), proceed to step S20205, Whether or not the game ball has entered the second starting port 34 is determined based on the detection state of the detection sensor corresponding to the second starting port 34.

In step S20205, if it is determined that the game ball has entered the second starting port 34 (S20205: YES), the process proceeds to step S20206, and the prize ball is used to cause the payout control device 70 to pay out one game ball. Set command. After that, the process advances to step S20207. On the other hand, in step S20205, if it is determined that the game ball has not entered the second starting port 34 (S20205: NO), the ball entering process for the main starting port is ended.

In step S20207, an external signal setting process is performed to output a signal to the management control device on the gaming hall side that the game ball has entered the second starting port 34. After that, the process advances to step S20208.

In step S20208, the starting pending number RbN (hereinafter also referred to as the second starting pending number RbN), which is the value stored in the pending number storage area of the second holding area Rb, is read, and the second starting pending number RbN will be described later. Set as a processing target. The second starting hold number RbN indicates the hold number based on balls entering the second starting port 34. After that, the process advances to step S20209.

In step S20209, it is determined whether the start pending number N (RaN or RbN) set in step S20204 or step S20208 described above is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment). In step S20209, if the starting pending number N is not less than the upper limit value (S20209: NO), the entry process for the main starting port is ended.

On the other hand, in step S20209, if the start pending number N is less than the upper limit (S20209: YES), the process advances to step S20210, where 1 is added to the start pending number N of the corresponding holding area, and then the process advances to step S20211. , 1 is added to the value stored in the total reservation number storage area (hereinafter referred to as total reservation number CRN). The total pending number CRN indicates the total value of the first starting pending number RaN and the second starting pending number RbN. After that, the process advances to step S20212.

In step S20212, each value of the jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, and reach random number counter C3 updated in step S20103 (FIG. 92) is transferred to the first storage area among the free storage areas of the corresponding reservation area, that is, the step In S20210, it is stored in the storage area corresponding to the pending number to which 1 is added. Specifically, when the first start pending number RaN is set as the processing target, each of the jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, and reach random number counter C3 updated in step S20103 (FIG. 92) The value is stored in the first storage area among the free storage areas of the first reservation area Ra, that is, the storage area corresponding to the first start reservation number RaN to which 1 was added in step S20210. In addition, when the second start pending number RbN is set as the processing target, the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, and reach random number counter C3 updated in step S20103 (FIG. 92) are It is stored in the first storage area among the empty storage areas of the second reservation area Rb, that is, the storage area corresponding to the second start reservation number RbN to which 1 was added in step S20210. After executing step S20212, the process advances to step S20213.

In step S20213, a destination determination process is executed. The destination determination process is based on the information (pending information) of each value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3. This is a process in which a determination is made as to the presence or absence of the pending information before it becomes a target of the winning lottery by the main control device 60. After executing step S20213, the process advances to step S20214.

In step S20214, processing for setting a pending command is executed. Specifically, the determination result (first determination information) of the first determination process executed based on the information (suspension information) of each value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 is set as the pending command. do.

The hold command is the occurrence of a ball entering the first starting port (upper first starting port 33, lower first starting port 44) or second starting port 34, and the pending information acquired based on the ball entering. This is a command for causing the sub-side control device to recognize the determination result (first determination information) of the first determination process based on , before the pending information becomes a target of the winning lottery by the main control device 60. The hold command is transmitted to the audio emission control device 90 in command output processing (FIG. 94: step S20302) of normal processing to be described later.

In addition, when the audio emission control device 90 receives a hold command transmitted based on the ball entering the first starting port (upper first starting port 33, lower first starting port 44), the audio emission control device 90 displays the liquid crystal display. A command is sent to the display control device 100 to change the display in the first reservation display area Ds1 of the device 41 in accordance with the increase in the number of reservations. The display control device 100 that has received the command changes the display in the first reservation display area Ds1 of the liquid crystal display device 41 in accordance with the increase in the number of reservations. On the other hand, when receiving the hold command transmitted based on the entry of the ball into the second starting port 34, the audio emission control device 90 changes the display of the number of held balls in the second hold display area Ds2 of the liquid crystal display device 41. A command is sent to the display control device 100 to make changes in response to the increase. The display control device 100 that has received the command changes the display in the second reservation display area Ds2 of the liquid crystal display device 41 in accordance with the increase in the number of reservations.

After executing step S20214, the main MPU 62 ends the ball entry process for the main starting port.

<Normal processing>
Next, normal processing will be explained. The normal process is a process that is started by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 when the power is turned on. In the normal processing, the main processing of the game is executed.

FIG. 94 is a flowchart showing normal processing. In step S20301, startup processing is executed. Specifically, initial settings of each control device upon power-on, determination of validity of data stored in the RAM 64, etc. are executed. After that, the process advances to step S20302.

In step S20302, output data such as a command set in the timer interrupt process or the previously executed normal process is transmitted to each sub-side control device. Specifically, the presence or absence of a prize ball command is determined, and if a prize ball command is set, it is transmitted to the payout control device 70. Further, if commands related to effects such as a variation command, a type command, a hold command, etc. are set, they are transmitted to the audio emission control device 90. After executing step S20302, the process advances to step S20303.

In step S20303, the variation type counter CS is updated. Specifically, 1 is added to the variation type counter CS, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value, the counter value is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the variation type counter CS is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 64. After that, the process advances to step S20304.

In step S20304, the prize ball count signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 70 are read, and the process proceeds to step S20305. In step S20305, a game round control process is executed to control the game in each game round. In the game round control process, a winning lottery, setting of variable display of symbols on the liquid crystal display device 41, display control of the first symbol display section 37a, second symbol display section 37b, etc. are performed. Details of the game time control process will be described later. After executing step S20305, the process advances to step S20306.

In step S20306, a gaming state transition process for shifting the gaming state is executed. By executing the gaming state transition process, the gaming state shifts to an opening/closing execution mode, a high probability mode, a high frequency support mode, or the like. Details of the gaming state transition process will be described later. After that, the process advances to step S20307.

In step S20307, electric utility support processing for driving and controlling the electric accessory 44a provided at the first starting port 44 on the right side is executed. In the electric utility support process, it is determined whether or not the electric accessory 44a is to be in an open state. Details of the electric support support process will be described later. After that, the process advances to step S20308.

In step S20308, it is determined whether a predetermined period of time (4 msec in this embodiment) has elapsed since the start of the current normal processing (from the second round onward, the start of the command output processing in step S20302). That is, it is determined whether the timing for executing the next normal process has arrived.

In step S20308, if it is determined that the predetermined time (4 msec) has not elapsed since the start of the current normal process (S20308: NO), in step S20309 and step S20310, until the execution timing of the next normal process. Within the remaining time, the random number initial value counter CINI and the fluctuation type counter CS are repeatedly updated. Specifically, in step S20309, 1 is added to the random number initial value counter CINI, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value, it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the random number initial value counter CINI is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 64. Further, in step S20310, 1 is added to the variation type counter CS, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value, it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the variation type counter CS is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 64.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S20308 that the predetermined time (4 msec) has elapsed since the start of the current normal process (S20308: YES), the process returns to step S20302 and each process from step S20302 to step S20307 is performed. Execute.

Note that since the execution time of each process from step S20302 to step S20307 changes depending on the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next normal process is not constant but fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the random number initial value counter CINI and the variation type counter CS using this remaining time, the values of these counters can be updated at random.

<Game time control processing>
Next, the game time control process will be explained. The game time control process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine of the normal process (FIG. 94: S20305).

FIG. 95 is a flowchart showing the game time control process. In step S20401, it is determined whether the opening/closing execution mode is in progress. Specifically, it is determined whether the opening/closing execution mode flag in the various flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64 is ON. As will be described later, the opening/closing execution mode flag is turned ON at the timing when the fluctuation of the symbols in the game round in which the jackpot is won is finished and the opening/closing execution mode is transferred, and is turned OFF at the timing when the opening/closing execution mode is finished. The following two functions are realized by determining whether the opening/closing execution mode is being executed in step S20401. The first function is to prevent the game session from starting while the opening/closing execution mode is being executed by not executing step S20403 (and step S20406) while the opening/closing execution mode is being executed. can do. In addition, as a second function, when the opening/closing execution mode is executed during the execution of a game round, by not executing step S20404 (and step S20407), which will be described later, the opening/closing execution mode is executed. It is possible to interrupt the measurement of the fluctuation time of the game session being executed during the period in which the game is being executed. Details will be explained below.

In step S20401, if it is determined that the opening/closing execution mode flag is ON (S20401: YES), it is determined that the opening/closing execution mode is in progress, and the main game is played without executing any of the processes after step S20402. Control processing ends. That is, when the opening/closing execution mode is in progress, whether a game ball enters the first starting port (the upper first starting port 33 and the lower first starting port 44) or the second starting port 34. Regardless of whether or not the game is played, no game round is started. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S20401 that the opening/closing execution mode is not in progress (S20401: NO), the process advances to step S20402.

In step S20402, it is determined whether the first game execution flag is ON. The first game-in-progress flag is a flag that turns ON when the first starting opening game round is started, and turns OFF when the first starting opening gaming round ends. In step S20402, if it is determined that the first game execution flag is not ON (S20402: NO), the process advances to step S20403.

In step S20403, a fluctuation start process for the first starting port is executed. The fluctuation start process for the first starting opening is a process for starting a game round for the first starting opening. Details of the fluctuation start process for the first starting port will be described later. After executing step S20403, the process advances to step S20405.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S20402 that the first game execution flag is ON (S20402: YES), the process advances to step S20404.

In step S20404, first fluctuation stop processing is executed. The first fluctuation stop process is a process for stopping the fluctuation of symbols in the game round for the first start opening that has been started. Details of the first fluctuation stop processing will be described later. After executing step S20404, the process advances to step S20405.

In step S20405, it is determined whether the second game execution flag is ON. The second game execution flag is a flag that is turned ON when the game round for the second starting opening is started, and turned OFF when the gaming round for the second starting opening ends. In step S20405, if it is determined that the second game execution flag is not ON (S20405: NO), the process advances to step S20406.

In step S20406, a fluctuation start process for the second starting port is executed. The fluctuation start process for the second starting opening is a process for starting a game round for the second starting opening. Details of the fluctuation start process for the second starting port will be described later. After executing step S20406, the main game round control process is ended.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S20405 that the second game execution flag is ON (S20405: YES), the process advances to step S20407.

In step S20407, second fluctuation stop processing is executed. The second fluctuation stop process is a process for stopping the fluctuation of symbols in the game round for the second start opening that has been started. Details of the second fluctuation stop processing will be described later. After executing step S20407, the main game round control process is ended.

<Variation start processing for the first starting port>
Next, the fluctuation start process for the first starting port will be explained. The fluctuation start process for the first start opening is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 95: S20403) of the game time control process.

FIG. 96 is a flowchart showing the fluctuation start process for the first starting port. In step S20501, it is determined whether the first start pending number RaN=0. In step S20501, if it is determined that the first start pending number RaN is not 0 (S20501: NO), the process advances to step S20502. On the other hand, in step S20501, if it is determined that the first start pending number RaN=0 (S20501: YES), the fluctuation start process for the first start port is ended.

In step S20502, a first starting port pending information shift process is executed. In the first starting gate reservation information shift process, the reservation information stored in the first reservation area Ra is shifted. Details of the first starting port pending information shift process will be described later. After executing step S20502, the process advances to step S20503.

In step S20503, determination processing for the first starting port is executed. In the determination process for the first starting opening, a winning lottery is executed based on the special information stored in the determination process execution area 64c. Specifically, based on the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 stored in the judgment processing execution area 64c, a judgment is made to determine the presence or absence of a jackpot or a small win, and the jackpot type is distributed. Performs distribution judgment and reach judgment to determine whether reach has occurred. Details of the determination process for the first starting port will be described later. After executing step S20503, the process advances to step S20504.

In step S20504, a process for setting a variable time for the first starting port is executed. In the process of setting the fluctuation time for the first starting opening, a fluctuation time is set which is the time from when the symbol starts to fluctuate until it stops. Details of the process of setting the variable time for the first starting port will be described later. After executing step S20504, the process advances to step S20505.

In step S20505, a first variation command is set. The first variation command includes special information that is acquired based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port (upper first starting port 33, lower first starting port 44) in the current game round. In addition to containing information indicating that it is a certain event, it also includes information on whether a reach has occurred and information on the fluctuation time set in step S20504. After executing step S20505, the process advances to step S20506.

In step S20506, a first type command is set. The first type command includes information on the presence or absence of a jackpot and information on the type of jackpot. Specifically, the first type command includes information on a 10R probability variable jackpot, information on a 10R specific probability variation jackpot, information on an 8R normal jackpot, or information on a loss.

The variation command and the first type command set in step S20505 and step S20506 are transmitted to the audio emission control device 90 in step S20302 in the normal process (FIG. 94). The audio emission control device 90 determines the content of the performance in the game round based on the received variation command and first type command, and controls various devices so that the determined content of the performance is executed. After executing step S20506, the process advances to step S20507.

In step S20507, the variable display on the first symbol display section 37a is started, and the process proceeds to step S20508, where the first game execution flag is turned ON. After that, the process advances to step S20509, and the first fluctuation flag is turned on.

The first game execution flag is turned ON when the first starting opening game round is started, and the fluctuating display in the first symbol display section 37a becomes a stop display, which is a period in which the symbol display is stopped. This is a flag that is turned OFF when the first symbol display stop time ends. On the other hand, the first fluctuating flag is a flag that is turned ON when the first starting opening game round is started, and is turned OFF when the fluctuating display in the first symbol display section 37a becomes a stopped display. .

After executing step S20509, the process advances to step S20510.

In step S20510, the value of the number of games counter PNC is subtracted by 1. A value is set in the game number counter PNC when the high frequency support mode is started, and the counter value is decremented by 1 every time a game is played. After executing step S20510, the variation start process for the first starting port ends.

<Pending information shift processing for the first starting gate>
Next, the reservation information shift process for the first starting port will be explained. The first starting port pending information shift process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 96: S20502) of the first starting port variation start process.

FIG. 97 is a flowchart showing the first starting port reservation information shift process. In step S20601, the first start hold number RaN of the first hold area Ra is subtracted by 1. After that, the process advances to step S20602.

In step S20602, the data (reservation information) stored in the first area of the first reservation area Ra is moved to the first execution area of the determination process execution area 64c. After that, the process advances to step S20603.

In step S20603, processing is performed to shift the data stored in the storage area of the first reservation area Ra. This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the first to fourth areas to the lower area side. Specifically, while clearing the data in the first area, the data in each area is shifted in the following order: second area → first area, third area → second area, fourth area → third area. After executing step S20603, this pending information shift process ends.

<Determination processing for first starting port>
Next, the determination process for the first starting port will be explained. The determination process for the first starting port is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 96: S20503) of the variation start process for the first starting port.

FIG. 98 is a flowchart showing the determination process for the first starting port. In step S20701, it is determined whether the win/fail lottery mode is the high probability mode. Specifically, it is determined whether the high probability mode flag in the various flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64 is ON. The high probability mode flag is a flag used by the MPU 62 to specify whether or not the win/fail lottery mode is the high probability mode. , is turned off at the start of the opening/closing execution mode related to winning the next jackpot. In step S20701, if it is determined that the mode is high probability mode (S20701: YES), the process advances to step S20702.

In step S20702, the validity determination is made with reference to the validity table (for high probability mode) for the first starting port. Specifically, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the determination process execution area 64c is set as a jackpot in the first starting opening success/failure table (for high probability mode) shown in FIG. 86(b). Determine whether the value matches the current value. After that, the process advances to step S20704. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S20701 that the mode is not high probability mode (S20701: NO), the process advances to step S20703.

In step S20703, the validity determination is made with reference to the validity table (for low probability mode) for the first starting port. Specifically, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the determination process execution area 64c is set as a jackpot in the first starting opening success/failure table (for low probability mode) shown in FIG. 86(a). Determine whether the value matches the current value. After that, the process advances to step S20704.

In step S20704, it is determined whether the result of the determination in step S20702 or step S20703 is a jackpot. In step S20704, if it is determined that the result of the judgment is a jackpot (S20704: YES), the process proceeds to step S20705.

In step S20705, it is determined whether the probability change or normal jackpot flag for the second starting opening is ON. In step S20705, if it is determined that the probability variable or normal jackpot flag for the second starting opening is ON (S20705: YES), the process proceeds to step S20722, and the stoppage indicating the lottery result of the game round for the first starting opening is performed. Set the symbol to a stop symbol for missing. Thereafter, the determination process for the first starting port ends. That is, if the game round for the second starting opening that won a jackpot is being executed at the start of the variation of the gaming round for the first starting opening, the stop symbol opening/closing execution mode of the gaming round for the first starting opening will not be executed. Set to a combination of designs.

On the other hand, in step S20705, if it is determined that the probability change or normal jackpot flag for the second starting opening is not ON (S20705: NO), the process advances to step S20706, and it is determined whether the specific processing flag is ON or not. judge. The specific processing flag is turned ON when a specific probability variable jackpot has been won in a game run executed before the game cycle for the first starting opening that is the subject of judgment, and is turned ON for the specific probability variable jackpot. This flag is turned off when special bonus processing is executed. In step S20706, if it is determined that the specific processing flag is ON (S20706: YES), the process advances to step S20707.

In step S20707, the high frequency support mode flag is turned OFF. That is, processing corresponding to the special bonus processing is executed. After executing step S20707, the process advances to step S20708.

In step S20708, a special bonus start command is set. The special bonus start command is a command for notifying the audio emission control device 90 that special bonus processing is started. The command is sent to the audio light emission control device 90 by the command output process (S20302) of the normal process (FIG. 94). After executing step S20708, the process advances to step S20709.

In step S20709, the specific processing flag is turned OFF. After that, the process advances to step S20710.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S20706 that the specific processing flag is not ON (S20706: NO), the process directly advances to step S20710.

In step S20710, a distribution determination is made with reference to the distribution table for the first starting port (see FIG. 88(a)). Specifically, it is determined which jackpot type numerical range the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the determination process execution area 64c is included in. After executing step S20710, the process advances to step S20711.

In step S20711, it is determined whether the result of the distribution determination in step S20710 (jackpot type) is a probability variable jackpot. In step S20711, if it is determined that the distributed jackpot type is a probability variable jackpot (S20711: YES), the process advances to step S20712.

In step S20712, the probability variable jackpot flag (jackpot type flag) corresponding to the jackpot type distributed in step S20711 is turned ON. After executing step S20712, the process advances to step S20713.

In step S20713, it is determined whether the particular probability variable jackpot is a specific probability variable jackpot. In step S20713, if it is determined that the probability variable jackpot is a specific probability variable jackpot (step S20713: YES), the process advances to step S20714.

In step S20714, the specific probability variable jackpot flag is turned on. After that, the process advances to step S20715, and a specific probability variable jackpot command is set. The specific probability variable jackpot command is a command for notifying the audio emission control device 90 that a specific probability variable jackpot has been won in the game round for the first starting opening to be determined. The command is sent to the audio light emission control device 90 by the command output process (S20302) of the normal process (FIG. 94). After executing step S20715, the process advances to step S20716.

On the other hand, in step S20713, if it is determined that the probability variable jackpot is not a specific probability variable jackpot (step S20713: NO), the process directly proceeds to step S20716.

In step S20716, a stop symbol setting process for a variable jackpot is executed. In the stop symbol setting process for a probability variable jackpot, it is set which stop result is to be displayed in the first symbol display section 37a to end the variable display (stop display) in the current game round which will be a probability variable jackpot. Execute the processing for Specifically, by referring to the stop result table for probability-variable jackpots stored in the stop result table storage area 63e, address information of the stop result data corresponding to the jackpot type distributed in step S20711 is acquired, and the The address information is stored in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 64. After executing step S20716, the determination process for the first starting port ends.

In step S20711, if it is determined that the distributed jackpot type is not a variable jackpot (S20711: NO), that is, if the distributed jackpot type is a normal jackpot, the process advances to step S20717.

In step S20717, the normal jackpot flag (jackpot type flag) corresponding to the jackpot type distributed in step S20711 is turned ON. After executing step S20717, the process advances to step S20718.

In step S20718, stop symbol setting processing for normal jackpot is executed. In the stop symbol setting process for a normal jackpot, it is set which stop result is to be displayed in the first symbol display section 37a to end the variable display (stop display) in the current game round, which is a normal jackpot. Execute the processing for Specifically, by referring to the stop result table for normal jackpots stored in the stop result table storage area 63e, the address information of the stop result data corresponding to the jackpot type distributed in step S20711 is acquired, and the The address information is stored in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 64. After executing step S20718, the determination process for the first starting port ends.

In step S20704, if it is determined that the result of the judgment in step S20702 or step S20703 is not a jackpot (S20704: NO), the process advances to step S20719, and the reach is stored in the reach judgment table storage area 63c of the ROM 63. With reference to the determination table, a reach determination is made as to whether or not a reach occurs. Specifically, it is determined whether the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the determination processing execution area 64c matches the value set as the occurrence of a reach in the referred reach determination table. The process of step S20719 is executed when the result of the win/fail determination (winning lottery) in step S20704 is not a jackpot. That is, in step S20719, it is determined whether or not it is a game time in which a reach is generated among the game times in which the result of the judgment is not a jackpot. After executing step S20719, the process advances to step S20720.

In step S20720, it is determined whether the result of the reach determination in step S20719 is a reach occurrence. In step S20720, if it is determined that a reach has occurred (S20720: YES), the process proceeds to step S20721, and the reach occurrence flag in the various flag storage areas 64g of the RAM 64 is turned on. After executing step S20721, the process advances to step S20722.

In step S20722, a stop symbol setting process for losing is executed. In the stop symbol setting process for a loss, in the current game round in which the result is a loss, which stop result is displayed on the first symbol display section 37a is set to end the variable display (stop display). Execute processing. Specifically, by referring to the stop result table for losing in the stop result table storage area 63e, the address information of the stop result data corresponding to the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the determination process execution area 64c is obtained. The address information is acquired and stored in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 64. After executing step S20722, the determination process for the first starting port ends.

<Variable time setting process for the first starting port>
Next, the process of setting the variable time for the first starting port will be explained. The process of setting the variation time for the first starting port is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the variation start process for the first starting port (FIG. 96: S20504).

FIG. 99 is a flowchart showing the process of setting the variable time for the first starting port. In step S20801, the value of the variable type counter CS stored in the variable type counter buffer in the lottery counter buffer 64a of the RAM 64 is acquired. After that, the process advances to step S20802.

In step S20802, it is determined whether the result of the win/fail determination regarding the current game round is a jackpot. Specifically, it is determined whether the probability variable jackpot flag or the normal jackpot flag is ON, and if either flag is ON (S20802: YES), the process advances to step S20803.

In step S20803, the variable time table for jackpot stored in the variable time table storage area 63d of the ROM 63 is referred to to obtain variable time information corresponding to the value of the current variable type counter CS. After executing step S20803, the process advances to step S20807, and the acquired variable time information is set in the variable time counter area provided in the various counter areas 64f of the RAM 64. Thereafter, the process of setting the variable time for the first starting port is completed.

In step S20802, if it is determined that the result of the hit/fail determination for the current game round is not a jackpot (S20802: NO), the process advances to step S20804, and the result of the reach determination for the current game round is that a reach has occurred. Determine whether or not. Specifically, it is determined whether the reach occurrence flag is ON, and when it is determined that the reach occurrence flag is ON (S20804: YES), the process advances to step S20805.

In step S20805, the variable time table for reach generation stored in the variable time table storage area 63d of the ROM 63 is referred to to acquire variable time information corresponding to the value of the current variable type counter CS. After executing step S20805, the process advances to step S20807, and the acquired variable time information is set in the variable time counter area provided in the various counter areas 64f of the RAM 64. Thereafter, the process of setting the variable time for the first starting port is completed.

In step S20804, if it is determined that the reach determination result for the current game round is not a reach occurrence (S20804: NO), the process advances to step S20806, and the reach non-occurrence stored in the variable time table storage area 63d is determined. The fluctuation time corresponding to the current value of the fluctuation type counter CS is obtained by referring to the fluctuation time table. After executing step S20806, the process advances to step S20807, and the acquired variable time information is set in the variable time counter area provided in the various counter areas 64f of the RAM 64. Thereafter, the process of setting the variable time for the first starting port is completed.

In the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment, the variation time information stored in the non-reach variation time table is set such that the larger the first start pending number RaN is, the shorter the variation time is. . However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the configuration may be such that it does not depend on the number of first start pending numbers RaN, and the fluctuation time is set to be shorter as the first start pending number RaN is smaller. It's okay.

Furthermore, the above configuration may be applied to the fluctuation time when a reach occurs, and the fluctuation time that is likely to be selected and the fluctuation time that is difficult to be selected may be different when winning a jackpot and when winning a reach. good. Furthermore, a configuration may be adopted in which a variable time table for a definite variable jackpot and a variable time table for a normal jackpot are each set individually.

<First fluctuation stop processing>
Next, the first fluctuation stop processing will be explained. The first fluctuation stop process is executed by the main side MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 95: S20404) of the game time control process.

FIG. 100 is a flowchart showing the first fluctuation stop processing. In step S20901, it is determined whether the first fluctuation flag is ON. In step S20901, if it is determined that the first fluctuation flag is ON (S20901: YES), the process advances to step S20902.

In step S20902, a first variation time measurement process is executed. Specifically, the first variable time counter PTC1 for measuring the variable time of the first starting opening game (the variable time of the first symbol display section) is counted down. In this process, the value of the first variable time counter PTC1 is counted down each time the thread of step S20902 is passed. That is, only when the thread passes through step S20902, the value of the first variable time counter PTC1 is counted down. After executing step S20902, the process advances to step S20903.

In step S20903, it is determined whether or not the variation time of the first symbol display section has ended. Specifically, it is determined whether the first variable time counter PTC1, which is counted down by the process of step S20902, has reached 0. In step S20903, if it is determined that the variation time of the first symbol display section has ended (S20903: YES), the process proceeds to step S20904, and the variation of the first symbol display section is stopped. After that, the process advances to step S20905.

In step S20905, the first fluctuation flag is turned off. After that, the process advances to step S20906.

On the other hand, in step S20903, if it is determined that the fluctuation time of the first symbol display section has not ended (S20903: NO), the first fluctuation stop process is directly ended.

If it is determined in step S20901 that the first fluctuation flag is not ON (S20901: NO), the process directly advances to step S20906.

In step S20906, a first symbol stop display time setting process is executed. The first symbol stop display time is the time during which the first symbol is stopped and displayed. In step S20906, the first symbol stop display time is set. However, if the first symbol stop display time has already been set, this setting is not performed. In this embodiment, the first symbol stop display time of all the first starting opening game times is set to the same length of time. After executing step S20906, step S20907 is executed.

In step S20907, a first symbol stop display time measurement process is executed. Specifically, a counter for measuring the first symbol stop display time is counted down. In this process, the value of the counter for measuring the first symbol stop display time is counted down each time the thread of step S20907 is passed. After executing step S20907, the process advances to step S20908.

In step S20908, it is determined whether the first symbol stop display time has ended. Specifically, it is determined whether the value of the counter for measuring the first symbol stop display time has become zero. In step S20908. If it is determined that the first symbol stop display time has ended (S20908: YES), the process advances to step S20909. Meanwhile, in step S20908. If it is determined that the first symbol stop display time has not ended (S20908: NO), the first variation stop process is ended.

In step S20909, the first game execution flag is turned OFF. After that, the process advances to step S20910.

In step S20910, it is determined whether the jackpot flag (jackpot flag according to each jackpot type) or small jackpot flag is ON. In step S20910, if it is determined that the big hit flag or the small hit flag is ON (S20910: YES), the process advances to step S20911. On the other hand, in step S20910, if it is determined that neither the big hit flag nor the small hit flag is ON (S20910: NO), the first fluctuation stop process is directly ended.

In step S20911, the opening/closing execution mode flag is turned on. After that, the process advances to step S20912, and after setting the opening/closing execution mode start command, the first fluctuation stop process ends.

<Variation start processing for second starting port>
Next, the fluctuation start process for the second starting port will be explained. The fluctuation start process for the second starting opening is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 95: S20406) of the game time control process.

FIG. 101 is a flowchart showing the fluctuation start process for the second starting port. In step S21001, it is determined whether the second start pending number RbN=0. In step S21001, if it is determined that the second start pending number RbN is not 0 (S21001: NO), the process advances to step S21002. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S21001 that the second start pending number RbN=0 (S21001: YES), the fluctuation start process for the second start port is ended.

In step S21002, second starting port pending information shift processing is executed. In the second starting gate hold information shift process, the hold information stored in the second hold area Rb is shifted. Details of the second starting port pending information shift process will be described later. After executing step S21002, the process advances to step S21003.

In step S21003, determination processing for the second starting port is executed. In the determination process for the second starting opening, a winning lottery is executed based on the special information stored in the determination process execution area 64c. Specifically, based on the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 stored in the judgment processing execution area 64c, a judgment is made to determine the presence or absence of a jackpot or a small win, and the jackpot type is distributed. Performs distribution judgment and reach judgment to determine whether reach has occurred. Details of the determination process for the second starting port will be described later. After executing step S21003, the process advances to step S21004.

In step S21004, a process for setting a variable time for the second starting port is executed. In the process of setting the fluctuation time for the second starting opening, a fluctuation time is set which is the time from when the symbol starts to fluctuate until it stops. Details of the process for setting the variable time for the second starting port will be described later. After executing step S21004, the process advances to step S21005.

In step S21005, a second variation command is set. The second variation command includes information indicating that the current game round is related to special information acquired based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 34, and the reach It includes information on the presence or absence of occurrence and information on the fluctuation time set in step S21004. After executing step S21005, the process advances to step S21006.

In step S21006, a second type command is set. The second type command includes information on the presence or absence of a jackpot and information on the type of jackpot. Specifically, the second type command includes information on a 2R probability variable jackpot, information on a 2R normal jackpot, information on a small win, or information on a loss.

The variation command and the second type command set in step S21005 and step S21006 are transmitted to the audio emission control device 90 in step S20302 in the normal process (FIG. 94). The audio emission control device 90 determines the content of the performance in the game round based on the received variation command and second type command, and controls various devices so that the determined content of the performance is executed. After executing step S21006, the process advances to step S21007.

In step S21007, variable display on the second symbol display section 37b is started, and the process proceeds to step S21008, where the second game execution flag is turned ON. After that, the process advances to step S21009, and the second fluctuating flag is turned on.

The second game execution flag is turned ON when a game round for the second start opening is started, and the fluctuating display in the second symbol display section 37b becomes a stop display, which is a period in which the symbol display is stopped. This is a flag that is turned OFF when the second symbol display stop time ends. On the other hand, the second fluctuating flag is a flag that is turned ON when a game round for the second start opening is started, and is turned OFF when the fluctuating display in the second symbol display section 37b becomes a stop display. .

After executing step S21009, the process advances to step S21010.

In step S21010, the value of the number of games counter PNC is subtracted by 1. A value is set in the game number counter PNC when the high frequency support mode is started, and the counter value is decremented by 1 every time a game is played. After executing step S21010, the variation start process for the second starting port is ended.

<Holding information shift processing for second starting gate>
Next, the second starting port pending information shift process will be described. The second starting port pending information shift process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 101: S21002) of the second starting port variation start process.

FIG. 102 is a flowchart showing the second starting port pending information shift process. In step S21101, the second start hold number RbN of the second hold area Rb is subtracted by 1. After that, the process advances to step S21102.

In step S21102, the data (reservation information) stored in the first area of the second reservation area Rb is moved to the second execution area of the determination processing execution area 64c. After that, the process advances to step S21103.

In step S21103, processing is performed to shift the data stored in the storage area of the second reservation area Rb. This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the first to fourth areas to the lower area side. Specifically, while clearing the data in the first area, the data in each area is shifted in the following order: second area → first area, third area → second area, fourth area → third area. After executing step S21103, this pending information shift process ends.

<Determination processing for second starting port>
Next, the determination process for the second starting port will be explained. The determination process for the second starting port is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the variation start process for the second starting port (FIG. 101: S21003).

FIG. 103 is a flowchart showing the determination process for the second starting port. In step S21201, it is determined whether the win/fail lottery mode is the high probability mode. Specifically, it is determined whether the high probability mode flag in the various flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64 is ON. The high probability mode flag is a flag used by the MPU 62 to specify whether or not the win/fail lottery mode is the high probability mode. , is normally turned off at the end of the opening/closing execution mode associated with winning the jackpot. In step S21201, if it is determined that the mode is high probability mode (S21201: YES), the process advances to step S21202.

In step S21202, a validity determination is made with reference to the validity table (for high probability mode) for the second starting port. Specifically, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the determination processing execution area 64c is set as a jackpot in the second starting opening success/failure table (for high probability mode) shown in FIG. 87(b). Determine whether the value matches the current value. After that, the process advances to step S21204. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S21201 that the mode is not high probability mode (S21201: NO), the process advances to step S21203.

In step S21203, a validity determination is made with reference to the validity table (for low probability mode) for the second starting port. Specifically, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the determination process execution area 64c is set as a jackpot in the second starting opening success/failure table (for low probability mode) shown in FIG. 87(a). Determine whether the value matches the current value. After that, the process advances to step S21204.

In step S21204, it is determined whether the result of the determination in step S21202 or step S21203 is a jackpot. In step S21204, if it is determined that the result of the validity determination is a jackpot (S21204: YES), the process advances to step S21205.

In step S21205, it is determined whether the probability change or normal jackpot flag for the first starting opening is ON. In step S21205, if it is determined that the probability variable or normal jackpot flag for the first starting opening is ON (S21205: YES), the process proceeds to step S21218, and the stoppage indicating the lottery result of the game round for the second starting opening is performed. Set the symbol to a stop symbol for missing. Thereafter, the determination process for the second starting port ends. In other words, when the first starting opening game round that won a jackpot is being executed at the start of the fluctuation of the second starting opening game round, the stop symbol opening/closing execution mode of the second starting opening gaming round will not be executed. Set to a combination of designs.

On the other hand, in step S21205, if it is determined that the probability change or normal jackpot flag for the first starting opening is not ON (S21205: NO), the process advances to step S21206.

In step S21206, a distribution determination is made with reference to the distribution table for the second starting port (see FIG. 88(b)). Specifically, it is determined which jackpot type numerical range the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the determination process execution area 64c is included in. After executing step S21206, the process advances to step S21207.

In step S21207, it is determined whether the result of the distribution determination in step S21206 (jackpot type) is a variable jackpot. In step S21207, if it is determined that the distributed jackpot type is a probability variable jackpot (S21207: YES), the process advances to step S21208.

In step S21208, the probability variable jackpot flag (jackpot type flag) corresponding to the jackpot type distributed in step S21206 is turned ON. After executing step S21208, the process advances to step S21209.

In step S21209, a stop symbol setting process for a probability variable jackpot is executed. In the stop symbol setting process for a probability variable jackpot, it is set which stop result is to be displayed in the second symbol display section 37b to end the variable display (stop display) in the current game round that will be a probability variable jackpot. Execute the processing for Specifically, by referring to the stop result table for probability-variable jackpots stored in the stop result table storage area 63e, address information of the stop result data corresponding to the jackpot type distributed in step S21206 is acquired, and the The address information is stored in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 64. After executing step S21209, the determination process for the second starting port ends.

In step S21207, if it is determined that the distributed jackpot type is not a probability variable jackpot (S21207: NO), that is, if the distributed jackpot type is a normal jackpot, the process advances to step S21210.

In step S21210, the normal jackpot flag (jackpot type flag) corresponding to the jackpot type distributed in step S21206 is turned ON. After executing step S21210, the process advances to step S21211.

In step S21211, a stop symbol setting process for normal jackpot is executed. In the stop symbol setting process for a normal jackpot, it is set which stop result is to be displayed in the second symbol display section 37b to end the variable display (stop display) in the current game round which usually becomes a jackpot. Execute the processing for Specifically, by referring to the stop result table for normal jackpots stored in the stop result table storage area 63e, the address information of the stop result data corresponding to the jackpot type distributed in step S21206 is acquired, and the The address information is stored in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 64. After executing step S21211, the determination process for the second starting port ends.

In step S21204, if it is determined that the result of the determination in step S21202 or step S21203 is not a jackpot (S21204: NO), the process advances to step S21212.

In step S21212, it is determined whether the result of the determination in step S21202 or step S21203 is a small hit. In step S21212, if it is determined that the result of the determination is a small hit (S21212: YES), the process advances to step S21213.

In step S21213, the small hit flag is turned on. After executing step S21213, the process advances to step S21214.

In step S21214, a stop symbol setting process for small winning is executed. In the stop symbol setting process for a small win, it is set which stop result is to be displayed on the second symbol display section 37b to end the variable display (stop display) in the current game round that is a small win. Execute the processing for Specifically, by referring to the stop result table for small wins stored in the stop result table storage area 63e, the address information of the stop result data corresponding to the small win is acquired, and the address information is stored in the RAM 64. Store the stop result in the address storage area. After executing step S21214, the process for determining the second starting port ends.

In step S21212, if it is determined that the result of the determination is not a small hit (S21212: NO), the process advances to step S21215.

In step S21215, the reach determination table stored in the reach determination table storage area 63c of the ROM 63 is referred to to determine whether or not a reach determination occurs. Specifically, it is determined whether the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the determination processing execution area 64c matches the value set as the occurrence of a reach in the referred reach determination table. The process of step S21215 is executed when the result of the win/fail determination (winning lottery) in step S21204 is not a jackpot. That is, in step S21215, it is determined whether or not it is a game time in which a reach is generated among the game times in which the result of the judgment is not a jackpot. After executing step S21215, the process advances to step S21216.

In step S21216, it is determined whether the result of the reach determination in step S21215 is a reach occurrence. In step S21216, if it is determined that a reach has occurred (S21216: YES), the process advances to step S21217, and the reach occurrence flag in the various flag storage areas 64g of the RAM 64 is turned on. After executing step S21217, the process advances to step S21218.

In step S21218, a stop symbol setting process for losing is executed. In the stop symbol setting process for a loss, in the current game round that results in a loss, a process is performed to set which stop result is to be displayed on the second symbol display section 37b to end the variable display (stop display). Execute processing. Specifically, by referring to the stop result table for losing in the stop result table storage area 63e, the address information of the stop result data corresponding to the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the determination process execution area 64c is obtained. The address information is stored in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 64. After executing step S21218, the determination process for the second starting port ends.

<Setting process of variable time for second starting port>
Next, a process for setting the variable time for the second starting port will be explained. The process of setting the variation time for the second starting port is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the variation start process for the second starting port (FIG. 101: S21004).

FIG. 104 is a flowchart showing the process of setting the variable time for the second starting port. In step S21301, the value of the variable type counter CS stored in the variable type counter buffer in the lottery counter buffer 64a of the RAM 64 is acquired. After that, the process advances to step S21302.

In step S21302, it is determined whether the high probability mode flag is ON. If it is determined in step S21302 that the high probability mode flag is not ON (S21302: NO), the process advances to step S21303.

In step S21303, low-accuracy time-varying time information acquisition processing is executed. The low-probability time fluctuation time information acquisition process is a process of acquiring the fluctuation time information of the second starting opening game time when the second starting opening game time is executed when the lottery mode is the low probability mode. . Specifically, when the game is in progress at step F101 in FIG. 90 and when the game is in progress at step F105, when the game round for the second starting opening is executed, the second starting opening is This is a process to obtain the fluctuation time information of the number of games played. Details of the low-accuracy time-varying time information acquisition process will be described later. After executing step S21303, the process advances to step S21307.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S21302 that the high probability mode flag is ON (S21302: YES), the process advances to step S21304.

In step S21304, it is determined whether the high frequency support mode flag is ON. If it is determined in step S21304 that the high-frequency support mode flag is ON (S21304: YES), the process advances to step S21305.

In step S21305, highly accurate and frequent time-varying time information acquisition processing is executed. When the lottery mode is the high probability mode and the support mode is the high frequency support mode, and the game round for the second starting opening is executed, the high accuracy and high frequency time varying time information acquisition process is performed for the second starting opening. This is a process to obtain the fluctuation time information of the game times. Specifically, when the game is in progress at step F110 in FIG. 90 and when the game is in progress at step F113, when the second start opening game is executed This is a process to obtain the fluctuation time information of the number of games played. Details of the highly accurate and frequent time-varying time information acquisition process will be described later. After executing step S21305, the process advances to step S21307.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S21304 that the high-frequency support mode flag is not ON (S21304: NO), the process advances to step S21306.

In step S21306, high-accuracy and low-frequency time-varying time information acquisition processing is executed. The high-accuracy, low-frequency, time-varying time information acquisition process is performed when the lottery mode is the high-probability mode and the support mode is the low-frequency support mode, and when a game round for the second starting opening is executed, the second starting opening This is a process to obtain the fluctuation time information of the game times. Specifically, when the game time for the second starting opening is executed during the progress state of the game in step F116 in FIG. be. Details of the high-accuracy, low-frequency, time-varying time information acquisition process will be described later. After executing step S21306, the process advances to step S21307.

In step S21307, the variable time information acquired in each process of step S21303, step S21305, and step S21306 is set in the variable time counter area provided in the various counter areas 64f of the RAM 64. Thereafter, the process of setting the variable time for the second starting port is completed.

<Low-accurate time-varying time information acquisition process>
Next, a low-accuracy time-varying time information acquisition process will be described. The low-accuracy time variation time information acquisition process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 104: S21303) of the process of setting the variation time for the second starting port.

As described above, the low-accuracy time-varying time information acquisition process is executed in the game round for the second starting opening when the game is in progress at step F101 in FIG. 90 and when the game is in progress at step F105. This is a process of acquiring the variable time information of the game round for the second starting opening when the game is played. In other words, the period in which the game round for the first starting hole should normally be executed by hitting the game ball to the left and entering the game ball into the first starting hole (upper first starting hole 33, lower first starting hole 44). This is a process that is executed when the game ball is hit right and enters the second starting port 34 and a game round for the second starting port is executed. There is a possibility that someone is trying to get a benefit during a period when they should not have gotten it due to winning a small win, so in order to prevent this behavior, information is acquired in the low-accuracy time-varying time information acquisition process. The variable time information (variable time) is set to a relatively long time. This low-accuracy time-varying time information acquisition process will be described below.

FIG. 105 is a flowchart illustrating a low-accuracy time-varying time information acquisition process. In step S21401, it is determined whether the result of the win/fail determination regarding the current game round is a jackpot. Specifically, it is determined whether the probability variable jackpot flag or the normal jackpot flag is ON, and if either flag is ON (S21401: YES), the process advances to step S21402.

In step S21402, with reference to the variable time table for low probability jackpot stored in the variable time table storage area 63d of the ROM 63, variable time information corresponding to the current value of the variable type counter CS is obtained. In this embodiment, the variable time set in the low probability jackpot variable time table is a value between 5 minutes and 10 minutes, and the average value of the values obtained as the variable time is 7 minutes. After executing step S21402, this low-accuracy time-varying time information acquisition process ends.

In step S21401, if it is determined that the result of the win/fail determination regarding the current game round is not a jackpot (step S21401: NO), the process advances to step S21403.

In step S21403, it is determined whether or not a reach occurs in the current game round. In step S21403, if it is determined that reach occurs in the current game round (step S21403: YES), the process advances to step S21404.

In step S21404, the variable time table for low probability reach generation stored in the variable time table storage area 63d of the ROM 63 is referred to to obtain variable time information corresponding to the current value of the variable type counter CS. In this embodiment, the variable time set in the variable time table for low probability reach occurrence is a value between 5 minutes and 10 minutes, and the average value of the values obtained as the variable time is 7 minutes. After executing step S21404, this low-accuracy time-varying time information acquisition process ends.

In step S21403, if it is determined that reach does not occur in the current game round (step S21403: NO), the process advances to step S21405.

In step S21405, the fluctuation time information corresponding to the current value of the fluctuation type counter CS is obtained by referring to the fluctuation time table for non-reach occurrence at low probability stored in the fluctuation time table storage area 63d of the ROM 63. In this embodiment, the variation time set in the variation time table for non-reach occurrence at low probability is a value between 5 minutes and 10 minutes, and the average value of the values obtained as the variation time is 7 minutes. . After executing step S21405, this low-accuracy time-varying time information acquisition process ends.

In this way, the fluctuating time information acquired in the low-accuracy time fluctuating time information acquisition process is set to a relatively long time.

<High-accuracy, high-frequency time-varying time information acquisition processing>
Next, a highly accurate and frequent time-varying time information acquisition process will be described. The highly accurate and high frequency time variation time information acquisition process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 104: S21305) of the process of setting the variation time for the second starting port.

As described above, the highly accurate and highly frequent time-varying time information acquisition process is performed when the game is in progress at step F110 in FIG. 90 and when the game is in progress at step F113. This is a process of acquiring the variable time information of the game time for the second starting opening when is executed. In other words, the period in which the game round for the first starting hole should normally be executed by hitting the game ball to the left and entering the game ball into the first starting hole (upper first starting hole 33, lower first starting hole 44). This is a process that is executed when the game ball is hit right and enters the second starting port 34 and a game round for the second starting port is executed. There is a possibility that someone is trying to get a benefit during a period when they should not have been able to get it by winning a small win. The variable time information (variable time) that is displayed is set to a relatively long time. Note that the average value of the fluctuation times acquired in the high-accuracy and high-frequency time-varying time information acquisition process is set to a shorter value than the average value of the fluctuation times acquired in the low-accuracy time-varying time information acquisition process. This is because the period in which the highly accurate and high-frequency time-varying time information acquisition process is executed is more advantageous to the player compared to the period in which the low-accuracy, high-frequency time-varying time information acquisition process is executed. The reason for this is that the unfairness of the player's act of executing the game round for the second starting opening and gaining profits by winning a small win is not as great as in the case of the accurate time varying time information acquisition process. Hereinafter, this high-accuracy, high-frequency time-varying time information acquisition process will be described.

FIG. 106 is a flowchart showing highly accurate and frequent time-varying time information acquisition processing. In step S21501, it is determined whether or not the result of the win/fail determination regarding the current game round is a jackpot. Specifically, it is determined whether the probability variable jackpot flag or the normal jackpot flag is ON, and if either flag is ON (S21501: YES), the process advances to step S21502.

In step S21502, the variation time information corresponding to the value of the current variation type counter CS is obtained by referring to the variation time table for high probability and high frequency jackpots stored in the variation time table storage area 63d of the ROM 63. In this embodiment, the variation time set in the variation time table for high accuracy and high frequency jackpots is a value between 2 minutes and 5 minutes, and the average value of the values obtained as the variation time is 3 minutes. . After executing step S21502, the high-accuracy, high-frequency, time-varying time information acquisition process ends.

In step S21501, if it is determined that the result of the win/fail determination regarding the current game round is not a jackpot (step S21501: NO), the process advances to step S21503.

In step S21503, it is determined whether or not a reach occurs in the current game round. In step S21503, if it is determined that reach occurs in the current game round (step S21503: YES), the process advances to step S21504.

In step S21504, the fluctuation time information corresponding to the current value of the fluctuation type counter CS is obtained by referring to the fluctuation time table for highly accurate and high frequency reach generation stored in the fluctuation time table storage area 63d of the ROM 63. . In this embodiment, the variation time set in the variation time table for high-accuracy, high-frequency reach generation is a value between 2 minutes and 5 minutes, and the average value of the values obtained as the variation time is 3 minutes. be. After executing step S21504, the high-accuracy, high-frequency, time-varying time information acquisition process ends.

In step S21503, if it is determined that reach does not occur in the current game round (step S21503: NO), the process advances to step S21505.

In step S21505, the fluctuation time information corresponding to the current value of the fluctuation type counter CS is obtained by referring to the fluctuation time table for non-reach occurrence at high accuracy and high frequency stored in the fluctuation time table storage area 63d of the ROM 63. do. In this embodiment, the variation time set in the variation time table for reach non-occurrence during high accuracy and high frequency is a value between 2 minutes and 5 minutes, and the average value of the values obtained as the variation time is 3 minutes. It is. After executing step S21505, the high-accuracy, high-frequency, time-varying time information acquisition process ends.

In this way, the variable time information acquired in the highly accurate and high frequency time varying time information acquisition process is set to a relatively long time, but the The average value is set to a value shorter than the average value of the fluctuation times acquired in the low-accuracy time fluctuation time information acquisition process.

<High-accuracy, low-frequency time-varying time information acquisition processing>
Next, a process for acquiring high-accuracy and low-frequency time-varying time information will be described. The high-accuracy, low-frequency time variation time information acquisition process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 104: S21306) of the process of setting the variation time for the second starting port.

As described above, the high-accuracy and low-frequency time-varying time information acquisition process is performed when a game round for the second starting opening is executed during the progress state of the game in step F116 in FIG. This is a process to obtain the fluctuation time information of the number of games played. In other words, this is a process that is executed when a game ball is hit to the right and enters the second starting port 34 and a game round for the second starting port is executed during the period when the special bonus process is being executed. This is a process that follows the original flow of the game. The fluctuation time information (fluctuation time) acquired in the highly accurate and low frequency time fluctuation time information acquisition process is set to a very short time. Hereinafter, the high-accuracy/low-frequency time-varying time information acquisition process will be described.

FIG. 107 is a flowchart illustrating high-accuracy, low-frequency time-varying time information acquisition processing. In step S21601, it is determined whether the result of the win/fail determination regarding the current game round is a small win. Specifically, it is determined whether the small hit flag is ON, and if the small hit flag is ON (S21601: YES), the process advances to step S21602. In addition, during the period of special bonus processing in which the main high/low frequency time fluctuation time information acquisition process is executed, at the start of the fluctuation of the game time for the second starting opening, the gaming round for the first starting opening that won the jackpot is being executed. Therefore, the symbols of the game round for the second start opening are stopped and displayed in a combination of symbols for which the opening/closing execution mode is not executed (see FIG. 103/S21205: NO). Therefore, during the period of the special bonus processing in which the main high probability/low frequency time varying time information acquisition processing is executed, the game round for the second starting opening will not win a jackpot, which is different from the processing in FIGS. 104 and 105. , there is no process to determine whether or not a jackpot has been won.

In step S21602, the fluctuation time information corresponding to the current value of the fluctuation type counter CS is obtained by referring to the fluctuation time table for high accuracy and low frequency small winnings stored in the fluctuation time table storage area 63d of the ROM 63. . In this embodiment, the fluctuation time set in the fluctuation time table for high accuracy and low frequency small wins is a value between 2 seconds and 5 seconds, and the average value of the values obtained as the fluctuation time is 3 seconds. be. After executing step S21502, the high-accuracy-low-frequency time-varying time information acquisition process ends.

In step S21601, if it is determined that the result of the win/fail determination regarding the current game round is not a small win (step S21601: NO), the process advances to step S21603.

In step S21603, the fluctuation time information corresponding to the current value of the fluctuation type counter CS is obtained by referring to the fluctuation time table for high accuracy and low frequency non-small winnings stored in the fluctuation time table storage area 63d of the ROM 63. do. In this embodiment, the fluctuation time set in the fluctuation time table for high accuracy and low frequency non-small winnings is a value between 1 second and 3 seconds, and the average value of the values obtained as the fluctuation time is 2 seconds. It is. After executing step S21603, the high-accuracy-low-frequency time-varying time information acquisition process ends.

In this way, the fluctuation time information (fluctuation time) acquired in the high-accuracy and low-frequency time fluctuation time information acquisition process is set to a very short time. Therefore, during the execution period of the special bonus process, that is, during the period in which the first starting hole game time in which the jackpot has been won is being executed, a plurality of second starting hole game times can be executed. As a result, by winning a plurality of small wins, the player can obtain benefits during the execution of the first starting opening game round.

<Second fluctuation stop processing>
Next, the second fluctuation stop processing will be explained. The second fluctuation stop process is executed by the main MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 95: S20407) of the game time control process.

FIG. 108 is a flowchart showing the second fluctuation stop processing. In step S21701, it is determined whether the second fluctuating flag is ON. In step S21701, if it is determined that the second fluctuation flag is ON (S21701: YES), the process advances to step S21702.

In step S21702, a second fluctuation time measurement process is executed. Specifically, a second variable time counter PTC2 for measuring the variable time of the second starting slot game time (the variable time of the second symbol display section) is counted down. In this process, the value of the second variable time counter PTC2 is counted down each time the thread of step S21702 is passed. That is, instead of continuously counting down after passing through the thread in step S21702, the value of the second variable time counter PTC2 is counted down only when passing through the thread. After executing step S21702, the process advances to step S21703.

In step S21703, it is determined whether or not the variation time of the second symbol display section has ended. Specifically, it is determined whether the second variable time counter PTC2, which is counted down by the process in step S21702, has reached 0. In step S21703, if it is determined that the fluctuation time of the second symbol display section has ended (S21703: YES), the process proceeds to step S21704, and the fluctuation of the second symbol display section is stopped. After that, the process advances to step S21705.

In step S21705, the second fluctuation flag is turned OFF. After that, the process advances to step S21706.

On the other hand, in step S21703, if it is determined that the fluctuation time of the second symbol display section has not ended (S21703: NO), the second fluctuation stop processing is directly ended.

In step S21701, if it is determined that the second fluctuation flag is not ON (S21701: NO), the process directly advances to step S21706.

In step S21706, a second symbol stop display time setting process is executed. The second symbol stop display time is the time during which the second symbol is stopped and displayed. In step S21706, the second symbol stop display time is set. However, if the second symbol stop display time has already been set, this setting is not performed. In this embodiment, the second symbol stop display time of all the game times for the second start opening is set to the same length of time. After executing step S21706, step S21707 is executed.

In step S21707, a second symbol stop display time measurement process is executed. Specifically, a counter for measuring the second symbol stop display time is counted down. In this process, the value of the counter for measuring the second symbol stop display time is counted down each time the thread of step S21707 is passed. After executing step S21707, the process advances to step S21708.

In step S21708, it is determined whether or not the second symbol stop display time has ended. Specifically, it is determined whether the value of the counter for measuring the second symbol stop display time has become zero. In step S21708. If it is determined that the second symbol stop display time has ended (S21708: YES), the process advances to step S21709. Meanwhile, in step S21708. If it is determined that the second symbol stop display time has not ended (S21708: NO), the second fluctuation stop process is ended.

In step S21709, the second game execution flag is turned OFF. After that, the process advances to step S21710.

In step S21710, it is determined whether the jackpot flag (jackpot flag according to each jackpot type) or small jackpot flag is ON. In step S21710, if it is determined that the big hit flag or the small hit flag is ON (S21710: YES), the process advances to step S21711. On the other hand, in step S21710, if it is determined that neither the big hit flag nor the small hit flag is ON (S21710: NO), the second fluctuation stop process is directly ended.

In step S21711, the opening/closing execution mode flag is turned on. After that, the process advances to step S21712, and after setting the opening/closing execution mode start command, the second fluctuation stop process ends.

<Game state transition processing>
Next, the game state transition process will be explained. The game state transition process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine of the normal process (FIG. 94: S20306).

FIG. 109 is a flowchart showing the gaming state transition process. In step S21801, it is determined whether the ending period flag is ON. The ending period flag is turned ON at the end of the opening/closing processing period in the opening/closing execution mode (at the start of the ending period), and turned OFF at the end of the ending period. The ending period is a period for executing the ending effect in the opening/closing execution mode.

In step S21801, if it is determined that the ending period flag is not ON (S21801: NO), the process advances to step S21802, and it is determined whether the opening/closing processing period flag is ON. As described above, the opening/closing processing period flag is turned ON when the gaming state is transferred to the opening/closing processing period, and is turned OFF when the opening/closing processing period is ended.

If it is determined in step S21802 that the opening/closing processing period flag is not ON (S21802: NO), the process advances to step S21803, and it is determined whether the opening period flag is ON. The opening period flag is turned ON at the start of the opening period and turned OFF at the end of the opening period.

In step S21803, if it is determined that the opening period flag is not ON (S21803: NO), the process advances to step S21804, and it is determined whether the opening/closing execution mode flag is ON. The opening/closing execution mode flag is turned ON when the game round that triggered the opening/closing execution mode ends, and is turned OFF when the opening/closing execution mode ends.

If it is determined in step S21804 that the opening/closing execution mode flag is ON (S21804: YES), the process advances to step S21805. On the other hand, in step S21804, if it is determined that the opening/closing execution mode flag is not ON (S21804: NO), the game state transition process is ended.

In step S21805, it is determined whether or not it is a small win. Specifically, by determining whether the small win flag is ON, it is determined whether the trigger for starting the opening/closing execution mode is a small win. In step S21805, if it is determined that it is not a small hit (S21805: NO), the process advances to step S21806.

In step S21806, the high probability mode flag is turned OFF. In step S21805, it is determined that the game result (result of the winning lottery) in the current game round is not a small win, so the result of the winning lottery in the current game round is a jackpot. The high probability mode flag is turned OFF in order to change the lottery mode currently being executed in the opening/closing execution mode triggered by winning a jackpot to a low probability mode. After executing step S21806, the process advances to step S21807.

In step S21807, the high frequency support mode flag is turned OFF. In step S21805, it is determined that the game result (result of the winning lottery) in the current game round is not a small win, so the result of the winning lottery in the current game round is a jackpot. The high-frequency support mode flag is turned OFF in order to change the support mode currently being executed in the opening/closing execution mode triggered by winning the jackpot to the low-frequency support mode. After executing step S21807, the process advances to step S21808.

In step S21808, a jackpot opening/closing execution mode command is set. The jackpot opening/closing execution mode command is a command for notifying the audio emission control device 90 that the opening/closing execution mode will be started in response to the winning of the jackpot. The jackpot opening/closing execution mode command is transmitted to the audio emission control device 90 in the command output process (FIG. 94: Step S20302) of the normal process. After executing step S21808, the process advances to step S21809.

In step S21809, an opening/closing execution mode start command is set. The opening/closing execution mode start command is a command for notifying the audio emission control device 90 that the opening/closing execution mode will be started in response to a jackpot win or a small win. That is, the opening/closing execution mode start command is set when the opening/closing execution mode is started regardless of whether it is a big hit or a small hit. The opening/closing execution mode start command is sent to the audio emission control device 90 in the command output process (FIG. 94: Step S20302) of the normal process. After executing step S21809, the process advances to step S21810.

In step S21810, opening/closing scenario setting processing is executed. The opening/closing scenario setting process is a process for setting an opening/closing scenario in which an opening pattern of the opening/closing door 36b in a round game is set. The opening/closing scenario setting process will be described later. After executing step S21810, the process advances to step S21811.

In step S21811, opening time setting processing is executed. The opening time setting process is a process for setting the temporal length of the opening period (hereinafter also referred to as opening time) in the special gaming state. Specifically, a predetermined value is set in the third timer counter area T3 as the opening time. The opening time setting process will be described later. After executing step S21811, the process advances to step S21812.

In step S21812, an opening command is set. The set opening command is sent to the audio emission control device 90 in step S20302 in the normal process (FIG. 94). This opening command includes information on the set opening time, information on the type of jackpot, and information on the jackpot or small win that triggered the execution of the current opening/closing execution mode. The audio emission control device 90 determines the contents of the performance corresponding to the opening time and opening/closing execution mode based on the received opening command, and controls various devices so that the determined contents are executed. After executing step S21812, the process advances to step S21813 and the opening period flag is turned ON. After that, the main game state transition process is ended.

In step S21803, if it is determined that the opening period flag is ON (S21803: YES), the process advances to step S21814.

In step S21814, it is determined whether the opening period has ended. Specifically, it is determined whether the value of the third timer counter area T3 set in the opening time setting process is "0". If it is determined in step S21814 that the opening period has ended (S21814: YES), the process advances to step S21815 and the opening period flag is turned OFF. After that, the process advances to step S21816.

In step S21816, a round display start process is executed to notify the type of the current opening/closing execution mode. Specifically, the jackpot type is displayed on the round display section 39. After executing step S21816, the process advances to step S21817.

In step S21817, the opening/closing processing period flag is turned ON. After that, the main game state transition process is ended.

In step S21802, if it is determined that the opening/closing process period flag is ON (S21802: YES), the process proceeds to step S21818, and the big winning opening opening/closing process is executed. The grand prize opening opening/closing process will be described later. After executing step S21818, the process advances to step S21819.

In step S21819, it is determined whether or not the big winning hole opening/closing process has ended, and if it is determined that the big winning hole opening/closing process has ended (S21819: YES), the process advances to step S21820. On the other hand, in step S21819, if it is determined that the big winning opening opening/closing process has not been completed (S21819: NO), the main gaming state transition process is ended as it is.

In step S21820, the opening/closing processing period flag is turned OFF, and the process then proceeds to step S21821.

In step S21821, round display end processing is executed. In this process, display control of the round display section 39 in the main display section 45 is ended so that the round display section 39 is turned off. After executing step S21821, the process advances to step S21822.

In step S21822, ending time setting processing is executed. The ending time setting process is a process for setting the temporal length of the ending period (hereinafter also referred to as ending time) in the opening/closing execution mode. Specifically, a predetermined value is set in the fourth timer counter area T4 as the ending time. After executing step S21822, the process advances to step S21823.

In step S21823, an ending command is set. The set ending command is sent to the audio emission control device 90 in step S20302 in the normal process (FIG. 94). The audio emission control device 90 starts a production corresponding to the ending period based on receiving the ending command. After executing step S21823, the process advances to step S21824.

In step S21824, the ending period flag is turned ON. After that, the main game state transition process is ended.

In step S21801, if it is determined that the ending period flag is ON (S21801: YES), the process advances to step S21825.

In step S21825, it is determined whether the ending period has ended. Specifically, in the ending time setting process (S21822), it is determined whether the value of the fourth timer counter area T4 set as the ending time is "0". In step S21825, if it is determined that the value of the fourth timer counter area T4 set as the ending time is "0" (S21825: YES), the process advances to step S21826.

In step S21826, the ending period flag is turned OFF. After that, the process advances to step S21827, and transition processing at the end of the ending period is executed. The transition process at the end of the ending period is a process for setting various modes for the game after the current ending period ends. Details of the transition process at the end of the ending period will be described later. After executing step S21827, the process advances to step S21828, and the opening/closing execution mode flag is turned OFF. After that, the process advances to step S21829, and an opening/closing execution mode end command is set. The opening/closing execution mode end command is a command for notifying the audio emission control device 90 that the opening/closing execution mode has ended. The opening/closing execution mode end command is sent to the audio emission control device 90 in step S20302 in the normal process (FIG. 94). After that, the main game state transition process is ended.

On the other hand, in step S21825, if it is determined that the value of the fourth timer counter area T4 set as the ending time is not "0" (S21825: NO), the main gaming state transition process is ended.

<Opening/closing scenario setting process>
Next, the opening/closing scenario setting process will be explained. The opening/closing scenario setting process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the gaming state transition process (FIG. 109: S21810).

FIG. 110 is a flowchart showing opening/closing scenario setting processing. In step S21901, it is determined whether the jackpot flag is ON. In step S21901, if it is determined that the jackpot flag is ON (S21901: YES), the process advances to step S21902.

In step S21902, a jackpot opening/closing scenario is set according to the type of jackpot. The opening/closing scenario is a program in which an opening pattern of the opening/closing door 36b in a round game is set. After executing step S21902, the main opening/closing scenario setting process ends.

In step S21901, if it is determined that the jackpot flag is not ON (S21901: NO), the process advances to step S21903.

In step S21903, a small win opening/closing scenario is set. In addition, in this embodiment, an opening/closing pattern in which the opening/closing door 36b opens and closes once in the round game is set in the opening/closing scenario for small winnings. After executing step S21903, the main opening/closing scenario setting process ends.

<Opening time setting process>
Next, the opening time setting process will be explained. The opening time setting process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the gaming state transition process (FIG. 109: S21811).

FIG. 111 is a flowchart showing opening time setting processing. In step S22001, it is determined whether the current opening/closing execution mode is triggered by a jackpot win. Specifically, it is determined whether the jackpot flag is ON or not.

In step S22001, if it is determined that the current opening/closing execution mode is triggered by a jackpot (S22001: YES), the process advances to step S22002.

In step S22002, 3000 (approximately 6.0 sec) is set in the third timer counter area T3 as the opening time. Thereafter, the opening time setting process ends.

On the other hand, in step S22001, if it is determined that the trigger for the current opening/closing execution mode is not a jackpot win, that is, if it is determined that the trigger for the current opening/closing execution mode is a small win (S22001: NO), step Proceed to S22003.

In step S22003, 0 (0 sec) is set in the third timer counter area T3 as the opening time. Thereafter, the opening time setting process ends.

<Big prize opening opening/closing process>
Next, the big winning opening opening/closing process will be explained. The big prize opening/closing process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine of the gaming state transition process (FIG. 109: S21818).

FIG. 112 is a flowchart showing the big winning opening opening/closing process. In step S22101, it is determined whether the opening/closing door 36b is open. If it is determined in step S22101 that the door 36b is not open (S22101: NO), the process advances to step S22102.

In step S22102, it is determined whether the conditions for opening the opening/closing door 36b are satisfied. Specifically, the opening/closing scenario set by the opening/closing scenario setting process is read, and it is determined whether it is the timing to open the opening/closing door 36b. If it is determined in step S22102 that the condition for opening the door 36b is satisfied (S22102: YES), the process advances to step S22103.

In step S22103, the opening/closing door 36b is opened. After that, the process advances to step S22104.

In step S22104, a door opening command is set. The opening/closing door open command is a command for making the sub-side control device recognize that the opening/closing door 36b has been opened. The opening/closing door opening command is transmitted to the audio emission control device 90 in the command output processing (FIG. 94: S20302) of the normal processing. After executing step S22104, the main prize opening/closing process ends.

In step S22102, if it is determined that the opening condition for the opening/closing door 36b is not satisfied (S22102: NO), the main prize opening opening/closing process is directly terminated.

In step S22101, if it is determined that the door 36b is open (S22101: YES), the process advances to step S22105.

In step S22105, it is determined whether the conditions for closing the opening/closing door 36b are satisfied. The closing condition for the opening/closing door 36b is that the continuous opening time of the opening/closing door 36b set in the opening/closing scenario has elapsed, or it has been detected that a preset number of game balls have entered the grand prize opening 36a. It holds true if If it is determined in step S22105 that the closing condition for the opening/closing door 36b is satisfied (S22105: YES), the process advances to step S22106.

In step S22106, the opening/closing door 36b is closed. After that, the process advances to step S22107.

In step S22107, a door closing command is set. The opening/closing door close command is a command for making the sub-side control device recognize that the opening/closing door 36b is closed. The opening/closing door closing command is sent to the audio emission control device 90 in the command output process (FIG. 94: S20302) of the normal process. After executing step S22107, the main prize opening/closing process ends.

In step S22105, if it is determined that the closing condition for the opening/closing door 36b is not satisfied (S22105: NO), the main prize opening opening/closing process is directly ended.

<Transition processing at the end of the ending period>
Next, the transition process at the end of the ending period will be explained. The transition process at the end of the ending period is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the gaming state transition process (FIG. 109: S21827).

FIG. 113 is a flowchart showing the transition process at the end of the ending period. In step S22201, it is determined whether the current transition to the opening/closing execution mode is triggered by a jackpot. Specifically, if any of the jackpot type flags stored in the RAM 64 is ON, it is determined that the trigger for shifting to the current opening/closing execution mode is a jackpot.

In step S22201, if it is determined that the current transition to the opening/closing execution mode is a jackpot (S22201: YES), the process advances to step S22202, and the current transition to the opening/closing execution mode is determined to be a probability-variable jackpot. Determine whether or not. Specifically, when the variable probability jackpot flag stored in the RAM 64 is ON, it is determined that the trigger for shifting to the current opening/closing execution mode is a variable probability jackpot.

In step S22202, if it is determined that the current transition to the opening/closing execution mode is a probability-variable jackpot (S22202: YES), the process advances to step S22203. On the other hand, in step S22202, if it is determined that the trigger for the current transition to the opening/closing execution mode is not a probability variable jackpot (S22202: NO), the process advances to step S22212.

In step S22203, the corresponding probability variable jackpot flag is turned OFF. Specifically, a process is executed to turn off the ON flag among the 10R probability variable jackpot flag and the 2R probability variation flag. After executing step S22203, the process advances to step S22204.

In step S22204, the high probability mode flag stored in the RAM 64 is turned on. As a result, after the opening/closing execution mode ends, the win/fail lottery mode shifts to the high probability mode. After executing step S22204, the process advances to step S22205.

In step S22205, it is determined whether the specific probability variable jackpot flag is ON. In step S22205, if it is determined that the specific probability variable jackpot flag is ON (S22205: YES), the process advances to step S22209.

In step S22209, the specific probability variable jackpot flag is turned OFF. Thereafter, in step S22210, the specific processing flag is turned on. After executing step S22210, the process advances to step S22211, and a specific processing command is set. The specific processing command is a command for notifying the audio emission control device 90 that specific processing (special bonus processing) is to be executed. The specific processing command is sent to the audio emission control device 90 in step S20302 in the normal processing (FIG. 94). After executing step S22211, the process advances to step S22206.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S22205 that the specific probability variable jackpot flag is not ON (S22205: NO), the process directly advances to step S22206.

In step S22206, the high probability mode command is set as a command to be transmitted to the audio emission control device 90. The high probability mode command is a command for making the sub-side control device recognize that the winning lottery mode after the end of the opening/closing execution mode is the high probability mode. After executing step 06, the process proceeds to step 07.

In step S22207, the high frequency support mode flag is turned on. After that, the process advances to step S22208, and a high-frequency support mode command is set. The high frequency support mode command is a command for notifying the audio emission control device 90 that the support mode after the opening/closing execution mode is the high frequency support mode. The high frequency support mode command is sent to the audio emission control device 90 in step S20302 in the normal process (FIG. 94). Thereafter, the transition process at the end of the ending period ends.

In step S22202, if it is determined that the current transition to the opening/closing execution mode is not due to a variable jackpot (S22202: NO), the process proceeds to step S22212 and the corresponding normal jackpot flag is turned OFF. After executing step S22212, the process advances to step S22213.

In step S22213, the low probability mode command is set as a command to be transmitted to the audio emission control device 90. The low probability mode command is a command that includes information for making the sub-side control device recognize that the winning lottery mode after the end of the opening/closing execution mode is the low probability mode. After executing step S22213, the process advances to step S22214.

In step S22214, the high frequency support mode flag is turned on. Thereafter, the process advances to step S22215, and 100 is set as a counter value in the number of games counter PNC. After executing step S22215, the process advances to step S22216.

In step S22216, a high frequency support mode command is set. The high frequency support mode command is a command for notifying the audio emission control device 90 that the support mode after the opening/closing execution mode is the high frequency support mode. The high frequency support mode command is sent to the audio emission control device 90 in step S20302 in the normal process (FIG. 94). Thereafter, the transition process at the end of the ending period ends.

In step S22201, if it is determined that the trigger for the current transition to the opening/closing execution mode is not a jackpot (S22201: NO), that is, if the trigger for the current transition to the opening/closing execution mode is a small win, the step Proceed to S22217 and turn off the small hit flag. After executing step S22217, the transition process at the end of the ending period ends.

<Processing for electric support>
Next, the processing for electric support will be explained. The electric support support process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the normal process (FIG. 94: S20307).

FIG. 114 is a flowchart showing the electric support support process. In step S22301, it is determined whether it is supported. Specifically, it is determined whether the supported flag in the various flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64 is ON. The support flag is a flag that is turned ON when the electric accessory 44a of the lower first starting port 44 is brought into the open state, and turned OFF when the electric accessory 44a of the lower first starting port 44 is brought back to the closed state. If it is determined in step S22301 that the supported flag is not ON (S22301: NO), the process advances to step S22302.

In step S22302, it is determined whether the support winning flag in the various flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64 is ON. The support winning flag is a flag that is turned ON when the open state is won in the electric accessory opening lottery to determine whether or not to open the electric accessory 44a, and is turned OFF when the supporting flag is ON. It is. If it is determined in step S22302 that the support winning flag is not ON (S22302: NO), the process advances to step S22303.

In step S22303, it is determined whether the value of the second timer counter area T2 provided in the various counter areas 64f of the RAM 64 is "0". In this case, the second timer counter area T2 is used as a parameter for measuring the fluctuation time of the general figure unit 38. The count value set in the second timer counter area T2 is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process is activated, that is, every 2 msec.

In step S22303, if it is determined that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is not "0" (S22303: NO), the present electric role support process is directly ended. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is "0" (S22303: YES), the process advances to step S22304.

In step S22304, it is determined whether or not it is the end timing of the fluctuating display of symbols in the common symbol unit 38. In step S22304, if it is determined that it is the timing to end the variable display (S22304: YES), the process advances to step S22305, sets the out-of-line display, and then ends the main electric role support process. By setting the missing display, the fluctuating display of the symbols in the regular pattern unit 38 is ended with the missing display being stopped and displayed. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S22304 that it is not the end timing of the variable display (S22304: NO), the process advances to step S22306.

In step S22306, it is determined whether the value of the number of reserved accessories SN is greater than "0". In step S22306, if it is determined that the value of the number of reserved accessories SN is "0" (S22306: NO), this electronic role support process is directly ended. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S22306 that the value of the number of reserved accessories SN is greater than "0" (S22306: YES), the process advances to step S22307.

In step S22307, it is determined whether or not the opening/closing execution mode is in progress, and then the process proceeds to step S22308, in which it is determined whether or not the high-frequency support mode is in progress. If it is not the opening/closing execution mode in step S22307 (S22307: NO), and if it is the high-frequency support mode in step S22308 (S22308: YES), the process advances to step S22309, and an electric accessory opening lottery is performed. Specifically, when the value stored in the electric accessory holding area 64d is shifted and the value of the electric accessory opening counter C4 shifted to the execution area is 0 to 190, the electric accessory opening lottery is entered. Will be elected. Further, at the same time as the electric accessory opening lottery, "750" (ie, 1.5 sec) is set in the second timer counter area T2. The second timer counter area T2 is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process is activated. After that, the process advances to step S22310.

In step S22310, it is determined whether the result of the electric accessory opening lottery in step S22309 is a support win. In step S22310, if it is determined that the result of the electric accessory opening lottery is a support win (S22310: YES), the process advances to step S22311, where the support win flag is turned ON, and the support win flag is set in the various counter areas 64f of the RAM 64. "3" is set in the second round counter area RC2. The second round counter area RC2 is a counter area for counting the number of times the electric accessory 44a is released. After that, the process advances to step S22312. On the other hand, in step S22310, if it is determined that the result of the electric accessory opening lottery is not a support win (S22310: NO), the process proceeds to step S22312 without executing the process of step S22311.

In step S22312, it is determined whether the win/fail lottery mode is the low probability mode. In step S22312, if it is determined that the win/fail lottery mode is the low probability mode (S22312: YES), the process advances to step S22313. On the other hand, in step S22312, if it is determined that the win/fail lottery mode is not the low probability mode (S22312: NO), the main electronic win support process is ended.

In step S22313, it is determined whether the number of games counter area is "0". The number of games counter is decremented by 1 each time one game is completed in the low probability mode and the high frequency support mode. In step S22313, if it is determined that the number of games counter area is not "0" (S22313: NO), this electronic role support process is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S22313 that the number of games counter area is "0", the process advances to step S22314 and the high frequency support mode flag is turned OFF. After that, the process advances to step S22315.

In step S22315, a low-frequency support command, which is a command that includes information for making the sub-side control device recognize that the support mode is the low-frequency support mode, is set as a command to be transmitted to the audio emission control device 90. do. After that, the electric support support process ends.

The low frequency support command set in step S22315 is transmitted to the audio emission control device 90 in the command output process (FIG. 94: S20302) of the normal process. The audio emission control device 90 specifies that the support mode is the low-frequency support mode based on receiving the low-frequency support command, and executes processing corresponding to the low-frequency support mode.

If it is determined in step S22307 that it is the opening/closing execution mode (S22307: YES), or if it is determined that it is not the high-frequency support mode in step S22308 (S22308: NO), the process advances to step S22316, and the electric accessory opening lottery I do. Specifically, when the value stored in the electric accessory holding area 64d is shifted and the value of the electric accessory opening counter C4 shifted to the execution area is 0 to 190, the electric accessory opening lottery is entered. Will be elected. Furthermore, "14750" (that is, 29.5 seconds) is set in the second timer counter area T2 at the same time as the electric accessory opening lottery. After that, the process advances to step S22317.

In step S22317, it is determined whether the result of the electric accessory opening lottery in step S22316 is a support win. In step S22317, if it is determined that the support has not been won (S22317: NO), the main electric role support process is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S22317 that support has been won (S22317: YES), the process proceeds to step S22318, where the support win flag is turned ON, and after setting "1" in the second round counter area RC2, , ends this electronic support process.

In step S22302, if it is determined that the support winning flag is ON (S22302: YES), the process advances to step S22319, and it is determined whether the value of the second timer counter area T2 is "0". In this case, the second timer counter area T2 is used as a parameter for measuring the fluctuation time of the general figure unit 38. In step S22319, if it is determined that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is not "0" (S22319: NO), since the symbol is being displayed in a fluctuating manner in the general drawing unit 38, the main electric role support processing is performed as it is. end. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S22319 that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is "0" (S22319: YES), the process advances to step S22320.

In step S22320, a winning display is set. As a result, the fluctuating display of the symbols in the normal pattern unit 38 is ended with the win display being stopped and displayed. Thereafter, the process advances to step S22321, where the supporting flag is turned on and the support winning flag is turned off. Thereafter, the main power support process is ended.

In step S22301, if it is determined that the support flag is ON (S22301: YES), the process advances to step S22322, and an electric role opening/closing process for controlling the opening/closing of the electric accessory 44a is executed. Thereafter, the main power support process is ended.

<Electric opening/closing process>
Next, the power opening/closing process will be explained. The electric role opening/closing process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine of the electric role support process (FIG. 114: S22322).

FIG. 115 is a flowchart showing the electric role opening/closing process. In step S22401, it is determined whether the electric accessory 44a is open. Whether or not the electric accessory 44a is open is determined by whether or not the electric accessory drive section 44b is in a driving state. If it is determined that the electric accessory 44a is open (S22401: YES), the process advances to step S22402.

In step S22402, it is determined whether the value of the second timer counter area T2 is "0". In this case, the second timer counter area T2 is used as a parameter for measuring the duration of opening of the electric accessory 44a. In step S22402, if it is determined that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is not "0" (S22402: NO), the present electric role opening/closing process is directly ended. That is, if the opening duration time of the electric accessory 44a has not ended, the electric accessory opening/closing process ends.

In step S22402, if it is determined that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is "0" (S22402: YES), the process proceeds to step S22403, where a closing process is performed to control the electric accessory 44a to a closed state, "250" (ie, 0.5 sec) is set in the second timer counter area T2. That is, when the second timer counter area T2 as a means for measuring the open duration time of the electric accessory 44a is "0", the electric accessory 44a is closed and the second timer counter area T2 is turned on. It is used as a parameter for measuring the closing duration time of the accessory 44a, and "250" is set in the second timer counter area T2. After executing step S22403, the process advances to step S22404.

In step S22404, after subtracting 1 from the value of the second round counter area RC2, the process proceeds to step S22405, and it is determined whether the value of the second round counter area RC2 is "0". In step S22405, if it is determined that the value of the second round counter area RC2 is not "0" (S22405: NO), this electronic role opening/closing process is directly ended. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S22405 that the value of the second round counter area RC2 is "0" (S22405: YES), the process advances to step S22406 and the support flag is turned OFF. After that, the main power opening/closing process is ended.

In step S22401, if it is determined that the electric accessory 44a is not open (S22401: NO), the process advances to step S22407, and it is determined whether the second timer counter area T2 is "0". In this case, the second timer counter area T2 is used as a parameter for measuring the closing duration time of the electric accessory 44a. In step S22407, if it is determined that the second timer counter area T2 is not "0" (S22407: NO), the main electric hand opening/closing process is directly ended. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S22407 that the second timer counter area T2 is "0" (S22407: YES), the process proceeds to step S22408, and an opening process is executed to control the electric accessory 44a to be in the open state. . After that, the process advances to step S22409.

In step S22409, it is determined whether or not the opening/closing execution mode is in progress. If it is determined that the opening/closing execution mode is not in progress (S22409: NO), the process proceeds to step S22410, and it is determined whether or not the opening/closing execution mode is in the high frequency support mode. do.

In step S22410, if it is determined that the high-frequency support mode is in effect (S22410: YES), the process advances to step S22411, and "800" (ie, 1.6 sec) is set in the second timer counter area T2. After that, the main power opening/closing process is ended.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S22409 that the mode is the opening/closing execution mode (S22409: YES), or if it is determined that the high frequency support mode is not the mode in step S22410 (S22410: NO), the process advances to step S22412, and the second Set "100" (ie, 0.2 sec) in the timer counter area T2. After that, the main power opening/closing process is ended.

B5. Electrical configuration of the audio emission control device and display control device:
Next, the electrical configurations of the audio emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 will be explained.

FIG. 116 is a block diagram mainly showing the electrical configurations of the audio emission control device 90 and the display control device 100. Note that some components such as the power supply device 85 are omitted.

An MPU 92 is mounted on a sound light emission control board 91 provided in the sound light emission control device 90 . The MPU 92 is an element that includes a ROM 93, a RAM 94, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input/output circuit, and the like.

The ROM 93 stores various control programs executed by the MPU 92, fixed value data, tables, and the like. For example, a part of the ROM 93 is provided with a performance pattern table storage area 93a, a variable display pattern table storage area 93b, and the like.

The RAM 94 is a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when executing the control program stored in the ROM 93. For example, a part of the area of the RAM 94 is provided with various flag storage areas 94a, various counter areas 94b, lottery counter areas 94c, and the like. Note that it is not essential that the ROM 93 and RAM 94 are integrated into one chip for the MPU 92, and each may be integrated into separate chips.

The MPU 92 is provided with an input port and an output port, respectively. The main controller 60 is connected to the input side of the MPU 92 . Various commands are received from the main controller 60. The output side of the MPU 92 is connected to the production operation button 24, the speaker 46, and various lamps 47, as well as the display control device 100.

A display control board 101 provided in the display control device 100 includes an MPU 102 which is an element in which a program ROM 103 and a work RAM 104 are combined into a chip, a video display processor (VDP) 105, a character ROM 106, and a video RAM 107. is installed. Note that it is not essential that the program ROM 103 and work RAM 104 are integrated into one chip for the MPU 102, and each may be integrated into separate chips.

The MPU 102 analyzes various commands received from the audio emission control device 90 or performs predetermined arithmetic processing based on the received various commands to control the VDP 105 (specifically, generate internal commands for the VDP 105). .

The program ROM 103 is a memory for storing various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 102, and also stores JPEG format image data for a background image.

The work RAM 104 is a memory for temporarily storing work data, flags, etc. used when the MPU 102 executes various programs.

The VDP 105 is a type of drawing circuit, and directly operates an image processing device as a liquid crystal display driver incorporated in the liquid crystal display device 41. The VDP 105 is also called a "drawing chip" because it is implemented as an IC chip, and is a type of microcomputer chip containing firmware dedicated to drawing processing. The VDP 105 adjusts the timing of each of the MPU 102, the video RAM 107, etc. and intervenes in reading and writing data, and also reads image data to be stored in the video RAM 107 from the character ROM 106 at a predetermined timing and displays it on the liquid crystal display device 41.

The character ROM 106 serves as an image data library for storing character data such as symbols displayed on the liquid crystal display device 41. This character ROM 106 stores bitmap format image data of various display symbols, a color palette table that is referred to when determining the expression color of each dot of the bitmap image, and the like. It is also possible to provide a plurality of character ROMs 106 and store image data and the like in each character ROM 106. Further, it is also possible to have a configuration in which the JPEG format image data for the background image stored in the program ROM 103 is stored in the character ROM 106.

The video RAM 107 is a memory for storing display data to be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 41, and by rewriting the contents of the video RAM 107, the display contents of the liquid crystal display device 41 are changed.

Hereinafter, the MPU 62, ROM 63, and RAM 64 of the main control device 60 are also referred to as the main side MPU 62, main side ROM 63, and main side RAM 64, respectively, and the MPU 92, ROM 93, and RAM 94 of the audio/light emission control device 90 are referred to as the sound-light side MPU 92 and the sound-light side MPU 92, respectively. The ROM 93 is also called the audio/light side RAM 94, and the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 is also called the display side MPU 102.

B6. Various processes executed in the audio emission control device and display control device:
Next, a specific example of control executed in the audio emission control device and the display control device will be described. First, the processing executed in the audio emission control device 90 will be explained, and then the processing executed in the display control device 100 will be explained.

<Various processes executed in the audio emission control device>
<Timer interrupt processing>
First, timer interrupt processing executed in the MPU 92 of the audio emission control device 90 will be described.

FIG. 117 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing executed in the MPU 92 of the audio emission control device 90. The timer interrupt process is repeatedly executed at a relatively short cycle (for example, 2 msec). The processing of each step executed in the timer interrupt processing will be described below.

In step S23101, command storage processing is executed. The command storage process is a process for storing the received command in the sound/light side RAM 94 when a command is received from the main side MPU 62 . The sound/light side RAM 94 is provided with a ring buffer to enable storage and reading of commands received from the main side MPU 62, and the commands received from the main side MPU 62 are sequentially stored in the ring buffer and , are sequentially read out according to the stored order. After executing step S23101, the process advances to step S23102.

In step S23102, state storage processing is executed. The state storage process is a process in which the state of the game being executed is stored using a flag based on the command received from the main MPU 62. The state of the game stored as a flag is used to determine the performance to be executed. Details of the state storage process will be described later. After executing step S23102, the process advances to step S23103.

In step S23103, display mode switching processing is executed. The display mode switching process is a process of switching the area in which the first starting port performance image and the second starting port performance image are displayed. Specifically, there is a case where a first starting port performance image is displayed in the main display area MA and a second starting port performance image is displayed in the sub display area SA, and a second case where a second starting port performance image is displayed in the main display area MA. Processing for switching between displaying the image and displaying the first starting opening effect image in the sub-display area SA is executed. Note that the first starting opening performance image includes a first liquid crystal pattern, and the second starting opening performance image includes a second liquid crystal pattern. Details of the display mode switching process will be described later. After executing step S23103, the process advances to step S23104.

In step S23104, special 1 game round production processing is executed. The special 1 game round performance process is a process for setting and executing a performance corresponding to the first starting opening game round. Details of the special 1 game rendition process will be described later. After executing step S23104, the process advances to step S23105.

In step S23105, special 2 game round performance processing is executed. The special 2 game round performance processing is a process for setting and executing the performance corresponding to the second starting opening game round. Details of the processing for special 2 game rendition will be described later. After executing step S23105, the process advances to step S23106.

In step S23106, special bonus effect setting processing is executed. The special bonus performance setting process is a process for setting a performance to be executed during a period in which the special bonus process is being executed. Details of the special bonus performance setting process will be described later. After executing step S23106, the process advances to step S23107.

In step S23107, other display processing is executed. Other display processing is processing for executing various display-related settings based on various commands received from the main MPU 62. For example, when a hold command is received from the main MPU 62, processing is performed to update the number of holds displayed in the first hold display area Ds1 and the second hold display area Ds2. After executing step S23107, the process advances to step S23108.

In step S23108, a light emission control process for controlling light emission of the various lamps 47 is executed. In the light emission control process, light emission control of the various lamps 47 is performed based on the light emission data read out in the processes from step S23103 to step S23107. That is, the various lamps 47 are controlled to emit light so that the light emission mode corresponds to the effects set in steps S23103 to S23107. After executing step S23108, the process advances to step S23109.

In step S23109, audio output control processing for controlling the audio output of the speaker 46 is executed. In the audio output control process, the audio output of the speaker 46 is controlled based on the audio output data read out in the processes from step S23103 to step S23107. That is, the audio output control of the speaker 46 is performed so that the audio corresponding to the effects set in steps S23103 to S23107 is outputted. After executing step S23109, this timer interrupt processing ends.

<State memory processing>
Next, state storage processing will be explained. The state processing is executed by the sound and light side MPU 92 of the sound and light emission control device 90 as a timer interrupt processing subroutine (FIG. 117: S23102).

FIG. 118 is a flowchart showing state storage processing. In step S23201, it is determined whether a specific probability variable jackpot command has been received from the main side MPU 62. The specific probability variable jackpot command is transmitted from the main side MPU 62 at the start of a game round in which a specific probability variable jackpot is won. In step S23201, if it is determined that the specific probability variable jackpot command has been received from the main side MPU 62 (S23201: YES), the process proceeds to step S23202, and the sound-light side specific probability variable jackpot flag is turned ON. After executing step S23202, the process advances to step S23203.

On the other hand, in step S23201, if it is determined that the specific probability variable jackpot command has not been received from the main side MPU 62 (S23201: NO), the process directly advances to step S23203.

In step S23203, it is determined whether a specific processing command has been received from the main MPU 62. The specific processing command is transmitted from the main side MPU 62 when the game round in which the specific probability variable jackpot is won ends and the opening/closing execution mode corresponding to the specific probability variable jackpot is completed. In step S23203, if it is determined that the specific processing command has been received from the main MPU 62 (S23203: YES), the process proceeds to step S23204, and the sound and light side specific processing flag is turned ON. After executing step S23204, the process advances to step S23205.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S23203 that the specific processing command has not been received from the main MPU 62 (S23203: NO), the process directly advances to step S23205.

In step S23205, it is determined whether a special bonus start command has been received from the main MPU 62. The special bonus start command is transmitted from the main side MPU 62 at the start of a game round when a jackpot is won in a subsequent game round after winning a special probability variable jackpot. In step S23205, if it is determined that the special bonus start command has been received from the main MPU 62 (S23205: YES), the process proceeds to step S23206, and the sound and light side specific processing flag is turned OFF. After that, the process advances to step S23207, and the special bonus start flag is turned ON. After executing step S23207, the process advances to step S23208.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S23205 that the special bonus start command has not been received from the main MPU 62 (S23205: NO), the process directly advances to step S23208.

In step S23208, it is determined whether a jackpot opening/closing execution mode command has been received from the main side MPU 62. The jackpot opening/closing execution mode command is transmitted from the main side MPU 62 at the time of starting the opening/closing execution mode triggered by the jackpot winning. In step S23208, if it is determined that the jackpot opening/closing execution mode command has been received from the main side MPU 62 (S23208: YES), the process advances to step S23209.

In step S23209, it is determined whether the special bonus start flag is ON. In step S23209, if it is determined that the special bonus start flag is ON (S23209: YES), the process advances to step S23210. In step S23210, the special bonus start flag is turned OFF. Thereafter, this state storage process is ended.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S23208 that the jackpot opening/closing execution mode command has not been received from the main MPU 62 (S23208: NO), and if it is determined in step S23209 that the special bonus start flag is not ON (S23209 :NO), this status storage process is ended.

<Display mode switching process>
Next, the display mode switching process will be explained. The display mode switching process is executed by the sound and light side MPU 92 of the sound and light emission control device 90 as a subroutine of timer interrupt processing (FIG. 117: S23103).

FIG. 119 is a flowchart showing display mode switching processing. In step S23301, it is determined whether a special bonus start command has been received. In step S23301, if it is determined that the special bonus start command has been received (S23301: YES), the process advances to S23302. In step S23302, the special 2 main display flag is turned on. The special 2 main display flag displays the first starting port performance image including the first liquid crystal pattern in the main display area MA of the liquid crystal display device 41, and also displays the second starting port performance image including the second liquid crystal pattern. When displaying on the sub-display area SA of the liquid crystal display device 41, it is turned off, and the second start opening effect image including the second liquid crystal pattern is displayed on the main display area MA of the liquid crystal display device 41, and the first This is a flag that is turned ON when displaying the first starting port performance image including the liquid crystal pattern in the sub display area SA of the liquid crystal display device 41. In step S23302, when the special bonus process is started, the special 2 main display flag is turned ON. As shown in FIG. 91, during the period in which the special bonus process is being executed, the game round for the second starting opening is executed multiple times, and for the player, the lottery result in the gaming round for the second starting opening is a small win. Therefore, in this embodiment, when the special bonus process is started, the special 2 main display flag is turned ON. After executing step S23302, the process advances to step S23303.

In step S23303, a special 2 main display command is sent to the display control device 100. The display control device 100 that has received the special 2 main display command displays the second starting gate effect image in the main display area MA of the liquid crystal display device 41 by controlling the display of the liquid crystal display device 41, and displays the first A first starting opening performance image including a liquid crystal pattern is displayed in the sub display area SA of the liquid crystal display device 41. After executing step S23303, the process advances to step S23304.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S23301 that the special bonus start command has not been received (S23301: NO), the process directly advances to step S23304.

In step S23304, it is determined whether a jackpot opening/closing execution mode command has been received. In step S23304, if it is determined that the jackpot opening/closing execution mode command has been received (S23304: YES), the process proceeds to step S23305.

In step S23305, it is determined whether the special 2 main display flag is ON. In step S23305, if it is determined that the special 2 main display flag is ON (S23305: YES), the process advances to S23306 and the special 2 main display flag is turned OFF. Thereafter, the process advances to step S23307, and a special 1 main display command is sent to the display control device 100. That is, when the opening/closing execution mode is started in response to winning a jackpot, the effect image for the first starting opening including the pattern for the first liquid crystal is displayed in the main display area MA of the liquid crystal display device 41, and the effect image for the second liquid crystal is displayed. A display mode is set in which a second starting opening performance image including a pattern is displayed in the sub-display area SA of the liquid crystal display device 41.

In this embodiment, if the game is played according to the legal flow of the game, the probability of winning a jackpot in the winning lottery in the second starting opening game is low, and the opening/closing execution mode is executed in response to the winning of the jackpot. has a high probability of winning the jackpot in the game round for the first starting opening. Therefore, when the opening/closing execution mode is executed due to a jackpot win, the first starting opening performance image including the first liquid crystal symbol is displayed in the main display area MA of the liquid crystal display device 41.

In step S23307, as described above, the special 1 main display command is sent to the display control device 100. The display control device 100 that has received the special 1 main display command displays the first starting gate effect image in the main display area MA of the liquid crystal display device 41 by controlling the display of the liquid crystal display device 41, and displays the second A second starting port performance image including a liquid crystal pattern is displayed in the sub display area SA of the liquid crystal display device 41. After executing step S23307, this display mode switching process ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S23304 that the jackpot opening/closing execution mode command has not been received (S23304: NO), and if it is determined in step S23305 that the special 2 main display flag is not ON (S23305: NO) , the display mode switching process ends.

<Special 1 game replay processing>
Next, the processing for special 1 game rendition will be explained. The special 1 game play processing is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine of the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 117: S23104).

FIG. 120 is a flowchart showing the special 1 game round production process. In step S23401, it is determined whether or not a special 1 variation command has been received from the main MPU 62. In step S23401, if it is determined that the special 1 variation command has been received (S23401: YES), the process advances to step S23402.

In step S23402, the command for special 1 variation received this time is read out, and from the command, information on the presence or absence of a jackpot, the type of jackpot, the presence or absence of reach occurrence, and the variation time is read out. Then, the read information is stored in the register of the audio-optical side MPU 92. After that, the process advances to step S23403.

In step S23403, it is determined whether the special 2 main display flag is ON. In step S23403, if it is determined that the special 2 main display flag is not ON (S23403: NO), the process advances to step S23404, and a process for setting a special 1 effect pattern for the main display area is executed. The setting process of the special 1 effect pattern for the main display area is a process of setting the contents of the preview effect and the ready-to-reach effect to be displayed in the main display area MA, based on the information read in step S23402. Details of the setting process of the special 1 effect pattern for the main display area will be described later. After executing step S23404, the process advances to step S23406.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S23403 that the special 2 main display flag is ON (S23403: YES), the process advances to step S23405, and a process for setting a special 1 effect pattern for the sub display area is executed. Specifically, based on the information read in step S23402, the contents of the preview effect and reach effect to be displayed in the sub-display area SA are set.

Here, the process of step S23405, that is, the process of setting the special 1 effect pattern for the sub display area is executed during the period when the special bonus process is being executed. That is, during the special bonus process, the first starting opening performance image is displayed in the sub display area SA. As explained in FIG. 91, during the period in which the special bonus process is being executed, during the execution of the game round for the first starting opening in which the jackpot has been won, the gaming round for the second starting opening is executed and there is a high probability that the winning bonus will be small. A winning result is won and one round of the round game is executed. Then, during the period in which the round game is being executed in response to a small win in the game round for the second starting opening, the measurement of the playing time of the gaming round for the first starting opening is interrupted as an internal process of the main control device 60. Therefore, the display time of the first starting gate performance image displayed in the sub display area SA during this period is variable and cannot be determined at the time when the display of the first starting gate performance image starts to be displayed in the sub display area SA. . Therefore, as the effect image for the first starting opening to be displayed in the sub-display area SA, an image that does not give the player a sense of discomfort no matter what timing the display ends is set. For example, an image in which the first liquid crystal pattern is monotonically changing without any narrative, or an image in which a predetermined character repeats monotonous movements is set. By doing so, it is possible to display the first starting opening effect image in the sub-display area SA whose display time is variable so that the player does not feel strange.

After executing step S23405, the process advances to step S23406.

In step S23406, a process for setting a liquid crystal pattern to be stopped is executed. In the liquid crystal symbol setting process, if the result of the winning lottery for the current game round is a jackpot, information corresponding to the stop result in which the same symbol combination is established on the active line L (L1 or L2) is set. is set as the information for the current LCD pattern. Furthermore, if the result of the winning lottery for the current game round is a loss, it is determined whether or not a reach has occurred based on the contents of the special 1 variation command. If it is determined that it corresponds to the occurrence of a reach, it is a stop result in which the combination of the same symbols does not occur on the active line L (L1 or L2), and the reach symbol appears on the active line L (L1 or L2). The information corresponding to the stop result that satisfies the combination of is determined as the information of the current stop result. On the other hand, if it is determined that it does not correspond to the reach occurrence, it is a stop result in which the same symbol combination does not occur on the active line L (L1 or L2), and Information corresponding to the stop result in which the combination of reach symbols is not established is set as the information of the current liquid crystal symbol. After executing step S23406, the process advances to step S23407.

In step S23407, processing is executed to determine a variable display pattern for the current game round. In this process, the information on the fluctuation time of the current game round is specified from the content of the special 1 fluctuation command received this time, and the information on the fluctuation time and the information on the liquid crystal symbol specified in the above step S23406 are Select a variable display pattern that corresponds to the combination of . When selecting this variable display pattern, the variable display pattern table stored in the variable display pattern table storage area 93b of the audio/light side ROM 93 is referred to. After executing step S23407, the process advances to step S23408.

In step S23408, pending information update processing is executed. In the reservation information update process, the information in the first reservation number counter area is updated so that the first reservation number stored in the first reservation number counter area of the audio-optical side RAM 94 is subtracted by one. After executing step S23408, the process advances to step S23409.

In step S23409, the special 1 effect setting flag is turned on. The special 1 effect setting flag is a flag indicating that the effect pattern, stop liquid crystal symbol, variable display pattern, etc. in the game round for the first starting opening have been set. After executing step S23409, the process advances to step S23410.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S23401 that the special 1 variation command has not been received, the process directly advances to step S23410.

In step S23410, special 1 game round performance execution processing is executed. The special 1 game round performance execution process is a process that controls the start and end of fluctuation of the liquid crystal symbols corresponding to the first starting opening game round. Details of the special 1 game round performance execution process will be described later. After executing step S23410, the process advances to step S23411.

In step S23411, special 1 variation time measurement processing is executed. The special 1 variation time measurement process is a process that measures the time for which the liquid crystal symbols of the first starting opening game are displayed in a variable manner. Details of the special 1 variation time measurement process will be described later. After executing step S23411, the process for this special 1 game rendition is ended.

<Setting process of special 1 effect pattern for main display area>
Next, the setting process of the special 1 effect pattern for the main display area will be explained. The setting process of the special 1 performance pattern for the main display area is executed by the MPU 92 of the audio emission control device 90 as a subroutine of the special 1 game round performance process (FIG. 120: S23404).

FIG. 121 is a flowchart showing the setting process of the special 1 effect pattern for the main display area. In step S23501, based on the received special 1 variation command, it is determined whether the game round to be processed is a game round in which a jackpot was won. In step S23501, if it is determined that the game round to be processed is the game round in which the jackpot was won (S23501: YES), the process advances to step S23502.

In step S23502, based on the received special 1 variation command, it is determined whether or not the game round to be processed is the game round in which the probability variable jackpot was won. In step S23502, if it is determined that the game round to be processed is the game round in which the probability variable jackpot was won (S23502: YES), the process advances to step S23503.

In step S23503, it is determined whether the sound-light side specific probability variable jackpot flag is ON. In step S23503, if it is determined that the sound and light side specific probability variable jackpot flag is not ON, that is, if it is determined that it is a 10R probability variable jackpot (step S23503: NO), the process proceeds to step S23504.

In step S23504, a performance pattern for a probability variable jackpot is set as the special 1 performance pattern (performance image for the first starting opening) to be displayed in the main display area MA. Thereafter, the setting process of the special 1 effect pattern for the main display area is completed.

In step S23503, if it is determined that the sound and light side specific probability variable jackpot flag is ON (S23503: YES), the process advances to step S23505. In step S23505, a special probability variable jackpot performance pattern is set as the special 1 performance pattern (first starting opening performance image) to be displayed in the main display area MA. After executing step S23505, the process advances to step S23506.

In step S23506, the sound and light side specific probability variable jackpot flag is turned OFF. Thereafter, the setting process of the special 1 effect pattern for the main display area is completed.

Note that a configuration may be adopted in which the performance pattern for a variable probability jackpot set in step S23504 and the performance pattern for a specific probability variable jackpot set in step S23506 are the same or similar performance patterns. By doing this, it is made difficult to distinguish whether the current jackpot is a certain probability variable jackpot or a specific probability variable jackpot, thereby giving the player a sense of expectation as to which type of jackpot it is. Can be done.

In step S23502, if it is determined that the game round to be processed is not a game round in which a probability variable jackpot was won (S23502: NO), the process advances to step S23507.

In step S23507, a normal jackpot performance pattern is set as the special 1 performance pattern (first starting opening performance image) to be displayed in the main display area MA. Thereafter, the setting process of the special 1 effect pattern for the main display area is completed.

In step S23501, if it is determined that the game round to be processed is not the game round in which the jackpot was won (S23501: NO), the process advances to step S23508.

In step S23508, it is determined whether the sound/light side specific processing flag is ON. In step S23508, if it is determined that the sound and light side specific processing flag is not ON (S23508: NO), the process advances to step S23509.

In step S23509, a performance pattern for missing is set as the special 1 performance pattern (performance image for the first starting opening) to be displayed in the main display area MA. Thereafter, the setting process of the special 1 effect pattern for the main display area is completed.

In step S23508, if it is determined that the sound and light side specific processing flag is ON (S23508: YES), the process advances to step S23510.

In step S23510, a process for setting a performance pattern for missing for specific processing is executed. This process is executed when a specific probability variable jackpot is won in the game round for the first starting opening, and the gaming round for the first starting opening is executed after the opening/closing execution mode corresponding to the winning ends. be. That is, this process is a process for setting a performance pattern for losing in the game round for the first starting opening, which is executed during the period from time T3 to time T4 in FIG. 91. In this embodiment, a performance pattern that suggests that a special bonus process will be started if a jackpot is won next time is used as a performance pattern for a loss in the first starting opening game run during the period. adopt. By doing so, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation. Thereafter, the setting process of the special 1 effect pattern for the main display area is completed.

<Special 1 game rendition execution processing>
Next, the special 1 game rendition execution processing will be explained. The special 1 game round performance execution process is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine (FIG. 120: S23410) of the special 1 game round performance process.

FIG. 122 is a flowchart showing the special 1 game round performance execution process. In step S23601, it is determined whether the special 1 effect setting flag is ON. In step S23601, if it is determined that the special 1 effect setting flag is ON (step S23601: YES), the process advances to step S23602. On the other hand, in step S23601, if it is determined that the special 1 performance setting flag is not ON (step S23601: NO), the game round performance execution process for this special 1 is directly ended.

In step S23602, it is determined whether the special 1 variation display start flag is ON. If it is determined in step S23602 that the special 1 variation display start flag is not ON (S23602: NO), the process advances to step S23603.

In step S23603, a process for starting the variation of the first liquid crystal symbol is executed. Specifically, the speaker 46, various lamps 47, display The operation details of the control device 100 etc. are set. After executing step S23603, the process advances to step S23604.

In step S23604, a first liquid crystal symbol variation start command is sent to the display control device 100. Specifically, information on the performance pattern, stop liquid crystal symbol, and variable display pattern set in the current game round is set in the first liquid crystal symbol variation start command, and transmitted to the display control device 100. The display control device 100 that has received the command displays the effect pattern, the stop liquid crystal symbol, and the variable display pattern based on the contents of the first liquid crystal symbol variation start command as the first starting opening effect image on the liquid crystal display device 41. It is displayed on the display surface 41a. After executing step S23604, the process advances to step S23605.

In step S23605, the special 1 variation display start flag is turned on. Thereafter, the game performance execution process for this special 1 is ended.

In step S23602, if it is determined that the special 1 variation display start flag is ON (S23602: YES), the process advances to step S23606.

In step S23606, it is determined whether the value of the sound and light side variation time counter SPTC1 is 0. The sound and light side fluctuation time counter SPTC1 is a counter for measuring the fluctuation time in the game round for the first starting opening. The sound and light side fluctuation time counter SPTC1 is counted down in the special 1 fluctuation time measurement process described later, and by recognizing the timing when the sound and light side fluctuation time counter SPTC1 becomes 0, the sound and light side MPU 92 starts the first start. Specify the timing at which the variable time period in the oral game session ends. If it is determined in step S23606 that the value of the sound and light side fluctuation time counter SPTC1 is 0 (S23606: YES), the process advances to step S23607. On the other hand, in step S23606, if it is determined that the value of the sound and light side fluctuation time counter SPTC1 is not 0 (S23606: NO), the main special 1 game round performance execution process is ended.

In step S23607, processing is executed to end the variation of the first liquid crystal symbol. Specifically, the operation contents of the speaker 46, various lamps 47, display control device 100, etc. for ending the variation of the first liquid crystal symbol (displaying the stop symbol) are set. After executing step S23603, the process advances to step S23608.

In step S23608, a first liquid crystal symbol variation end command is sent to the display control device 100. The display control device 100 that has received the command stops the first liquid crystal symbol displayed on the display surface 41a of the liquid crystal display device 41 based on the content of the first liquid crystal symbol variation start command. After executing step S23608, the process advances to step S23609.

In step S23609, the special 1 effect setting flag and the special 1 variable display start flag are turned OFF. Thereafter, the game performance execution process for this special 1 is ended.

<Variation time measurement processing for special 1>
Next, the special 1 variation time measurement process will be explained. The special 1 variation time measurement process is executed by the MPU 92 of the audio emission control device 90 as a subroutine (FIG. 120: S23411) of the special 1 game rendition process.

The variation time measurement process for this feature 1 is a process for measuring the variation time of the game round for the first starting opening. Furthermore, this process has a function of interrupting measurement of the fluctuation time during the period in which the opening/closing execution mode is being executed.

FIG. 123 is a flowchart showing the special 1 variation time measurement process. In step S23701, it is determined whether the special 1 variation display start flag is ON. In step S23701, if it is determined that the special 1 variation display start flag is ON (S23701: YES), the process advances to step S23702. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S23701 that the special 1 variation display start flag is not ON (S23701: NO), the variation time measurement process for this special 1 is directly ended.

In step S23702, it is determined whether an opening/closing execution mode start command has been received. In step S23702, if it is determined that the opening/closing execution mode start command has been received (S23702: YES), the process advances to step S23703.

In step S23703, the special 1 count stop flag is turned on. After that, the process advances to step S23706.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S23702 that the opening/closing execution mode start command has not been received (S23702: NO), the process advances to step S23704.

In step S23704, it is determined whether an opening/closing execution mode end command has been received. In step S23704, if it is determined that the opening/closing execution mode end command has been received (S23704: YES), the process proceeds to step S23705, and the special 1 count stop flag is turned OFF. After executing step S23705, the process advances to step S23706. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S23704 that the opening/closing execution mode end command has not been received (S23704: NO), the process directly advances to step S23706.

In step S23706, it is determined whether the special 1 count stop flag is ON. If it is determined in step S23706 that the special 1 count stop flag is not ON (S23706: NO), the process advances to step S23707.

In step S23707, the sound and light side fluctuation time counter SPTC1 is counted down. In this process, the value of the sound and light side fluctuation time counter SPTC1 is counted down each time the thread of step S23707 is passed. That is, only when the thread passes through step S23707, the value of the sound and light side variation time counter SPTC1 is counted down. After executing step S23707, the variation time measurement process for special 1 ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S23706 that the special 1 count stop flag is ON (S23706: YES), the main special 1 variable time measurement process is ended.

By executing such processing, the fluctuation time measurement processing for this special feature 1 is capable of measuring the fluctuation of the game times for the first starting opening, which has the function of interrupting the measurement of the fluctuation time during the period in which the opening/closing execution mode is being executed. It is possible to measure time.

In this way, by receiving the opening/closing execution mode start command indicating the start of the opening/closing execution mode from the main side MPU 62 during the execution of a game round, the measurement of the fluctuation time of the game round in the sound/light side MPU 92 is interrupted, and the game round is stopped. By receiving an opening/closing execution mode end command indicating the end of the opening/closing execution mode from the main side MPU 62 during execution, the interrupted measurement of the fluctuation time of the game times in the sound/light side MPU 92 is restarted. When such processing is executed, if measurement of the variation time is frequently stopped and restarted, for example, during a period when a special bonus process is being executed, the variation time measured by the main MPU 62 and the sound There is also a possibility that a difference will occur between the fluctuation time measured by the optical side MPU 92 and the fluctuation time measured by the optical side MPU 92. Therefore, for example, a configuration may be adopted in which information regarding the current value of the fluctuation time measured by the main MPU 62 is included in the open/close execution mode start command and the open/close execution mode end command transmitted by the main MPU 62. The sound/light side MPU 92 measures the fluctuation time on the sound/light side MPU 92 based on the information regarding the current value of the fluctuation time measured by the main side MPU 62 which is included in the received opening/closing execution mode start command and opening/closing execution mode end command. A configuration may be adopted in which the value of the fluctuation time is corrected. In addition, if it is known that there will be an error in the variation time measured by the acoustic and optical side MPU 92 compared to the variation time measured by the main side MPU 62, the value of the error or the value of the error will be determined in advance. When specifying the average value of and measuring the fluctuation time in the sound/light side MPU 92, a configuration may be adopted in which the error value is corrected. By doing so, it is possible to accurately synchronize the measurement of the fluctuation time between the main side MPU 62 and the audio/light side MPU 92.

<Special 2 game rendition processing>
Next, the processing for special 2 game rendition will be explained. The special 2 game rendition processing is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine of the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 117: S23105).

FIG. 124 is a flowchart showing the special 2 game round effect processing. In step S23801, it is determined whether a special 2 variation command has been received from the main MPU 62. In step S23801, if it is determined that the special 2 variation command has been received (S23801: YES), the process advances to step S23802.

In step S23802, the command for special 2 variation received this time is read out, and information on the presence or absence of a jackpot, the type of jackpot, the presence or absence of a small win, and the variation time is read from the command. Then, the read information is stored in the register of the audio-optical side MPU 92. After that, the process advances to step S23803.

In step S23803, it is determined whether the special 2 main display flag is ON. In step S23803, if it is determined that the special 2 main display flag is not ON (S23803: NO), the process advances to step S23804, and a process for setting a special 2 effect pattern for the main display area is executed. The setting process of the special 2 effect pattern for the main display area is a process of setting the contents of the preview effect and the ready-to-reach effect to be displayed in the main display area MA, based on the information read in step S23802. Details of the setting process of the special 2 effect pattern for the main display area will be described later. After executing step S23804, the process advances to step S23806.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S23803 that the special 2 main display flag is ON (S23803: YES), the process advances to step S23805, and a process for setting a special 2 effect pattern for the sub display area is executed. Specifically, based on the information read in step S23802, the contents of the preview effect and reach effect to be displayed in the sub-display area SA are set.

After executing step S23805, the process advances to step S23806.

In step S23806, a process for setting a liquid crystal pattern to be stopped is executed. In the liquid crystal symbol setting process, if the result of the winning lottery for the current game round is a jackpot, information corresponding to the stop result in which the same symbol combination is established on the active line L (L1 or L2) is set. is set as the information for the current LCD pattern. Furthermore, if the result of the winning lottery for the current game round is a loss, it is determined whether or not a reach has occurred based on the contents of the special 2 variation command. If it is determined that it corresponds to the occurrence of a reach, it is a stop result in which the combination of the same symbols does not occur on the active line L (L1 or L2), and the reach symbol appears on the active line L (L1 or L2). The information corresponding to the stop result that satisfies the combination of is determined as the information of the current stop result. On the other hand, if it is determined that it does not correspond to the reach occurrence, it is a stop result in which the same symbol combination does not occur on the active line L (L1 or L2), and Information corresponding to the stop result in which the combination of reach symbols is not established is set as the information of the current liquid crystal symbol. After executing step S23806, the process advances to step S23807.

In step S23807, processing for determining a variable display pattern for the current game round is executed. In this process, the information on the fluctuation time of the current game round is specified from the contents of the special 2 fluctuation command received this time, and the information on the fluctuation time and the information on the LCD symbol specified in the above step S23806 are Select a variable display pattern that corresponds to the combination of . When selecting this variable display pattern, the variable display pattern table stored in the variable display pattern table storage area 93b of the audio/light side ROM 93 is referred to. After executing step S23807, the process advances to step S23808.

In step S23808, pending information update processing is executed. In the reservation information update process, the information in the second reservation number counter area is updated so that the second reservation number stored in the second reservation number counter area of the audio-optical side RAM 94 is subtracted by 1. After executing step S23808, the process advances to step S23809.

In step S23809, the special 2 effect setting flag is turned on. The special 2 effect setting flag is a flag indicating that the effect pattern, stop liquid crystal symbol, variable display pattern, etc. in the game round for the second starting opening have been set. After executing step S23809, the process advances to step S23810.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S23801 that the special 2 variation command has not been received, the process directly advances to step S23810.

In step S23810, special 2 game round performance execution processing is executed. This is a process for controlling the start and end of fluctuation of the liquid crystal symbols corresponding to the game round for the second starting opening. Details of the special 2 game round performance execution process will be described later. After executing step S23810, the process advances to step S23811.

In step S23811, special 2 variation time measurement processing is executed. The special 2 variation time measurement process is a process for measuring the time for variable display of the liquid crystal symbols of the second starting opening game round. Details of the special 2 variation time measurement process will be described later. After executing step S23811, the process for this special 2 game round effect is ended.

<Setting process of special 2 effect pattern for main display area>
Next, the setting process of the special 2 effect pattern for the main display area will be explained. The setting process of the special 2 performance pattern for the main display area is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine of the special 2 game round performance process (FIG. 124: S23804).

FIG. 125 is a flowchart showing the setting process of the special 2 effect pattern for the main display area. In step S23901, based on the received special 2 variation command, it is determined whether the game round to be processed is a game round in which a jackpot was won. In step S23901, if it is determined that the game round to be processed is the game round in which the jackpot was won (S23901: YES), the process advances to step S23902.

In step S23902, a performance pattern for a jackpot including a probability variable jackpot and a normal jackpot is set. Thereafter, the process for setting the special 2 effect pattern for the main display area is completed.

In step S23901, if it is determined that the game round to be processed is not a game round in which a jackpot was won (S23901: NO), the process advances to step S23903.

In step S23903, it is determined whether the special bonus start flag is ON. If it is determined in step S23903 that the special bonus start flag is not ON (S23903: NO), the process advances to step S23904.

In step S23904, based on the received special 2 variation command, it is determined whether the game round to be processed is a game round in which a small win was won. In step S23904, if it is determined based on the received special 2 variation command that the game round to be processed is the game round in which the small win was won (S23904: YES), the process advances to step S23905.

In step S23905, a performance pattern for a small win during normal times (not during special bonus times) is set. Thereafter, the process for setting the special 2 effect pattern for the main display area is completed.

In step S23904, if it is determined based on the received special 2 variation command that the game round to be processed is not the game round in which the small win was won (S23904: NO), the process advances to step S23906.

In step S23906, a performance pattern for losing during normal times (not during special bonus times) is set. Thereafter, the process for setting the special 2 effect pattern for the main display area is completed.

If it is determined in step S23903 that the special bonus start flag is ON (S23903: YES), the process advances to step S23907.

In step S23907, based on the received special 2 variation command, it is determined whether the game round to be processed is a game round in which a small win was won. In step S23907, if it is determined based on the received special 2 variation command that the game round to be processed is the game round where the small win was won (S23907: YES), the process advances to step S23908.

In step S23908, a production pattern for a small win at the time of a special bonus is set. The setting method for the performance pattern for the small win at the time of the special bonus differs depending on the state of the game at the time of execution of the process. The details of the setting process of the performance pattern for the small win at the time of the special bonus will be described later. After executing step S23908, the process for setting the special 2 effect pattern for the main display area is ended.

In step S23907, if it is determined based on the received special 2 variation command that the game round to be processed is not the game round in which the small win was won (S23907: NO), the process advances to step S23909.

In step S23909, a performance pattern for losing during the special bonus is set. Thereafter, the process for setting the special 2 effect pattern for the main display area is completed.

FIG. 126 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the process of setting a performance pattern for a small win at the time of a special bonus in step S23908.

In the process of setting a performance pattern for a small win during a special bonus, the performance pattern is set by referring to performance pattern table data (TB1 to TB9) that associates the variation time of the game round to be processed with the performance pattern. do. FIG. 126 is a correspondence table in which the performance pattern table data to be referred to is associated with each game state at the time of execution of the performance pattern setting process for the small win at the time of the special bonus.

As shown in the figure, the type of jackpot in the first starting slot game session that triggered the start of the special bonus process (the type of jackpot in the first starting slot gaming session at time T4 in FIG. 91), and the jackpot in the first starting slot gaming session that triggered the start of the special bonus process. It is used to set the effect of the game time for the second starting opening to be executed during the period when the special bonus process is being executed, for each remaining time RT after the start of the fluctuation of the gaming time for the first starting opening. Performance pattern table data is associated and set.

For example, if the type of jackpot in the game round for the first starting opening that triggered the start of the special bonus process (the type of jackpot in the gaming round for the first starting opening at time T4 in FIG. 91) is a 10R specific probability variable jackpot. If the remaining time RT of the variable time of the game round for the first starting opening at the timing of setting the performance of the gaming round for the second starting opening is 30 seconds or more but less than 60 seconds, the performance pattern table The performance pattern of the game round for the second starting opening in which the small win was achieved is determined by referring to the data TB2.

As shown in the figure, each performance pattern table data is set in association with a performance pattern for each variable time UT of the game round for the second starting opening, and a performance pattern corresponding to the variable time is selected and set. .

In this way, by determining the method of setting the performance pattern for the second starting opening game round during the special bonus depending on the gaming state when setting the performance pattern, various suggestive performances can be provided to the player. can be executed.

For example, if the remaining time RT of the first starting slot game during the period in which the special bonus process is being executed becomes short, an effect that suggests that the remaining time of the special bonus process is short is executed to notify the player. It can give a feeling of irritation. In addition, when the remaining time RT for the first starting slot game is sufficient, an effect indicating that the remaining time for the special bonus process is short is executed, and after that, if there is sufficient remaining time for the special bonus process, By executing a performance that suggests this, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation.

In addition, by changing the method of setting the performance pattern for each type of jackpot in the first starting opening game session that triggered the start of the special bonus process, the type of jackpot in the first starting opening gaming session can be suggested. It is possible to carry out a performance.

<Special 2 game rendition execution processing>
Next, the special 2 game rendition execution processing will be explained. The special 2 game round performance execution process is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine (FIG. 124: S23810) of the special 2 game round performance process.

FIG. 127 is a flowchart showing the special 2 game round performance execution process. In step S24001, it is determined whether the special 2 effect setting flag is ON. In step S24001, if it is determined that the special 2 effect setting flag is ON (step S24001: YES), the process advances to step S24002. On the other hand, in step S24001, if it is determined that the special 2 performance setting flag is not ON (step S24001: NO), the main special 2 game round performance execution process is ended.

In step S24002, it is determined whether the special 2 variation display start flag is ON. In step S24002, if it is determined that the special 2 fluctuation display start flag is not ON (S24002: NO), the process advances to step S24003.

In step S24003, a process for starting the variation of the second liquid crystal symbol is executed. Specifically, the speaker 46, various lamps 47, display The operation details of the control device 100 etc. are set. After executing step S24003, the process advances to step S24004.

In step S24004, a second liquid crystal symbol variation start command is sent to the display control device 100. Specifically, information on the performance pattern, the stop liquid crystal symbols, and the variable display pattern set in the current game round is set in the second liquid crystal symbol variation start command, and transmitted to the display control device 100. The display control device 100 that has received the command displays the effect pattern, the stop liquid crystal symbol, and the variable display pattern based on the contents of the second liquid crystal symbol variation start command as the second starting opening effect image on the liquid crystal display device 41. It is displayed on the display surface 41a. After executing step S24004, the process advances to step S24005.

In step S24005, the special 2 variation display start flag is turned on. Thereafter, the game performance execution process for this special 1 is ended.

In step S24002, if it is determined that the special 2 fluctuation display start flag is ON (S24002: YES), the process advances to step S24006.

In step S24006, it is determined whether the value of the sound and light side variation time counter SPTC2 is 0. The sound and light side fluctuation time counter SPTC2 is a counter for measuring the fluctuation time in the game round for the second starting opening. The sound and light side fluctuation time counter SPTC2 is counted down in the special 2 fluctuation time measurement process described later, and by recognizing the timing when the sound and light side fluctuation time counter SPTC2 becomes 0, the sound and light side MPU 92 starts the second start. Specify the timing at which the variable time period in the oral game session ends. In step S24006, if it is determined that the value of the sound and light side variation time counter SPTC2 is 0 (S24006: YES), the process advances to step S24007. On the other hand, in step S24006, if it is determined that the value of the sound and light side fluctuation time counter SPTC2 is not 0 (S24006: NO), the main special 2 game round performance execution process is ended.

In step S24007, processing is executed to end the variation of the second liquid crystal symbol. Specifically, the operation contents of the speaker 46, various lamps 47, display control device 100, etc. for ending the variation of the second liquid crystal symbol (displaying the stop symbol) are set. After executing step S24003, the process advances to step S24008.

In step S24008, a second liquid crystal symbol variation end command is sent to the display control device 100. The display control device 100 that has received the command stops the second liquid crystal symbol displayed on the display surface 41a of the liquid crystal display device 41 based on the content of the second liquid crystal symbol variation start command. After executing step S24008, the process advances to step S24009.

In step S24009, the special 2 effect setting flag and the special 2 variable display start flag are turned OFF. Thereafter, the game performance execution process for this special 2 is ended.

<Variation time measurement processing for Special 2>
Next, the special 2 variation time measurement process will be explained. The special 2 variation time measurement process is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine (FIG. 124: S23811) of the special 2 game rendition processing.

The variation time measurement process for this feature 2 is a process for measuring the variation time of the game times for the second starting opening. Furthermore, this process has a function of interrupting measurement of the fluctuation time during the period in which the opening/closing execution mode is being executed.

FIG. 128 is a flowchart showing the special 2 variation time measurement process. In step S24101, it is determined whether the special 2 variation display start flag is ON. In step S24101, if it is determined that the special 2 fluctuation display start flag is ON (S24101: YES), the process advances to step S24102. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S24101 that the special 2 fluctuation display start flag is not ON (S24101: NO), the main special 2 fluctuation time measurement process is ended.

In step S24102, it is determined whether an opening/closing execution mode start command has been received. In step S24102, if it is determined that the opening/closing execution mode start command has been received (S24102: YES), the process advances to step S24103.

In step S24103, the special 2 count stop flag is turned on. After that, the process advances to step S24106.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S24102 that the opening/closing execution mode start command has not been received (S24102: NO), the process advances to step S24104.

In step S24104, it is determined whether an opening/closing execution mode end command has been received. In step S24104, if it is determined that the opening/closing execution mode end command has been received (S24104: YES), the process proceeds to step S24105, and the special 2 count stop flag is turned OFF. After executing step S24105, the process advances to step S24106. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S24104 that the opening/closing execution mode end command has not been received (S24104: NO), the process directly advances to step S24106.

In step S24106, it is determined whether the special 2 count stop flag is ON. If it is determined in step S24106 that the special 2 count stop flag is not ON (S24106: NO), the process advances to step S24107.

In step S24107, the sound and light side fluctuation time counter SPTC2 is counted down. In this process, the value of the sound and light side variation time counter SPTC2 is counted down each time the thread of step S24107 is passed. That is, only when the thread passes through step S24107, the value of the sound and light side variation time counter SPTC2 is counted down. After executing step S24107, the variation time measurement process for special feature 2 is ended.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S24106 that the special 2 count stop flag is ON (S24106: YES), the main special 2 variable time measurement process is ended.

By executing such processing, the fluctuation time measurement processing for this special feature 2 is capable of measuring the fluctuation of the game times for the second starting opening, which has the function of interrupting the measurement of the fluctuation time during the period in which the opening/closing execution mode is being executed. It is possible to measure time.

<Special bonus performance setting process>
Next, the special bonus performance setting process will be explained. The special bonus effect setting process is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 117: S23106).

FIG. 129 is a flowchart showing special bonus effect setting processing. In step S24201, it is determined whether a special bonus start command has been received. In step S24201, if it is determined that the special bonus start command has been received (S24201: YES), the process advances to step S24202.

In step S24202, a special bonus effect is set. The special bonus performance includes displaying images, outputting audio, and lamps for the special bonus processing period in areas other than the main display area MA and sub display area SA of the display surface 41a during the period when the special bonus processing is being executed. This is a setting process for executing lighting, etc. After executing step S24202, this special bonus performance setting process ends.

On the other hand, in step S24201, if it is determined that the special bonus start command has not been received (S24201: NO), this special bonus performance setting process is directly ended.

<Various processes executed in the display control device>
Next, processing executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 will be described.

The processes executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 are mainly a main process that is repeatedly executed after the power is turned on until the power is turned off, and a main process that is executed when a command is received from the audio emission control device 90. There are command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing that is executed when a V interrupt signal transmitted from the VDP 105 is detected. The V interrupt signal is a signal sent from the VDP 105 to the MPU 102 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process for one frame of images is completed.

The MPU 102 executes main processing after power is turned on, and executes command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing in response to receiving a command or detecting a V interrupt signal. Note that if command reception and V interrupt signal detection are performed at the same time, command interrupt processing is executed with priority. Therefore, it is possible to quickly reflect the contents of the command received from the audio emission control device 90 and execute the V interrupt process.

<Main processing>
Next, the main processing executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 will be described.

FIG. 130 is a flowchart showing the main processing executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100. As described above, the main process is a process that is executed when the power is turned on and continues to be executed until the power is turned off. The processing of each step executed in the main processing will be described below.

In step S24301, initial setting processing is executed. Specifically, first, the MPU 102 is initialized and the memories in the work RAM 104 and video RAM 107 are cleared. Then, the compressed character information stored in the character ROM 106 is read out, the read character information is decompressed, and the decompressed character information is stored in the character area of the video RAM 107. Furthermore, in order to display the initial screen, information corresponding to the initial screen is extracted from the character information written in the video RAM 107, and the extracted character information is written into the frame buffer area of the video RAM 107. Also perform other settings necessary for initialization. After that, the process advances to step S24302.

In step S24302, interrupt permission setting is executed. After the interrupt permission setting is executed, the main process executes an infinite loop process until the power is turned off. As a result, after the interrupt permission is set, command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing, which will be described below, are executed in accordance with command reception and V interrupt signal detection.

<Command interrupt processing>
Next, command interrupt processing executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 will be described. As described above, the command interrupt process is a process that is executed every time a command is received from the audio emission control device 90.

FIG. 131 is a flowchart showing command interrupt processing executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100. In step S24401, command storage processing is executed. In the command storage process, received command data is extracted and the extracted command data is stored in a command storage area provided in the work RAM 104. Various commands stored in the command storage area by the command storage process are read out by the command determination process of the V interrupt process, which will be described later, and the process corresponding to the command is executed.

<V interrupt processing>
Next, V interrupt processing executed in the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 will be described.

FIG. 132 is a flowchart showing V interrupt processing executed in the MPU 102 of the display control device 100. As described above, the V interrupt process is a process that is executed when the V interrupt signal from the VDP 105 is detected. In the V-interrupt processing, various processes corresponding to the commands stored in the command storage area by the command interrupt processing are executed, and after specifying an image to be displayed on the symbol display device 41, drawing and drawing of the image on the VDP 105 are performed. Execute the displayed instructions.

As described above, the V interrupt signal is a signal that is generated in the VDP 105 every 20 milliseconds when rendering processing for one frame of image is completed, and is also transmitted to the MPU 102. Therefore, by the MPU 102 executing the V interrupt processing in synchronization with this V interrupt signal, a drawing instruction to the VDP 105 is issued every 20 milliseconds when the drawing processing of one frame of image is completed. For this reason, the VDP 105 does not receive instructions to draw the next image before the image drawing or display processing has finished, so it may start drawing a new image in the middle of drawing an image, or display It is possible to prevent an image from being developed in accordance with a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer area in which image information is stored. The details of each step of the V interrupt processing will be described below.

In step S24501, command corresponding processing is executed. In the command corresponding processing, the contents of the command stored in the command storage area by the command interrupt processing (FIG. 131) are analyzed, and processing corresponding to the command is executed. Specifically, for example, if a production command is stored, control of image drawing and display is started so that the production mode specified by the production command is displayed on the symbol display device 41.

If the production operation command is stored, it is determined whether or not it is the acceptance period for pressing the production operation button 24, and if it is determined that it is the acceptance period for pressing the production operation button 24, the production operation is executed. Image drawing and display control is started so that the effect mode corresponding to the pressing of the button 24 is displayed on the pattern display device 41. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not the acceptance period for pressing the production operation button 24, the content of the next command is analyzed without executing the process.

Note that in the command correspondence processing (S24501), all commands stored in the command storage area at that time are analyzed, and processing corresponding to all the analyzed commands is executed. The reason for this will be explained. This is because the command determination process is performed at 20 millisecond intervals during which the V interrupt process is executed, so it is highly likely that a plurality of commands are stored in the command storage area during those 20 milliseconds. In particular, when the content of the production is set by the audio emission control device 90 and the production is started, there is a high possibility that various commands for specifying the content of the production are simultaneously stored in the command storage area. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands at the same time, it is possible to quickly grasp the mode of presentation such as a preview effect or a pattern for LCD set by the sound emission control device 90, and to design a presentation image according to the mode. Drawing of an image can be controlled so that it is displayed on the display device 41.

In step S24502, display setting processing is executed. In the display setting process, the content of one frame of image to be displayed next on the symbol display device 41 is specified based on the type of screen to be displayed on the symbol display device 41 set by the command corresponding process (S24501) etc. . After that, the process advances to step S24503.

In step S24503, task processing is executed. In the task process, based on the content of the next frame of image to be displayed on the pattern display device 41, which is specified by the display setting process (S24502), the type of character (sprite, display object) that makes up the image is determined. At the same time, for each character (sprite), various parameters necessary for drawing such as display coordinate position, magnification, rotation angle, etc. are determined. After that, the process advances to step S24504.

In step S24504, drawing processing is executed. In the drawing process, the types of characters that make up one frame and the parameters necessary for drawing each character, determined by the task process (S24503), are transmitted to the VDP 105. The VDP 105 executes the image drawing process based on this information, and also sends the image along with the drive signal in order to display the image drawn based on the information received during the previous V interrupt process on the pattern display device 41. The image data is transmitted to the symbol display device 41. Thereafter, the process advances to step S24505, and after other processing is executed, the V interrupt processing is ended.

As explained above, the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment executes the special bonus process, which is the process of giving a benefit during the execution of the first starting opening game round in which the jackpot has been won, so that the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment In addition to creating a feeling of anticipation regarding the round game (opening/closing execution mode) as a benefit that will be given after the end of the game round in which the jackpot has been won, it is also possible to It can also create a sense of expectation.

In addition, even if you win a jackpot in the game round for the first starting opening, special bonus processing may or may not be executed during the execution of the game round, so you may not win a jackpot. When the game round for the first start opening is started, it is possible to give the player a sense of urgency as to whether or not the special bonus process will be executed.

In addition, during the period in which the special bonus processing is executed, during the execution of the game round for the first starting opening in which the jackpot was won, the special bonus will be given as a result of winning a small hit in the gaming round for the second starting opening. As a bonus (1R round game) is given, even if you win a jackpot in the first starting slot game, you can still play the second starting slot game and win a small hit. By having the winner win, it is possible to give an even greater sense of expectation.

Furthermore, after the first starting opening game round in which the special bonus process is executed, a round game will be executed in response to the jackpot winning in the first starting opening game round, so the game will have even greater expectations. can be granted to a person.

In addition, the upper limit of the number of times the game for the second starting opening that can be executed during the period when the special bonus process is being executed is the time during which the game for the first starting opening is being executed during the period. Depends on. That is, the upper limit value of the amount of benefits to be given as a special bonus is determined by the time period during which the first starting slot game is being executed during the period. Therefore, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation that the first starting opening game session being executed during the period in which the special bonus process is being executed will continue for a longer period of time. In addition, as the end of the game round for the first starting opening approaches, there is an expectation that you would like to win as many special bonus benefits as possible, that is, you would like to play the gaming round for the second starting opening and win as many small wins as possible. It is possible to give a feeling of excitement and a sense of impatience regarding the end timing of the first starting slot game, and it is possible to give tone to the player's emotions.

Furthermore, since the pachinko machine 10 in this embodiment switches the support mode from the high-frequency support mode to the low-frequency support mode at the start of the first starting opening game round in which the special bonus process is executed, the special bonus process is executed. In this case, it is possible to prevent a situation from becoming excessively advantageous to the player.

In addition, whether or not the special bonus process is executed in the game round for the first starting opening where the winning lottery is won is determined by whether or not the special bonus processing is executed before the game round for the first starting opening where the special bonus processing is executed. It is determined based on the jackpot type corresponding to the winning first starting opening game round. Specifically, in the present embodiment, the jackpot type corresponding to the first starting opening game round in which the special bonus process was executed before the first starting opening gaming round and winning the jackpot is specified. In the case of a probability-variable jackpot, a special bonus process is executed in the first starting opening game round in which the jackpot is subsequently won. That is, before the special bonus process is executed, it can be specified in advance that the special bonus process will be executed if the player wins a jackpot in the next first starting opening game round. As a result, for example, during the execution of the first starting slot game round in which a specific probability variable jackpot was won, a notice (suggestion) is given that if a jackpot is won in the first starting slot game round, a special bonus process will be executed. The special bonus process is executed between the execution of the game round for the first starting opening in which the special bonus process is executed or the game round for the first opening opening in which the special bonus process is executed, or winning a special probability variable jackpot. It is possible to perform a performance that foretells (suggests) that it will be performed. In addition, conditions for switching the support mode from high-frequency support mode to low-frequency support mode if you win a specific probability variable jackpot in the first starting opening game round, and then if you win a jackpot in the first starting opening gaming round. It can be one of the In this way, in the game round for the first starting opening in which the winning lottery is won, the determination as to whether or not to execute the special bonus process is made before the game round for the first starting opening in which the special bonus processing is executed. By making the determination based on the jackpot type corresponding to the first starting slot game run that was executed and won the jackpot, various corresponding processing can be executed in response to the execution of the special bonus processing.

Further, the pachinko machine 10 in this embodiment switches the method of setting the variable time of the game round for the second starting opening between the period in which the special bonus process is executed and the period other than that. More specifically, the average value of the fluctuation time of the game times for the second starting opening set in the period in which the special bonus process is executed is the average value of the fluctuation time of the gaming times for the second starting opening set in other periods. shorter than average. Therefore, the period during which the special bonus process is executed can be made advantageous to the player. Furthermore, when such processing is executed, there is a risk that the player will be given an excessive advantage; however, in this embodiment, during the period in which the special bonus processing is executed, the support mode is changed from the high-frequency support mode to the low-frequency support mode. Since the mode is switched to the support mode, it is possible to prevent a situation from becoming excessively advantageous to the player.

Furthermore, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment determines the jackpot type of the first starting opening game to be executed during the period in which the special bonus process is executed, based on the jackpot type of the first starting opening game to be executed during the period. Decide on the performance pattern. Therefore, it is possible to indirectly make the player guess the lottery result (jackpot type) of the game round for the first starting opening through the presentation of the gaming round for the second starting opening. In other words, it is possible to create a sense of anticipation for the first starting opening game round by using the effects performed during the second starting opening gaming round. Also, based on the lottery mode (high probability mode or low probability mode) after the end of the first starting slot game round that is executed during the period when the special bonus process is executed, the special bonus process is executed during the period when the special bonus process is executed. The effect pattern of the game round for the second starting opening to be played is determined. Therefore, by using the effect executed in the game round for the second starting opening, it is possible to give the player a sense of anticipation regarding the lottery mode after the end of the gaming round for the first starting opening.

Furthermore, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured such that, regarding the setting of the performance of the game time for the second starting opening that is executed during the period in which the special bonus process is executed, the game for the first starting opening at the timing when the performance is set is set. The effect pattern of the game round for the second starting opening is set based on the elapsed time of the round. Therefore, for the player who has recognized the performance corresponding to the executed game round for the second starting opening, the player will be informed of the elapsed time since the first gaming round for the first starting opening was executed and the game round for the first starting opening. It is possible to make the player guess the remaining time until the end of the game, and indirectly give a feeling of anticipation for the special information game round for the first starting opening through the performance corresponding to the special information game round for the second starting opening. In addition, as one of the conditions for executing such processing, that is, the process of setting the performance pattern of the game round for the second starting opening based on the elapsed time of the gaming round for the first starting opening, the first The condition is that the game round for the starting opening has won a jackpot. Therefore, if the game round for the second starting opening is executed while the gaming round for the first starting opening is being executed, the performance of the gaming round for the second starting opening is based on the elapsed time of the gaming round for the first starting opening. By having the player guess whether or not the game for the first starting opening has won a jackpot. That is, it is possible to create a sense of expectation regarding the success or failure of the winning lottery in the first starting opening game round through the presentation of the second starting opening gaming round. In addition, as one of the conditions for executing such processing, that is, the process of setting the performance pattern of the game round for the second starting opening based on the elapsed time of the gaming round for the first starting opening, the first The condition is that a specific probability variable jackpot has been won in the first starting opening game run executed before the starting opening gaming round. Therefore, if the game round for the second starting opening is executed while the gaming round for the first starting opening is being executed, the performance of the gaming round for the second starting opening is based on the elapsed time of the gaming round for the first starting opening. By having the player guess whether or not he or she won a specific probability variable jackpot in the game round for the first starting opening executed before the game round for the first starting opening, in other words, in the game round for the first starting opening, It is possible to make the player guess whether a special bonus process will be executed in the game round for one starting opening, and it is possible to give the player a great sense of expectation.

Furthermore, even if the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment wins a jackpot in the game round for the first starting opening, the symbols for the first liquid crystal display are displayed depending on the state in which the gaming round for the first starting opening is executed. There are cases in which the process of exchanging the display area for displaying the display area and the display area for displaying the second liquid crystal pattern is executed and cases in which it is not executed. Specifically, before the game round for the first starting opening in which the jackpot was won is executed, if the specific probability variable jackpot has been won, the gaming round for the first starting opening in which the jackpot was won is started. Taking this as an opportunity, processing is performed to exchange the display areas in which the first liquid crystal symbols and the second liquid crystal symbols are displayed. On the other hand, if a jackpot other than a specific probability variable jackpot has been won before the first starting opening game round in which the jackpot was won is executed, the first starting opening game round in which the jackpot was won is started. Taking this as an opportunity, the process of exchanging the display areas for displaying the first liquid crystal pattern and the second liquid crystal pattern is not performed. Therefore, by making the player recognize whether or not the display area has been replaced, it is possible to determine whether the game round for the first starting opening was executed after the game round in which the specific probability variable jackpot was won. Alternatively, it can be made to guess whether it is after a game round in which a jackpot other than a specific probability variable jackpot was won. As a result, by making the player recognize whether or not the display area has been replaced, it is possible to make the player guess whether or not the special bonus process will be executed, thereby giving a great sense of anticipation. Further, by executing a performance that utilizes whether or not the display area can be replaced, it is possible to further give the player a sense of anticipation as to whether or not the special bonus process will be executed.

B6. Modification of the second embodiment:
The present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiments, and can be implemented in various forms without departing from the spirit thereof. For example, the following modifications are also possible. In addition, in the modified example described below, description of the same configuration, processing, and effect as in the above embodiment will be omitted.

B6-1. Variation 1:
In the second embodiment, the determination as to whether or not to execute the special bonus process in the game round for the first starting opening in which the jackpot has been won is determined by lottery at the start of the gaming round for the first starting opening in which the special bonus processing is to be executed. Therefore, it may be carried out, or it may be carried out based on the type of jackpot in the game round for the first starting opening. That is, in the above embodiment, the determination as to whether or not to execute the special bonus process in the first starting opening game round in which the jackpot was won is determined based on the first starting opening gaming round (post-execution first Determined based on whether or not a specific probability variable jackpot was won in the first starting opening gaming round (the first starting opening gaming round) in which the jackpot was won earlier than the starting opening gaming round). However, in this modification, the jackpot type in the game round for the first starting opening to be executed first is not referred to, and the judgment is based on the jackpot type in the gaming round for the first starting opening to be executed later, or the game round for the first starting opening to be executed later. Judgment will be made by lottery at the start of the event. By doing this, there is no need to perform processing to store the jackpot type of the first starting slot game that was executed earlier and won the jackpot (for example, by storing it using a flag), which reduces the processing load. can be achieved.

In addition, it is possible to set the type of jackpot to be a guaranteed variable jackpot or a regular jackpot, and if you win a guaranteed variable jackpot in the first starting opening game, you will receive a guaranteed variable jackpot or normal jackpot in the next first starting opening game. A configuration may be adopted in which special bonus processing is executed at the timing of winning. By doing so, it is not necessary to set a jackpot type such as a specific probability variable jackpot and to set a specific probability variable jackpot flag, and the processing can be simplified.

In addition, types of high-frequency support modes are provided as jackpot types, and when the high-frequency support mode set in the game round that is executed after winning the jackpot and opening/closing execution mode ends is a specific high-frequency support mode. In addition, a configuration may be adopted in which a special bonus process is executed when a jackpot is won in the first starting opening game round during execution of the specific high-frequency support mode. Specifically, the jackpot types are a 10R probability variable jackpot A in which a high-frequency support mode A is executed in which the opening pattern of the electric accessory 44a is pattern A, and a high-frequency jackpot A in which the opening pattern of the electric accessory 44a is pattern B. A configuration is adopted in which a 10R probability variable jackpot B in which support mode B is executed can be set. For example, a configuration is adopted in which, when a jackpot is won in the first start opening game round during execution of the high-frequency support mode B, a special bonus process is executed.

More specifically, a high-frequency support mode flag is prepared depending on the type of high-frequency support mode. Then, when winning the 10R guaranteed variable jackpot B, the transition process at the end of the ending period (Fig. 113), which is executed at the end of the round game (opening/closing execution mode) corresponding to the jackpot, corresponds to high-frequency support mode B. Turn on the high-frequency support mode flag (hereinafter referred to as the high-frequency support mode flag for pattern B). After that, during the execution of the high-frequency support mode B in which the opening pattern of the electric accessory 44a is pattern B, the game round for the first starting opening is executed, and it is determined whether or not the jackpot has been won, and it is determined that the jackpot has been won. In this case, it is determined whether or not the pattern B high-frequency support mode flag is ON, and when it is determined that the flag is ON, it is determined to execute the special bonus process. That is, the high-frequency support mode flag for pattern B is turned OFF at the start of the game round for the first starting opening in which the jackpot has been won. It should be noted that a configuration may be adopted in which it is determined whether or not the jackpot in the game round for the first starting opening is determined, and then it is determined whether or not the high frequency support mode flag for pattern B is ON. A configuration may be adopted in which it is determined whether or not the frequent support mode flag is ON or not, and then it is determined whether or not the jackpot in the first starting opening game round is determined. Various types of processing can be adopted as long as the processing allows recognition that a jackpot has been won in the game round for one starting opening.

By adopting such a configuration, in a game round after winning a specific probability variable jackpot, it is possible to recognize that a specific probability variable jackpot was won in the previous game cycle without using the specific processing flag. . That is, by providing multiple types of high-frequency support modes and determining whether the high-frequency support mode is a specific high-frequency support mode (in the above example, whether or not it is high-frequency support mode B), It is possible to recognize that the player won the special probability variable jackpot in the previous game round.

Furthermore, when such a configuration is adopted, it is possible to draw the attention of the player to the type of high-frequency support mode that is executed. When a specific high-frequency support mode (in the above example, high-frequency support mode B) is being executed, the player is notified of the It is possible to give a greater sense of expectation regarding the result of winning the jackpot. In other words, if you win a jackpot in the first starting slot game while a specific high-frequency support mode is being executed, a special bonus process will be executed, so if the specific high-frequency support mode is not being executed, Compared to the success or failure of the jackpot in the first starting slot game to be executed, it is possible to give the player a greater sense of expectation.

Furthermore, if a special bonus process is executed by winning a jackpot in the first starting slot game while a specific high-frequency support mode (high-frequency support mode B in the above example) is being executed, the high-frequency support mode The mode flag (high-frequency support mode flag for pattern B) is turned OFF, and the support mode is switched. Specifically, it switches to low frequency support mode. Therefore, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation as to whether or not the support mode will be switched during execution of a specific high-frequency support mode. In addition, if a special bonus process is executed by winning a jackpot in the game round for the first starting opening while a specific high-frequency support mode (high-frequency support mode B in the above example) is being executed, the second starting opening The method of setting the variation time of the oral game times is changed (see FIGS. 91 and 104). Therefore, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation as to whether or not the setting method of the variable time of the second start opening game time will be changed during execution of the specific high-frequency support mode.

In addition, only one type of high-frequency support mode can be executed, and if a jackpot is won in the first starting opening game while the high-frequency support mode is being executed, a special bonus process is executed. Good too. Specifically, if a jackpot is won in the first starting opening game round while the high-frequency support mode is being executed, the high-frequency support mode is activated at a low frequency at the start of the first starting opening gaming round in which the jackpot occurred. Switch to support mode. In addition, if you win a jackpot in the game round for the first starting opening while executing the high-frequency support mode, at the start of the gaming round for the first starting opening that became the jackpot, the change in the gaming round for the second starting opening will change. Switch the time setting method. Such a configuration may also be adopted.

B6-2. Variation 2:
In the above embodiment, a configuration is adopted in which the support mode is switched from the high-frequency support mode to the low-frequency support mode at the start of the game round for the first starting opening. A configuration may be adopted in which a process of switching from frequent support mode to high-frequency support mode is executed. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from being at an excessive disadvantage during the execution of the first starting opening game round.

B6-3. Variation 3:
In the above embodiment, the special bonus process is started at the start of the fluctuation of the first symbol in the game round for the first starting opening that won the jackpot, but as a modified example, You may adopt the structure which starts from the time when the fluctuating display of the 1st symbol ends and the 1st symbol stops. In other words, during the period from the time when the fluctuation of the first symbol of the game round for the first starting opening that won the jackpot stops until the display of the stopped first symbol ends (hereinafter also referred to as the stop display period). , a configuration may be adopted in which special bonus processing is executed. Specifically, at the start of the stop display period, the setting method of the variable time of the second start opening game time is changed, and the setting method is changed from a setting method in which a relatively long time (5 to 10 minutes) is set as the variable time. Switch to a setting method that sets a relatively short time (2 to 5 seconds). Then, at the start of the stop display period, the support mode is switched from the high-frequency support mode to the low-frequency support mode. Further, the stop display period when executing the special bonus process is set to a relatively long time such as 30 seconds to 1 minute. By doing so, the configuration of the modified example can be realized.

B6-4. Modification example 4:
In the above embodiment, when winning a probability-variable jackpot, the lottery mode becomes the high-probability mode from the end of the opening/closing execution mode executed after the winning game round, and the lottery mode becomes the high-probability mode until the next jackpot is won. However, the configuration is not limited to this, and as a modified example, when a probability-variable jackpot is won, the lottery mode is set to a high-probability mode from the end of the opening/closing execution mode that is executed after the winning game round. Therefore, a configuration may be adopted in which the game shifts to the low probability mode after a predetermined number of games have been played. In other words, the configuration is such that a limit is placed on the number of times the game can be played in the high probability mode. By doing this, for example, if you win a special probability variable jackpot, and if you subsequently win a jackpot, a special bonus process will be executed. Since there is a limit on the number of times, the special bonus process will not be executed unless a jackpot is won before the limited number of games are played. Therefore, it is possible to give the player a sense of urgency and irritation during a period in which a game round is executed in a high probability mode after winning a special probability variable jackpot, and it is possible to give tone to the player's emotions.

B6-5. Variation 5:
In the above embodiment, even if a jackpot of any jackpot type is won in the first starting slot game round, the high-frequency support mode is executed thereafter. Therefore, during the period when the high-frequency support mode is being executed, by executing an effect that suggests the jackpot type of the jackpot that triggered the execution of the high-frequency support mode, the player can It can give a sense of expectation. For example, during the period when the high-frequency support mode is running, if a performance suggesting that the jackpot type of the winning jackpot is a 10R specific probability variable jackpot or a 10R probability variable jackpot is executed, a player who recognizes the production may On the other hand, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation that a special bonus process may be started the next time he or she wins a jackpot.

In addition, during the period in which the high-frequency support mode is being executed, the player is asked to guess whether the jackpot type of the jackpot that triggered the execution of the high-frequency support mode is a 10R specific probability variable jackpot or an 8R regular jackpot. When the player executes the effect that causes the player to move from the high-frequency support mode to the low-frequency support mode at the start of the first starting opening game, the player will be notified that the transition to the support mode will be changed and the special bonus process will be started. It is difficult to determine whether this is due to the fact that the number of games played in the high-frequency support mode (100 times) has ended, and it may give the player a sense of anticipation and tension. can.

B6-6. Variation 6:
In the above embodiment, if the jackpot type in the first starting opening game round in which the jackpot was won earlier is a specific probability variable jackpot, it is possible to determine that the jackpot was won in the first starting opening gaming round executed later. As a trigger, the high-frequency support mode was switched to the low-frequency support mode at the start of the game round for the first starting opening, but the present invention is not limited to such a configuration, and other configurations may be adopted. For example, regardless of the jackpot type in the first starting slot game where the jackpot was won first, the jackpot was won in the first starting slot game that was executed, or the jackpot of a specific jackpot type was won. Taking this as an opportunity, a configuration may be adopted in which the high-frequency support mode is switched to the low-frequency support mode at the start of the game round for the first starting opening. By doing so, it is possible to give the player who has recognized that the high-frequency support mode has been switched to the low-frequency support mode a sense of anticipation for the subsequent progress of the game.

B6-7. Modification example 7:
In the above embodiment, the processing at the start of the first starting slot game round in which the jackpot was won depends on whether or not the jackpot type in the first starting slot gaming round in which the jackpot was won earlier is a specific probability variable jackpot. It is determined whether or not the special bonus process is to be started at the start of the game round for the first starting opening in which the jackpot has been won, but this is not limited to this configuration; Other configurations may be adopted as long as the configuration determines the processing at the start of a game round in which a jackpot is won later. For example, if the type of jackpot in the game round in which the jackpot was won earlier is a variable jackpot, a specific effect may be started at the start of the game round in which the jackpot is won later, or a high-frequency support mode can be changed to a low-frequency support mode. Various configurations may be adopted, such as a configuration for switching between modes, a configuration for switching from a low-frequency support mode to a high-frequency support mode, and a configuration for changing the method of setting the variable time of game times.

B6-8. Modification example 8:
In this embodiment, with the start of the special bonus process as a trigger, the fluctuation time of the game times for the second starting opening becomes high despite the fact that the average value of the fluctuation time set is shorter compared to other periods. Although the frequency support mode has been switched to low frequency support, it is not limited to such a configuration. Other configurations may be adopted as long as the configuration switches to infrequent support. For example, by switching from high-probability mode to low-probability mode, the method for setting the fluctuation time may be changed so that the average value of the fluctuation time of the set gaming times is shortened, and the high-frequency support mode may be changed to the low-frequency support mode. A configuration in which the system switches to support may be adopted. Even if such a configuration is adopted, it is possible to prevent a situation from becoming excessively advantageous to the player.

B6-9. Modification example 9:
In the above embodiment, if a jackpot is won in the first starting opening game round, particularly when a jackpot is won in the first starting opening gaming round and a special bonus process is executed, the first starting opening The game round for the second starting opening that is executed during the period in which the game round for the second starting opening is executed is the production that is executed in the game round for the second starting opening compared to the game round for the second starting opening that is executed in other periods. However, the present invention is not limited to such a configuration, and the second starting opening game is executed during the period from the start of one first starting opening game to the end. Other configurations may be adopted as long as the performance to be performed in a round is determined based on the symbol (lottery result) corresponding to the first game round for the first start opening. For example, depending on whether the lottery result corresponding to the first game round for the first starting opening is a guaranteed variable jackpot or a regular jackpot, the first gaming round for the first starting opening starts and then ends. A configuration may be adopted in which the performance (or the method of setting the performance) performed in the second starting opening game round executed during the period up to the start (or the method of setting the performance) is different. Even in this case, it is possible to create a sense of anticipation for the first starting opening game round by using the effects performed during the second starting opening gaming round.

B6-10. Modification 10:
In the above embodiment, a configuration is adopted in which a benefit is given to the player in the form of a special bonus process during the period in which the first starting slot game round in which the player wins the jackpot is being executed. Other configurations may be adopted as long as they provide benefits to the player during the period in which the current game round is being executed. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which the low-frequency support mode is switched to the high-frequency support mode and a benefit is provided to the player during the execution of the first starting opening game round in which a jackpot is won. In addition, the pachinko machine in this embodiment is a so-called simultaneous variable pachinko machine in which the game round for the first starting opening and the game round for the second starting opening are executed in parallel; A pachinko machine in which the game round and the game round for the second starting opening are executed exclusively may be adopted. In this case, during the execution of the game for the first starting hole where the jackpot has been won, the low-frequency support mode switches to the high-frequency support mode, making it easier for game balls to enter the second starting hole, and as a bonus. A configuration may be adopted in which a prize ball is paid out when a game ball enters the second starting port.

B6-11. Modification example 11:
In the embodiment described above, elapsed time information that is information regarding the elapsed time from the start of the first starting opening game round to a predetermined timing, or information regarding the remaining time of the first starting opening gaming round (remaining time RT ), and based on the elapsed time information, produce a performance corresponding to the second starting opening game round that is executed during the period in which the first starting opening gaming round, which is the target of the acquisition of the elapsed time information, is being executed. Other configurations may be adopted as long as the configuration sets . For example, based on the remaining time of the first starting opening game, information corresponding to the remaining time in the second starting opening gaming session that is executed during the period in which the first starting opening gaming session is being executed is displayed. Alternatively, a configuration may be adopted in which an effect indicating that more time remains as the remaining time than the actual remaining time of the first starting slot game is executed based on the actual remaining time. Even in this case, for a player who has recognized the effect corresponding to the executed game round for the second starting opening, the player will be informed of the elapsed time since the game round for the first starting opening was executed and the performance for the first starting opening. It is possible to make the player guess the remaining time until the end of the game round and indirectly give a feeling of anticipation for the game round for the first starting opening through the performance corresponding to the game round for the second starting opening.

B6-12. Modification example 12:
In the above embodiment, during the period when the special bonus process is being executed, the fluctuation of the symbol of the first starting opening game round that has won a jackpot is replaced by a specific small winning winning in the second starting opening gaming round. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the system is stopped when the system is activated. For example, a configuration is adopted in which two types of small wins, a first small win and a second small win, are set in the second starting opening win/fail table (see FIG. 87). Then, during the period when the special bonus process is being executed, that is, while the symbols of the first starting opening gaming round winning the jackpot are changing, the second starting opening gaming round is executed, and the lottery result is changed to the first opening opening gaming round. In the case of a 2-small win, the fluctuation of the game times for the first starting opening does not stop and continues to fluctuate, as in the above embodiment. On the other hand, if the second starting opening game round is executed while the symbols of the first starting opening game round winning the jackpot are changing, and the lottery result is the first small winning, then the second At the timing when the fluctuation of the symbols of the game round for the starting opening stops, the fluctuation of the symbols of the gaming round for the first starting opening is also stopped. At this time, the symbols of the game round for the first starting opening are stopped at a symbol indicating a loss. That is, the game round for the first starting opening ends, and the special bonus process ends. Also, at this time, since the symbols of the game round for the first starting opening stop at the symbols indicating a miss, the opening/closing execution mode is not executed after the gaming round for the first starting opening is completed, and the opening/closing execution mode is not executed as a special bonus process. The support mode after the end of the game for one starting opening also becomes the low-frequency support mode.

In other words, by adopting such a configuration, during the period when the special bonus process is being executed, that is, during the period when the special bonus process is being executed, in other words, the game for the second starting opening when the symbols of the gaming round for the first starting opening where the jackpot has been won is changing. If the result of the lottery is the first small win, the privilege given to the player will be reduced compared to the case where the lottery result is not the first small win. Therefore, during the period when the special bonus processing is being executed, that is, even when the symbols of the first starting opening game round where the jackpot has been won are changing, the player does not feel a sense of urgency or anticipation. It is possible to increase the interest of the game.

In addition, in this modification, similarly to the above embodiment, during the period when the special bonus process is being executed, that is, during the second start when the symbols of the game round for the first start opening that have won the jackpot are changing. It is possible to adopt a configuration in which the lottery result of the oral game round does not become a jackpot.

B6-13. Modification example 13:
In the above embodiment, if the game round for the second starting opening is executed during the fluctuation of the gaming round for the first starting opening that has won the jackpot, the gaming round for the second starting opening has won the jackpot. Even though it is set to stop with a symbol indicating that you have not won a jackpot if you have won a small jackpot, if you have won a small jackpot, a symbol that indicates that you have won a small jackpot will appear. It was configured to stop, but only if you have won a specific small win, it will stop with a symbol indicating that you have won that small win, and even if you have won another small win, it will not be a small win. A configuration may be adopted in which the game is set to stop at a symbol indicating that the game has not been won.

B6-14. Modification example 14:
In the above embodiment, when a special probability variable jackpot is won in the first winning opening game round, and a jackpot is won in the first starting opening gaming round, that is, the special bonus process is executed. In this case, a configuration is adopted in which the display area in which the first liquid crystal symbol and the second liquid crystal symbol are displayed is switched, but the present invention is not limited to such a configuration, and other configurations may be adopted. For example, when a game round in which a jackpot is won in the high probability mode is executed, a configuration may be adopted in which the display area in which the first liquid crystal symbol and the second liquid crystal symbol are displayed are switched, or A configuration may be adopted in which when a game round in which a jackpot is won in the frequency support mode is executed, the display area in which the first liquid crystal symbol and the second liquid crystal symbol are displayed is switched. In addition, a display in which the first liquid crystal symbol and the second liquid crystal symbol are displayed when a game round in which a jackpot is won while a specific small win has been won in the previous game round is executed. A configuration in which the areas are switched may also be adopted. In addition, the objects of the symbols whose display areas are switched are not limited to the first liquid crystal symbols and the second liquid crystal symbols, but also include the first liquid crystal symbols and the symbols for the electric prize opening lottery, and the second liquid crystal symbols and the electric prizes. It may be a symbol for an open lottery. Even in this case, by making the player recognize whether or not the display area has been replaced, it is possible to make the player make various guesses and give the player a sense of anticipation.

In addition, regardless of the jackpot type in the first starting slot game round where the jackpot was won, if a jackpot is won in each first starting slot game round, the main A configuration may be adopted in which the effect images displayed in the display area MA and the sub-display area SA are replaced, and even if the jackpot has not been won, for example, in a game round in which a reach occurs, the relevant image may be replaced. A configuration may be adopted in which the effect images displayed in the main display area MA and the sub display area SA are replaced at the start of a game round. Further, these configurations may be combined. In combination, it is possible to encourage the player who has recognized the exchange of the effect images displayed in the main display area MA and the sub-display area SA to make various guesses in the game round that has started, giving him a sense of anticipation.

B6-15. Modification example 15:
In the above embodiment, during the period in which the special bonus process is executed, the upper limit of the amount of benefits to be given as a benefit, that is, the number of times that the game for the second starting opening that can win a small win can be executed. was configured to be determined based on the length of the variation time of the first starting opening game session corresponding to the special bonus processing, but the upper limit of the amount of the benefit is determined based on the variation time of the gaming session that satisfies specific conditions. Other configurations may be adopted as long as they are determined based on the length of time. For example, the upper limit of the number of game balls that can enter the second starting port during the execution of the first starting port game is determined based on the length of the fluctuation time of the first starting port game. A configuration may also be adopted. Even in this case, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation as the end of the game round approaches, and a sense of impatience regarding the end time of the game round, thereby making the player feel It can add modulation to emotions.

B6-16. Modification example 16:
In the above embodiment, a configuration is adopted in which the high-frequency support mode flag is turned from ON to OFF at the start of the game round for the first starting opening in which the jackpot has been won. A configuration may be adopted in which a fall lottery is executed before a winning lottery is executed. Here, the falling lottery is a lottery for determining whether to enter the low probability mode when the lottery mode is the high probability mode. In this modification, the falling lottery is executed before the winning lottery in the game round. If the game round has already been played 100 times or more in the high-frequency support mode, if you win the fall lottery in the game round for the first starting opening, the lottery mode will change from the high probability mode at the start of the game round. Along with the transition to the low probability mode, the high frequency support mode flag changes from ON to OFF.

If such a configuration is adopted, if a specific probability variable jackpot is won in the first game for the first starting opening that is executed first, and then a jackpot is won in the first gaming session for the first starting opening, a special bonus process will be executed. In a state in which the game cycle is already executed in the high-frequency support mode 100 times or more, the support mode changes from the high-frequency support mode to the low-frequency mode at the same time as the first starting opening game cycle is started. If the player enters the support mode, the player may be asked whether the support mode has shifted from the high-frequency support mode to the low-frequency support mode due to winning a jackpot and starting special bonus processing. It is possible to make the player speculate whether the support mode has changed from high-frequency support mode to low-frequency support mode due to the transition from high-probability mode to low-probability mode after winning the lottery, giving the player a great sense of urgency. This can increase the interest of the game.

B6-17. Modification example 17:
In the above embodiment, when a jackpot is won in the game round for the first starting opening, in that gaming round, an effect that suggests information about the type of jackpot in the gaming round for the first starting opening where the jackpot was won earlier is provided. May be executed. That is, the performance to be executed in the first starting slot game round in which the jackpot was won is determined based on the type of jackpot in the first starting opening gaming round in which the jackpot was won before the first starting opening gaming round. do.

For example, if a jackpot is won in the first starting slot game round, an effect is performed that suggests that the type of jackpot in the first starting slot game round where the jackpot was won the previous time was a specific probability variable jackpot. In this case, it is possible to make the player aware that the game round for the first starting opening that is currently being executed is a game round for which special bonus processing is to be executed, giving the player a sense of anticipation. be able to. In addition, if the type of jackpot in the game round for the first starting opening in which the jackpot was won earlier was a specific probability variable jackpot, then in the gaming round for the first starting opening in which the jackpot was later won, the jackpot was won first. An effect may be performed that allows the player to guess whether the type of jackpot in the first starting opening game round was a specific probability variable jackpot or a normal jackpot. By executing such an effect, the player is made to guess whether or not the game round for the first starting opening currently being executed is the game round for which the special bonus process is to be executed. This can give players a sense of anticipation and urgency.

B6-18. Modification example 18:
In the embodiment described above, a configuration is adopted in which the setting method of the variable time of the game round for the second start opening is switched at the start of the special bonus process. Specifically, the process is transferred from the high-accuracy, high-frequency fluctuation time information acquisition process (FIG. 104: S21305) to the high-accuracy, low-frequency time fluctuation time acquisition process (FIG. 104: S21306), which is executed as a special bonus process. The average value of the fluctuation time set for the game time for the second starting hole during the period in which the game time for the first starting hole is being executed is However, in addition, the game times for the second starting hole during the period in which the game times for the first starting hole, which are executed as special bonus processing, are being executed. A configuration having multiple types of methods for setting the fluctuation time may be adopted.

Specifically, in the high-accuracy, low-frequency, time-variable time acquisition process (see FIG. 107), a plurality of types of high-accuracy, low-frequency, small-win variation time tables are provided that are selected in the event of a small win. Each of the high-accuracy, low-frequency, small-win variation time tables has a different average value of the variation time set for the second starting opening game time. For example, it is provided with a first high-accuracy, low-frequency small-win variation time table, a second high-accuracy, low-frequency, small-win variation time table, and a third high-precision, low-frequency small-win variation time table. The average value of the fluctuation time set for the second starting opening game time is shorter in the first high-accuracy, low-frequency small-win variation time table than in the second high-accuracy, low-frequency small-win variation time table, The second high-accuracy, low-frequency, small-win variation time table has a shorter average value of the variation time set in the second starting slot game time than the third, high-probability, low-frequency, small-win variation time table. If the result of the winning lottery in the game round for the second starting opening during the period in which the gaming round for the first starting opening is being executed as a special bonus process is a small win, then The variable time table for setting the variable time in the game round for the 2nd starting opening includes the jackpot type and variable time of the gaming round for the 1st starting opening that corresponds to the special bonus process, etc. The determination is made based on predetermined parameters (jackpot type counter C2, fluctuation type counter CS) acquired in .

For example, if the jackpot type of the game round for the first starting opening executed as the special bonus process is a 10R probability variable jackpot, the gaming round for the first starting opening executed as the special bonus process is executed. When the result of the winning lottery in the game round for the second starting opening in the period is a small win, the fluctuation time of the second starting opening gaming round is based on the first high probability low frequency fluctuation time table for small winning. decide. In addition, if the jackpot type of the game round for the first starting opening executed as the special bonus process is a 10R specific probability variable jackpot, the gaming round for the first starting opening executed as the special bonus process is executed. When the result of the winning lottery in the game round for the second starting opening in the period is a small win, the fluctuation time of the second starting opening gaming round is based on the second high probability low frequency fluctuation time table for small winning. decide. Furthermore, if the jackpot type of the game round for the first starting opening executed as the special bonus process is 8R normal jackpot, the period during which the gaming round for the first starting opening executed as the special bonus process is being executed. When the result of the winning lottery in the game round for the second starting opening is a small win, the fluctuation time of the game round for the second starting opening is determined based on the third high accuracy low frequency small winning fluctuation time table. do.

If such a configuration is adopted, depending on the type of variable time table for high-accuracy and low-frequency small winnings that is selected, the upper limit of the number of times the game for the second starting opening can be executed during the period in which the special bonus process is being executed. will be different. Therefore, in addition to the feeling of anticipation regarding the start of the special bonus processing, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation regarding the method of setting the variable time of the game round for the second start opening during the special bonus processing period. can.

B6-19. Modification example 19:
In the embodiment described above, at the start of the special bonus process, the high-frequency support mode flag is turned from ON to OFF, and the support mode shifts from the high-frequency support mode to the low-frequency support mode. Electric accessory during the period from the time when the high-frequency support mode flag turns from ON to OFF to the time when the electric accessory 44a operates in the low-frequency support mode (hereinafter also referred to as support mode transition period) Various modes can be adopted as the mode of operation of 44a. For example, in the case of the above embodiment, the electric accessory 44a performs the opening/closing operation three times when the electric accessory is won once during the high-frequency support mode. The number of times the electric accessory 44a is opened/closed for one electric role opening win is determined by the value of the second round counter area RC2 (see FIG. 115: electric role opening/closing process). That is, in the embodiment described above, if the player wins the power lottery during the high-frequency support mode, the value "3" is set in the second round counter area RC2.

In the case of the processing mode of the electric accessory opening/closing process (FIG. 115) of the above embodiment, suppose that the high frequency support mode flag is turned OFF while the opening operation of the electric accessory 44a is being executed three times in the high frequency support mode. In this case, for the remaining opening/closing times, the opening/closing process is executed during the opening time of the electric accessory 44a when the low frequency support mode is set. For example, if you win the electric role opening lottery during the high frequency support mode and the high frequency support mode flag turns OFF when the electric role accessory 44a opens and closes once, the remaining number of openings (hereinafter referred to as The opening operation of the electric accessory 44a for two times (also referred to as the remaining number of openings) is performed during the opening time of the electric accessory 44a when the low-frequency support mode is set. Hereinafter, such an operation mode of the electric accessory 44a during the support mode transition period will also be referred to as a first operation mode. That is, when the high frequency support mode flag is turned OFF, if the remaining number of openings is not "0", the opening time of the electric accessory 44a is set by the low frequency support mode for the number of openings remaining. It is executed during the opening time of the electric accessory 44a when the electric accessory 44a is opened. In this case, the operation of the electric accessory 44a is suddenly changed at the same time as or immediately after the high-frequency support mode flag is turned off. Therefore, the player who recognizes that the operation of the electric accessory 44a has suddenly changed, recognizes that the special bonus process has started, and immediately starts hitting right.

However, this is not limited to the configuration of the above embodiment. For example, if the remaining number of releases, that is, the value of the second round counter area RC2 is not "0" at the time the high-frequency support mode flag changes from ON to OFF, the remaining number of releases You may adopt the structure which performs the operation|movement of the electric accessory 44a in the opening time when high frequency support mode is set. Hereinafter, such an operation mode of the electric accessory 44a during the support mode transition period will also be referred to as a second operation mode. By doing this, even if the high-frequency support mode flag changes from ON to OFF, the operation of the electric accessory 44a will not suddenly change, and the player will be informed that the high-frequency support mode flag changes from ON to OFF. It is possible to delay the time it takes for the player to recognize that the special bonus process has started, and as a result, it is possible to delay the time it takes for the player to recognize that the special bonus process has started. Therefore, it is possible to delay the time from the start of the special bonus process until the player starts hitting right. As a result, the amount of benefits that the player can obtain through special bonus processing can be suppressed (reduced). Although the amount of benefits that the player can obtain due to the special bonus process is reduced, even after the start of the special bonus process, the opening/closing process for the remaining number of electric accessories 44a is performed during the open time in the high-frequency support mode. Therefore, by entering the game ball into the first starting port 44, the player can obtain a benefit.

Furthermore, the configuration of the above embodiment and the configuration shown in this modification may be combined. That is, the electric accessory 44a may operate in the first operation mode or in the second operation mode during the support mode transition period. For example, based on the jackpot type of the first starting slot game corresponding to the special bonus process, the electric accessory 44a is operated in the first operation mode or in the second operation mode during the support mode transition period. You may decide whether to operate it. More specifically, if the jackpot type of the first starting opening game round corresponding to the special bonus process is a 10R certain probability variable jackpot or a 10R specific probability variable jackpot, during the support mode transition period, the electric accessory 44a is If the jackpot type of the game round for the first start opening corresponding to the special bonus process is 8R normal jackpot when the electric accessory 44a is operated in the first operation mode, the electric accessory 44a is operated in the second operation mode during the support mode transition period. You may adopt the structure which operates. In this way, by controlling the operation mode of the electric accessory 44a during the support mode transition period, it is possible to control the amount of benefits that the player can acquire during the special bonus processing period.

In addition, as the operation mode of the electric accessory 44a during the support mode transition period, in addition to the first operation mode and the second operation mode, a further different operation mode may be executable. Then, for example, based on the jackpot type of the first start opening game corresponding to the special bonus process, the electric accessory 44a is operated in the first operation mode or in the second operation mode during the support mode transition period. A configuration may be adopted in which it is determined whether to operate or to operate in another operation mode. In this way, by controlling the operation mode of the electric accessory 44a during the support mode transition period, it is possible to control the amount of benefits that the player can acquire during the special bonus processing period. Furthermore, it is possible to make the player who recognizes the electric accessory 44a make various guesses during the support mode transition period, giving the player a sense of expectation.

C. Application to other configurations:
Other types of pachinko machines different from the above embodiments, for example, pachinko machines in which an electric accessory is released a predetermined number of times when a game ball enters a specific area of a special device, or a pachinko machine that releases a game ball a predetermined number of times when a game ball enters a specific area of a special device. The present invention can also be applied to game machines such as pachinko machines that generate jackpots when rights are generated, pachinko machines equipped with other accessories, arranged ball machines, and mahjong balls.

Also, non-pinball type game machines, for example, are equipped with multiple reels with multiple types of symbols attached in the circumferential direction, and rotation of the reels is started by inserting a medal and operating a start lever, and a stop switch is operated. After the reels have stopped after a predetermined period of time has elapsed, if a specific symbol or a specific symbol combination is established on the active line that can be seen from the display window, the player is given benefits such as a payout of medals, etc. The present invention can also be applied to slot machines.

In addition, the game machine main body, which is supported by the outer frame in an openable and closable manner, is equipped with a storage section and a retrieval device, and the start lever is operated after a predetermined number of game balls stored in the storage section are retrieved by the retrieval device. The present invention can also be applied to a gaming machine that is a combination of a pachinko machine and a slot machine, which starts the rotation of the reels by doing so.

Moreover, some of the functions realized by software in the above embodiments may be realized by hardware, or some of the functions realized by hardware may be realized by software.

D. Regarding inventions extracted from each of the above embodiments, etc.:
Hereinafter, the features of the invention group extracted from each of the embodiments described above will be explained, showing effects etc. as necessary. Note that, in the following, for ease of understanding, configurations corresponding to each of the above embodiments are appropriately indicated in parentheses, etc., but the present invention is not limited to the specific configurations shown in parentheses.

<Characteristics Group A>
The feature group A is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment.

[Feature A1]
an information acquisition means for acquiring special information upon satisfaction of acquisition conditions;
acquired information storage means for storing the acquired special information;
determining means for determining whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means satisfies a predetermined condition;
A gaming machine comprising:
When a game cycle is defined as the time when the game cycle operation for notifying the result of the determination by the determination means is started and the game cycle operation is finished,
comprising a changing means (a function of executing a point awarding effect) for changing a predetermined amount (accumulated points in the first embodiment) in the game round,
The changing means is
A gaming machine characterized by comprising a change control means for changing the predetermined amount (accumulated points) so as to reach a preset threshold value (10 points).

According to feature A1, since the change control means is provided to change the predetermined amount so that it reaches a preset threshold value in a game round, the player can control the change in the predetermined amount until the predetermined amount reaches the threshold value. can attract attention. Further, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation regarding the game after the predetermined amount reaches the threshold value.

[Feature A2]
The gaming machine according to feature A1,
Comprising a specific process execution means for executing a specific process (button press effect in the first embodiment),
The specific processing execution means is
It is easier to perform the specific processing in the game round when the special information corresponding to the game round satisfies the predetermined condition than when the special information corresponding to the game round does not satisfy the predetermined condition. The probability of doing so is high;
The change control means includes:
When the specific processing execution means executes the specific processing, the predetermined amount (accumulated points) reaches the threshold (10 points) before the specific processing (button press effect) is executed. A gaming machine characterized by comprising means for changing the game so that

According to feature A2, specific processing is executed in a game round when the special information corresponding to the game round satisfies a predetermined condition than when the special information corresponding to the game round does not satisfy the predetermined condition. Since the probability is high, executing a specific process can give the player a high sense of expectation. In addition, when the specific processing execution means executes a specific process, the change control unit changes the predetermined amount so as to reach a preset threshold before the specific process is executed. A sense of anticipation can be given to the player each time the predetermined amount is changed. Therefore, by changing the predetermined amount and executing a specific process, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation in stages.

[Feature A3]
The gaming machine according to feature A1 or feature A2,
It is characterized by comprising a reset means that executes a reset process (point reset process in the first embodiment) for returning the predetermined amount that has changed in a game round to a preset initial value, triggered by the end of the game round. A gaming machine that does.

According to feature A3, since the reset means is provided for executing a reset process to return a predetermined amount that has changed in a game round to a preset initial value using the end of the game round as a trigger, the amount that has changed during the game round is reset until the end of the game round. It is possible to give the player a sense of expectation so that the predetermined amount reaches a preset threshold. Furthermore, it is possible to make the player who recognizes that the game round has started and that the predetermined amount has started changing, aware of when the game round will end, and to pay attention to the manner in which the predetermined amount changes.

[Feature A4]
The gaming machine according to feature A3,
The reset means is
In the first case (when the game round is not a carryover game round), the predetermined amount (accumulated points) that changed during the game round is returned to the initial value upon the end of the game round, and in the second case (If the game round is a carryover game round), there is a means for not returning the predetermined amount (accumulated points) that changed during the game round to the initial value upon the end of the game round (carrying over the accumulated points). A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to feature A4, the predetermined amount may or may not return to the initial value at the end of the game, so even if the predetermined amount does not reach the threshold in the game. , the predetermined amount will not return to the initial value at the end of the game, but will be maintained until the next game, giving the player a sense of expectation that the predetermined amount may reach the threshold value in the next game. I can do it. In other words, it is possible to give the player a sense of anticipation even at the end of the game round.

[Feature A5]
The gaming machine according to feature A3 or feature A4,
The reset means is
Reset execution that determines whether or not to execute the reset process with the end of the first game round as a trigger, based on the special information corresponding to the second game round that is executed after the first game round. A gaming machine characterized by comprising a control means.

According to feature A5, based on the special information corresponding to the second game round to be executed after the first game round, it is determined whether or not to execute the reset process with the end of the first game round as a trigger. Therefore, the manner in which the predetermined amount is returned to the initial value or maintained can be made to be relevant over a plurality of game rounds. In other words, for a player who has recognized a change in a predetermined amount in the first game round, not only is the player given a sense of anticipation for the first game round, but also a sense of expectation for the second game round is given. It is possible to create new gameplay.

[Feature A6]
The gaming machine according to any one of Features A3 to A5,
Reset processing execution suggestion means (stage) that indicates, in the predetermined game round, whether or not the reset means returns the predetermined amount that has changed in the predetermined game round to the initial value with the end of the predetermined game round as a trigger; A gaming machine characterized by having a function of executing display control processing.

According to feature A6, the reset means indicates whether or not to return the predetermined amount that changed in a predetermined game round to the initial value using the end of the predetermined game round as a trigger, so that the reset is not performed. When the player recognizes that the predetermined amount will not return to the initial value upon the end of the game round, the predetermined amount that did not return to the initial value will be set to the threshold value in the next game round. It is possible to give a sense of expectation that there is a possibility of reaching the goal.

<Characteristics Group B>
Feature B group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment.

[Feature B1]
an information acquisition means for acquiring special information upon satisfaction of acquisition conditions;
acquired information storage means for storing the acquired special information;
determining means for determining whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means satisfies a predetermined condition;
A gaming machine comprising:
When a game cycle is defined as the time when the game cycle operation for notifying the result of the determination by the determination means is started and the game cycle operation is finished,
A changing means (a function of executing a point awarding effect) for changing a predetermined amount (accumulated points in the first embodiment) in the game round;
Specific processing execution means that executes a specific process (button press effect in the first embodiment) when the predetermined amount reaches a preset threshold value as a result of the change by the changing unit;
a reset unit that executes a reset process (point reset process in the first embodiment) that returns the predetermined amount changed by the change unit to a preset initial value;
Equipped with
The reset means is
In the first case (when the game round is not a carryover game round), the predetermined amount that changed during the game round is returned to the initial value with the end of the game round as an opportunity, and in the second case (when the game round is In the case of a carryover game round), a gaming machine comprising means for not returning the predetermined amount changed in the game round to the initial value upon completion of the game round.

According to feature B1, the predetermined amount may or may not return to its initial value at the end of the game round, so the player is made to pay attention to the predetermined amount even at the end of the game round. be able to. In addition, even if the predetermined amount does not reach the threshold value in a game round, the predetermined amount does not return to the initial value at the end of the game round and is maintained until the next game round, and the predetermined amount does not return to the initial value at the end of the game round. It is possible to give the player a sense of expectation that the amount may reach the threshold value. In other words, it is possible to give the player a sense of anticipation even at the end of the game round.

[Feature B2]
The gaming machine according to feature B1,
The reset means is
Reset execution that determines whether or not to execute the reset process with the end of the first game round as a trigger, based on the special information corresponding to the second game round that is executed after the first game round. Equipped with a control means (effect information setting process in the first embodiment)
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to feature B2, based on the special information corresponding to the second game round that is executed after the first game round, it is determined whether or not to execute the reset process with the end of the first game round as a trigger. Therefore, the manner in which the predetermined amount changes can be made to be relevant over a plurality of game rounds. In other words, for a player who has recognized a change in a predetermined amount in the first game round, not only is the player given a sense of anticipation for the first game round, but also a sense of expectation for the second game round is given. It is possible to create new gameplay.

[Feature B3]
The gaming machine according to feature B1 or feature B2,
When the predetermined game round in which the predetermined amount (accumulated points) reaches the threshold value (10 points) is defined as the third game round,
The specific processing execution means is
Based on the special information corresponding to the fourth game round to be executed after the third game round, it is determined whether the specific process (button press effect) is executed in the third game round or not. Includes a specific process execution control means that determines whether to execute in a game round that is executed after the game round (effect information setting process in the first embodiment)
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to feature B3, based on the special information corresponding to the fourth game round to be executed after the third game round, a specific process is executed in the third game round or after the third game round. Since it is determined whether to execute a particular process in the game round, it is possible to give relevance over a plurality of game rounds regarding the timing of executing a specific process. Therefore, based on the timing at which a specific process is executed, the player is given various guesses regarding the special information corresponding to the third game round and the special information corresponding to the game round executed after the third game round. can be made to For example, even if a specific process is not executed in a game round, there is a possibility that the specific process will not be executed in the next game round because the specific process will be executed in the next game round. It is possible to make the players make guesses, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Feature B4]
The gaming machine according to any one of Features B1 to B3,
A gaming machine characterized in that the specific processing execution means includes means for executing a specific effect (button press effect) as the specific process.

According to feature B4, since a specific effect is executed as the specific process, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the effect executed during the execution of the game round. Further, by executing a specific performance, a sense of expectation can be given to the player.

[Feature B5]
The gaming machine according to any one of Features B1 to B4,
Equipped with operation acceptance means (performance operation button) that accepts input operations from the player,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the specific process includes a process of starting execution of a preset process (a performance executed after pressing a button) triggered by acceptance of the input operation.

According to feature B5, since the specific process includes a process that starts execution of a preset process triggered by acceptance of an input operation, the timing at which the execution of the specific process gives the player a sense of anticipation Furthermore, by having the player actively participate in the game through input operations, it is possible to draw even more attention to the game and further heighten the player's sense of expectation.

[Feature B6]
The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B5,
A gaming machine comprising a predetermined amount display means (a function of executing point accumulation processing/a function of displaying an image of a pearl on a stage) for displaying a display corresponding to the predetermined amount (accumulated points).

According to feature B6, since the predetermined amount display means for displaying a display corresponding to the predetermined amount is provided, it is possible to make the player always aware of the predetermined amount and draw attention to the game.

[Feature B7]
The gaming machine according to any one of Features B1 to B6,
Reset processing execution suggestion means is provided for indicating in the predetermined game round whether or not the reset means should return the predetermined amount that has changed in the predetermined game round to the initial value upon completion of the predetermined game round. (Production information setting process in the first embodiment)
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to feature B7, the reset means indicates whether or not to return the predetermined amount that changed in a predetermined game round to the initial value with the end of the predetermined game round as a trigger, so that the reset is not performed. When the player recognizes that the predetermined amount will not return to the initial value upon the end of the game round, the predetermined amount that did not return to the initial value will be set to the threshold value in the next game round. It is possible to give a sense of expectation that there is a possibility of reaching the goal.

<Feature C group>
The feature C group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment.

[Feature C1]
an information acquisition means for acquiring special information upon satisfaction of acquisition conditions;
acquired information storage means for storing the acquired special information;
determining means for determining whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means satisfies a predetermined condition;
A gaming machine comprising:
When a game cycle is defined as the time when the game cycle operation for notifying the result of the determination by the determination means is started and the game cycle operation is finished,
A changing means (a function of executing a point awarding effect) for changing a predetermined amount (accumulated points in the first embodiment) in the game round;
a specific process execution means for executing a specific process (button press effect in the first embodiment);
Equipped with
The changing means is
When the specific processing execution means executes the specific processing (button press effect), the predetermined amount is changed to reach a preset threshold before the specific processing is executed. A gaming machine characterized by comprising a change control means.

According to feature C1, when the specific process execution unit executes a specific process, the changing unit changes the predetermined amount so as to reach a preset threshold before the specific process is executed. Therefore, it is possible to give the player a sense of anticipation each time the changing means changes the predetermined amount.

[Feature C2]
The gaming machine according to feature C1,
The changing means includes change amount determining means for determining the predetermined amount to be changed in the first game round based on special information corresponding to a second game round to be executed after the first game round. Prepare (production information setting process in the first embodiment)
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to feature C2, the predetermined amount to be changed in the first game round is determined based on the special information corresponding to the second game round that is executed after the first game round, so that in each game round The predetermined amount that changes can be made to be relevant over a plurality of games. In other words, for a player who has recognized a change in a predetermined amount in the first game round, not only is the player given a sense of anticipation for the first game round, but also a sense of expectation for the second game round is given. It is possible to create new gameplay.

[Feature C3]
The gaming machine according to feature C1 or feature C2,
The changing means includes a change timing determining means that determines the timing for changing the predetermined amount in a game round based on special information corresponding to the game round (performance information setting process and performance setting in the first embodiment). process)
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to feature C3, the timing of changing the predetermined amount in a game round is determined based on the special information corresponding to the game round, so the timing of changing the predetermined amount in a game round is determined based on the special information that determines the fluctuation time of the game round and other special information. The predetermined amount can be changed at a timing that suits the various factors to be determined.

[Feature C4]
The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C3,
comprising a reset means for executing a reset process (point reset process in the first embodiment) to return the predetermined amount that has changed in a game round to a preset initial value, triggered by the end of the game round;
The reset means is
means for determining whether or not to execute the reset process with the end of the first game round as a trigger, based on the special information corresponding to the second game round to be executed after the first game round; Prepare (production information setting process in the first embodiment)
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to feature C4, based on the special information corresponding to the second game round that is executed after the first game round, it is determined whether or not to execute the reset process with the end of the first game round as a trigger. Therefore, the manner in which the predetermined amount is returned to the initial value or maintained can be made to be relevant over a plurality of game rounds. In other words, for a player who has recognized a change in a predetermined amount in the first game round, not only is the player given a sense of anticipation for the first game round, but also a sense of expectation for the second game round is given. It is possible to create new gameplay.

[Feature C5]
The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C4,
comprising a reset means for executing a reset process to return the predetermined amount that has changed in a game round to a preset initial value, triggered by the end of the game round;
The reset means is
Based on the special information corresponding to the game round, the game machine includes means for determining whether or not to execute the reset process with the end of the game round as a trigger (performance information setting process in the first embodiment).
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to feature C5, based on the special information corresponding to the game round, it is determined whether or not to execute the reset process with the end of the game round as a trigger, so the special information that determines the fluctuation time of the game round or the like is determined based on special information corresponding to the game round. In consideration of various factors determined by other special information, it is possible to determine whether or not to return the predetermined amount changed in the relevant game round to the initial value.

[Feature C6]
The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C5,
A gaming machine characterized in that the specific processing execution means includes means for executing a specific effect (button press effect) as the specific process.

According to feature C6, since a specific effect is executed as the specific process, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the effect executed during the execution of the game round. Further, by executing a specific performance, a sense of expectation can be given to the player.

[Feature C7]
The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C6,
Equipped with operation acceptance means (performance operation button) that accepts input operations from the player,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the specific process includes an execution start process that starts execution of a preset process (effect executed after pressing a button) triggered by acceptance of the input operation.

According to feature C7, since the specific process includes a process that starts execution of a preset process triggered by acceptance of an input operation, the timing at which the execution of the specific process gives the player a sense of expectation Furthermore, by having the player actively participate in the game through input operations, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the game even more, and to further heighten the player's sense of expectation.

<Characteristic group D>
The feature D group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment.

[Feature D1]
an information acquisition means for acquiring special information upon satisfaction of acquisition conditions;
acquired information storage means for storing the acquired special information;
determining means for determining whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means satisfies a predetermined condition;
A gaming machine comprising:
When a game cycle is defined as the time when the game cycle operation for notifying the result of the determination by the determination means is started and the game cycle operation is finished,
A changing means (a function of executing a point awarding effect) for changing a predetermined amount (accumulated points in the first embodiment) in the game round;
a specific process execution unit that executes a specific process (button press effect) when the predetermined amount (accumulated points) reaches a preset threshold (10 points) by changing the change unit;
When the predetermined amount reaches the threshold value, a time suggestion means (point filling control) that executes a time suggestion process (timer effect) that indicates the time until the specific process (button press effect) is executed. functions) and
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to feature D1, when a predetermined amount reaches a threshold value, the device includes a time suggestion means that executes a time suggestion process that suggests a time until a specific process is executed, so that the specific process is executed. During the period from when the suggested time is suggested until the specific process is executed, it is possible to continuously give the player a sense of expectation regarding the specific process to be executed after the suggested time has passed. can. Moreover, since the time suggestion means suggests that the time until a specific process is executed becomes shorter as time passes, it is possible to increase the player's sense of expectation as time passes.

[Feature D2]
The gaming machine according to feature D1,
When the game time in which the predetermined amount reaches the threshold value is defined as the first game time,
The time suggestion means (a function of executing point filling control processing) includes:
In the first case, starting execution of the time suggestion process (timer effect) in the first game round,
In the second case, execution of the time suggestion process (timer effect) is not started in the first game round, and in a second game round that is a game round to be executed after the first game round. A gaming machine comprising means for starting execution of the time suggestion process.

According to feature D2, when the predetermined amount reaches the threshold value in the first game round, execution of the time suggestion process can be started in the first game round or executed after the first game round. In some cases, the time suggestion process is executed in the second game round, which is the second game round, so by recognizing whether or not the time suggestion process is executed in the game round when the predetermined amount reaches the threshold value, It is possible to give the player the pleasure of guessing when a specific process will be executed.

[Feature D3]
The gaming machine according to feature D2,
The first case is a case where the specific processing execution means executes the specific processing (button press effect) in the first game round,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the second case is a case where the specific processing execution means executes the specific processing (button press effect) in a game round that is executed after the first game round.

According to feature D3, when the predetermined amount reaches the threshold value and the execution of the time suggestion process is started in the first game round, the By making the player aware that a specific process will be executed, it is possible to give the player a sense of anticipation for the first game round. In addition, if the predetermined amount reaches the threshold value and the execution of the time suggestion process is not started in the first game round, the player is not allowed to play the game after the first game round. It is possible to make the player aware that a specific process will be executed in the game round, and give the player a sense of anticipation for the subsequent game round.

[Feature D4]
The gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D3,
When the game round in which the predetermined amount reaches the threshold value is defined as the third game round,
The specific processing execution means is
Based on the special information corresponding to a fourth game round to be executed after the third game round, the specific process is executed in the third game round or after the third game round. A gaming machine characterized by comprising: a specific processing execution control means for determining whether to execute a specific processing in a game round.

According to feature D4, it is possible to give relevance over a plurality of game rounds regarding the timing of executing a specific process. Therefore, based on the timing of execution of the time suggestion process that suggests the time until a specific process is executed, it is possible to make the player guess which game round he or she can expect to play, thereby creating a new gameplay experience. can be created.

[Feature D5]
The gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D4,
A gaming machine characterized in that the specific processing execution means includes means for executing a specific effect (button press effect) as the specific process.

According to feature D5, since a specific effect is executed as the specific process, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the effect executed during the execution of the game round. Further, by executing a specific performance, a sense of expectation can be given to the player.

[Feature D6]
The gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D5,
Equipped with operation acceptance means (performance operation button) that accepts input operations from the player,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the specific process includes an execution start process that starts execution of a preset process (effect executed after pressing a button) triggered by acceptance of the input operation.

According to feature D6, the specific process includes a process that starts execution of a preset process triggered by acceptance of an input operation, so the timing at which the execution of the specific process gives the player a sense of anticipation Furthermore, by having the player actively participate in the game through input operations, it is possible to draw even more attention to the game and further heighten the player's sense of expectation.

<Characteristic group E>
The feature E group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment.

[Feature E1]
an information acquisition means for acquiring special information upon satisfaction of acquisition conditions;
acquired information storage means for storing the acquired special information;
determining means for determining whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means satisfies a predetermined condition;
A gaming machine comprising:
When a game cycle is defined as the time when the game cycle operation for notifying the result of the determination by the determination means is started and the game cycle operation is finished,
a first process execution means that executes a first process (standby performance) when a specific condition is met (in the first embodiment, when 10 or more accumulated points are accumulated);
a second process execution means that executes a second process (timer effect) when the specific condition is met (when 10 or more accumulated points are accumulated);
Equipped with
If the specific conditions are met in the first game round,
The first processing execution means includes:
When the second processing execution means executes the second processing (timer effect) in a second game round executed after the first game round, the second processing execution means executes the second process (timer effect) in the first game round Executes the process (standby performance),
A gaming machine characterized in that when the second process execution means executes the second process (timer effect) in the first game round, the first process (standby effect) is not executed. .

According to feature E1, when a specific condition is satisfied in the first game round, and when the second process is executed in the second game round, after the specific condition is satisfied, A period occurs until the second process is executed. In such a case, the first processing execution means executes the first processing in the first game round, so even in the period that occurs after the specific condition is met until the second processing is executed. , it is possible to make the player aware that the second process will be executed later, and it is possible to maintain a sense of anticipation for the second process.

[Feature E2]
The gaming machine according to feature E1,
comprising a specific process execution means for executing a specific process (button press effect) when the specific condition is met (when 10 or more accumulated points are accumulated);
If the specific condition is satisfied in the first game round and the specific process (button press effect) is executed in the first game round, then the second Processing (timer performance) is executed,
If the specific condition is satisfied in the first game round and the specific process (button press effect) is executed in the second game round, then the second A gaming machine characterized in that processing (timer performance) is executed.

According to feature E2, when a specific condition is satisfied in the first game round, the player can execute the specific process by recognizing in which game round the second process will be executed. Since it is possible to predict the number of times the second process will be played, it is possible to make the player concentrate on the timing when the second process will be executed, and also to make the player aware of the execution of the second process It can give a feeling.

[Feature E3]
The gaming machine according to feature E2,
The specific processing execution means executes the specific process (button press effect) in the first gaming round or executes the specific processing (button press effect) in the second gaming round based on special information corresponding to the second gaming round. A gaming machine characterized by comprising a specific process execution control means for determining whether to execute a specific process (button press effect).

According to feature E3, a specific process is executed in the first game round or executed in the second game round based on special information corresponding to the second game round to be executed after the first game round. Since it is determined whether or not to perform a specific process, it is possible to give relevance over a plurality of game rounds regarding the timing to execute a specific process. Therefore, it is possible to have a player who recognizes the execution of the second process guess the timing at which a specific process will be executed, and also to provide special information for each game round based on the guessed timing at which the specific process will be executed. It is possible to infer whether or not satisfies a predetermined condition. Therefore, it is possible for the player to guess whether or not the special information in each game round satisfies a predetermined condition based on various factors, and it is possible to maintain the player's sense of expectation.

[Feature E4]
The gaming machine according to feature E2 or feature E3,
The second process (timer effect) is a process until the specific process (button press effect) is executed when the specific condition is met (if 10 points or more have been accumulated). A gaming machine characterized by processing that indicates time.

According to feature E4, during the period from when the execution of the second process suggests the time until the specific process is executed, to when the specific process is executed, the process is executed after the suggested time has elapsed. It is possible to give the player a sense of expectation regarding the specific processing to be performed. Furthermore, since it is suggested that the time until a specific process is executed becomes shorter as time passes, the player's sense of expectation can be increased as time passes.

[Feature E5]
The gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E4,
A gaming machine characterized in that the first process (standby performance) is a process that suggests that the second process (timer performance) is executed.

According to feature E5, since the first process is a process that suggests that the second process will be executed, the player who has recognized that the first process has been executed is notified of the second process. It is possible to create a sense of expectation regarding the execution of the process.

<Characteristic group F>
The feature F group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment.

[Feature F1]
an information acquisition means for acquiring special information upon satisfaction of acquisition conditions;
acquired information storage means for storing the acquired special information;
determining means for determining whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means satisfies a predetermined condition;
A gaming machine comprising:
When a game cycle is defined as the time when the game cycle operation for notifying the result of the determination by the determination means is started and the game cycle operation is finished,
comprising a changing means (a function of executing a point awarding effect) for changing a predetermined amount (accumulated points in the first embodiment) in the game round,
The changing means is
If the first process (the predetermined performance in the first modification of the first embodiment) is executed in the game round, the predetermined amount is There are cases where the predetermined amount is not changed, and cases where the predetermined amount is not changed.
If the second process (specific performance in the first modification of the first embodiment) is executed in the game round, after the second process of the game round is executed, the predetermined amount is A gaming machine that is characterized by constant change.

According to feature F1, when the second process is executed in a game round, the predetermined amount always changes in that game round. It is possible to give the player a sense of anticipation for the execution of the process and draw attention to the game. Furthermore, when the second process is executed, it is possible to give a feeling of exhilaration to the player who was hoping for a predetermined amount of change, and it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

[Feature F2]
The gaming machine according to feature F1,
Equipped with a specific process execution means for executing a specific process (button press effect),
The changing means is
When the specific processing execution means executes the specific processing (button press effect), the predetermined amount (accumulation points) is increased to a preset threshold (10 points) by the time the specific processing is executed. 1. A gaming machine characterized by comprising a change control means for changing the number of points so as to reach a certain point.

According to feature F2, when the specific process execution unit executes a specific process, the changing unit changes the predetermined amount so as to reach a preset threshold before the specific process is executed. Therefore, it is possible to give the player a sense of anticipation each time the changing means changes the predetermined amount. In addition, when the second process is executed, the predetermined amount always changes in that game round, so players who have recognized that the second process has been executed are asked to change the specific process. It can give a sense of expectation regarding execution.

[Feature F3]
The gaming machine according to feature F2,
The specific processing ( A gaming machine characterized by a high probability that a button press effect will be executed.

According to feature F3, by executing a specific process, it is possible to give a player a high sense of expectation. Therefore, by performing the second process, the change in the predetermined amount, and the specific process, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation in stages.

[Feature F4]
The gaming machine according to feature F3,
The first process is a predetermined effect (predetermined effect in Modification 1 of the first embodiment),
The gaming machine is characterized in that the second process is a preset specific effect (the specific effect in Modification 1 of the first embodiment).

According to feature F4, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the performance performed in the game round. When a specific performance is executed, it is possible to give the player a great sense of anticipation and elation.

[Feature F5]
The gaming machine according to any one of features F2 to F4,
Equipped with operation acceptance means (performance operation button) that accepts input operations from the player,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the specific process includes an execution start process that starts execution of a preset process (a performance executed after a button is pressed) triggered by acceptance of the input operation.

According to feature F5, since the specific process includes a process that starts execution of a preset process triggered by acceptance of an input operation, the timing at which the execution of the specific process gives the player a sense of expectation Furthermore, by having the player actively participate in the game through input operations, it is possible to draw even more attention to the game and further heighten the player's sense of expectation.

<Feature G group>
The feature G group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment.

[Feature G1]
an information acquisition means for acquiring special information upon satisfaction of acquisition conditions;
acquired information storage means for storing the acquired special information;
determining means for determining whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means satisfies a predetermined condition;
A gaming machine comprising:
When a game cycle is defined as the time when the game cycle operation for notifying the result of the determination by the determination means is started and the game cycle operation is finished,
comprising a predetermined process execution means (a function of executing a point award effect) for executing a predetermined process (awarding points in the first embodiment) in the game round;
The predetermined processing execution means includes:
When the mode of the game round is the first mode, there are cases in which the predetermined process is executed and cases in which the predetermined process is not executed in the game cycle to be executed after the game session.
A gaming machine characterized in that when the mode of the game round is the second mode, the predetermined process is always executed in the game round executed after the game round.

According to feature G1, when the mode of the game round is the second mode, the predetermined process is always executed in the game cycle executed after the game cycle, so that a player who desires the predetermined process , it is possible to give a sense of expectation regarding the mode of the game in question, and it is possible to draw attention to the game in the game in question. In addition, if the mode of the game round is the second mode, the predetermined process is executed for the player who desired to execute the predetermined process in the game session that is executed after the game session. It is possible to give a sense of anticipation and a sense of elation, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Feature G2]
The gaming machine according to feature G1,
The predetermined processing execution means includes:
comprising a changing means (a function of executing a point awarding effect) for changing a predetermined amount (accumulated points in the first embodiment) in the game round,
The changing means (the function of executing the point giving performance in the second modification of the first embodiment) is
When the aspect of the game round is the first aspect, there are cases in which the predetermined amount is changed and cases in which the predetermined amount is not changed in the game time executed after the game time.
A gaming machine characterized in that, when the mode of the game round is the second mode, the predetermined amount is always changed in the game round executed after the game round.

According to feature G2, when the mode of the game round is the second mode, the predetermined amount always changes in the game round executed after the game round, so that the game in which the predetermined amount changes is desired. It is possible to give the player a sense of expectation regarding the mode of the game in question, and it is also possible to draw attention to the game in the game in question. In addition, if the mode of the game round is the second mode, the predetermined amount will change in the game round executed after the game round for the player who desired a change in the predetermined amount. It is possible to give a sense of anticipation and a sense of elation, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Feature G3]
The gaming machine according to feature G2,
comprising a reset means for executing a reset process (point reset process in the first embodiment) to return the predetermined amount changed by the change means to a preset initial value;
The first aspect of the game round is such that the reset means returns the predetermined amount to the initial value upon completion of the game round,
The gaming machine characterized in that the second aspect of the game round is such that the reset means does not return the predetermined amount to the initial value upon completion of the game round.

According to feature G3, if the reset means does not return the predetermined amount to the initial value upon completion of the relevant game round, the predetermined amount will always change in the game round executed after the relevant game round. , it is possible to give a player who desires a change in a predetermined amount a sense of expectation that the predetermined amount will not return to its initial value upon completion of the relevant game round. Therefore, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the game even at the end of the game round. In addition, if the predetermined amount does not return to the initial value at the end of a game round, the player who desired a change in the predetermined amount will be given the predetermined amount in the game round executed after the game round. It is possible to give a sense of expectation regarding the change in the amount, and also to give a feeling of exhilaration, thereby making it possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Feature G4]
The gaming machine according to feature G2 or feature G3,
Equipped with a specific process execution means for executing a specific process (button press effect),
The changing means is
When the specific processing execution means executes the specific processing, change control means changes the predetermined amount so that it reaches a preset threshold before the specific processing is executed. A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to feature G4, when the specific process execution unit executes a specific process, the changing unit changes the predetermined amount so as to reach a preset threshold before the specific process is executed. Therefore, it is possible to give the player a sense of anticipation each time the changing means changes the predetermined amount. In addition, if the predetermined amount does not return to the initial value at the end of the game, the predetermined amount will always change in the game after the game, so the end of the game will be the trigger. When the player recognizes that the predetermined amount has not returned to the initial value, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation regarding the execution of a specific process.

[Feature G5]
The gaming machine described in feature G4,
The specific processing ( A gaming machine characterized by a high probability that a button press effect will be executed.

According to feature G5, by executing a specific process, it is possible to give a player a high sense of expectation. Therefore, depending on the presence or absence of the reset process, the change in a predetermined amount, and the execution of a specific process, expectations can be given to the player in stages.

[Feature G6]
The gaming machine according to any one of Features G3 to G5,
Reset processing execution suggestion means (stage) that indicates, in the predetermined game round, whether or not the reset means returns the predetermined amount that has changed in the predetermined game round to the initial value with the end of the predetermined game round as a trigger; A gaming machine characterized by having a function of executing display control processing.

According to feature G6, the reset means indicates whether or not to return the predetermined amount that changed in a predetermined game round to the initial value with the end of the predetermined game round as a trigger, so that the reset is not performed. For a player who has recognized that the predetermined amount will not return to its initial value upon the end of the game session, the predetermined amount will always change in the game session after the predetermined game session based on the suggestion by the processing execution suggestion means. It is possible to give a feeling of expectation that the amount will be returned to the initial value, and a feeling of expectation that there is a possibility that the predetermined amount that did not return to the initial value will reach the threshold value in a game after the predetermined game.

[Feature G7]
The gaming machine according to any one of Features G4 to G6,
Equipped with operation acceptance means (performance operation button) that accepts input operations from the player,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the specific process includes an execution start process that starts execution of a preset process (a performance executed after a button is pressed) triggered by acceptance of the input operation.

According to feature G7, the specific process includes a process that starts execution of a preset process triggered by acceptance of an input operation, so the timing at which the execution of the specific process gives the player a sense of expectation Furthermore, by having the player actively participate in the game through input operations, it is possible to draw even more attention to the game and further heighten the player's sense of expectation.

<Feature H group>
The feature H group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment.

[Feature H1]
an information acquisition means for acquiring special information upon satisfaction of acquisition conditions;
acquired information storage means for storing the acquired special information;
determining means for determining whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means satisfies a predetermined condition;
A gaming machine comprising:
When a game cycle is defined as the time when the game cycle operation for notifying the result of the determination by the determination means is started and the game cycle operation is finished,
a predetermined process execution means for executing a predetermined process in the game round;
A predetermined effect execution means for executing a predetermined effect (point awarding effect) before the predetermined process execution means executes the predetermined process;
Equipped with
The predetermined processing execution means includes:
The present invention is characterized by comprising a non-execution means for executing a non-execution process (a point awarding production in which the award points are 0) in which the predetermined process is not executed even though the predetermined production execution means has executed the predetermined production. A gaming machine that does.

According to feature H1, the predetermined process execution means includes a non-execution means that executes a non-execution process in which the predetermined process is not executed even though the predetermined effect execution means has executed the predetermined effect. It is possible to make the player who recognizes that the non-execution process is executed expect that the non-execution process will not be executed. Further, if the no-execution process is not executed, the player can feel elated, and if the no-execution process is executed, the player is disappointed. In other words, depending on whether or not the non-execution process is executed, it is possible to give tone to the player's sense of expectation and improve the interest of the game.

[Feature H2]
The gaming machine according to feature H1,
The predetermined processing execution means includes:
The predetermined process includes a changing means for changing a predetermined amount (accumulated points in the first embodiment) in the game round,
The non-execution means is
The present invention is characterized by comprising a no-change means that executes a no-change process (a point awarding performance in which the awarded points are 0) in which the predetermined amount is not changed even though the predetermined performance execution means has executed the predetermined performance. A gaming machine that does.

According to feature H2, even though the predetermined effect execution means has executed the predetermined effect, the no-change means is provided that executes no-change processing in which the predetermined amount is not changed, so that it is not possible to detect that the predetermined effect has been executed. It is possible to make the recognized player expect that no-change processing will be executed. Further, if no change processing is executed, the player can feel elated, and if no change processing is executed, the player is disappointed. In other words, depending on whether or not the no-change process is executed, it is possible to give tone to the player's expectations and improve the interest of the game.

[Feature H3]
The gaming machine according to feature H2,
comprising a reset means for executing a reset process (point reset process in the first embodiment) to return the predetermined amount that has changed in a game round to a preset initial value, triggered by the end of the game round;
An upper limit is set on the number of times the no-change means executes the no-change process (a point awarding performance in which the award points are 0) during a period from the start of a game round until the reset means executes the reset process. (Modification 3 in the first embodiment)
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to feature H3, an upper limit is set on the number of times the no-change means executes the no-change process during the period from the start of a game round until the reset means executes the reset process. A player who recognizes that the number of executions has reached the upper limit can be given a strong sense of expectation that a predetermined performance will be executed. This is because if the number of executions of the no-change process reaches the upper limit, the predetermined amount will always change when a predetermined effect is executed thereafter. Therefore, even when no-change processing is executed, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation that the number of executions will reach the upper limit. In other words, when a predetermined effect is executed, if no change processing is executed, the predetermined amount changes, giving the player a sense of elation; Even in this case, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation (a sense of expectation that the number of executions will reach the upper limit). As a result, the player's sense of expectation can be increased both in the case where the no-change process is not executed and in the case where the no-change process is executed.

[Feature H4]
The gaming machine according to feature H2 or feature H3,
Equipped with specific processing execution means for executing specific processing,
The specific processing execution means is
It is easier to perform the specific processing in the game round when the special information corresponding to the game round satisfies the predetermined condition than when the special information corresponding to the game round does not satisfy the predetermined condition. The probability of doing so is high;
The changing means is
When the specific processing execution means executes the specific processing, the device includes a change control unit that changes the predetermined amount so as to reach a preset threshold before the specific processing is executed. A gaming machine characterized by:

According to feature H4, when the specific process execution unit executes a specific process, the changing unit changes the predetermined amount so as to reach a preset threshold before the specific process is executed. Since the change control means is provided, it is possible to give a sense of anticipation to the player each time the change means changes a predetermined amount. Further, by executing a specific process, it is possible to give the player a greater sense of expectation. Therefore, it is possible to give players a sense of expectation in stages by using a predetermined effect, the presence or absence of a no-change process, the number of times the no-change process is executed, a predetermined amount of change, and the execution of a specific process. can.

[Feature H5]
The gaming machine according to feature H3 or feature H4,
The reset means is
In the first case (when the game round is not a carryover game round), the predetermined amount that changed during the game round is returned to the initial value with the end of the game round as an opportunity, and in the second case (when the game round is In the case of a carryover game round), a gaming machine comprising means for not returning the predetermined amount changed in the game round to the initial value upon completion of the game round.

According to feature H5, the predetermined amount may or may not return to the initial value upon the end of the game, so even if the predetermined amount does not reach the threshold value in the game. , the predetermined amount does not return to the initial value at the end of the game, but is maintained until the next game, and the player can expect that the predetermined amount will reach the threshold value in the next game. In other words, it is possible to give the player a sense of anticipation even at the end of the game round.

<Characteristics Group I>
Feature I group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment.

[Feature I1]
an information acquisition means for acquiring special information upon satisfaction of acquisition conditions;
acquired information storage means for storing the acquired special information;
determining means for determining whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means satisfies a predetermined condition;
A gaming machine comprising:
When a game cycle is defined as the time when the game cycle operation for notifying the result of the determination by the determination means is started and the game cycle operation is finished,
A changing means (a function of executing a point awarding effect) for changing a predetermined amount (accumulated points in the first embodiment) in the game round;
a first specific process execution unit that executes a first specific process (button press effect in the first embodiment) when the predetermined amount reaches a preset threshold as a result of the change by the changing unit; ,
a second specific process execution means that executes a second specific process (unfilled effect in modification 4 of the first embodiment) when the predetermined amount does not reach the threshold;
Equipped with
When the second specific process (unfilled effect) is executed, the amount of change (accumulation points) of the predetermined amount from the initial value before the second specific process is executed is The special information corresponding to the game round satisfies the predetermined condition when the second amount of change is larger than the first amount of change than when the first amount of change is the first amount of change. A gaming machine characterized by high expectations.

According to feature I1, even if the predetermined amount does not reach a preset threshold and the first specific process is not executed, if the second specific process is executed, the predetermined amount The larger the amount of change from the initial value, the higher the degree of expectation that the special information satisfies the predetermined condition, and it is possible to give a sense of expectation to the player. That is, if the predetermined amount does not reach a preset threshold and the first specific process is not executed, and the amount of change from the initial value of the predetermined amount is relatively large, the second specific process It is possible to give the player a sense of expectation regarding the execution of the process.

[Feature I2]
The gaming machine according to feature I1,
The first specific process (button press effect) is such that the special information corresponding to the game round satisfies the predetermined condition rather than the case where the special information corresponding to the game round does not satisfy the predetermined condition. A game machine characterized in that the probability of execution is higher when the case is the case.

According to feature I2, it is possible to give a player who has recognized that the first specific process has been executed a strong sense of expectation that the special information corresponding to the game round will satisfy a predetermined condition. can. Furthermore, since the first specific process is executed when the predetermined amount reaches the threshold value, it is possible to give the player a sense of anticipation each time the changing means changes the predetermined amount.

[Feature I3]
The gaming machine according to feature I1 or feature I2,
The content of the second specific process (unfilled effect) differs depending on the predetermined amount (accumulated points) before the second specific process is executed (as in the first embodiment). Modification example 4)
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to feature I3, the content of the process differs depending on the predetermined amount before the second specific process is executed, so no matter what the predetermined amount is, the second specific process is It is possible to draw the player's attention to the content, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Feature I4]
The gaming machine according to any one of Features I1 to I3,
After the second specific process (unfilled effect) is executed, the third specific process execution means executes a third specific process (unfilled development effect in modification 4 of the first embodiment). ,
In a game round, when the third specific process (unfilled development effect) is executed is more effective than when the first specific process (button press effect) is executed. A gaming machine characterized in that there is a high expectation that the corresponding special information satisfies the predetermined condition.

According to feature I4, the special information corresponding to the game round satisfies the predetermined condition more when the third specific process is executed than when the first specific process is executed. There are high expectations. Therefore, even if the first specific process is not executed because the predetermined amount does not reach the preset threshold, if the second specific process is executed, the player is , it is possible to give a strong sense of expectation that the third specific process will be executed. Furthermore, when the third specific process is executed, there is a higher expectation that the special information corresponding to the game round satisfies the predetermined condition than when the first specific process is executed. It is possible to give a stronger sense of anticipation to the player who recognizes that the third specific process has been executed. In summary, when the predetermined amount reaches the threshold value, the first specific process is executed, so that a sense of expectation can be given to the player, and when the predetermined amount does not reach the threshold value, the first specific process is executed. Even if the second specific process is executed, the player is given a sense of expectation that the second specific process will be executed, and furthermore, when the second specific process is executed, the third specific process is executed. It is possible to give players a strong sense of expectation regarding this. Therefore, no matter what the gaming situation is, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation.

<Feature J group>
The feature J group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment.

[Feature J1]
an information acquisition means for acquiring special information upon satisfaction of acquisition conditions;
acquired information storage means for storing the acquired special information;
determining means for determining whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means satisfies a predetermined condition;
A gaming machine comprising:
When a game cycle is defined as the time when the game cycle operation for notifying the result of the determination by the determination means is started and the game cycle operation is finished,
A game time display means for displaying a game time display that is a display indicating one game time that is on hold or in progress;
Display mode changing means for executing a display mode changing process for changing the display mode of the game times display being displayed (a function for executing a process for changing the display mode of the game times display in Modification 5 of the first embodiment); ,
a predetermined process execution means (a function to execute a point award effect) for executing a predetermined process (awarding points in the first embodiment) in the game round;
Equipped with
A gaming machine characterized in that the timing at which the display mode changing means executes the display mode changing process and the timing at which the predetermined process execution means executes the predetermined process have a temporal correlation.

According to feature J1, the player's expectations can be synergistically increased by changing the display mode of the game times display and executing the predetermined process in a manner that correlates with the timing. can.

[Feature J2]
The gaming machine according to feature J1,
The predetermined processing execution means includes:
A changing means for changing a predetermined amount (accumulated points in the first embodiment) in a game round (modification 5 in the first embodiment),
A gaming machine characterized in that the timing at which the display mode changing means executes the display mode changing process and the timing at which the changing section changes the predetermined amount have a temporal correlation.

According to feature J2, the player's sense of expectation can be synergistically increased by changing the display mode of the game times display and changing the predetermined amount in a manner that correlates with the timing. can.

[Feature J3]
The gaming machine according to feature J2,
The changing means is
A gaming machine characterized in that the display mode changing means changes the predetermined amount within a predetermined time after executing the display mode changing process.

According to feature J3, by making players who have increased their sense of expectation after recognizing that the display mode of the game times display has changed, further recognize that a predetermined amount has changed within a predetermined time, It is possible to give a stronger sense of anticipation and elation.

[Feature J4]
The gaming machine according to feature J2,
A gaming machine characterized in that the timing at which the display mode changing means executes the display mode changing process and the timing at which the changing section changes the predetermined amount are simultaneous.

According to feature J4, the player's sense of expectation can be synergistically increased by making the player recognize the change in the display mode of the game round display and the change in the predetermined amount at the same time.

[Feature J5]
The gaming machine according to feature J2,
The gaming machine characterized in that the display mode changing means executes the display mode changing process within a predetermined time after the changing means changes the predetermined amount.

According to feature J5, by making a player who has increased his or her expectations upon realizing that a predetermined amount has changed, further recognize that the display mode of the game play display has changed within a predetermined time, It is possible to give a stronger sense of anticipation and elation.

[Feature J6]
The gaming machine according to any one of Feature J2 to Feature J5,
There is a correlation between the display mode of the game times display changed by the display mode changing means and the predetermined amount of change changed by the changing means (Variation 5 of the first embodiment)
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to feature J6, the display mode changing means creates a correlation between the display mode of the game times display after being changed by the display mode changing means and the predetermined amount of change changed by the changing means. If the display mode of the game times display after being changed is a mode that meets the player's expectations, and if the amount of change in the predetermined amount changed by the changing means is large, It is possible to give an even stronger sense of expectation and superiority.

[Feature J7]
The gaming machine according to any one of Feature J2 to Feature J6,
The display mode changing means includes:
When the special information corresponding to the gaming session satisfies the predetermined condition, the display mode of the gaming session display is changed to the second display mode rather than changing the display mode of the gaming session display to the first display mode. The probability of changing the display mode is high,
When the display mode changing means changes the game round display to the first display mode, an amount of change in the predetermined amount that is changed by the changing means is a first amount of change,
When the display mode changing means changes the game times display to the second display mode, the amount of change of the predetermined amount changed by the changing means is the second amount of change,
The average value of the second amount of change is larger than the average value of the first amount of change (Variation 5 in the first embodiment)
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to feature J7, when the special information satisfies a predetermined condition, there is a high probability of changing the display mode of the game times display to the second display mode, and furthermore, the display mode changing means changes the game times display to the second display mode. When changing the display mode to the first display mode, the amount of change in the predetermined amount is often larger than when changing to the first display mode. By making the changes in timing correlated with each other, it is possible to synergistically increase the player's expectation that the special information will satisfy a predetermined condition.

<Feature K group>
The feature K group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment.

[Feature K1]
an information acquisition means for acquiring special information upon satisfaction of acquisition conditions;
acquired information storage means for storing the acquired special information;
determining means for determining whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means satisfies a predetermined condition;
A gaming machine comprising:
When a game cycle is defined as the time when the game cycle operation for notifying the result of the determination by the determination means is started and the game cycle operation is finished,
A changing means (a function of executing a point awarding effect) for changing a predetermined amount (accumulated points in the first embodiment) in the game round;
Change mode information display means for displaying change mode information that is information regarding the mode of change of the predetermined amount that has already been changed (displays an image of a pearl on stage St indicating accumulated points in modification 13 of the first embodiment) function) and
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to feature K1, since the change mode information display means is provided for displaying change mode information that is information regarding the mode of change of the predetermined amount that has already been changed, the player can easily see how the predetermined amount has changed. It is possible to easily understand the changes, encourage the player to make various guesses based on the change mode information, and give the player a sense of expectation.

[Feature K2]
The gaming machine according to feature K1,
The changing means includes means for changing a predetermined amount at a plurality of timings,
The change mode information display means includes:
Means for displaying the change mode information in a manner in which the amount of change in the predetermined amount changed by the change means at each timing can be identified (on stage St indicating accumulated points in Modification 13 of the first embodiment) A gaming machine characterized by having a function of displaying an image of a pearl.

According to feature K2, the change mode information is displayed in a manner that allows the change amount of the predetermined amount changed by the change means at each timing to be identified, so that the player who recognizes the change mode information can, for example, , to encourage users to try to find regularities in the amount of change in a predetermined amount that has changed at each timing up to now, or to infer the amount of change in a predetermined amount at subsequent timings. This makes it possible to provide players with new enjoyment based on the change mode information.

[Feature K3]
The gaming machine according to feature K1 or feature K2,
The changing means is
A means for determining a mode of change in the predetermined amount based on special information corresponding to the game round (a function for determining a point awarding scenario based on a production scenario in Modification 12 of the first embodiment). A gaming machine featuring

According to feature K3, since the mode of change in the predetermined amount is determined based on the special information corresponding to the game round, the change mode information that is information regarding the mode of change in the predetermined amount that has already been changed is recognized. It is possible to give the player a sense of expectation regarding special information corresponding to the game round.

[Feature K4]
The gaming machine according to feature K3,
comprising performance determining means for determining a performance to be performed in the game round based on special information corresponding to the game round,
The changing means is
means for determining a mode of change of the predetermined amount (point awarding scenario in Modification 12 of the first embodiment) based on the determined performance (performance scenario in Modification 12 of the first embodiment); A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to feature K4, the performance to be performed in the game round is determined based on the special information corresponding to the game round, and the mode of change of the predetermined amount is determined based on the determined performance, so that the effect of changing the predetermined amount is determined based on the determined performance. The player who has recognized the change mode information, which is information about the mode of change of a predetermined amount, is made to make various guesses about the content of the performance that will be performed later in the game round, thereby increasing expectations based on the change mode information. can be granted.

<Feature L group>
The feature L group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment.

[Feature L1]
an information acquisition means for acquiring special information upon satisfaction of acquisition conditions;
acquired information storage means for storing the acquired special information;
determining means for determining whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means satisfies a predetermined condition;
A gaming machine comprising:
When a game cycle is defined as the time when the game cycle operation for notifying the result of the determination by the determination means is started and the game cycle operation is finished,
A changing means (a function of executing a point awarding effect) for changing a predetermined amount (accumulated points in the first embodiment) in the game round;
a first performance execution means that executes a first performance that is a performance that suggests changing the predetermined amount (point provision suggestion performance in modification 14 of the first embodiment);
After the first performance is executed, a second performance is executed, which is a performance indicating that the predetermined amount is changed (the point award execution performance in Modification 14 of the first embodiment). means and
Equipped with
The second performance execution means is
In the first case, the second effect is executed once after the first effect is executed once, and in the second case, after the first effect is executed once. , a gaming machine comprising means for executing the second performance N times (an integer of N≧2).

According to feature L1, since the first performance is a performance that suggests changing a predetermined amount, there is a possibility that the predetermined amount will change for a player who recognizes the first performance. It can give a sense of expectation. Since the second performance is a performance that indicates a change in a predetermined amount, the player who recognizes the second performance is made to recognize that the predetermined amount has changed, giving a sense of superiority and satisfaction. can do. Therefore, if the second performance is performed N times after the first performance is performed once, the predetermined amount is given to the player N times after the first performance is performed once. It can make you realize that you have changed. As a result, it is possible to give the player who has recognized the first effect a sense of expectation as to how many times the predetermined amount will change thereafter. In addition, if the second performance is executed N times after the first performance is executed once, it is recognized that the first performance has been executed, and the second performance is executed once after that. It is possible to give surprise and surprise to the player who had guessed that the game would happen.

[Feature L2]
The gaming machine according to feature L1,
The changing means includes change amount information acquisition means for acquiring change amount information that is information corresponding to the amount of change in the predetermined amount to be changed,
The second performance execution means is
In the first case, after the first performance is executed once, the second performance indicating that the predetermined amount is changed by a change amount corresponding to the change amount information is executed once. death,
In the second case, the amount of change corresponding to the amount of change information is divided into N pieces, and after the first effect is executed once, the amount of change is divided into N pieces, one for each of the N pieces. (Modification 14 of the first embodiment)
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to feature L2, in both the first case and the second case, it is only necessary to acquire the change amount information corresponding to the first effect to be executed, so the second effect is N Even when the process is executed twice, the process up to the process of acquiring the change amount information is the same as in the first case, and the process can be simplified. Further, the amount of change information can be set without distinguishing between the case where the information is used in the first case and the case where the information is used in the second case, and the setting of the amount of change information can be simplified. can.

[Feature L3]
The gaming machine according to feature L1,
The changing means is a second effect change amount information acquisition means for acquiring second effect change amount information that is information corresponding to a predetermined amount of change indicating that the second effect is changed once. Equipped with
The second performance execution means is
In the first case, one piece of the second effect change amount information is acquired, and after the first effect is executed once, a change corresponding to the acquired second effect change amount information is obtained. Executing the second performance indicating that the predetermined amount is changed once;
In the second case, after the N pieces of the second effect change amount information are acquired and the first effect is executed once, the acquired N pieces of the second effect change amount information are The second performance indicating that the predetermined amount is changed by the corresponding amount of change is executed N times in response to each of the acquired N pieces of second performance change amount information (first embodiment Modification example 14)
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to feature L3, in the second case, it is only necessary to acquire the number of pieces of second effect variation information corresponding to the number of times the second effect is executed. There is no need to perform a process of dividing the amount of change corresponding to the amount of change information into N pieces according to the number of times of the second performance to be performed, and the process can be simplified.

[Feature L4]
The gaming machine according to feature L1 or feature L2,
Comprising a specific process execution means for executing a specific process (button press effect in the first embodiment),
The specific processing execution means is
It is easier to perform the specific processing in the game round when the special information corresponding to the game round satisfies the predetermined condition than when the special information corresponding to the game round does not satisfy the predetermined condition. The probability of doing so is high;
The changing means is
When the specific processing execution means executes the specific processing, the predetermined amount (accumulated points) is accumulated by a preset threshold (10 points) until the specific processing (button press effect) is executed. ).

According to feature L4, specific processing is executed in a game round when the special information corresponding to the game round satisfies a predetermined condition than when the special information corresponding to the game round does not satisfy the predetermined condition. Since the probability is high, executing a specific process can give the player a high sense of expectation. Furthermore, when the specific process execution unit executes a specific process, the changing unit changes the predetermined amount so as to reach a preset threshold before the specific process is executed. Each time the amount is changed, a sense of anticipation can be given to the player. That is, it is possible to give the player a sense of anticipation each time the second performance is executed. Therefore, by changing a predetermined amount (execution of the second performance) and by executing a specific process, it is possible to give a sense of expectation to the player in stages.

<Feature M group>
The feature M group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment.

[Feature M1]
an information acquisition means for acquiring special information upon satisfaction of acquisition conditions;
acquired information storage means for storing the acquired special information;
determining means for determining whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means satisfies a predetermined condition;
A gaming machine comprising:
When a game cycle is defined as the time when the game cycle operation for notifying the result of the determination by the determination means is started and the game cycle operation is finished,
A changing means (a function of executing a point awarding effect) for changing a predetermined amount (accumulated points in the first embodiment) in the game round;
a first performance execution means that executes a first performance (first performance in modification 10 of the first embodiment) that is a performance that suggests changing the predetermined amount;
After the first performance is executed, a second performance is executed, which is a performance indicating that the predetermined amount is changed (the second performance in Modification 10 of the first embodiment). means and
Equipped with
The first performance execution means is
When the changing means changes the predetermined amount in a second game round that is a game round executed after the first game round,
means for starting, in the first game round, the first performance corresponding to the changing means changing the predetermined amount in the second game round;
means for starting, in the second game round, the first effect corresponding to the changing means changing the predetermined amount in the second game round;
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to feature M1, since the first performance is a performance that suggests changing a predetermined amount, there is a possibility that the predetermined amount will change for a player who recognizes the first performance. It can give a sense of expectation. Since the second performance is a performance that indicates a change in a predetermined amount, the player who recognizes the second performance is made to recognize that the predetermined amount has changed, giving a sense of superiority and satisfaction. can do. In addition, there are cases in which the first performance corresponding to the changing means changing a predetermined amount in the second game round is started in the first game round, and cases in which it is executed in the second game round. . In other words, when the first effect is executed in a predetermined game round, the predetermined amount changes in the predetermined game round, and the predetermined amount changes in the game round executed after the predetermined game round. When the player recognizes that the first effect has been executed, he or she can make a guess as to which of the cases is the case, thereby creating a sense of anticipation.

[Feature M2]
The gaming machine according to feature M1,
The first performance execution means is
When the changing means changes the predetermined amount in the second game round,
means for notifying, in the first game round, the amount of change in the predetermined amount that is changed by the changing means in the second game round;
means for notifying in the second game round the amount of change in the predetermined amount that is changed by the changing means in the second game round;
(Modification 10 of the first embodiment)
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to feature M2, when changing the predetermined amount in the second game round, there is a case in which the amount of change in the predetermined amount to be changed in the second game round is notified in the first game round, and a case in which the amount of change in the predetermined amount to be changed in the second game round is announced, and a case in which the amount of change in the predetermined amount to be changed in the second game round is announced, There are cases where a predetermined amount of change that is changed in a game round is notified in a second game round. In other words, when a predetermined amount of change is reported in a predetermined game, there is a case where a predetermined amount corresponding to the reported change changes in the predetermined game, and a case where the predetermined amount changes in the predetermined game. In a game run executed after the game run, a predetermined amount corresponding to the notified amount of change may change, and for a player who has recognized that the predetermined amount of change has been notified, It is possible to give a sense of expectation by making the user guess as to which of the cases is the case.

[Feature M3]
The gaming machine according to feature M1 or feature M2,
Specific processing execution means that executes a specific process (button press effect in the first embodiment) when the predetermined amount reaches a preset threshold value as a result of the change by the changing unit;
a reset unit that executes a reset process (point reset process in the first embodiment) that returns the predetermined amount changed by the change unit to a preset initial value;
Equipped with
The reset means is
In the first case (when the game round is not a carryover game round), the predetermined amount that changed during the game round is returned to the initial value with the end of the game round as an opportunity, and in the second case (when the game round is In the case of a carryover game round), a gaming machine comprising means for not returning the predetermined amount changed in the game round to the initial value upon completion of the game round.

According to feature M3, the predetermined amount may or may not return to its initial value at the end of the game round, so the player is made to pay attention to the predetermined amount even at the end of the game round. be able to. In addition, even if the predetermined amount does not reach the threshold value in a game round, the predetermined amount does not return to the initial value at the end of the game round and is maintained until the next game round, and the predetermined amount does not return to the initial value at the end of the game round. It is possible to give the player a sense of expectation that the amount may reach the threshold value. Therefore, due to feature M1, when the first effect is executed, there are cases where the predetermined amount changes in the predetermined game round, and cases where it changes in the game round executed after the predetermined game round. Furthermore, due to the feature M3, when the predetermined amount changes, the predetermined amount may or may not return to the initial value upon the end of the game round, so that various changes at the time of transition of the game round may occur. It is possible to give the player a sense of expectation.

<Characteristics N group>
The feature N group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment.

[Feature N1]
an information acquisition means for acquiring special information upon satisfaction of acquisition conditions;
acquired information storage means for storing the acquired special information;
determining means for determining whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means satisfies a predetermined condition;
a performance execution means for performing the performance;
A gaming machine comprising:
When a game cycle is defined as the time when the game cycle operation for notifying the result of the determination by the determination means is started and the game cycle operation is finished,
comprising a changing means (a function of executing a point awarding effect) for changing a predetermined amount (accumulated points in the first embodiment) in the game round,
The effect execution means includes change effect execution means for executing a change effect (point awarding effect) that is a effect indicating that the predetermined amount changes when the change means changes the predetermined amount;
The change performance execution means determines the mode of the change performance (point award performance in Modification 11 of the first embodiment) based on the special information corresponding to the game round in which the change means changes the predetermined amount. A gaming machine characterized by comprising means for determining.

According to feature N1, the change effect execution means determines the mode of change effect based on the special information corresponding to the game round in which the change means changes the predetermined amount, so can attract people's attention. Further, it is possible to give a player who recognizes that a change performance has been executed a sense of anticipation for a game round in which a predetermined amount changes.

[Feature N2]
The gaming machine according to feature N1,
The performance execution means is
comprising a game round performance determining means for determining a game round performance (performance scenario in modification example 11 of the first embodiment), which is a performance to be performed in the game round, based on the special information corresponding to the game round;
The change performance execution means executes a mode of the change performance (the point award performance in the eleventh modification of the first embodiment) based on the content of the game round performance (the performance scenario in the eleventh modification of the first embodiment). A gaming machine characterized by comprising a means for determining.

According to feature N2, the change performance execution means determines the mode of the change performance based on the content of the game round performance, so the change performance execution means informs the player who has recognized that the change performance has been executed of the change performance. Based on the aspect, it is possible to make the player guess the content of the game performance to be executed subsequently, and it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation.

[Feature N3]
The gaming machine according to feature N2,
The change production execution means is
If the game performance includes a specific performance and the changing means changes the predetermined amount before the specific performance is executed, the predetermined amount changes. (Modification 11 of the first embodiment)
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to feature N3, when the game performance includes a specific performance, the changing performance execution means changes the predetermined amount before the specific performance is executed. , since the change effect indicating that the predetermined amount changes is executed in a specific manner, the relationship between the manner of each change effect to be executed and the content of the game round effect to be executed after that is explained to the player. The game player is made to think and guess the contents of the game performance to be executed thereafter every time a change performance is executed. Furthermore, based on the content of the guessed game round presentation, it is possible to give the player a feeling of anticipation for special information corresponding to the game round.

<Characteristic group O>
The feature O group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment.

[Feature O1]
a predetermined amount display means for displaying a predetermined amount;
Calculation suggestion performance execution means for executing a calculation suggestion performance that is a performance that suggests that calculation processing is performed on the displayed predetermined amount;
A gaming machine comprising:
The calculation suggestion performance execution means is
A mode that suggests that an addition process will be performed on the displayed predetermined amount, or a mode that suggests that a multiplication process will be performed on the displayed predetermined amount, as one calculation suggestion effect. A mode that suggests that an addition process is performed on the displayed predetermined amount or a mode that suggests that a multiplication process is performed on the displayed predetermined amount. comprising an arithmetic processing mode change performance execution means for executing a computation processing mode change performance that is a performance of changing one of the suggested modes to the other mode (Modification 15 in the first embodiment);
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to feature O1, by changing the mode of calculation suggestion presentation, it is possible to make the user recognize that the calculation method executed for the displayed predetermined amount has changed, and it is possible to add surprise. . In addition, since the new predetermined amount after the calculation process may differ greatly depending on the calculation method performed on the predetermined amount, by changing the aspect of the calculation suggestion effect, it is possible for the player to It is possible to give a sense of urgency to the game, and also add a modicum to the player's sense of expectation.

[Feature O2]
The gaming machine according to feature O1,
The mode that suggests that an addition process is performed on the displayed predetermined amount is an addition sign display mode that displays an arithmetic symbol "+" indicating addition;
The mode that suggests that a multiplication process is performed on the displayed predetermined quantity is a multiplication symbol display mode that is a mode of displaying an arithmetic symbol "x" indicating multiplication,
The arithmetic processing mode change effect execution means includes:
As the arithmetic processing mode change effect, either the displayed arithmetic symbol "+" indicating addition or "x" indicating multiplication is rotated to make it an arithmetic symbol indicating addition. It is provided with means for executing an effect that changes the display to either a certain "+" or an arithmetic symbol "x" indicating multiplication (Variation 15 in the first embodiment).
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to feature O2, by executing the process of rotating almost the same line drawing symbols such as "+" and "×", the meaning can be greatly changed. It is possible to give a great sense of urgency to the game, and to add tone to the player's sense of expectation.

[Feature O3]
The gaming machine according to either feature O1 or feature O2,
an information acquisition means for acquiring special information upon satisfaction of acquisition conditions;
acquired information storage means for storing the acquired special information;
determining means for determining whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means satisfies a predetermined condition;
When a game cycle is defined as the time when the game cycle operation for notifying the result of the determination by the determination means is started and the game cycle operation is finished,
a changing means (a function for executing a point awarding effect) for changing the predetermined amount (accumulated points in the first embodiment) in the game round;
a specific process execution means for executing a specific process (button press effect in the first embodiment);
Equipped with
The specific processing execution means is
It is easier to perform the specific processing in the game round when the special information corresponding to the game round satisfies the predetermined condition than when the special information corresponding to the game round does not satisfy the predetermined condition. The probability of doing so is high;
The changing means is
When the specific processing execution means executes the specific processing, the predetermined amount (accumulated points) is accumulated by a preset threshold (10 points) before the specific processing (button press effect) is executed. ).

According to feature O3, a specific process is executed in a game round when the special information corresponding to the game round satisfies a predetermined condition than when the special information corresponding to the game round does not satisfy the predetermined condition. Since the probability is high, executing a specific process can give the player a high sense of expectation. Furthermore, when the specific process execution unit executes a specific process, the changing unit changes the predetermined amount so as to reach a preset threshold before the specific process is executed. Each time the amount is changed, a sense of anticipation can be given to the player. Therefore, it is possible to further increase the player's sense of urgency regarding the change in the form of the calculation suggestion performance, and when the form of the calculation suggestion performance is changed, it is possible to greatly improve the player's sense of expectation for the game. can be granted.

<Feature P group>
The feature P group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment.

[Feature P1]
an information acquisition means for acquiring special information upon satisfaction of acquisition conditions;
acquired information storage means for storing the acquired special information;
determining means for determining whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means satisfies a predetermined condition;
A gaming machine comprising:
When a game cycle is defined as the time when the game cycle operation for notifying the result of the determination by the determination means is started and the game cycle operation is finished,
A changing means (a function of executing a point awarding effect) for changing a predetermined amount (accumulated points in the first embodiment) in the game round;
a predetermined amount display means for displaying the predetermined amount;
A multiplication mode performance execution means for executing a multiplication mode performance that is a mode of performance suggesting that a multiplication process is performed on the displayed predetermined amount before the predetermined amount changes;
(Modification 15 in the first embodiment),
The predetermined amount display means is
When the multiplication mode rendering execution means executes the multiplication mode rendering, means is provided for displaying a multiplication result amount, which is an amount resulting from multiplying the displayed predetermined amount, as a new predetermined amount. A gaming machine featuring:

According to feature P1, since the multiplication mode effect execution means for executing the multiplication mode effect is provided, the player who recognizes the execution of the multiplication mode effect can be given a sense of expectation regarding the value to be multiplied by the predetermined amount. It is possible to draw attention to the multiplication effect.

[Feature P2]
The gaming machine according to feature P1,
The multiplication mode performance execution means is
Means for controlling the mode of the multiplication mode effect to be executed according to the magnitude of the value to be multiplied by the displayed predetermined amount (Variation 15 of the first embodiment)
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to feature P2, the multiplication mode effect execution means controls the mode of the multiplication mode effect to be executed according to the magnitude of the value to be multiplied by the displayed predetermined amount, so pay attention to the mode of the multiplication mode effect. can be done.

[Feature P3]
The gaming machine according to feature P1 or feature P2,
The predetermined amount display means is
When the multiplication mode performance execution means executes the multiplication mode performance, means for displaying an amount larger than the multiplication result amount, which is the amount resulting from multiplying the displayed predetermined amount, as a new predetermined amount. (Modification 15 in the first embodiment)
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to feature P3, when the multiplication mode performance execution means executes the multiplication mode performance, an amount greater than the multiplication result amount, which is the amount resulting from multiplying the displayed predetermined amount, is displayed as a new predetermined amount. Therefore, it is possible to provide a sense of surprise and happiness to the player who recognizes a new predetermined amount that is greater than the multiplication result amount.

[Feature P4]
The gaming machine according to any one of features P1 to P3, which suggests that an addition process is performed on the displayed predetermined amount before the predetermined amount changes. comprising an addition mode performance execution means for executing an addition mode performance that is a performance of the mode;
The predetermined amount display means is
When the addition mode performance execution means executes the addition mode performance, means for displaying an addition result amount, which is an amount resulting from adding the displayed predetermined amounts, as a new predetermined amount ( 1st embodiment)
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to feature P4, since the addition mode effect execution means is provided, it is possible to give the player a sense of urgency and tension as to whether the addition mode effect is to be executed or the multiplication mode effect to be executed.

[Feature P5]
The gaming machine according to any one of features P1 to P4,
Prior to the change of the predetermined amount, the method further comprises an addition mode performance execution means for executing an addition mode performance that is a mode of performance suggesting that addition processing is performed on the displayed predetermined amount. ,
The predetermined amount display means is
When the addition mode performance execution means executes the addition mode performance, an amount greater than the addition result amount, which is the amount resulting from adding the displayed predetermined amounts, is displayed as a new predetermined amount. (Modification 15 in the first embodiment)
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to feature P5, when the addition mode effect execution means executes the addition mode effect, an amount greater than the addition result amount, which is the amount resulting from multiplying the displayed predetermined amount, is displayed as a new predetermined amount. Therefore, it is possible to provide a sense of surprise and happiness to the player who has recognized a new predetermined amount that is greater than the addition result amount.

<Feature Q group>
The feature Q group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment.

[Feature Q1]
an information acquisition means for acquiring special information upon satisfaction of acquisition conditions;
acquired information storage means for storing the acquired special information;
determining means for determining whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means satisfies a predetermined condition;
A gaming machine comprising:
When a game cycle is defined as the time when the game cycle operation for notifying the result of the determination by the determination means is started and the game cycle operation is finished,
a first changing means for changing the first amount in the game round (a function for giving points in Modification 22 of the first embodiment);
a second changing means that changes the second amount in the game round (a function that gives points in Modification 22 of the first embodiment);
a first specific processing execution means that executes the first specific processing;
a second specific processing execution means for executing a second specific processing;
Equipped with
The first changing means is
When the first specific processing execution means executes the first specific processing, the first amount is set to a preset first threshold value ( 10 points).
The second changing means is
When the second specific processing execution means executes the second specific processing, the second amount is set to a preset second threshold ( 10 points).

According to feature Q1, when the first specific process execution unit executes the first specific process, the first changing unit changes the first amount in advance before the first specific process is executed. When the second specific processing execution means executes the second specific processing, the second changing means changes the second specific processing until the second specific processing is executed. In addition, since the second amount is changed so as to reach a preset second threshold value, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation when the first amount changes, and furthermore, the second amount can be changed to reach a preset second threshold value. When this changes, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation. That is, in a game round, it is possible to draw the attention of the player to changes in at least two amounts, and it is possible to give a sense of anticipation.

[Feature Q2]
The gaming machine described in feature Q1,
A gaming session in which the first specific process is executed has a higher expectation that the special information corresponding to the gaming session satisfies the predetermined condition than a gaming session in which the first specific process is not executed. A gaming machine characterized by high .

According to feature Q2, a player who recognizes that the first specific process has been executed in a game round is given a sense of expectation that the special information corresponding to the game round will satisfy a predetermined condition. be able to.

[Feature Q3]
The gaming machine described in feature Q1 or feature Q2,
A reset process that returns at least one of the first amount and the second amount that changed during the game round to a preset initial value, triggered by the end of the game round (point reset process in the first embodiment) A gaming machine characterized by comprising a reset means for executing.

According to feature Q3, since the reset means is provided, at least one of the first amount and the second amount reaches the threshold value (first threshold value, second threshold value) corresponding to each amount by the time the game round ends. It is possible to give the player a sense of expectation so that the player can reach the goal. Furthermore, when a player recognizes that a game round has started and that at least one of the first amount and the second amount has started to change, the player is made aware of when the game round ends; It is possible to draw attention to the manner in which the second quantity changes.

[Feature Q4]
The gaming machine described in feature Q3,
The reset means is
In the first case, at least one of the first amount and the second amount that changed in the game round is returned to the initial value upon the end of the game round, and in the second case (the game round is carried over (in the case of a gaming session), means for not returning at least one of the first amount and the second amount that changed during the gaming session to the initial value upon completion of the gaming session (carrying over the accumulated points); A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to feature Q4, at least one of the first amount and the second amount may or may not return to the initial value upon completion of the game round. Even if at least one of the second amounts does not reach the threshold corresponding to each amount, the amount will not return to the initial value at the end of the game and will be maintained until the next game. It is possible to give the player a sense of expectation that there is a possibility that the threshold value will be reached in the second round. In other words, it is possible to give the player a sense of anticipation even at the end of the game round.

<Characteristic R group>
The feature R group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or a combination thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment.

[Feature R1]
an information acquisition means for acquiring special information upon satisfaction of acquisition conditions;
acquired information storage means for storing the acquired special information;
determining means for determining whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means satisfies a predetermined condition;
A gaming machine comprising:
When a game cycle is defined as the time when the game cycle operation for notifying the result of the determination by the determination means is started and the game cycle operation is finished,
A changing means (a function of executing a point awarding effect) for changing a predetermined amount (accumulated points in the first embodiment) in the game round;
Specific processing execution means that executes a specific process (button press effect in the first embodiment) when the predetermined amount reaches a preset threshold value as a result of the change by the changing unit;
a reset unit that executes a reset process (point reset process in the first embodiment) that returns the predetermined amount changed by the change unit to a preset initial value;
Equipped with
The reset means is
In the first case (when the game round is not a carryover game round), the predetermined amount that changed during the game round is returned to the initial value with the end of the game round as an opportunity, and in the second case (when the game round is (in the case of a carryover game round), a means is provided for not returning the predetermined amount that changed in the game round to the initial value upon the end of the game round;
The reset means does not return the predetermined amount changed in a predetermined game round to the initial value after the end of the game round. There is a high degree of expectation that the special information corresponding to the game round to be executed later satisfies the predetermined condition (Modification 25 in the first embodiment)
A gaming machine characterized by:

According to feature R1, the larger the number of occasions at which the reset means does not return the predetermined amount changed in a predetermined game round to the initial value upon the end of the game round, the more the predetermined value changes. Since there is a high expectation that the special information corresponding to the game round executed after the game round satisfies the predetermined conditions, the predetermined amount does not return to the initial value upon the end of the game round. The longer this continues, the greater the sense of expectation can be given to the player.

[Feature R2]
The gaming machine according to feature R1,
When the special information in the second game round executed after the first game round satisfies a predetermined condition,
The reset means is
comprising means for not returning the predetermined amount changed in the first game round to the initial value until the second game round;
The changing means is
A gaming machine comprising means for limiting the amount of change in the predetermined amount so that the predetermined amount does not reach the threshold value between the first game round and the second game round.

According to feature R2, for a player who recognizes that the predetermined amount does not return to the initial value at the end of a game session, and the timing of the end of the game session continues, and the predetermined amount does not reach the threshold value. , can give a sense of expectation. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player's sense of expectation from decreasing in a state where the predetermined amount has not reached the threshold value.

<Feature S group>
The feature S group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment.

[Feature S1]
an information acquisition means for acquiring special information upon satisfaction of acquisition conditions;
acquired information storage means for storing the acquired special information;
determining means for determining whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means satisfies a predetermined condition;
A gaming machine comprising:
When a game cycle is defined as the time when the game cycle operation for notifying the result of the determination by the determination means is started and the game cycle operation is finished,
a changing means (a function for executing a point awarding performance) for changing a predetermined amount (accumulated points in the first embodiment) from a preset initial value in the game round;
Specific processing execution means that executes a specific process (button press effect in the first embodiment) when the predetermined amount reaches a preset threshold value as a result of the change by the changing unit;
a threshold value changing unit (modification example 26 in the first embodiment) that executes a threshold value changing process to change the value of the threshold value;
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to feature S1, a predetermined amount is changed in a game round, and when the predetermined amount reaches a preset threshold value, a specific process is executed, so that the player pays attention to the manner in which the predetermined amount changes. can be done. Further, when a predetermined amount reaches a threshold value and a specific process is executed, it is possible to give the player a sense of superiority and expectation. Furthermore, since the threshold value may be changed, it is difficult for the player to guess the timing at which a specific process will be executed, and it becomes possible to execute the specific process at a timing that the player does not expect. As a result, it is possible to provide surprise to the player.

[Feature S2]
The gaming machine according to feature S1,
The threshold value changing means is
A gaming machine comprising: a threshold value change process determining means for determining whether or not to execute the threshold value change process in a game round based on the special information corresponding to the game round.

According to feature S2, based on the special information corresponding to the game round, it is determined whether or not to execute the threshold value changing process in the game round, so that the player who has recognized that the threshold value has been changed, or To give a player who recognizes that a threshold value has been changed when a specific process is executed a sense of expectation as to whether or not the special information corresponding to the game round satisfies a predetermined condition. I can do it.

[Feature S3]
The gaming machine according to feature S1 or feature S2,
It is easier to perform the specific processing in the game round when the special information corresponding to the game round satisfies the predetermined condition than when the special information corresponding to the game round does not satisfy the predetermined condition. A gaming machine characterized by a high probability of execution.

According to feature S3, a specific process is executed in a game round when the special information corresponding to the game round satisfies the predetermined condition than when the special information corresponding to the game round does not satisfy the predetermined condition. Since there is a high probability that a certain process will be executed, a sense of anticipation can be given to the player when a specific process is executed. Further, since a specific process is executed when the predetermined amount reaches the threshold value, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation even when the predetermined amount changes.

<Characteristic T group>
The feature T group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the first embodiment.

[Feature T1]
an information acquisition means for acquiring special information upon satisfaction of acquisition conditions;
acquired information storage means for storing the acquired special information;
determining means for determining whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means satisfies a predetermined condition;
A gaming machine comprising:
When a game cycle is defined as the time when the game cycle operation for notifying the result of the determination by the determination means is started and the game cycle operation is finished,
A changing means (a function of executing a point awarding effect) for changing a predetermined amount (accumulated points in the first embodiment) in the game round;
Before changing the predetermined amount, displaying a change amount display (amounting point suggestion display in Modification 27 of the first embodiment) indicating information regarding the amount of change in the predetermined amount changed by the changing means. A change amount display means,
A gaming machine equipped with.

According to feature T1, before changing the predetermined amount, a change amount display indicating information regarding the amount of change in the predetermined amount changed by the changing means is displayed, so that a player who recognizes the change amount display is Therefore, it is possible to give various guesses and expectations regarding the game round corresponding to the change amount display.

[Feature T2]
The gaming machine according to feature T1,
comprising a game time display means for displaying a game time display that is a display indicating one game time that is on hold or in progress;
The change amount display means is
A gaming machine comprising means for displaying the amount of change display corresponding to a predetermined game round in association with the game round display corresponding to the predetermined game round.

According to feature T2, since the change amount display corresponding to a predetermined game time is displayed in association with the game time display corresponding to the predetermined game time, the change amount display displayed in association with the game time display is displayed. It is possible to give the recognized player various guesses and expectations regarding the game round corresponding to the displayed change amount display. For example, if a change amount display is displayed in association with a game time display corresponding to a pending game time, the player who recognizes the change amount display may be asked to make various guesses or expectations regarding the pending game time. It can give a feeling.

[Feature T3]
The gaming machine according to feature T2,
The change amount display means is
After displaying the change amount display corresponding to a predetermined game time in association with the game time display corresponding to a game time different from the predetermined game time, the game time display corresponding to the predetermined game time is displayed. A gaming machine characterized by comprising means for displaying a game in association with a game machine.

According to feature T3, after the change amount display corresponding to the predetermined game time is displayed in association with the game time display corresponding to the game time different from the predetermined game time, the game time corresponding to the predetermined game time is displayed. Since it is displayed in association with the display, it is possible to overturn the player's guess based on the display of the amount of change displayed in association with the game cycle display corresponding to a game cycle different from the predetermined game cycle. This can add surprise.
[Feature T4]
The gaming machine according to feature T2 or feature T3,
The change amount display means is
After displaying an amount of change display corresponding to an amount of change different from the amount of change changed by the changing means in the predetermined game round, a change corresponding to the amount of change changed by the changing means in the predetermined game round. A gaming machine characterized by displaying an amount display.

According to feature T4, after displaying a change amount display corresponding to a change amount different from the change amount changed by the change means in a predetermined game time, a change corresponding to the change amount changed by the change means in a predetermined game time is displayed. Since the amount display is displayed, it is possible to overturn the player's guess based on the change amount display that corresponds to a change amount different from the change amount changed by the changing means in a predetermined game round, and to give the player a surprise. It is possible to add character to the game, and it is also possible to add tone to the player's expectations.

[Feature T5]
The gaming machine according to any one of features T1 to T4,
Comprising a specific process execution means for executing a specific process (button press effect in the first embodiment),
The changing means is
comprising a change control means for changing the predetermined amount (accumulation points) so as to reach a preset threshold (10 points),
The specific processing execution means is
It is easier to perform the specific process in the game round when the special information corresponding to the game round satisfies the predetermined condition than when the special information corresponding to the game round does not satisfy the predetermined condition. The probability of doing so is high;
The change control means includes:
When the specific processing execution means executes the specific processing, the predetermined amount (accumulated points) reaches the threshold (10 points) before the specific processing (button press effect) is executed. A gaming machine characterized by comprising means for changing the game so that

According to feature T5, specific processing is executed in a game round when the special information corresponding to the game round satisfies a predetermined condition than when the special information corresponding to the game round does not satisfy the predetermined condition. Since the probability is high, executing a specific process can give the player a high sense of expectation. In addition, when the specific processing execution means executes a specific process, the change control unit changes the predetermined amount so as to reach a preset threshold before the specific process is executed. A sense of anticipation can be given to the player each time the predetermined amount is changed. Therefore, by changing the predetermined amount and executing a specific process, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation in stages.

Incidentally, the inventions of the above feature group A to feature T group solve the following problems.

In gaming machines such as pachinko machines and slot machines, various changes have been made to the structure, control, performance, etc., with the aim of increasing the interest of the game, reducing the processing load on the gaming machine, optimizing processing, and simplifying control. Technical improvements have been made from this point of view.

Various technical improvements have also been made with the aim of improving the soundness of gaming, such as discovering and deterring fraudulent actions by players and unauthorized modifications to gaming machines.

In the gaming machines mentioned above, further technological improvements are desired for the purpose of increasing the interest of gaming, reducing the processing load on gaming machines, optimizing processing, simplifying control, and providing healthier gaming. It is rare.

<Feature U group>
The feature U group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the second embodiment.

[Feature U1]
an information acquisition means for acquiring special information upon satisfaction of acquisition conditions;
acquired information storage means for storing the acquired special information;
determining means for determining whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means satisfies a predetermined condition;
A game round execution means for executing a game round when one game round is defined as the time when the game operation for notifying the result of the determination by the determination means is started and the game operation is finished;
a firing means for firing a game ball;
a ball entry section into which a fired game ball can enter;
An auxiliary means (electric accessory 44a in the second embodiment) for assisting the entry of the game ball into the ball entry part;
The state of the auxiliary means is divided into a first state (a state in which the electric accessory 44a is closed) which makes it impossible or difficult to enter the game ball into the ball entry section, and a state where the electric accessory 44a is closed. State transition means for transitioning between a second state (a state in which the electric accessory 44a is opened) that is a state that allows or facilitates the entry of the game ball;
A control means for controlling the state transition means, wherein at least a first control mode (high frequency support mode) and a second control mode are provided as control modes in which the state transition means changes the state of the auxiliary means. (infrequent support mode);
A gaming machine comprising:
The control means includes:
Based on the result of the determination by the determination means, the control mode is changed from the first control mode (high-frequency support mode) to the second control mode (low-frequency support mode) at the start of a game round in which the result of the determination is notified. A gaming machine characterized by comprising means for switching to a frequency support mode).

According to feature U1, based on the result of the determination by the determination means, at the start of the game round that notifies the result of the determination, the control mode is provided with means for switching from the first control mode to the second control mode. By the processing executed after the start of the round and the control mode of the state transition means, it is possible to prevent the player from becoming excessively advantageous or disadvantageous. For example, if the control mode of the state transition means is a control mode that is advantageous to the player, and the process executed after the start of a game round becomes a state that is advantageous to the player, the state is excessively advantageous to the player. There is a possibility that it will become. However, since the gaming machine according to this feature is equipped with a means for switching the control mode based on the result of the determination by the determining means at the start of a gaming round, for example, a state advantageous to the player can be created by processing executed after the start of a gaming round. In such a case, by switching the control mode from a control mode that is advantageous to the player to a control mode that is not too advantageous to the player, it is possible to prevent the situation from becoming excessively advantageous to the player. .

[Feature U2]
The gaming machine according to feature U1,
In a situation where the game balls are continuously fired with a predetermined firing intensity by the firing means,
When the control means controls the state transition means in the first control mode (high frequency support mode), it is better that the control means controls the state transition means in the second control mode (low frequency support mode). A game machine characterized in that a game ball enters the ball entry section more easily than when the game ball is controlled.

According to feature U2, when the state transition means is controlled in the first control mode, the game ball enters the ball entry section more easily than when it is controlled in the second control mode. That is, the first control mode is a control mode that is more advantageous to the player than the second control mode. Therefore, according to the gaming machine having this feature, if a process executed after the start of a game round results in a state advantageous to the player, the control mode is changed from a control mode advantageous to the player to a control mode advantageous to the player. Since it is possible to switch to a control mode that does not become too much, it is possible to prevent a situation from becoming excessively advantageous to the player.

[Feature U3]
The gaming machine according to feature U1 or feature U2,
Equipped with a benefit granting means for granting benefits,
The benefit granting means is
If the determining means determines that the special information satisfies the predetermined condition, the result of the determination is notified. After-gaming round benefit granting means (function for executing a round game) for granting a prize after the end of the gaming round; )and,
If a game session corresponding to the special information that satisfies the predetermined condition satisfies a specific condition, a benefit granting unit during a game session that provides a benefit during the execution of the game session (a function that executes special bonus processing) and
The control means includes:
When the game round to be executed satisfies the specific condition (when the specific processing flag is ON), the control mode is changed from the first control mode to the second control mode at the start of the game round. A gaming machine characterized by being equipped with a switching means (a function of turning off a high-frequency support mode flag).

According to feature U3, when a game round to be executed satisfies a specific condition, a bonus is awarded during the execution of the game round by the game round execution bonus granting means, resulting in an advantageous state for the player. On the other hand, the control means includes means for switching the control mode from the first control mode to the second control mode at the start of the game round when the game round satisfies a specific condition. Even during a period in which benefits are being provided by the ongoing benefit providing means, it is possible to prevent the player from being in an excessively advantageous state.

[Feature U4]
The gaming machine according to any one of features U1 to U3,
a first ball entry part that is a ball entry part into which a fired game ball can enter;
a second ball entry part that is a ball entry part into which a fired game ball can enter;
Equipped with
The auxiliary means is
disposed in either the first ball entry section or the second ball entry section,
The information acquisition means includes:
means for acquiring special information based on the fact that a game ball has entered the first ball entry section; and means for acquiring special information based on the fact that a game ball has entered the second ball entry section. and
The acquired information storage means includes:
The first special information is the special information obtained when a game ball enters the first ball entry section, and the first special information obtained when a game ball enters the second ball entry section. and means for storing second special information that is the special information, respectively;
The game round execution means is
a first special information game round which is a game round for notifying the result of the determination by the determining means regarding the first special information; and a first special information game round for notifying the result of the determination by the determining means regarding the second special information. A gaming machine characterized by comprising means for executing a second special information game round, which is a game round, in parallel.

According to feature U4, since it includes a means for running the first special information game round and the second special information game round in parallel, for example, the second special information game round is executed while the first special information game round is being executed. It becomes possible to provide benefits based on the determination results. In such a case, the process executed after the start of the first special information game round will give the player an advantageous situation, but the gaming machine with this feature changes the control mode to the first at the start of the first special information game round. Since a means for switching from the control mode to the second control mode is provided, it is possible to prevent the player from being in an excessively advantageous state during the execution of the first special information game round.

<Characteristic group V>
The feature group V is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the second embodiment.

[Feature V1]
an information acquisition means for acquiring special information upon satisfaction of acquisition conditions;
acquired information storage means for storing the acquired special information;
determining means for determining whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means satisfies a predetermined condition;
A game round execution means for executing a game round when one game round is defined as the time when the game operation for notifying the result of the determination by the determination means is started and the game operation is finished;
When the determination means determines that the special information satisfies the predetermined condition, a benefit granting means (a function of executing a round game) that grants a benefit after the end of a game round that notifies the result of the determination;
The game round corresponding to the special information that satisfies the predetermined condition (the game round in which the jackpot has been won) is defined as the game round where the condition is met, and the game round where the condition is met is executed first among the two game rounds where the condition is met. is a precondition-satisfied game time, and the condition-satisfaction game time that is executed after the pre-conditions-satisfaction game time is a post-conditions-satisfaction game time. Processing determining means that determines based on the special information corresponding to the game round where the previous condition is satisfied (based on the jackpot type of the previous game round in which the jackpot was won, special bonus processing is performed at the start of the game round after winning the jackpot) function to decide whether or not to execute related processing),
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to feature V1, since it includes a process determining means that determines the process at the start of the game round where the post-condition is satisfied based on special information corresponding to the game round where the post-condition is satisfied, it is easier to execute the game round where the post-condition is satisfied. It is also possible to execute in advance a process corresponding to the process to be executed at the start of a game round in which the post-conditions are satisfied. For example, in a game round where the preceding condition is met, an effect that suggests a process to be executed at the start of the game round where the post-condition is met may be executed, or in a game round that is executed between the game round where the preceding condition is met and the game round where the post-condition is met. It is possible to execute various corresponding processes for the process to be executed at the start of the game round where the post-conditions are met, such as executing a performance that suggests the process to be executed at the start of the game round where the post-conditions are met, and to improve the interest of the game. be able to.
In addition, since the processing at the start of the game round where the post-conditions are met is determined based on the special information corresponding to the game round where the post-conditions are met, for example, the process determined as the process at the start of the game round where the post-conditions are met is If the processing is advantageous to the player, as a response process to the processing, a process that does not give the player an excessive advantage due to the processing based on the special information corresponding to the game round where the condition is satisfied is carried out after the game round where the condition is satisfied. Can be executed at startup.

[Feature V2]
The gaming machine according to feature V1,
a firing means for firing a game ball;
a ball entry section into which a fired game ball can enter;
An auxiliary means (electric accessory 44a in the second embodiment) for assisting the entry of the game ball into the ball entry part;
The state of the auxiliary means is divided into a first state (a state in which the electric accessory 44a is closed) which makes it impossible or difficult to enter the game ball into the ball entry section, and a state where the electric accessory 44a is closed. State transition means for transitioning between a second state (a state in which the electric accessory 44a is opened) that is a state that allows or facilitates the entry of the game ball;
A control means for controlling the state transition means, wherein at least a first control mode (high frequency support mode) and a second control mode are provided as control modes in which the state transition means changes the state of the auxiliary means. (infrequent support mode);
Equipped with
The processing determining means includes:
Determining whether to switch the control mode from the first control mode to the second control mode at the start of the post-condition satisfaction game round (determining whether to turn off the high-frequency support mode flag). , a gaming machine comprising means for executing the game based on the special information corresponding to the game round in which the precondition is satisfied.

According to feature V2, the processing determining means determines whether or not to switch the control mode from the first control mode to the second control mode at the start of the game round where the post-condition is satisfied, corresponding to the game round where the pre-condition is satisfied. Since it is executed based on special information, for example, if a process advantageous to the player is executed at the start of a game round where the post-condition is satisfied based on the special information corresponding to the game round where the pre-condition is satisfied, the response to that process is As a process, it is determined whether or not to switch the control mode from a control mode that is advantageous to the player to a control mode that is not too advantageous to the player at the start of a game round where the post-condition is satisfied based on special information corresponding to the game round where the precondition is satisfied. It becomes possible to execute the determination, and as a result, it is possible to prevent a situation from becoming excessively advantageous to the player.

[Feature V3]
The gaming machine according to feature V2,
a first ball entry part that is a ball entry part into which a fired game ball can enter;
a second ball entry part that is a ball entry part into which a fired game ball can enter;
Equipped with
The information acquisition means includes:
means for acquiring special information based on the fact that a game ball has entered the first ball entry section; and means for acquiring special information based on the fact that a game ball has entered the second ball entry section. and
The acquired information storage means includes:
The first special information is the special information obtained when a game ball enters the first ball entry section, and the first special information obtained when a game ball enters the second ball entry section. and means for storing second special information that is the special information, respectively;
The game round execution means is
a first special information game round which is a game round for notifying the result of the determination by the determining means regarding the first special information; and a first special information game round for notifying the result of the determination by the determining means regarding the second special information. comprising means for executing a second special information game time which is a game time in parallel;
The gaming machine further includes:
A game time setting means for setting the game time when the time of the game time executed by the game time executing means is defined as the game time,
A game round corresponding to the first special information that satisfies the predetermined condition is defined as a first condition satisfying game round, and the first condition satisfying game round that is executed first among the two first condition fulfilling game rounds is defined as a first condition satisfying game round. When the first condition is met as a game time, and the first condition is met after the first condition is met, and the first condition is met as a game time after the first condition is met,
The playing time determining means includes:
The method for setting the playing time of the second special information game round that is executed during the period in which the first post-condition satisfaction game time is being executed is based on the special information corresponding to the first pre-condition satisfaction game time. (setting process of the variable time for the second starting opening in the second embodiment/based on the jackpot type of the game round for the first starting opening that won the jackpot earlier At the start of the opening game round, it is determined whether the high-frequency support mode flag is ON or OFF, and based on the state of the high-frequency support mode flag, the period during which the first starting opening game round that later won the jackpot is being executed. 1. A gaming machine comprising: a function of determining a method of setting a variable time of a game round for a second start opening to be executed at a time.

According to feature V3, the method for setting the playing time of the second special information game round to be executed during the period in which the first post-condition-satisfying game round is being executed is set to the special information corresponding to the first pre-condition-satisfying game round. For example, the game time of the second special information game run is determined based on the special information corresponding to the first condition satisfaction game run during the period in which the first post-condition satisfaction game run is being executed. The setting method can be determined to be advantageous to the player. More specifically, as the method of setting the playing time of the second special information game round, it is possible to decide on a setting method in which the average value of the playing time is relatively short. In this case, there is a risk that the period during which the first post-condition satisfying game round is executed may be excessively advantageous to the player, but for example, as shown in feature V2 above, as a response process to the process, , the control mode can be switched at the start of the first post-condition satisfying game round based on the special information corresponding to the first pre-condition satisfying game round, so for example, the control mode can be switched from a control mode that is advantageous to the player to a control mode that is advantageous to the player. By switching to a control mode that is not excessive, it is possible to prevent the player from being in an excessively advantageous state during the period in which the first post-condition satisfaction game round is being executed.

<Feature W group>
The feature W group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the second embodiment.

[Feature W1]
an information acquisition means for acquiring special information upon satisfaction of acquisition conditions;
acquired information storage means for storing the acquired special information;
determining means for determining whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means satisfies a predetermined condition;
A game round execution means for executing a game round when one game round is defined as the time when the game operation for notifying the result of the determination by the determination means is started and the game operation is finished;
A game time setting means for setting the game time, where the time of the game time executed by the game time executing means is defined as the game time;
a firing means for firing a game ball;
a ball entry section into which a fired game ball can enter;
An auxiliary means (electric accessory 44a in the second embodiment) for assisting the entry of the game ball into the ball entry part;
The state of the auxiliary means is divided into a first state (a state in which the electric accessory 44a is closed) which makes it impossible or difficult to enter the game ball into the ball entry section, and a state where the electric accessory 44a is closed. State transition means for transitioning between a second state (a state in which the electric accessory 44a is opened) that is a state that allows or facilitates the entry of the game ball;
A control means for controlling the state transition means, wherein at least a first control mode (high frequency support mode) and a second control mode are provided as control modes in which the state transition means changes the state of the auxiliary means. (infrequent support mode);
A gaming machine comprising:
In a situation where the game balls are continuously fired with a predetermined firing intensity by the firing means, the control means controls the state transition means in the first control mode (high frequency support mode). However, the game ball enters the ball entry section more easily than when the control means controls the state transition means in the second control mode (low frequency support mode),
The gaming time setting means includes:
As the method for setting the playing time, at least a first setting method and a second setting method in which the average value of the playing time to be set is shorter than the first setting method can be executed,
The control means includes:
The gaming time setting means switches the gaming time setting method from the first setting method to the second setting method based on a specific opportunity (switching the gaming time setting method for the second starting opening at the start of the specific bonus process). Despite switching the variable time setting method/switching from high-accuracy, high-frequency time-variable time information acquisition processing to high-accuracy, low-frequency time-variable time information acquisition processing, the control mode is changed to A gaming machine comprising means for switching from the first control mode to the second control mode (a function of turning off a high-frequency support mode flag).

In general gaming machines, when switching the playing time setting method from the first setting method to the second setting method, which has a shorter average value of the playing time than the first setting method, the state The control mode of the transition means is switched from the second control mode to the first control mode in which the game ball enters the ball entry section more easily than in the second control mode. However, in this case, the player may be given an excessive advantage.
According to the gaming machine of feature W1, although the gaming time setting method is switched from the first setting method to the second setting method based on a specific opportunity, the control mode is switched to the second setting method based on a specific opportunity. Since the first control mode is switched to the second control mode, it is possible to prevent a situation from becoming excessively advantageous to the player.

[Feature W2]
The gaming machine according to feature W1,
a first ball entry part that is a ball entry part into which a fired game ball can enter;
a second ball entry part that is a ball entry part into which a fired game ball can enter;
Equipped with
The information acquisition means includes:
means for acquiring special information based on the fact that a game ball has entered the first ball entry section; and means for acquiring special information based on the fact that a game ball has entered the second ball entry section. and
The acquired information storage means includes:
The first special information is the special information obtained when a game ball enters the first ball entry section, and the first special information obtained when a game ball enters the second ball entry section. and means for storing second special information that is the special information, respectively;
The game round execution means is
a first special information game round which is a game round for notifying the result of the determination by the determining means regarding the first special information; and a first special information game round for notifying the result of the determination by the determining means regarding the second special information. comprising means for executing a second special information game time which is a game time in parallel;
The specific opportunity is the start of the first special information game round corresponding to the first special information that satisfies the predetermined condition,
The control means includes:
The game time setting means determines the game time of the second special information game time that is executed during the period in which the first special information game time corresponding to the first special information that satisfies the predetermined condition is being performed. Despite switching the setting method from the first setting method to the second setting method,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the control mode is switched from the first control mode (high frequency support mode) to the second control mode (low frequency support mode) based on the specific opportunity.

According to feature W2, the method for setting the playing time of the second special information game time to be executed during the period in which the first special information game time corresponding to the first special information that satisfies the predetermined condition is being performed. Even if switching from the first setting method to the second setting method results in an advantageous situation for the player, the start of the first special information game round corresponding to the first special information that satisfies the predetermined conditions Since the control mode is switched from the first control mode to the second control mode in response to this, it is possible to prevent a situation from becoming excessively advantageous to the player.
Furthermore, since the trigger for switching the control mode is the start of the first special information game round corresponding to the first special information that satisfies the predetermined conditions, the benefits are not awarded after the first special information game round ends. It is also possible to execute processing that involves various changes in the state of the game to the player, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

<Characteristics Group X>
The feature X group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the second embodiment.

[Feature X1]
an information acquisition means for acquiring special information upon satisfaction of acquisition conditions;
acquired information storage means for storing the acquired special information;
determining means for determining whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means satisfies a predetermined condition;
A game round execution means for executing a game round when one game round is defined as the time when the game operation for notifying the result of the determination by the determination means is started and the game operation is finished;
a first ball entry part that is a ball entry part into which a fired game ball can enter;
a second ball entry part that is a ball entry part into which a fired game ball can enter;
a performance execution means for performing the performance;
A gaming machine comprising:
The information acquisition means includes:
means for acquiring special information based on the fact that a game ball has entered the first ball entry section; and means for acquiring special information based on the fact that a game ball has entered the second ball entry section. and
The acquired information storage means includes:
The first special information is the special information obtained when a game ball enters the first ball entry section, and the first special information obtained when a game ball enters the second ball entry section. and means for storing second special information that is the special information, respectively;
The game round execution means is
a first special information game round which is a game round for notifying the result of the determination by the determining means regarding the first special information; and a first special information game round for notifying the result of the determination by the determining means regarding the second special information. comprising means for executing a second special information game time which is a game time in parallel;
The performance execution means is
The production executed in the second special information game round that is executed during the period from the start to the end of the first special information game round corresponds to the first special information game round. A gaming machine comprising means for determining based on the first special information (in the second embodiment, a function for executing a setting process of a performance pattern for a small win at the time of a special bonus).

According to feature Since the determination is made based on the first special information corresponding to the special information game round, it is possible to indirectly make the player guess about the first special information game round through the performance executed in the second special information game round. , it is possible to create a sense of anticipation for the first special information game round by using the effects performed during the second special information game round.

[Feature X2]
The gaming machine according to feature X1,
When the determination means determines that the special information satisfies the predetermined condition, a benefit granting means that grants a benefit after the end of a game round that notifies the result of the determination;
a privilege type determining means for determining the type of the privilege to be granted by the privilege granting means from among a plurality of types of the privilege;
Equipped with
The performance execution means is
When the first special information corresponding to the first special information game round satisfies the predetermined condition, the first Means for determining the performance to be executed in the second special information game round that is executed during the period from the start to the end of the special information game round (the jackpot type in the first starting opening game round corresponding to the special bonus process) (a function of setting a performance pattern table for a small win in a game round for the second starting opening to be executed during the period of the special bonus processing) based on the above.

According to feature X2, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation regarding the type of benefit that will be awarded after the end of the first special information game round by using the effect executed in the second special information game round.

[Feature X3]
The gaming machine according to feature X1 or feature X2,
The determination means has at least two types of determination modes, a first determination mode (low probability mode) and a second determination mode (high probability mode), for determining whether the special information satisfies a predetermined condition. Judgment mode can be executed,
The probability that the special information satisfies the predetermined condition is higher when the determining means is executing the second determining mode than when executing the first determining mode,
The performance execution means is
a determination mode that the determining means executes in a game round that is executed after the end of the first special information game round when the first special information corresponding to the first special information game round satisfies the predetermined condition; means for determining the performance to be performed in the second special information game round that is executed during the period from the start to the end of the first special information game round based on the type of Depending on whether the type of jackpot in the game round for the first opening slot is a guaranteed variable jackpot or a regular jackpot, a performance pattern table for the small win in the gaming round for the second opening slot to be executed during the period of the special bonus processing is set. A gaming machine characterized by:

According to feature X3, the determination mode of the game round that is executed after the end of the first special information game round where the first special information satisfies the predetermined condition is determined by using the effect executed in the second special information game round. It is possible to give the player a sense of expectation regarding the type.

<Characteristics Y group>
The feature Y group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the second embodiment.

[Feature Y1]
an information acquisition means for acquiring special information upon satisfaction of acquisition conditions;
acquired information storage means for storing the acquired special information;
determining means for determining whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means satisfies a predetermined condition;
A game round execution means for executing a game round when one game round is defined as the time when the game operation for notifying the result of the determination by the determination means is started and the game operation is finished;
a first ball entry part that is a ball entry part into which a fired game ball can enter;
a second ball entry part that is a ball entry part into which a fired game ball can enter;
a benefit granting means for granting a benefit to a player;
A gaming machine comprising:
The information acquisition means includes:
means for acquiring special information based on the fact that a game ball has entered the first ball entry section; and means for acquiring special information based on the fact that a game ball has entered the second ball entry section. and
The acquired information storage means includes:
The first special information is the special information obtained when a game ball enters the first ball entry section, and the first special information obtained when a game ball enters the second ball entry section. and means for storing second special information that is the special information, respectively;
The game round execution means is
a first special information game time (a game time for the first starting opening in the second embodiment), which is a game time for notifying the result of the determination by the determination means with respect to the first special information; comprising means for concurrently executing a second special information game round (a second starting opening game round), which is a game round for notifying the result of the judgment made by the judgment means on the information;
The benefit granting means is
A game round in which, when the first special information corresponding to the first special information game round satisfies the predetermined condition, a post-game round benefit, which is a benefit, is given after the end of the first special information game round. Post-end benefit granting means (function of executing the opening/closing execution mode in the second embodiment);
If the first special information corresponding to the first special information game round satisfies the predetermined condition, a bonus during the game run, which is a benefit, is given during the period in which the first special information game round is being executed. A bonus granting unit (a function for executing special bonus processing in the second embodiment) during game play execution to be granted;
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to feature Y1, since the game system includes the after-gaming round benefit granting means and the during-playing round bonus granting means, it is possible to give players a sense of anticipation regarding the after-gaming round bonus and the during-game round bonus. In addition, for example, by setting cases in which a bonus is granted during a game session and cases in which it is not granted, it is possible to set a case in which a bonus is granted during a game session and a case in which it is not granted, during a period in which the first special information game session corresponding to the first special information that satisfies a predetermined condition is being executed. Even if there is, it is possible to give the player a sense of urgency by making him or her guess whether or not a benefit will be awarded during the game round.

[Feature Y2]
The gaming machine according to feature Y1,
The bonus granting means during the execution of the game round is
The execution of the game round is triggered by the second special information game round (game round for the second starting opening) that is executed during the period in which the first special information game round is being executed, which provides the bonus during the execution of the game round. A gaming machine characterized by comprising means for giving a medium benefit (a privilege for a round game triggered by a small win in a game round for the second starting opening).

According to feature Y2, the bonus during the game session is granted in response to the second special information game session that is executed during the period in which the first special information game session that provides the bonus during the game session is being executed. Even if the first special information corresponding to the first special information game round satisfies a predetermined condition, the player is given an even greater sense of expectation by further executing the second special information game round. be able to.

[Feature Y3]
The gaming machine according to feature Y1 or feature Y2,
comprising a game time setting means for setting a game time, which is the time of a game time executed by the game time execution means, based on the special information;
The upper limit value of the amount of the bonus to be given as the bonus during the game session is determined by the length of the game time set by the game time setting means for the first special information game session that gives the bonus during the game session. A gaming machine characterized in that the amount is determined based on the length of the variation time of the first starting slot game run executed as a special bonus process.

According to feature Y3, the upper limit of the amount of benefits to be given as a benefit during a game session is determined by the amount of the game time set by the game time setting means for the first special information game session for which the benefit during a game session is granted. Since it is determined based on the length, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation that the first special information game round will last longer. In addition, as the end of the first special information game round approaches, players can feel a sense of expectation to obtain as many benefits as possible during the game round, and a sense of impatience regarding when the first special information game round will end. It is possible to add modulation to the emotions of the person.

<Characteristics Z group>
The feature Z group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the second embodiment.

[Feature Z1]
an information acquisition means for acquiring special information upon satisfaction of acquisition conditions;
acquired information storage means for storing the acquired special information;
determining means for determining whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means satisfies a predetermined condition;
A game round execution means for executing a game round when one game round is defined as the time when the game operation for notifying the result of the determination by the determination means is started and the game operation is finished;
a first ball entry part that is a ball entry part into which a fired game ball can enter;
a second ball entry part that is a ball entry part into which a fired game ball can enter;
a performance execution means for performing the performance;
A gaming machine comprising:
The information acquisition means includes:
means for acquiring special information based on the fact that a game ball has entered the first ball entry section; and means for acquiring special information based on the fact that a game ball has entered the second ball entry section. and
The acquired information storage means includes:
The first special information is the special information obtained when a game ball enters the first ball entry section, and the first special information obtained when a game ball enters the second ball entry section. and means for storing second special information that is the special information, respectively;
The game round execution means is
a first special information game round which is a game round for notifying the result of the determination by the determining means regarding the first special information; and a first special information game round for notifying the result of the determination by the determining means regarding the second special information. comprising means for executing a second special information game time which is a game time in parallel;
The performance execution means is
The first special information acquires elapsed time information that is information about the elapsed time from the start of the game to a predetermined timing, and based on the elapsed time information, the first special information that is the target of acquiring the elapsed time information. Effect setting processing execution means (in the second embodiment, the effect setting processing execution means for executing the effect setting process for setting the effect corresponding to the second special information game time to be executed during the period when the special information game time is being executed) A gaming machine characterized by having a function of executing processing for setting a performance pattern for small winnings.

According to feature Z1, based on the elapsed time information that is information about the elapsed time from the start of the first special information game round to a predetermined timing, the game is executed during the period in which the first special information game round is being executed. Since the effect corresponding to the second special information game time that is played is set, the player who has recognized the effect corresponding to the second special information game time that has been executed will be notified after the first special information game time is executed. To make the player guess the elapsed time and the remaining time until the end of the first special information game round, and indirectly give a sense of anticipation for the first special information game round through a performance corresponding to the second special information game round. I can do it.

[Feature Z2]
The gaming machine described in feature Z1,
The performance execution means is
It is characterized by comprising means for determining whether or not to execute the production setting process based on the first special information corresponding to the first special information game round from which the elapsed time information is to be obtained. Game machine.

According to feature Z2, it is determined whether or not to execute the performance setting process based on the first special information corresponding to the first special information game round for which the elapsed time information is to be obtained. Therefore, the first special information game round corresponding to the first special information game round is provided to the player based on the performance corresponding to the second special information game round executed during the period in which the first special information game round is being executed. It is possible to make it possible to guess whether the special information satisfies a predetermined condition, and to indirectly give a sense of anticipation for the first special information game round through the performance corresponding to the second special information game round. .

[Feature Z3]
The gaming machine according to feature Z1 or feature Z2,
comprising a benefit granting means for granting a benefit after the end of the game round when the special information corresponding to the game round to be executed satisfies the predetermined condition;
The performance execution means is
When the first special information game round corresponding to the first special information that satisfies the predetermined condition satisfies a specific condition, a predetermined period of time after the first special information game round that satisfies the specific condition is started. Obtain elapsed time information that is information regarding the elapsed time until the timing (remaining time RT of the variable time of the first starting opening game time), and execute the first special information game time that is the target of obtaining the elapsed time information. A gaming machine characterized by comprising means for executing performance setting processing for setting a performance corresponding to the second special information game round to be executed during the period in which the game is played.

According to feature Z3, the first special information game round is specified to the player based on the performance corresponding to the second special information game round that is executed during the period in which the first special information game round is being executed. It is possible to make the player guess whether or not the condition is satisfied, and it is possible to indirectly give a feeling of expectation for the first special information game round through the performance corresponding to the second special information game round.

[Feature Z4]
The gaming machine described in feature Z3,
Equipped with a benefit granting means for granting benefits,
The benefit granting means is
If the determining means determines that the special information satisfies the predetermined condition, the result of the determination is notified. After-gaming round benefit granting means (function for executing a round game) for granting a prize after the end of the gaming round; )and,
If a game round corresponding to the special information that satisfies the predetermined condition satisfies the specific condition, a bonus granting means during the execution of the game round (a function for executing special bonus processing) that grants a bonus during the execution of the game round; ) A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

According to feature Z4, when a game round corresponding to special information that satisfies a predetermined condition satisfies a specific condition, a benefit is granted during the execution of the game round, so the first special information is provided to the player. It is possible to make it possible to guess whether or not the first special information game round satisfies a specific condition based on the effect corresponding to the second special information game round executed during the period in which the game round is being executed. , it is possible to indirectly give a greater sense of expectation regarding the benefits that may be awarded during the execution of the first special information game round through the performance corresponding to the second special information game round.

<Characteristic αA group>
The feature αA group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the second embodiment.

[Feature αA1]
an information acquisition means for acquiring special information upon satisfaction of acquisition conditions;
acquired information storage means for storing the acquired special information;
determining means for determining whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means satisfies a predetermined condition;
Judgment result notifying means for notifying the result of the judgment by the judging means using a pattern;
Execution of a game round in which the game round is executed when one game round is defined as the start of the game operation and the end of the game operation in which the result of the determination by the determination means is announced using symbols. means and
a first ball entry part that is a ball entry part into which a fired game ball can enter;
a second ball entry part that is a ball entry part into which a fired game ball can enter;
a benefit granting means for granting a benefit;
A gaming machine comprising:
The information acquisition means includes:
means for acquiring special information based on the fact that a game ball has entered the first ball entry section; and means for acquiring special information based on the fact that a game ball has entered the second ball entry section. and
The acquired information storage means includes:
The first special information is the special information obtained when a game ball enters the first ball entry section, and the first special information obtained when a game ball enters the second ball entry section. and means for storing second special information that is the special information, respectively;
The game round execution means is
a first special information game round which is a game round for notifying the result of the determination by the determining means regarding the first special information; and a first special information game round for notifying the result of the determination by the determining means regarding the second special information. comprising means for executing a second special information game time which is a game time in parallel;
The benefit granting means is
When the special information corresponding to the game run to be executed satisfies the predetermined condition (in the case of winning a jackpot), a privilege granting means is provided when a predetermined condition is satisfied;
and a special condition-fulfilling benefit granting means for granting a benefit when the special information corresponding to the game run to be executed satisfies a specific condition (in the case of a small win);
The determination result notification means includes:
The second special information corresponding to the second special information game run executed during the period in which the first special information game time corresponding to the first special information satisfying the predetermined condition is being executed is When the determination means determines that the predetermined condition is satisfied, the determination is made using the symbol corresponding to the determination result indicating that the second special information does not satisfy the predetermined condition. Corresponds to the second special information game round that is executed during the period in which the first special information game round corresponding to the first special information that satisfies the predetermined condition is being executed, despite reporting the result. If the determining means determines that the second special information to be processed satisfies the specific condition, the second special information corresponds to a determination result indicating that the second special information satisfies the specific condition. A gaming machine characterized by comprising means for executing a specific condition fulfillment notification process for notifying the result of the determination using the symbol.

According to feature Z1, a process is executed when a symbol corresponding to a determination result indicating that the first special information satisfies a predetermined condition is displayed, and a process is executed when the second special information satisfies a predetermined condition. It is possible to avoid conflicting at the same time with the process executed in response to the display of the symbol corresponding to the result of the determination indicating that the condition is satisfied.

[Feature αA2]
The gaming machine according to feature αA1,
An auxiliary means (electric accessory 44a in the second embodiment) for assisting the entry of the game ball into the ball entry part;
The state of the auxiliary means is divided into a first state (a state in which the electric accessory 44a is closed) which makes it impossible or difficult to enter the game ball into the ball entry section, and a state where the electric accessory 44a is closed. State transition means for transitioning between a second state (a state in which the electric accessory 44a is opened) that is a state that allows or facilitates the entry of the game ball;
A control means for controlling the state transition means, wherein at least a first control mode (high frequency support mode) and a second control mode are provided as control modes in which the state transition means changes the state of the auxiliary means. (infrequent support mode);
Equipped with
The control means includes:
At the start of the first special information game round corresponding to the first special information that satisfies the predetermined condition, the control mode is changed from the first control mode (high-frequency support mode) to the second control mode ( A gaming machine characterized by having a means for switching to a low-frequency support mode).

According to feature αA2, at the start of the first special information game round corresponding to the first special information that satisfies a predetermined condition, there is provided means for switching the control mode from the first control mode to the second control mode. By the process executed after the start of the first special information game round and the control mode of the state transition means, it is possible to prevent the player from becoming excessively advantageous or disadvantageous.

<Characteristic αB group>
The feature αB group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the second embodiment.

[Feature αB1]
a firing means for firing a game ball toward a game area;
a first ball entry portion (first starting port 33) into which game balls circulating in the gaming area can enter;
a second ball entry portion (second starting port 34) into which game balls circulating in the gaming area can enter;
information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the game ball entering the first ball entry section and the second ball entry section;
The first special information is the special information obtained when a game ball enters the first ball entry section, and the first special information obtained when a game ball enters the second ball entry section. acquired information storage means for respectively storing second special information that is the special information;
determination means for determining whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means satisfies a predetermined condition;
A game round execution means for executing a game round when one game round is defined as the time when the game operation for notifying the result of the determination by the determination means is started and the game operation is finished;
Display means (liquid crystal display device 41 in the second embodiment) for displaying identification information for indicating the result of the determination;
A gaming machine comprising:
The game round execution means is
a first special information game round which is a game round for notifying the result of the determination by the determining means regarding the first special information; and a first special information game round for notifying the result of the determination by the determining means regarding the second special information. comprising means for executing a second special information game time which is a game time in parallel;
The display means is
First identification information (a first liquid crystal symbol in the second embodiment) that is identification information for indicating the result of the determination based on the first special information, and the result of the determination based on the second special information. comprising a region-based display means for displaying second identification information (second liquid crystal pattern in the second embodiment) that is identification information for indicating in different display regions of the display means, respectively;
The area-specific display means is
The first special information game round in which the first special information satisfies the predetermined condition is executed in a first state (a state in which a specific probability variable jackpot has not been won in the first winning opening game round). , a process of exchanging a display area for displaying the first identification information corresponding to the first special information and a display area for displaying the second identification information corresponding to the second special information. Despite not being executed, the first special information game round in which the first special information satisfies the predetermined condition is in a second state (winning a specific probability strange jackpot in the first winning opening game round) when executed in a state in which the first identification information corresponds to the first special information, the display area displays the first identification information corresponding to the first special information and the second identification information corresponding to the second special information. A gaming machine characterized by comprising means for executing a process of exchanging a display area with a display area at a predetermined timing.

According to feature αB1, even if the first special information satisfies a predetermined condition, the first identification information may be changed depending on the state in which the first special information game round corresponding to the first special information is executed. Since the process of exchanging the display area for displaying the display area and the display area for displaying the second identification information may or may not be executed, the first special information game round in which the first special information satisfies the predetermined condition is When executed, by making the player recognize whether or not the display area has been replaced, it is possible to determine whether the state in which the first special information game was executed was the first state or not. It is possible to guess what the situation was.

[Feature αB2]
The gaming machine according to feature αB1, wherein the state in which the first special information game round in which the first special information satisfies the predetermined condition is executed is in the first state or in the second state. comprising a status determination process execution means for executing a status determination process to determine whether there is a
The state determining means includes:
The first special information is based on special information corresponding to a previously executed first special information game that is a first special information game that was executed earlier than the first special information game that satisfies the predetermined condition. A gaming machine characterized by comprising means for executing the state determination process.

According to feature αB2, it is determined whether the state in which the first special information game round in which the first special information satisfies the predetermined condition is executed is the first state or the second state. Since the processing is carried out based on the special information corresponding to the first special information game round, for example, in the first special information game round that satisfies the predetermined conditions, processing based on the special information corresponding to the previously executed first special information game round is performed. , processing can be performed using whether or not the display area can be replaced. For example, by performing an effect such as whether or not to replace the display area, information regarding the special information corresponding to the previously executed first special information game round can be suggested.

<Characteristic αC group>
The feature αC group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the second embodiment.

[Feature αC1]
an information acquisition means for acquiring special information upon satisfaction of acquisition conditions;
acquired information storage means for storing the acquired special information;
determining means for determining whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means satisfies a predetermined condition;
A game round execution means for executing a game round when one game round is defined as the time when the game operation for notifying the result of the determination by the determination means is started and the game operation is finished;
a game time setting means for setting a game time that is a time for a game time to be executed by the game time execution means based on the special information;
a benefit granting unit (a function of executing special bonus processing in the second embodiment) that grants a benefit when the special information corresponding to the game round satisfies the predetermined condition;
A gaming machine comprising:
The upper limit value of the amount of the benefit given as the benefit is the length of the gaming time set by the gaming time setting means for the gaming session corresponding to the special information that satisfies the predetermined condition (special bonus processing). 1. A gaming machine characterized in that the length of the variation time of the first starting slot game run is determined based on the length of the variation time of the first starting slot game run.

According to feature αC1, the upper limit value of the amount of benefits to be given as benefits is determined based on the length of the gaming time set by the gaming time setting means for the gaming round corresponding to special information that satisfies predetermined conditions. Therefore, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation that the playing time of the game round corresponding to the special information that satisfies the predetermined condition will last longer. In addition, as the end of the game session approaches, it is possible to create a feeling of expectation to obtain as many benefits as possible, and a sense of impatience regarding the timing of the end of the game session, and it is possible to add tone to the player's emotions. .

[Feature αC2]
The gaming machine according to feature αC1,
a firing means for firing a game ball;
a ball entry section into which a fired game ball can enter;
auxiliary means for assisting the entry of the game ball into the ball entry section;
The state of the auxiliary means is set to a first state that makes it impossible or difficult for the game ball to enter the ball entry section, and a first state that makes it possible or easy for the game ball to enter the ball entry section. state transition means for transitioning between a second state that is a state of
A control means for controlling the state transition means, the control means being capable of executing at least a first control mode and a second control mode as control modes in which the state transition means changes the state of the auxiliary means. means and
Equipped with
The control means includes:
When the benefit granting means grants the benefit, the control mode is changed from the first control mode (high-frequency support mode) at the start of the game round corresponding to the special information that satisfies the predetermined condition. A gaming machine comprising means for switching to the second control mode (low frequency support mode).

According to feature αC2, when the benefit granting means grants a benefit, the control mode is switched from the first control mode to the second control mode at the start of a game round corresponding to special information that satisfies a predetermined condition. Therefore, depending on the benefits granted after the start of the game round and the control mode of the state transition means, it is possible to prevent the player from becoming excessively advantageous or disadvantageous.

[Feature αC3]
The gaming machine according to feature αC2,
In a situation where the game balls are continuously fired with a predetermined firing intensity by the firing means,
When the control means controls the state transition means in the first control mode (high frequency support mode), it is better that the control means controls the state transition means in the second control mode (low frequency support mode). A game machine characterized in that a game ball enters the ball entry section more easily than when the game ball is controlled.

According to feature αC3, when the state transition means is controlled in the first control mode, the game ball enters the ball entry section more easily than when it is controlled in the second control mode. That is, the first control mode is a control mode that is more advantageous to the player than the second control mode. Therefore, according to the gaming machine having this feature, at the start of a game round in which a privilege is awarded by the privilege awarding means, it is possible to switch the control mode from a control mode that is advantageous to the player to a control mode that is not too advantageous to the player. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a situation from becoming excessively advantageous to the player.

<Characteristic αD group>
The feature αD group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the second embodiment.

[Feature αD1]
an information acquisition means for acquiring special information upon satisfaction of acquisition conditions;
acquired information storage means for storing the acquired special information;
determining means for determining whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means satisfies a predetermined condition;
A game round execution means for executing a game round when one game round is defined as the time when the game operation for notifying the result of the determination by the determination means is started and the game operation is finished;
A game time setting means for setting the game time, where the time of the game time executed by the game time executing means is defined as the game time;
a firing means for firing a game ball;
a first ball entry part that is a ball entry part into which a fired game ball can enter;
a second ball entry part that is a ball entry part into which a fired game ball can enter;
A gaming machine comprising:
The information acquisition means includes:
means for acquiring special information based on the fact that a game ball has entered the first ball entry section; and means for acquiring special information based on the fact that a game ball has entered the second ball entry section. and
The acquired information storage means includes:
The first special information is the special information obtained when a game ball enters the first ball entry section, and the first special information obtained when a game ball enters the second ball entry section. and means for storing second special information that is the special information, respectively;
The game round execution means is
a first special information game round which is a game round for notifying the result of the determination by the determining means regarding the first special information; and a first special information game round for notifying the result of the determination by the determining means regarding the second special information. comprising means for executing a second special information game time which is a game time in parallel;
The gaming time setting means includes:
Triggered by the start of the first special information game round in which the first special information satisfies the predetermined condition (the start of the first start opening game round in which the jackpot has been won), the The setting method of the playing time for the second special information game round is based on the first setting method (highly accurate and high frequency time varying time information acquisition process/step S21305 in the second embodiment), and the average value of the playing time to be set is A gaming machine characterized by comprising means for switching to a second setting method (high-accuracy and low-frequency time-varying time information acquisition process/step S21306 in the second embodiment) different from the first setting method.

According to the feature αD1, when the first special information game time where the first special information satisfies the predetermined condition is started, the method for setting the playing time of the second special information game time is changed to the first setting. Since the method includes a means for switching to a second setting method in which the average value of the game time to be set is different from the first setting method, the first special information satisfying the predetermined condition is set before the start of the first special information game round. After starting, the number of times the second special information game is executed per unit time can be changed, and the degree of advantage or disadvantage of the player in the game can be changed. That is, the degree of advantage or disadvantage of the player in the game can be changed by starting the first special information game round in which the first special information satisfies a predetermined condition.

[Feature αD2]
The gaming machine according to feature αD1,
A gaming machine characterized in that the second setting method sets an average value of gaming time that is shorter than that of the first setting method.

According to feature αD2, since the second setting method has a shorter average value of the set playing time than the first setting method, the first special information game time that satisfies the predetermined condition is Compared to before the start, the number of times the second special information game is executed per unit time after the start can be increased, and an advantageous game state can be created. That is, an advantageous gaming state can be created by starting a first special information game round in which the first special information satisfies a predetermined condition.

[Feature αD3]
The gaming machine according to feature αD1 or feature αD2,
The gaming time setting means includes:
As the method of setting the playing time of the second special information game round, it is possible to select a plurality of types of setting methods of playing time with different average values of the playing time to be set,
With the start of the first special information game round in which the first special information satisfies the predetermined condition, the method for setting the playing time of the second special information game time is changed to the first setting. switching from the method to one of the plurality of gaming time setting methods,
The one game time setting method is selected from among a plurality of types of game time setting methods having different average values of the game time to be set, the first game time setting method corresponding to the first special information game time that satisfies the predetermined condition. A gaming machine (gaming machine in modification 18 of the second embodiment) characterized in that the determination is made based on the special information of No. 1.

According to feature αD3, the method for setting the playing time of the second special information game round that is switched upon the start of the first special information game round in which the first special information satisfies the predetermined condition is to Since it is determined based on the first special information corresponding to the first special information game round that satisfies the first special information game round, the first special information game round that satisfies the predetermined conditions gives the player a feeling of anticipation, It is also possible to give a sense of expectation regarding the method of setting the playing time of the second special information game round, which is switched upon the start of the first special information game round.

<Characteristic αE group>
The feature αE group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the second embodiment.

[Feature αE1]
an information acquisition means for acquiring special information upon satisfaction of acquisition conditions;
acquired information storage means for storing the acquired special information;
determining means for determining whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means satisfies a predetermined condition;
A game round execution means for executing a game round when one game round is defined as the time when the game operation for notifying the result of the determination by the determination means is started and the game operation is finished;
a firing means for firing a game ball;
a ball entry section into which a fired game ball can enter;
An auxiliary means (electric accessory 44a in the second embodiment) for assisting the entry of the game ball into the ball entry part;
The state of the auxiliary means is divided into a first state (a state in which the electric accessory 44a is closed) which makes it impossible or difficult to enter the game ball into the ball entry section, and a state where the electric accessory 44a is closed. State transition means for transitioning between a second state (a state in which the electric accessory 44a is opened) that is a state that allows or facilitates the entry of the game ball;
A control means for controlling the state transition means, which is capable of executing a plurality of types of control modes in which the state transition means changes the state of the auxiliary means;
A gaming machine comprising:
The control means includes:
A specific control mode (high-frequency support mode B) among the plurality of types of control modes (high-frequency support mode A and high-frequency support mode B in modification 1 of the second embodiment) that can be executed by the control means. If the specific control mode is being executed, at the start of a game round in which the result of the determination by the determining means is announced, the specific control mode that is being executed differs from the specific control mode based on the result of the determination. Despite executing a control mode switching determination process which is a process of determining whether to switch to another type of control mode, the specific control among the plurality of control modes executable by the control means A gaming machine characterized by comprising means for not executing the control mode switching determination process at the start of a game round in which the result of the determination by the determination means is announced when a control mode other than the control mode is being executed. (Gaming machine in modification 1 of the second embodiment).

According to feature αE1, when a specific control mode is being executed, at the start of a game round in which the result of the determination by the determination means is announced, the control mode is changed from the specific control mode being executed based on the result of the determination. Since the control mode switching determination process, which is the process of determining whether to switch to another type of control mode different from the specific control mode, is executed, if the specific control mode is being executed by the control means, In addition to giving the player a sense of expectation regarding the result of the determination at the start of a game round, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation regarding whether or not the control mode will be switched.

[Feature αE2]
The gaming machine described in feature αE1,
The control means includes:
When the control mode switching determination process is executed and it is determined that the control mode is to be switched,
comprising means for switching the control mode from the specific control mode to a predetermined control mode at the start of a game round for notifying the result of the determination by the determination means;
In a situation where the game balls are continuously fired with a predetermined firing intensity by the firing means,
When the control means controls the state transition means in the specific control mode (high-frequency support mode B in modification 1 of the second embodiment), the control means controls the state transition means in the predetermined control mode (low-frequency support mode B). A gaming machine characterized in that a game ball enters the ball entry section more easily than when the state transition means is controlled in the support mode.

According to feature αE2, it is easier for the game ball to enter the ball entry section when the control means controls the state transition means in a specific control mode than when the control means controls the state transition means in a predetermined control mode. . Therefore, even if the game state shifts to a state advantageous to the player by executing some processing when the control mode is switched by the control means, the control mode changes from a specific control mode to a predetermined one. Since the control mode is switched to the control mode, it is possible to prevent the player from being excessively advantageous.

[Feature αE3]
The gaming machine according to feature αE1 or feature αE2,
The control means includes:
A game characterized in that, in the control mode switching determination process, it is determined that the control mode is to be switched if, as a result of the determination by the determination means, special information that is the subject of the determination satisfies a predetermined condition. Machine.

According to feature αE3, it is determined that the control mode will be switched if the special information to be determined as a result of the determination by the determination means satisfies a predetermined condition, so that the player who recognizes that the control mode has been switched However, it can be recognized that the special information to be determined satisfies a predetermined condition. Therefore, a sense of anticipation can be given to the player by using the switching of the control mode.

<Characteristic αF group>
The feature αF group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the second embodiment.

[Feature αF1]
an information acquisition means for acquiring special information upon satisfaction of acquisition conditions;
acquired information storage means for storing the acquired special information;
determining means for determining whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means satisfies a predetermined condition;
A game round execution means for executing a game round when one game round is defined as the time when the game operation for notifying the result of the determination by the determination means is started and the game operation is finished;
A game time setting means for setting the game time, where the time of the game time executed by the game time executing means is defined as the game time;
a firing means for firing a game ball;
a first ball entry part that is a ball entry part into which a fired game ball can enter;
a second ball entry part that is a ball entry part into which a fired game ball can enter;
auxiliary means (electric accessory 44a in the second embodiment) for assisting the entry of the game ball into the first ball entry section or the second ball entry section;
The state of the auxiliary means is set to a first state (when the electric accessory 44a is closed) that makes it impossible or difficult for the game ball to enter the first ball entry section or the second ball entry section. a second state (a state in which the electric accessory 44a is opened), which is a state in which it is possible or easy for the game ball to enter the first ball entry part or the second ball entry part. a state transition means for transitioning between;
A control means for controlling the state transition means, which is capable of executing a plurality of types of control modes in which the state transition means changes the state of the auxiliary means;
A gaming machine comprising:
The information acquisition means includes:
means for acquiring special information based on the fact that a game ball has entered the first ball entry section; and means for acquiring special information based on the fact that a game ball has entered the second ball entry section. and
The acquired information storage means includes:
The first special information is the special information obtained when a game ball enters the first ball entry section, and the first special information obtained when a game ball enters the second ball entry section. and means for storing second special information that is the special information, respectively;
The game round execution means is
a first special information game round which is a game round for notifying the result of the determination by the determining means regarding the first special information; and a first special information game round for notifying the result of the determination by the determining means regarding the second special information. comprising means for executing a second special information game time which is a game time in parallel;
The gaming time setting means includes:
A specific control mode (high-frequency support mode B) among the plurality of types of control modes (high-frequency support mode A and high-frequency support mode B in modification 1 of the second embodiment) that can be executed by the control means. If it is being executed, based on the result of the determination regarding the first special information at the start of the first special information game round in which the determination result of the first special information by the determination means is announced. and whether or not to switch the setting method of the playing time of the second special information game round from the first setting method to a second setting method in which the average value of the playing time to be set is different from the first setting method. Despite executing a setting method switching determination process for determining whether the control means is currently executing a control mode different from the specific control mode among the plurality of executable control modes, The gaming machine is characterized by comprising means for not executing the setting method switching determination process at the start of the first special information game round that notifies the result of the determination on the first special information by the determination means. (Gaming machine in modification 1 of the second embodiment).

2nd special information If you switch the setting method for the playing time of the game session from the first setting method to the second setting method in which the average value of the playing time to be set is different from the first setting method, the average value of the playing time to be set is different from the first setting method. The number of times the second special information game is executed can be changed, and the degree of advantage or disadvantage of the player in the game can be changed.

Therefore, according to feature αF1, when the control means is executing a specific control mode among a plurality of executable control modes, the determination result of the first special information by the determination means is notified. At the start of the first special information game round, the game time setting method for the second special information game round is changed from the first setting method based on the determination result for the first special information. A game in which the control means recognizes that a specific control mode is being executed because a setting method switching determination process is executed to determine whether to switch to a second setting method whose average value is different from the first setting method. expectations regarding whether the method for setting the playing time of the second special information game round will be changed at the start of the first special information game round, that is, whether the degree of advantage or disadvantage of the player in the game will be changed. It can give a sense of urgency and tension.

[Feature αF2]
The gaming machine according to feature αF1,
A gaming machine characterized in that the second setting method sets an average value of gaming time that is shorter than that of the first setting method.

According to feature αF2, since the second setting method has a shorter average value of the playing time set than the first setting method, the method for setting the playing time of the second special information game round is the first setting method. If the setting method is switched from to the second setting method, it is possible to increase the number of times the second special information game is executed per unit time, and it is possible to shift to an advantageous state for the player. Therefore, for a player who has recognized that the control means is executing a specific control mode, at the start of the first special information game time, the method for setting the playing time of the second special information game time is changed to the first one. It is possible to give a feeling of expectation that the setting method will be switched to the second setting method and the situation will be shifted to an advantageous state.

[Feature αF3]
The gaming machine according to feature αF1 or feature αF2,
The control means includes:
When the control means is executing a specific control mode among the plurality of executable control modes, the result of the determination is announced at the start of a game round in which the result of the determination by the determination means is announced. Despite executing a control mode switching determination process, which is a process of determining whether to switch from the specific control mode currently being executed to another type of control mode different from the specific control mode, based on , when the control means is executing a control mode different from the specific control mode among the plurality of executable control modes, the number of game times to notify the result of the determination by the determination means; A gaming machine characterized by comprising means for not executing the control mode switching determination process at the time of start.

According to feature αF3, when a specific control mode is being executed, at the start of a game round in which the result of the determination by the determination means is announced, the control mode is changed from the specific control mode being executed based on the result of the determination. Since a control mode switching determination process is executed, which is a process of determining whether to switch to another type of control mode different from a specific control mode, the player can confirm that the specific control mode is being executed by the control means. In this case, at the start of a game round, in addition to giving the player a sense of expectation regarding the result of the determination, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation regarding whether or not the control mode will be switched.

<Characteristic αG group>
The feature αG group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof, and is mainly extracted from the second embodiment.

[Feature αG1]
an information acquisition means for acquiring special information upon satisfaction of acquisition conditions;
acquired information storage means for storing the acquired special information;
determining means for determining whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means satisfies a predetermined condition;
A game round execution means for executing a game round when one game round is defined as the time when the game operation for notifying the result of the determination by the determination means is started and the game operation is finished;
a firing means for firing a game ball;
a ball entry section into which a fired game ball can enter;
An auxiliary means (electric accessory 44a in the second embodiment) for assisting the entry of the game ball into the ball entry part;
The state of the auxiliary means is divided into a first state (a state in which the electric accessory 44a is closed) which makes it impossible or difficult to enter the game ball into the ball entry section, and a state where the electric accessory 44a is closed. State transition means for transitioning between a second state (a state in which the electric accessory 44a is opened) that is a state that allows or facilitates the entry of the game ball;
A control means for controlling the state transition means, wherein at least a first control mode (high frequency support mode) and a second control mode are provided as control modes in which the state transition means changes the state of the auxiliary means. (infrequent support mode);
A gaming machine comprising:
The control means includes:
From the time of switching from the first control mode to the second control mode (the time of switching the high-frequency support mode flag from ON to OFF), the auxiliary means starts state transition in the second control mode. A gaming machine (No. (gaming machine in modification 19 of the second embodiment).

According to feature αG1, by controlling the auxiliary means in multiple types of operation modes during the control mode transition period, the player is not allowed to make various guesses when switching from the first control mode to the second control mode. It is possible to create a sense of anticipation and improve the interest of the game. For example, during the control mode transition period, by controlling the auxiliary means in an operation mode that is different from the operation mode in the first control mode or the second control mode, it is possible to temporarily confuse the player or cause surprises. can be given gender.

[Feature αG2]
The gaming machine described in feature αG1,
The control means includes:
means for controlling an operation mode of the auxiliary means during the control mode transition period in a first operation mode that is an operation mode when execution of the first control mode continues;
A gaming machine comprising means for controlling an operation mode of the auxiliary means in the control mode transition period in a different operation mode from the first operation mode.

According to feature αG2, since the means for controlling the operation mode of the auxiliary means in the control mode transition period in the first operation mode that is the operation mode when execution of the first control mode is continued, the first It is possible to delay making the player recognize that the control mode has been switched to the second control mode, and it is possible to overturn the player's guess or give the player a sense of surprise. Further, since the control unit includes means for controlling the operation mode of the auxiliary means in a control mode transition period in a different operation mode from the first operation mode, the control section changes the control mode from the first control mode to the second control mode. There are various ways to improve interest, such as making the player aware that the control mode has changed at the same time as the change, and temporarily making it difficult for the player to recognize what state the game has entered. can be controlled. Furthermore, by using these means in combination, it is possible to impart various emotions to the player during the control mode transition period, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

<Characteristic αH group>
The feature αH group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or a combination thereof, and is mainly extracted from the second embodiment.

[Feature αH1]
an information acquisition means for acquiring special information upon satisfaction of acquisition conditions;
acquired information storage means for storing the acquired special information;
determining means for determining whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means satisfies a predetermined condition;
Judgment result notifying means for notifying the result of the judgment by the judging means using a pattern;
Execution of a game round in which the game round is executed when one game round is defined as the start of the game operation and the end of the game operation in which the result of the determination by the determination means is announced using symbols. means and
a first ball entry part that is a ball entry part into which a fired game ball can enter;
a second ball entry part that is a ball entry part into which a fired game ball can enter;
a third ball entry section into which a fired game ball can enter, and which facilitates entry of the ball when a predetermined accessory is activated;
Accessories control means for controlling the operation of the predetermined accessories (variable winning device 36 of the second embodiment, opening/closing door 36b);
a benefit granting means for granting a benefit;
A gaming machine comprising:
The information acquisition means includes:
means for acquiring special information based on the fact that a game ball has entered the first ball entry section; and means for acquiring special information based on the fact that a game ball has entered the second ball entry section. and
The acquired information storage means includes:
The first special information is the special information obtained when a game ball enters the first ball entry section, and the first special information obtained when a game ball enters the second ball entry section. and means for storing second special information that is the special information, respectively;
The game round execution means is
a first special information game round which is a game round for notifying the result of the determination by the determining means regarding the first special information; and a first special information game round for notifying the result of the determination by the determining means regarding the second special information. comprising means for executing a second special information game time which is a game time in parallel;
The accessory control means includes:
a predetermined condition activation means for activating the predetermined accessory (the variable winning device 36 of the second embodiment, the opening/closing door 36b) when the predetermined condition is met (in the case of winning a jackpot); and the predetermined condition. and a specific condition operating means that operates the predetermined accessory (the variable winning device 36 and the opening/closing door 36b of the second embodiment) when a specific condition different from the above is met (in the case of winning a small win). ,
The benefit granting means is
When the special information corresponding to the game round to be executed satisfies the predetermined condition (when winning a jackpot), causing the predetermined condition operating means to operate the predetermined accessory at the end of the game round. comprises means for granting a benefit when a predetermined condition is met for granting a benefit according to the
The game round execution means is
The second special information corresponding to the second special information game run executed during the period in which the first special information game time corresponding to the first special information satisfying the predetermined condition is being executed is When the first specific condition is satisfied as the specific condition (in the case of winning the first small win in Modification Example 12 of the second embodiment), the second specific condition that satisfies the first specific condition is means for ending the first special information game round corresponding to the first special information that satisfies the predetermined condition at the end of the second special information game round corresponding to the special information;
The second special information corresponding to the second special information game run executed during the period in which the first special information game time corresponding to the first special information satisfying the predetermined condition is being executed is If the second specific condition is satisfied (if the second small win in Modification 12 of the second embodiment is won), the second specific condition that satisfies the second specific condition is and means for not ending the first special information game round corresponding to the first special information that satisfies the predetermined condition when the second special information game round corresponding to the special information ends. Gaming machine (gaming machine in modification 12 of the second embodiment).

According to feature αH1, when the special information corresponding to the second special information game round satisfies the first specific condition, the first special information that satisfies the predetermined condition at the end of the second special information game round Since the first special information game round corresponding to the first special information game round is ended, if the second special information game round is executed during the period in which the first special information game round is being executed, the second special information game round will be terminated. Even if the second special information corresponding to the second special information satisfies a specific condition, the player is made to guess whether the first specific condition or the second specific condition is satisfied among the specific conditions. This can give players a sense of anticipation and urgency.

[Feature αH2]
The gaming machine according to feature αH1,
The determination result notification means includes:
The second special information corresponding to the second special information game run executed during the period in which the first special information game time corresponding to the first special information satisfying the predetermined condition is being executed is When the determination means determines that the predetermined condition is satisfied, the determination is made using the symbol corresponding to the determination result indicating that the second special information does not satisfy the predetermined condition. Corresponds to the second special information game round that is executed during the period in which the first special information game round corresponding to the first special information that satisfies the predetermined condition is being executed, despite reporting the result. If the determining means determines that the second special information to be processed satisfies the specific condition, the second special information corresponds to a determination result indicating that the second special information satisfies the specific condition. A gaming machine characterized by comprising means for executing a specific condition fulfillment notification process for notifying the result of the determination using the symbol.

According to the feature αH2, a process is executed when a symbol corresponding to a determination result indicating that the first special information satisfies a predetermined condition is displayed, and a process is executed when the second special information satisfies a predetermined condition. It is possible to avoid conflicting at the same time with the process executed in response to the display of the symbol corresponding to the result of the determination indicating that the condition is satisfied.

Note that the inventions of the feature U group to the feature αH group solve the following problems.

In gaming machines such as pachinko machines and slot machines, various changes have been made to the structure, control, performance, etc., with the aim of increasing the interest of the game, reducing the processing load on the gaming machine, optimizing processing, and simplifying control. Technical improvements have been made from this point of view.

Various technical improvements have also been made with the aim of improving the soundness of gaming, such as discovering and deterring fraudulent actions by players and unauthorized modifications to gaming machines.

In the gaming machines mentioned above, further technological improvements are desired for the purpose of increasing the interest of gaming, reducing the processing load on gaming machines, optimizing processing, simplifying control, and providing healthier gaming. It is rare.

Note that a configuration may be adopted in which one or more configurations included in the feature A group to feature αH group are appropriately combined. Thereby, it becomes possible to produce a synergistic effect by the combined configuration.

Below, the basic configuration of a gaming machine to which each of the above features can be applied or is applied to each feature will be shown.

Pachinko gaming machine: A launcher that launches a game ball toward a game area based on a player's launch operation, and a starting ball that is provided in the game area and allows game balls flowing down the game area to enter. a game ball, an information acquisition unit that acquires special information based on the entry of a game ball into the starting ball entry unit, and an acquisition information storage unit that stores the special information acquired by the information acquisition unit. Machine.

A reel-type gaming machine such as a slot machine: a picture display means for variably displaying a plurality of pictures, a start means for starting the variable display of the plurality of pictures due to the operation of a start operation means, and operation of a stop operation means. A gaming machine comprising: a stop means for stopping the variable display of the plurality of symbols due to the change in time or the passage of a predetermined time; and a benefit granting means for granting a benefit to a player according to the symbols after the stop.

The present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiments and modifications, but can be realized in various configurations without departing from the spirit thereof. For example, the technical features of the embodiments and modifications corresponding to the technical features of each form described in the column of the summary of the invention may be used to solve some or all of the above-mentioned problems, or to solve the above-mentioned problems. In order to achieve some or all of the effects, it is possible to replace or combine them as appropriate. Further, unless the technical feature is described as essential in this specification, it can be deleted as appropriate.

10...Pachinko machine 11...Outer frame 12...Pachinko machine body 13...Inner frame 14...Front door frame 15...Hinge 16...Hinge 17...Cylinder lock 18. ..Window part 19...Glass unit 20...Upper plate 21...Lower plate 22...Ejection port 23...Lever 24...Production operation button 25...Operation handle 25a... Touch sensor 25b... Weight button 25c... Variable resistor 26... Game ball firing button 30... Game board 31... Guidance rail 31a... Inner rail part 31b... Outer rail part 32 ...General prize opening 33...First starting opening 44...First starting opening 34...Second starting opening 34a...Electric accessory 44a...Electric accessory 34b...Electric accessory Object drive unit 44b...Electric accessory drive unit 35...Through gate 36...Variable winning device 36a...Big winning opening 36b...Opening/closing door 36c...Variable winning drive unit 37... Special figure unit 37a...First symbol display section 37b...Second symbol display section 37c...First reserve display section 37d...Second reserve display section 38...Public symbol unit 39... Round display section 40... Variable display unit 41... Pattern display device 42... Nail 43... Outlet 44b... Electric accessory drive section 45... Main display section 46... Speaker 47 ...Various lamps 48a...Opening/closing door 48b...Opening/closing door drive unit 60...Main controller 61...Main control board 62...Main side MPU
63...Main side ROM
64...Main side RAM
70... Payout control device 71... Payout device 80... Launch control device 81... Game ball launch mechanism 85... Power supply device 86... Power outage monitoring circuit 90... Audio light emission control device 91 ...Audio light emission control board 92...Sound light side MPU
93...Sound light side ROM
94...Sound light side RAM
100...Display control device 101...Display control board 102...Display side MPU
103...Program ROM
104...Work RAM
106...Character ROM
107...Video RAM
Sync1...First synchronization display section Sync2...Second synchronization display section PA...Game area MA...Main display area Ra...First holding area Rb...Second holding area Ds1.. .1st hold display area Ds2...2nd hold display area RaN...1st start hold count RbN...2nd start hold count

Claims (2)

an information acquisition means for acquiring special information upon satisfaction of acquisition conditions;
acquired information storage means for storing the acquired special information;
determining means for determining whether the special information stored in the acquired information storage means satisfies a predetermined condition;
A game round execution means for executing a game round when one game round is defined as the time when the game operation for notifying the result of the determination by the determination means is started and the game operation is finished;
a firing means for firing a game ball;
a ball entry section into which a fired game ball can enter;
auxiliary means for assisting the entry of the game ball into the ball entry section;
The state of the auxiliary means is set to a first state that makes it impossible or difficult for the game ball to enter the ball entry section, and a first state that makes it possible or easy for the game ball to enter the ball entry section. state transition means for transitioning between a second state that is a state of
A control means for controlling the state transition means, the control means being capable of executing at least a first control mode and a second control mode as control modes in which the state transition means changes the state of the auxiliary means. means and
A gaming machine comprising:
The control means includes:
In a control mode transition period that is a period from the time when the first control mode is switched to the second control mode to the time when the auxiliary means starts state transition in the second control mode, the auxiliary means A game machine characterized in that the game machine can be controlled in multiple types of operation modes. The gaming machine according to claim 1,
The control means includes:
means for controlling an operation mode of the auxiliary means during the control mode transition period in a first operation mode that is an operation mode when execution of the first control mode continues;
A gaming machine comprising means for controlling an operation mode of the auxiliary means in the control mode transition period in a different operation mode from the first operation mode.

Images